JP2021094375A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a first movable body (drum part C3300), and a second movable body (projecting part C3420) provided in the first movable body (drum part C3300). The first movable body (drum part C3300) is operable from a first position (initial position) to second positions (second rotary position and third rotary position). The second movable body (projecting part C3420) is inoperable with respect to the first movable body (drum part C3300) when the first movable body (drum part C3300) is in the first position (initial position), and the second movable body (projecting part C3420) is operable with respect to the first movable body (drum part C3300) when the first movable body (drum part C3300) is in the second positions (second rotary position and third rotary position).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 322

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known. For example, as described in Patent Document 1.

Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-59498

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The problem to be solved by the present invention is as described above, and next, the means for solving this problem will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first movable body and a second movable body provided on the first movable body, and the first movable body is second from a first position. When the first movable body is in the first position, the second movable body is inoperable with respect to the first movable body, and the first movable body is inoperable. When the movable body is in the second position, the second movable body is movable with respect to the first movable body.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second movable body may be made movable with respect to the first movable body in a plurality of stages.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second movable body is invisible from the player side in a state where the first movable body is located at the first position, and the first movable body is invisible. May be visible from the player side in a state where the player is located at the second position.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the operation mode of the first movable body may be a rotational operation.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the operation mode of the second movable body may be a linear operation.

Further, as a gaming machine having the above configuration, the first movable body includes a first operating means, the second movable body includes a second operating means, and the first movable body includes the first operating means. When the first operating means is located at the first position, the first operating means can be operated, and when the first movable body is located at the second position, the second operating means can be operated. It may be done.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first movable body can move to a third position different from the first position and the second position, and the first movable body is the said. In the state of being located at the third position, the second operating means may be made operable.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second movable body can operate linearly from the fourth position to the fifth position, and the second movable body is located at the fourth position. Then, even if the second operating means is operable and the second movable body is located at the fifth position, the second movable body can be swing-operated. Good.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second movable body may be capable of linearly operating to a sixth position different from the fourth position and the fifth position.

Further, as a game machine having the above configuration, the first movable body is provided with a lock protrusion, and is provided with a lock portion provided with a lock groove that engages with the lock protrusion. Is engaged with the lock groove and the lock protrusion, and the lock position that regulates the operation of the first movable body is released from the engagement between the lock groove and the lock protrusion. It may be made movable at an unlocked position that allows the movement of the first movable body.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first movable body can be operated by swinging the second movable body, and the lock portion determines the operation of the first movable body. The swinging operation of the second movable body may be restricted to a swinging lock position that regulates the swinging operation within a predetermined range.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of a pachinko machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The first pachinko gaming machine is an example of a normal symbol determination table. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at the time of startup in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving shift determination processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning place detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the jackpot system look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the common hit type look-ahead effect form to the big hit type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal which is output to the outside of the machine according to the game state in the 1st pachinko game machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 2nd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in a 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in a 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 3rd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in a 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area, wherein (A) the specific area It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is a 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode. It is a front view which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a perspective view which shows the general winning opening unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) It is a front view which shows the general winning opening unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a top view which shows the general winning opening unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a cross-sectional view of XP1-XP1 in FIG. 110 (a). It is a front sectional view which shows the upper attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front sectional view which shows the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the base plate of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the base plate of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the base plate which fixed the opening / closing unit of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the base plate which fixed the opening / closing unit of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the cover of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the cover of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the rear side guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a front view which shows the rear side guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) It is a top view which shows the rear side guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP2-XP2 in FIG. 121 (a). It is a front schematic diagram which shows the attachment state of the rear side guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front enlarged schematic view which shows the lower side of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the flow of the game ball in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front sectional view which shows the flow of the game ball in the upper attacker part of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front sectional view which shows the flow of the game ball in the lower attacker part of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear perspective view which shows the flow of the game ball in the lower attacker part of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the flow of the game ball under the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the upper movable effect effect and the upper accessory elevating mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the upper movable production part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded view of the 1st production part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a bottom view of the upper movable effect effect of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded view of the 2nd production part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded view of the pupil movable unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded view of the upper movable production part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front enlarged view of the left end part of the lifted part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the right end part of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the right end part of the lifted part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the upper movable production part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded view of the left end portion (part) of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a left side view of the eyebrow rotation drive part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the eyebrow rotation drive part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the pupil rotation drive part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the left side guide member and the left side drive mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the upper part of the left side guide member and the left side drive mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the left side guide member and the left side drive mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the right side guide member and the right side drive mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the right side guide member and the right side drive mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which showed the state which the production by the 1st aspect is performed. It is a front view which showed the state which the production by the 2nd aspect is performed. It is a top view which showed the state which the production by the 2nd aspect is performed. It is a front view which showed the state which the production by the 2nd aspect is performed. It is a front view which showed the state which the production by the 3rd aspect is performed. It is a front view of the rotating accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view of the rotating accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear perspective view of the rotating accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which showed the rotating accessory which omitted the illustration of a rotating body. It is a rear view which showed the rotating accessory which omitted the illustration of a rotating body. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP5-XP5 in FIG. 158. It is an exploded perspective view which showed the rotating body of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The front view which showed the inside of the rotating body of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view which showed the driving means of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which showed the shielding means of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a front view which showed the light emitting means side shielding member of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP6-XP6 in FIG. 164 (a). (A) It is a front view which showed the rotating body side shielding member of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP7-XP7 in FIG. 165 (a). It is a front perspective view which showed the rotating accessory in the state which the 1st effect surface was moved and controlled to the effect position. It is a front view which showed the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in the state which the 1st effect surface was moved and controlled to the effect position. It is a side sectional view which showed the rotating accessory in the state which the 2nd effect surface was moved and controlled to the effect position. It is a front perspective view which showed the rotating accessory in the state which the 2nd effect surface was moved and controlled to the effect position. It is a front view which showed the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in the state which the 2nd effect surface was moved and controlled to the effect position. It is a front view which shows the effect device of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the effect device in a standby state. It is a perspective view which shows the left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is a rear view which shows the left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the left side part of the left-right movement control mechanism. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the central part of the left-right movement control mechanism. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the right side part of the left-right movement control mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the movable body. It is a perspective view which shows the engaging part. It is a perspective view which shows the belt and the engaging part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP3-XP3 in FIG. 177. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XP4-XP4 in FIG. 177. It is a perspective view which shows the reinforcing cover. It is a rear view which shows the reinforcing cover. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which moved the movable body in the center of the left-right direction in the production position. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which moved the movable body to the right side in the production position. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which moved the movable body to the left side in the production position. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which moves a movable body from a production position to a standby position. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the regulation means positioned in the standby position. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the regulation means positioned in the center in the left-right direction in the production position. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the regulation means positioned to the right in the production position. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the regulation means positioned to the left in the production position. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the regulation means to move from an effect position to a standby position. It is a front view which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear perspective view of a lower accessory and a link arm. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower accessory. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. A rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is in the standby position. A rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is between the standby position and the production position. A rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is in the production position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA according to the first alternative example. It is a cross-sectional view of AA which concerns on the 2nd alternative example. It is a cross-sectional view of AA which concerns on the 3rd alternative example. It is a perspective view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is a closed position. It is a front view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is a closed position. It is a rear perspective view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is a closed position. It is a rear perspective view which omitted a part of the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is a closed position. It is a rear view which shows the effect device of the closed state of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is an open position. It is a side sectional view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is an open position. It is a perspective view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is an open position. It is a front view which shows the effect device in which the opening / closing accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention is an open position. It is a rear view which shows the effect device of the open / locked state of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the effect device in the open / unlocked state of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the directing apparatus which made the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention an effect position. It is a side sectional view which shows the effect device which made the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention an effect position. It is a perspective view which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the standby position. It is a perspective view which omitted a part which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of a standby position. It is a perspective view which shows the bullet accessory and the decoration accessory of the production position. It is a perspective view which omitted a part which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the production position. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the bullet accessory and the decoration accessory. (A) is a cross-sectional view of X1-X1 in FIG. 214. (B) It is a cross-sectional view of X2-X2 in FIG. 214. (A) It is a front view which shows the guide gear. (B) It is a front view which shows the bullet accessory. (C) It is a front view which shows the 1st decorative base part. (D) It is a front view which shows the 2nd decorative base part. It is an exploded perspective view which shows a bullet accessory. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the outer spiral member and the inner spiral member. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the standby position. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory moving from a standby position to an effect position. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory which move from a standby position to an effect position. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the production position. It is a schematic diagram which shows the moving distance in the front-rear direction of a bullet accessory, a first decorative accessory, and a second decorative accessory. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory which move from an effect position to a standby position. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the standby position. It is a front view which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the effect device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the effect device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows a tower accessory and a specific area unit. It is a perspective view which shows the tower accessory. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the tower accessory. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the tower accessory seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the upper part of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the lower part of a drive unit. It is a top view which shows the discharge guide part, the drive part and the distribution part. It is a top view which shows the drive gear and a disk part. It is a side sectional perspective view which shows the effect device. It is a side sectional view which shows the effect device. It is a perspective view which shows the tower accessory and the specific area unit seen from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the tower accessory and a specific area unit which a part was omitted, which was seen from the rear. It is a side sectional perspective view which shows the drive unit. It is a side sectional view which shows the drive unit. It is a side sectional perspective view which shows the 1st stage part and the 2nd stage part. It is a side sectional view which shows the 1st stage part and the 2nd stage part. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st stage part. It is a top view which shows the 1st stage part. It is a perspective view which shows the rear side part of the 1st stage part. (A) It is a front view which shows the rocking transmission part. (B) It is a rear view which shows the swing transmission part. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd stage part. It is a top view which shows the 2nd stage part. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the tower accessory which omitted a part. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the rear part of the tower accessory which omitted a part. (A) It is a front view which shows the rolling inhibition part located in the front part of the 2nd stage rotation part. (B) It is a side sectional view which shows the rolling inhibition part of the 2nd stage rotating part. It is a side sectional perspective view which shows the 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a side sectional view which shows the 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a disassembled side sectional view which shows the 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a top view which shows the 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a front view which shows typically the operation of a tower accessory. It is a top view which shows typically the state which the tower accessory is tilted to the left. It is a top view which shows typically the state which the tower accessory is tilted backward. It is a top view which shows typically the state which the tower accessory is tilted to the right. (A) is a rear view schematically showing a state in which the first stage main body and the support portion are swung so as to be tilted to the right. (B) It is a rear view which shows typically the state in which the 1st stage main body and the support part were oscillated so as to be tilted to the left. It is a front view which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view which shows the game board. It is a front perspective view which shows the effect device. It is a front perspective view which shows the effect device (excluding the logo accessory). It is a rear perspective view which shows the effect device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the effect device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the movable production part. It is a rear view which shows the production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the left side lifting mechanism. It is an enlarged front view which shows the upper part of the left elevating mechanism. It is an enlarged front view which shows the lower part of the left elevating mechanism. It is a front sectional view which shows the lower part of the left elevating mechanism. It is a left side view which shows the lower left holding part, the left side shock absorbing means, and the inclination guide part. It is a front view which shows the lower left holding part and the left side shock absorbing means. (A) It is a left side view which shows the lower left holding part. (B) It is the AA sectional view. It is a front sectional view which shows the shock absorbing means. It is a front view which shows the game board in the state which the movable production | accessory is in a standby position. It is a left side view which shows the holding mechanism in a state where a solenoid is excited. It is a front view which shows the game board in the state which the movable production | accessory is in an intermediate position. It is a front perspective view which shows the effect device in the state which the movable effect object is in an intermediate position. It is a rear perspective view which shows the effect device in the state which the movable effect object is in an intermediate position. It is a left side view which shows the movable production accessory and the inclination guide part in the state which the movable production accessory is in a protruding position. It is a front view which shows the game board in the state which the movable production | accessory is in a protruding position. It is a front perspective view which shows the effect device in the state which the movable effect object is in a protruding position. It is a rear perspective view which shows the effect device in the state which the movable effect object is in a protruding position. It is a left side view which shows the positional relationship between the illumination board of the harpoon, and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon is in a vertical posture. It is a left side view which shows the positional relationship between the illumination board of the harpoon, and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon is in an inclined posture. It is a left side view which shows the modification of the positional relationship between the illumination substrate, the 1st decorative lens and the 2nd decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in a vertical posture. It is a left side view which shows the modification of the positional relationship between the illumination substrate, the 1st decorative lens and the 2nd decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in an inclined posture. It is a front view which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the upper part accessory. It is a front view which shows the upper part. It is a rear view which shows the upper part. It is a partially disassembled perspective view which shows the 1st accessory and the 2nd accessory. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 1st accessory and the 2nd accessory. It is a partially disassembled perspective view which shows the 1st accessory and the 2nd accessory seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 1st accessory. It is an enlarged front view which shows the upper part of the upper accessory which omitted the 2nd decorative member. It is an enlarged front sectional view which shows the upper part of the upper accessory. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows typically the 1st accessory. It is a rear view which shows the 1st accessory, the 2nd accessory and the drive mechanism. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the receiving member and an arm. It is a front view which shows the game board in the 1st slide state. It is a front view which shows the upper part accessory in the 1st slide state. It is a rear view which shows the 1st accessory, the 2nd accessory and the drive mechanism in the 1st slide state. It is a front view which shows the game board in the 2nd slide state. It is a front view which shows the upper part accessory in the 2nd slide state. It is a rear view which shows the 1st accessory, the 2nd accessory and the drive mechanism in the 2nd slide state. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the effect button device. It is a bottom perspective view which shows the effect button device. It is a side sectional view which shows the effect button device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the drum part was removed from the case part. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which each part of the button peripheral part and the case part is separated. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the right part of a drum part and a case part. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device which omitted a part. (A) It is an enlarged right side view which shows the motor base part and the rotation assist part. (B) It is an enlarged right side view which shows the lock part. (C) It is a right side view which shows the cam part. (D) It is a left side view which shows the cam part. It is a perspective view which shows the upper cover part of a drum part. It is a right side view which shows the drum part which omitted a part. It is an exploded right side view which shows the drum part which omitted a part. It is a side sectional view which shows the 2nd button part of the 2nd rotation position. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 2nd button part of the 2nd rotation position. (A) It is a perspective view which shows the columnar part. It is a perspective view which shows the column | cylinder part in the state rotated from the position (b). It is a bottom perspective view which shows the protruding part. (A) is a side sectional view schematically showing a second button portion of a standby position. (B) It is a side sectional view which shows typically the 2nd button part of the 1st pop-out position. (A) is a side sectional view schematically showing a second button portion located between a first pop-out position and a second pop-out position. (B) It is a side sectional view which shows typically the 2nd button part of the 2nd pop-out position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the lock part is positioned at the unlocked position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part is positioned at the 1st rotation position. It is a perspective view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part is positioned at the 1st rotation position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 1st rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 1st pop-out position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 1st rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 2nd pop-out position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part is positioned at the 2nd rotation position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 2nd rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 1st pop-out position. It is a perspective view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 2nd rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 1st pop-out position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 2nd rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 2nd pop-out position. It is a perspective view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part was positioned at the 2nd rotation position, and the pop-out part was positioned at the 2nd pop-out position. It is a right side view which shows the effect button device in the state which the drum part is positioned at the 3rd rotation position, and the lock part is positioned at the swing lock position. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an effect button device in a state where the lock portion is positioned at the swing lock position and the drum portion is swung forward. (A) is a side sectional view showing an effect button device in a state where the drum portion is positioned at the second rotation position. (B) is a side sectional view showing an effect button device in a state where the drum portion is positioned at an initial position. FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 351 (b).

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is in the rear direction, the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction, and the pachinko game is played. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. On the contrary, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called Digipachi. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean to exclude the pachinko game machines of the 1st and 2nd kind mixers in which the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it shall mean both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" referred to in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which a symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an aspect is included in the above variation display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, since the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process have not been determined at this point, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine in this specification, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. When the display is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol and the first There are pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially fluctuating machines") in which starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, the jackpot game state, etc., and the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed and the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. Further, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements such as display is suspended.

Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is established when at least all of the fact that the hold is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is established when at least all of the fact that the hold is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without a reference symbol) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge as an axis.

Further, a launching device 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and a speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap between them. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, below the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for producing a light-emitting effect or performing a light-emitting effect in various variations, but the LED group 46 is not limited to an LED as long as such a light-emitting effect can be performed, for example, a liquid crystal or a lamp. May be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitized version of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is a lower front portion of the base door 3 and is arranged below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be able to be rotated and opened / closed with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without reference numeral) that can be opened and closed by the operation of the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front of the base door 3 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrally formed in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a big hit game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / emission control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which will be referred to later) are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. On the front surface of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115, the first starting port 120, the general winning opening 122, the passing gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting port 140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 145, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference symbol). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, of the gaming areas 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the firing handle 62, a striking method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left striking", and the right side region 107 is flowed down. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, in the center accessory 115, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. The mouth 120 is designed to win (pass).

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. Good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) Random values for jackpot judgment, symbol random values of the first special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, up to 4) of various data are stored. When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first (1) The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as the start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the start information of the first special symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is configured so that the right-handed game ball can almost pass through the passing gate 126 and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) is stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as a start passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, a random value for hit determination of the ordinary symbol). Etc.) is called the start information of the normal symbol. Further, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is satisfied is called hold.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a large winning opening 131, a count switch 132 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 131 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a special electric accessory 133. It is a unit body that has been transformed. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 125 in the right region 107.

The large winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

Further, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Is.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, in the second starting port 140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-handed game ball due to, for example, a game nail, and the second starting port 140 allows the right-handed game ball to win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in, for example, the right side region 107. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) Random values for jackpot judgment, symbol random values for the second special symbol, random values for reach judgment for the second special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the second special symbol) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, up to 4) of various data are stored. When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when the game balls win (pass), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body in which a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting port 140, and the switch is the second starting port switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes, for example, a so-called electric chew, which is a movable member for general electric power 147 made of, for example, a blade member, and a solenoid for general electric power 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the movable member for general electric power. .. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. The movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out mouth)
The out opening 178 is fired toward the game area 105, but wins any of various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 140, the large winning opening 131, the general winning opening 122, etc.). This is for discharging the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You may do it.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 300. The effect group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 58 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 and is arranged outside the game area 105 (see, for example, FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display. A unit 165, a second special symbol hold display unit 166, a probability change notification display unit 167, and a time saving notification display unit 168 are provided.

(Normal symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. To. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 146 is operated, the movable member 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 is operated. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball to.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the start information of the normal symbol, that is, the number of variable displays of the normal symbol held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol") when the variable display is held. It is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected is detected. It refers to the state from the extraction until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. The start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol hold display unit 162 displays the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol hold display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 2, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group including eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group including, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, in which a part of the first special symbol repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol, in which a part of the symbol is alternately or mutually turned on and off, is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Hold display for special symbols)
When the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). It includes a first special symbol hold display unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LEDs 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To be equipped. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is two, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a, 166b. To be equipped. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the second special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of the second special symbol held is two, both the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of hold of the second special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, both of the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

(Display for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on during execution of the probability change control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probability change control is being executed. However, for example, the probability change control can be controlled by not turning on the display unit 167 so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probability change control is being executed. You may keep it secret that it is running.

However, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the probability variation control, the data indicating that the probability variation control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probability change control and then the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is lit in such a manner that the probability change control is being performed.

Even if it is kept secret whether or not the probability change control is being executed before the power is turned off, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is configured so that it can be grasped that the probability change control is being executed.

(Display for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of the time saving control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, the first time saving notification display unit 168a and the second time saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of the time saving notification display units 168 is the same. Not limited.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state. Then, for example, the combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time saving notification display unit 168a and the second time saving notification display unit 168b is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time saving game state is in.

The time reduction notification display unit 168 may turn on the first time reduction notification display unit 168a and / and the second time reduction notification display unit 168b according to the time reduction control being executed. By turning on or off in a mode in which it is not possible to visually grasp whether or not it is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed (for example, all turning off, all lighting, and a mode not related to the running time saving control). It may be concealed so that the fact that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed cannot be grasped by appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not the time saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp which time saving control is being executed from the appearance. By keeping the type of time saving control inside secret, it is possible to enhance the interest.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control, not only the data indicating that the time reduction control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of the time reduction control being executed is obtained by the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control and then the power is turned on, the time reduction notification display unit 168 can be visually grasped that the time reduction control is in progress and the type of the time reduction control being executed. Turns on or off.

Before the power was cut off, the power was turned on even if the time saving control was being executed or the type of time saving control being executed was kept secret so that it could not be visually grasped. In this case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is turned on and off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed can be visually grasped.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, a process executed when the power is turned on, a process related to a game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, ordinary symbol hold display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, and first special symbol hold display unit 165. , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the probability change notification display unit 167, the time reduction notification display unit 168, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting changing process is in progress and a setting confirmation process are being performed. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the passing gate switch 127, the count switch 132, the general winning port switch 123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used for transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 58 for production). The accessory control circuit 307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls and game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling ball lending, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving the ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which the cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, when a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like and the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game in which it is determined whether or not the starting port 140) is opened. In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as a "game", but the "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game for production using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the "game".

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and the game is controlled to the big hit game state, one special symbol game is set until the end of the big hit game state. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the hit determination of the special symbol is included. When the result of the process is derived and then controlled to the small hit game state, one special symbol game is set until the end of the small hit game state.

When the stop display mode indicating the big hit in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the big hit game state. In the big hit game state, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the big winning opening 131 is relatively high. Be done.

Further, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 in the normal symbol game, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game different from these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process performed when a prize (passage) is made to the first start port 120 or the second start port 140, and a special symbol. This includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the starting conditions of.

When a game ball is won in the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, reach determination) from various counters for the special symbol (for example, a jackpot determination counter, a symbol determination counter, etc.) Random values for, and various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted (acquired), respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed by referring to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter of the special symbol. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game proceeds in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time and short game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, for example, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process of is performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state that is not a big hit is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the jackpot type, the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to the time saving game state.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is won in the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol (for example, the random value for jackpot determination, the symbol random value for the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection) extracted when the game ball is won in the starting ports 120 and 140. Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the first special symbol and the starting information of the second special symbol can hold up to a total of eight special symbol starting information. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be held more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be held more than the start information of the first special symbol. It may be.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) the game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Based on the start information, a look-ahead determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game balls to the start ports 120 and 140 is held, or may be performed after the start information is held.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start-passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted (acquired) from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit judgment random value of the normal symbol extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, and whether or not to set it as "normal symbol hit" is normal. The hit determination process of the symbol is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, performs the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute the effect control process. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Is determined. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived, the main CPU 201 executes the normal symbol hit game control process. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is activated, and the game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special figure shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Electric support control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol", the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is a control to make. The time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is the winning probability of "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the ordinary symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, improving the time saving performance means, for example, making it easier for the game ball to win a prize in the winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). That is, when the electric support control is executed, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, or / and the ordinary electric accessory is increased as compared with the case where the electric support control is not executed. Winning is facilitated by 146 (increasing the number of opening times, extending the opening time, shortening the waiting time, etc.).

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

The variable display of the normal symbol is started in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the symbol random value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the hit determination random value of the normal symbol, etc.) is within a predetermined range by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method that generates a random number value within the width) may be used, or a hard random number method that extracts a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly classified into a non-big hit game state and a big hit game state. In the non-big hit game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game shifts from the non-big hit game state to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the big hit game state. The description of the small hit game state will be omitted.

The non-big hit game state includes a low probability state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be roughly divided.

The high-accuracy gaming state includes a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy high-base) in which the time-saving control is executed. Although not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 8, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) in which the time-saving control is not executed is the high-accuracy gaming. It may be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed (low probability low base) and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (low probability high base).

Further, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that can be shifted after the end of a specific jackpot game state, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is shifted to the jackpot game state, the A time-saving game state is changed. finish. When the A time saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time saving game state, for example, the jackpot game state has ended, the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (that is, the game state in which the probability change flag is off) has started, and the RAM cleared, which will be described later, has been cleared. When the variable display number (for example, the ceiling counter) of the special symbol starting from the above reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state in which the transition is possible, and whether the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times. , When the game shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time saving game state ends. When the B time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state in which the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the low probability state is "time-saving hit" and can be shifted when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived. When the special symbol game of the specified number of times determined by winning the "time reduction hit" is executed or the game shifts to the big hit game state, the C time reduction game state ends. When the C time reduction game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games are executed, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the transition condition to the time-saving game state is satisfied in the time-saving game state, or the transition condition to the plurality of time-saving game states is satisfied at the same time. This is referred to as "overlapping" time-saving game states. Then, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the duplicated time-saving game states, that is, the duplicated time-saving game states are internally activated. Operating in parallel is called "overlapping execution". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the time-saving game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.

Even if it is controlled to a normal game state, a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), a special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to shift to any of the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the high-accuracy game state (for example, the high-accuracy time-short game state), depending on the game specifications. However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state does not shift to the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, the short-time game state or the normal game state does not shift to the high-probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.

When controlled to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time saving gaming state unless the jackpot gaming state is passed. However, since the game shifts to the normal gaming state when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time saving game state, it is possible to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the game is controlled in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state when the specified number of special symbol games are executed. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the number of time reductions that can be executed in the A time-saving game state is set to be less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state. There is no transition to the time-saving game state. Further, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the B time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so that the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap. .. However, as described above, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, the C time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state.

When controlled to the B time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, and the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state are set. Can overlap. Further, even when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state are set. Can overlap.

The details of the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probability variation control nor time reduction control is executed, a high probability time reduction game state in which both probability variation control and time reduction control are executed, and a time reduction control in which probability variation control is not executed but time reduction control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states. However, the gaming state advanced by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, left-handed is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method that is regarded as a normal game mode in a display area of the display device 7. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among the plurality of game modes (for example, the launch mode).

[1-4-1. Big hit probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6) and the like. It can be set to any one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-short game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, in the high probability time and short game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in setting 1 and about 1/76 in setting 2. Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

Note that the time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values, unlike the big hit probability. For example, the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 1/160, and the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/240. There is. The time saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed and the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but they may be the same.

However, even if the time reduction hit probability is a common probability for all the set values, the time reduction continuation rate (for example, the number of time reductions set) may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times is set as the time saving number, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times is set as the time saving number. It may be.

Although the small hit is not included in the lottery target in the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit may be included in the lottery target. When the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all the set values. In addition, when a small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination process of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You may make it available. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not the small hit is won is not performed, whether or not the small hit is won with the small hit probability set to 0. May be the mode in which the determination is made.

The above-mentioned time saving hit probability and the small hit probability when the small hit is included in the lottery target are common to all the set values as described above, but the probability is not limited to this and may be different depending on the set value. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot probabilities common to the setting 1 and the setting 2 and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different depending on a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random value extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120 and 140. , "Big hit" or "miss" is a table referred to when determining by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "short-time hit", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first starting port 120 or / and When the game ball wins the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 is "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination, as in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. To decide. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the winning judgment value data is determined as the "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and wins. The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time reduction hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and makes a determination. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is referred to as "time saving hit". Judgment is made, and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time reduction hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the jackpot determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is set from 0. It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving hit judgment value data) excluding the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. Further, from the predetermined value, the tail end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag is changed from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. You may. In this case, for example, if the "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is executed repeatedly, and if the "time saving hit" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is changed. It will be substantially extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving hit" can be won regardless of whether the probability variation flag is on or off. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 201 controls the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins at the start ports 120 and 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 can use the selected symbol command as the selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 can use the selected symbol command as the selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol specification command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted big hit judgment random value with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (FIG. 10). 11) is referred to, and the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, a region 0 to 7. It is composed of a 1-byte control signal. Each region 0 to 7 of the first special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, the area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, the area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, the area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and the area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. The area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, the area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, the area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163 g, and the area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to. Corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each region 0 to 7 of the second special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, the area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, the area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, the area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and the area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. The second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164 g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to. Corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (display mode per time saving) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. Will be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the above is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to No. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the above and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the LED display mode (big hit display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the above and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to 4 is turned on, the LED 163f corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163 g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the unit 163 is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to No. 4 and the LED 164 g corresponding to the region 6 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the LED display mode (loss display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the others. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED of the above is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the other LEDs. Is determined to stop and display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a mode in which the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stop mode of the special symbol based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the control signal corresponding to the determined mode is transmitted to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. It outputs to each of the constituent LEDs and controls the stop mode of the special symbol led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12A, the display mode of the LED led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LED led out to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signal is transmitted separately by the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

FIG. 12B is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the decorative symbol stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is stopped, in response to the symbol designation command. Will be done. The "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 12B is shown for convenience for easy understanding.

Since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 1301 can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is controlled so that the display effect of the special symbol being performed is performed by the display device 7. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it can grasp whether the special symbol that is variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is composed of 9 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 on the left, and 10 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 and a time saving symbol, on the middle symbol. , The right symbol is composed of, for example, 9 symbols 1-9. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the time saving symbol, the player can grasp that the time saving hit has been won. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even-numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small hit, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small hit, for example, the symbol constituting the middle symbol includes a small hit symbol. (A symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol with the small hit symbol, so that the player can grasp that the small hit has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol to odd numbers as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Stop at the symbol and stop the middle symbol at the time saving symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is "z2" or "z8", as can be seen with reference to FIG. Compared with the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of time reductions set is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 uses, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Is stopped at an odd-numbered pattern (doublet).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 uses, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Is stopped at an even-numbered pattern (doublet). As can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"). There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls so that the decorative symbols are stopped at even-numbered identical symbols (doublets). In the big hit game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that the hit is a probability change hit (a hit in which the probability change flag is set to ON).

Further, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later. The expected value that the probability variation flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller than that in the case of. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a break. The loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12B, the decorative symbol is stopped according to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is “zA1”, the left symbol “2”, the middle symbol “time reduction”, and the right symbol “4”) are displayed. Although illustrated, the stopping mode shown in the column of the stopping mode of the decorative symbol in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or / and the mode of the subsequent game state, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when deciding. The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortened game state without being controlled to the big-hit game state. Therefore, the mode of the subsequent game state is the C-time-shortened game state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To determine. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then, after that, Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time reduction flag is set on and the determined number of time reductions is set, so that the C time reduction game state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the big hit game state is not determined because it is not controlled to the big hit game state. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. It is supposed to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 draws a "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the high probability gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C time saving gaming state. It may be.

Further, the main CPU 201 draws a "time saving hit" when the probability change flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to the special symbol display unit. It may be derived to 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the hit that does not include the "time saving hit" in the lottery result (result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol). The determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the jackpot determination random value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number value assigned to the time saving hit judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is the loss judgment value data, the jackpot judgment value data, or the loss judgment value instead of the time saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both the data and the jackpot judgment value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, the game is configured so as not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variation flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-short game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and can control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy time-short game state after the jackpot game state ends. Will be.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the jackpot game state to a high-accuracy time-short game state after the jackpot game state ends. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

The time saving performance in the high-accuracy time saving game state is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 has the mode of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent mode. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show the hit type determination table in FIG. 13 originally. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 13.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 10, and determines the jackpot extracted when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value for use (the winning judgment is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140 and the above-mentioned winning determination. The selected symbol command is determined based on the value data, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or type of jackpot) derived from the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z5”) or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. It is 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). It becomes.

Instead of making the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state. May be set to be higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are “z5” and “z10”). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of the "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving game state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal game state).

The probability variation number and the time reduction number "10000" shown in FIG. 13 and the like mean that the probability variation control can be continuously executed after the jackpot game state ends until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). ..

[1-4-6. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The “Remarks” column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The time-saving hit system reaches A, B, and C shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 15 indicate that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S96 of FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, but the determination is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

The main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether or not the time reduction flag is on regardless of the type of time reduction. , Not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different depending on the type of time reduction. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared as the time-saving game state. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". Is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state is to win a big hit (a big hit with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for shifting to the A time-saving game state is satisfied, the state does not always shift to the A time-saving game state, but the condition for hindering the transition to the A time-saving game state is satisfied (for example, when the backup is cleared). Etc.), do not shift to the A time saving game state.

Further, the end condition of the A time saving game state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and when the selected symbol command is used. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of time reductions") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving game state starts from, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-short game state in this embodiment) is started. As a result, the ceiling counter is updated (1 addition), and the time-saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time saving game state may be made when the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final fluctuation") when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is completed. This may be the case when the variable display of the next special symbol after the final change of the ceiling is started. That is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state may be between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling change is "miss", the display mode of the loss is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the game shifts to the B time saving game state. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 indicates to the player that the condition for shifting to the B time reduction game state has been satisfied (for example, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value in the present embodiment) (for example, the decorative symbol is a special symbol). It may be controlled to display on the display device 7 (an effect in which the character is stopped, a special effect is performed by the character, or both of them are performed). Even if the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the B time-saving game state is satisfied instead of always shifting to the B time-saving game state (for example, special in the final ceiling fluctuation). When the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit, etc.), the transition to the B time saving game state is not performed.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability change flag is on, and is always counted when the probability change flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game is controlled to the B time reduction game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit". In a pachinko machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit The B time saving game state may be started when is led out to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, or the B time saving game state may be started after the end of the small hit game state. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit is only displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. , The display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the set value. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state without being controlled to the B time reduction game state.

The ceiling counter has a backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). When a switch other than the above (for example, setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of hitting a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of hitting a normal symbol, etc. It is reset when the condition of is satisfied. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a pachinko gaming machine-specific one instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 is at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol unless the probability change flag is turned on after the end of the jackpot game state. Update the ceiling counter (+1). Also, if the probability change flag is on after the end of the jackpot game state, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if the special symbol is variablely displayed, but for example, if it is a specification for ST machine or probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag Updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after is turned off. In addition, in the case of the specification to perform the probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol If the probability change flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications in which a probabilistic fall lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect suggesting that the probabilistic fall lottery has been won or a highly probable game. It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting a transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start time of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time reduction game state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is interesting. It is possible to provide a certain game quality. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time reduction game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time reduction game state or a countdown effect of Gase is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

Further, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of the special symbol after the clear process in the work area in the RAM 203. Update the ceiling counter (+1) at the hour or end.

Further, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, a setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 performs the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of.

In addition, the end condition of the B time saving game state is the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "big hit"). This is the case where the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for (referred to as "B time reduction specified number of times") is executed, and the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. "When the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions is executed", which is one of the end conditions of the B time reduction game state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions (hereinafter, "B time reduction final variation"). It may be when (referred to as) is started, or when the B time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time reduction game state may be from the start of the B time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time reduction final variation.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit". That is, the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is that the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is the time saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time saving hit is a special symbol. It is derived (confirmed display) to the display units 163 and 164. Even if the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the state does not always shift to the C time saving game state, but the condition for hindering the transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied (for example, the B time saving game state). If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state is not executed at the same time (details will be described later) and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), the C time-saving game Do not move to the state. If the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied but the condition for hindering the transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 hits the time saving even though the transition to the C time saving game state is not satisfied. Control is executed to derive the display mode of the above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

Further, the end condition of the C time saving game state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and when the selected symbol command is used. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. As for the C time reduction specified number of times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, the variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction final variation") starts. It may be when the C time reduction is completed, or when the C time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time reduction game state may be from the start of the C time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the C time reduction final variation.

The time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. Further, of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the two time-saving game states is the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states and the other one time-saving game state It may be different from the time saving performance. Further, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

Further, in addition to the above, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times in the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the end condition of the B time reduction game state, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state. Alternatively, it may be included that the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode is selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the like. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number may be included in the above-mentioned end condition. Further, the time saving fall lottery may be performed and the fact that the time saving fall lottery is won may be included in the above-mentioned termination condition.

[1-4-8. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, that is, the game state and the hit determination of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when determining "per ordinary symbol" or "missing" by lottery based on the random value for use (that is, when executing the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described later). ..

As described above, the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol is a random value used in the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random value for hit determination of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol hit" or "miss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. In the hit judgment table of the normal symbol, the range (width) of the hit judgment random value for the normal symbol determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit judgment value data are displayed in the hit judgment table of the normal symbol. The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit judgment random value of the ordinary symbol determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined.

In this embodiment, in the non-time saving game state (for example, the normal game state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is "normal symbol hit" when the random value for hit determination is any of 0 to 79. Then, the winning judgment value data is determined as "ordinary symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the A time saving game state, when the hit determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “loss” and determines the determination value data as “loss determination value data”.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". Determined as "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16). Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

The winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is sufficient to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[1-4-9. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The ordinary symbol determination table is based on the type of time reduction, the above-mentioned winning determination value data, and the symbol random value of the ordinary symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol is selected. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a normal symbol hit symbol that is determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. is there. The symbol random value of the ordinary symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in the non-time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 does not matter whether the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 0 to 99. , Normal symbol hit selection Select "fz0" as the symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz2" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz4" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz5" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and the symbol of the normal symbol is disturbed. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz7" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz8" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the winning determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the hit determination table of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 16). After that, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value and the normal symbol symbol random value, the winning of the normal symbol and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per ordinary symbol]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec is determined.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 2000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 2500 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 3000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is decided that 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is not. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination processing of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, the most advantageous degree is the mode.

Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the hit determination of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state. The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol executes the variation pattern determination process of the ordinary symbol which is executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 of FIG. 43 described later when determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. When) is referred to. The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is usually based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the variation pattern of the symbol. The random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is the longest among the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. In the case of any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

As described above, the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display is A of the variable display times of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. The expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to the time-saving game state]
[1-5-1. Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction]
In the above description, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, not limited to this, the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination processing is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include "time saving hit". In this case, although the main CPU derives the display mode of the time saving hit to the special symbol display unit, it does not execute the control to shift to the time saving gaming state, but continuously controls to the high probability gaming state. By the way, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, which are so-called ST machines, that turn the probability change flag from on to off when the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the final game as the high probability gaming state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is later, the main CPU may control the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time-saving game states are overlapped in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving gaming states may not be overlapped (that is, the "time-saving hit" is ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. It is stipulated.

When the time-saving game states are overlapped, a mode in which the time-saving game states are overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode in which time-saving game states are repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game states are repeatedly executed when the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Occasionally, it is conceivable that the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derivation of display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts the one having a larger number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied while maintaining the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times.

For example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state is larger than the time reduction number that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 is A time reduction. While maintaining the time saving performance of the game state, unless a "big hit" is derived, the time saving game state is controlled until the remaining time saving number of times in the A time saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 200 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, although the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the time reduction number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. 200 times. Therefore, even if the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the appearance of the time reduction number and the time reduction performance is "time reduction". It is the same as the case where the A time saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 is A. While maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state, unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving game state is controlled until the time saving number of times set based on the "time saving hit" is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 20, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, the number of time reductions from this point is 50 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the following, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes the small hit will be described. ..

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit" or "loss" in the final ceiling variation will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining time saving number in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. Unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time reduction specified number of times is 200 times, the C time reduction game state. The number of time reductions from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance of. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the appearance of the time reduction frequency and the time reduction performance is the same as in the case where the C time reduction game state is continued without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. ..

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction specified number of times is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. However, unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state until the specified number of times of time-saving B is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time reductions that can be executed in the B time reduction game state is 300 times. In this case, the number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state, the special symbol is 280 times the difference between the two. The variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", the loss display mode is derived. .. When the small hit display mode is derived, the small hit game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final change, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final change, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are The case where it is satisfied will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts the control of the B time saving game state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is led out to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where the control of the B time saving game state is started after being derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

First, when the control of the B time saving game state is started before the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is led out to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is already controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving number of the B time saving specified number and the time saving number of the C time saving game state is digested. It is controlled to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time saving game state is started after the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is not yet controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 satisfies the end condition of the time saving game state (for example, derivation of the jackpot display mode, derivation of the small hit or a specific small hit display mode, etc.) while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. Unless otherwise specified, the time-saving game state is controlled until the larger number of the B time-saving specified number of times and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, when the end condition of the time-saving game state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed is satisfied, the time-saving game state may be terminated.

When the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the final ceiling fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs the B time reduction when only the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect performed when only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance in the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance in the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. It is also possible to give priority to any of the B time saving transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and the B time saving game. It controls the jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1--3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states in layers]
In the above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state and the mode in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state have been described.

When the specifications are such that a plurality of time-saving game states can be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In pachinko gaming machines with such specifications, the time saving performance of a plurality of time saving game states that can be executed in layers may be different from each other, but the time saving performance of a plurality of time saving game states that can be executed in layers can be made the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification in which the C time-saving game state can be executed by superimposing the C time-saving game state on the one time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state are the same. Further, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state are the same.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having specifications that allow a plurality of time-saving game states to be executed in layers, for example, a time-saving game state that can be executed later in comparison to the time-saving game state that has been executed earlier is executed first. It may be provided with one time saving performance which is the same as the current time saving game state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in combination with the time-saving game state executed earlier, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, another time saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having specifications that allow the B time-saving game state to be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as that of the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time saving performances are provided with other time saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time saving performance is activated, and in the normal gaming state which is not in any time saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time saving performance is activated. May be activated.

[1-5-3. A mode in which the time-saving game states are not repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, a mode in which the hit determination process is performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a mode in which the "time saving hit" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. It is conceivable that even if the time-saving game states are duplicated, the time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly (hereinafter, referred to as "the latter aspect"). In the latter aspect, even if the time saving hit is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the C time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable: a mode in which the game is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed. The above two modes that can be considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is not superimposed on the one time-saving game state]
When the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , Derivation of the display mode per time reduction. However, unless the main CPU 201 has a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final variation"), the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving game state based on "time-saving hit", and one It is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining time-saving number of times in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the time-saving final fluctuation) is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the time reduction final fluctuation in the time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 changes the time reduction game state to one before the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different controls can be executed depending on whether the time saving game state ends when the time saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the time-saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving hit display mode and then states the C time-saving game state. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving game state ends when the time-saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving hit display mode and the end of one time-saving game state are determined. When the interrupt processing is performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the C time saving game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode per time saving is performed before the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time saving hit before the ending process of one time saving game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode of the time saving hit is performed after the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls the C time saving game state. To do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance in one time saving game state, but sets it to the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. That is, at the time when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state if the end processing of the one time saving game state is not processed. If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, in the final ceiling variation, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "loss", the main CPU 201 digests the remaining time saving number of times in the C time saving game state. Until it is played, it is controlled to the C time saving game state.

However, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 0 in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the B time reduction game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed before the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state and controls the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed after the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state without controlling the B time reduction game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving game state, if the end processing of the C time saving game state is not processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state, and C time saving. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the game state is controlled to the B time reduction game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time reduction game state after the start processing of the B time reduction game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and starts controlling the big hit game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 on / off state and the setting key 174 on / off state are saved. That is, the on / off state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. In this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start waiting on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation on the sub-control circuit 300 side, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (when the determination in S14 is YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (when the determination in S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or any of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (when the determination in S18 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current activation state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. Note that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power failure process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial value random number. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to the process of S26 and performs the process after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission / reception process. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs the game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S74 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S74 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process, S75. Move to.

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs processing. Move to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0" (when S72 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the processing target when S73 is YES determination and when S74 is YES determination. The first special symbol is the processing target. Further, when the control state number is not "0" (when the determination in S72 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

The numerical values (“0” to “5”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S81).

When it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S83 based on the control state number read in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit. To do. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol includes a small hit, the hit of the special symbol If the result of the judgment process is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit game state. If the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit game state.

In the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93), first, the determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit by this process, the determination process of whether or not it is a time saving hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving hit, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, big hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. Good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol, the time saving flag value (0 or 1), and the reach determination random number value. Or / and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S96) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15). After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27). S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27). See) will be done. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions, but the game of the special symbol game under the specific state is provided by the symbol fixed number counter. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S122 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal plate 184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal plate 184 will be described later.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the special winning opening 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal plate 184 (S126), and a control state number of the special symbol "3". Processing (S127), game state specification parameter setting processing (S128), transmission reservation processing (S129) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 27) (See S86) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, when it is determined in this S122 that the special symbol that has stopped is not the stop display mode indicating the jackpot (when the determination in S122 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs the transmission reservation process (S134) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of the loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time reduction counter update process (S151). The details of the time reduction counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs the ceiling counter update process. Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process in which a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. The probability change flag is set to on when shifting to the high probability game state.

The time reduction counter indicates the number of time reductions executed in each of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.

When the transition condition to the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state or / and the C time reduction game state is satisfied, the time reduction counter for the time reduction game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time reduction counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which the time reduction counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter is set. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time reduction counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time reduction counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the time reduction counter becomes 0 (). The time saving game state may be completed when (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving number of times when the time saving counter is set is reached (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and performs the process. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is determined to be larger than 0 in S161 (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S164.

The C time reduction counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied during the time reduction game state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time saving mode is a flag set when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. In this embodiment, when the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and the C time saving game state is executed in combination with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 3" is set. Further, when the B time saving game state is executed in combination with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 2" is set.

On the other hand, in S163, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (when the determination in S163 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S166.

The B time reduction counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied during the time reduction game state (in the C time reduction game state in this embodiment). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time reduction counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process. , The process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164 or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 has a time reduction. Set the mode to off (= 0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, not only the two time-saving gaming states may be overlapped, but also three or more time-saving gaming states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, since the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap is the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time saving game states overlap, and the case where three or more C time saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variation flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is predetermined as a value peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for shifting to the B time reduction gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, the backup clear process is performed, the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, or the like. The process may be performed.

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (when S171 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process, and performs the counter update process (counter update process). (See FIG. 33).

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S181). The details of this time saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs the time saving transition process. The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S185.

On the other hand, in S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

If it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the process by the main CPU 201, for example, when the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more even though S183 is a YES determination. , An abnormality alarm may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Further, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the time saving by resetting the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. The counter, the B time reduction counter, and the C time reduction counter may be made consistent.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S186) of the time saving transition command. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, the time saving shift determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time reduction game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is off (S191).

In S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S191 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (counter determination process). (See FIG. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from shifting to the B time saving game state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter has a ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S192, when the ceiling counter is determined to be the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time saving transition processing]
Next, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is off (S202).

In S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S202 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 36). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the probability variation flag is off (S202 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S203, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (when S203 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes the B time saving control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time saving game state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 2, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the B time reduction counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening patterns (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 are shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

In S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (when S206 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition process, and the process is counter determination process. Return to (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S206, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the C time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 3, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening patterns (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 are shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs the time saving setting process. Details of this time reduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting process]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is on (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

When S211 is determined to be YES, the probability variation flag is off, and for example, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed (ceiling counter = ceiling value). Case), or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed (when the "time saving hit" is won) is equivalent. To do.

Although not shown, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and is determined in S205. B Set the time reduction counter. Further, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time reduction counter determined in S207 is set.

In S211 when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (S211 is determined to be NO), that is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reductions remaining in the previously executed time reduction game state) with the new time reduction number (the number of time reductions determined in S205 or S207), and presents the current time reduction. Determine if the time reduction counter is less than the new number of time reductions.

In S212, when it is determined that the current time saving counter is not smaller than the new time saving number (NO in S212), that is, when the current time saving counter is larger than the new time saving number, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time saving. The setting process is finished, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs the time reduction counter resetting process. In this process, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. When the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the present state, the larger time saving number of the current time saving counter value (that is, the remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. .. However, even if the time reduction counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the C time saving game state is executed first and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier. That is, the time saving performance in the time saving game state that was executed earlier can be changed to the time saving performance in the new time saving game state, or the time saving game corresponding to the larger time saving number of the current time saving counter and the new time saving number of times. It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

As described above, the time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball into the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to internally manage that the two time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of the current time saving counter value and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving game states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (which the player can grasp) is the above-mentioned two time-saving game states that are executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner without internally managing that the two time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner (that is, without providing a B time-saving counter and a C time-saving counter). , The value of the current time reduction counter and the new time reduction number, whichever is greater, may be reset as a new time reduction counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S211 determines NO, that is, when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the C time-saving game state. This is the process that is performed when the game is transferred to and executed (when the "time saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time reductions and the time reduction performance determined by the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) or the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag on. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

As described above, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, when the main CPU 201 finishes the process of shifting to the B time saving game state and the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. I'm going to. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation. There may be a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the B time reduction game state based on the end of the small hit game state. Good to do.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time reduction game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the B time reduction game is based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. It is preferable to perform the transition process to the state. This is because, if the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the game shifts to the B time reduction game state, and the other special symbol is variable during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final variation of the ceiling. This is because when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbol cannot receive the benefit of the B time reduction game state, and the interest may be reduced. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation such as 600,000 msec. However, in pachinko gaming machines that can perform variable display of special symbols due to such long fluctuations, the transition process to the B time reduction game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. As a result, even when the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, is performed with a long variation, it is possible to avoid the delay of the start of the B time-shortening gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is shifted to the C time saving game state. The process is prioritized over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the above (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state is prioritized over the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state. You may do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (S171 in FIG. 35 is a NO determination), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko gaming machine that performs a probability change fall lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed even when the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it does not shift to the B time saving game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter reaches the ceiling value, it may shift to the B time saving gaming state. .. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time reduction game state only when "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time reduction game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter becomes the ceiling value. Processing will be performed.

Further, the ceiling value, which is a condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), so the ceiling value. Is preferably in the range of 319 × 2.5 to 319 × 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction, which is the end condition of the B time reduction game state, is a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, regarding the upper limit of the C time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time reduction game state, up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (Up to 8 times) is preferable. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the B time reduction specified number of times and the C time saving specified number of times are both approximately 1212 (319 × 319 ×). It is preferable that the upper limit is 3.8). It is not essential that the upper limit of the B time reduction specified number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving specified number of times are the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine such as the first pachinko gaming machine, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above. , The time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for shifting to the B time reduction game state, is the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the set value. If this is the case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set set value will be detected by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number. It is preferable to set the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modification example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time saving management process (hereinafter referred to as “time saving management process of this embodiment”) described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is performed as a special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is prioritized over the process related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Further, a transition flag to the B time reduction game state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time reduction game state (time reduction hit flag) are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time reduction game state is performed. When the time saving hit flag is on, the state shifts to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update processing, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the transition to the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state Whether to make the migration flag separate or common is not limited to the above, and the time saving management process can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

Further, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is prioritized to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

Further, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

Further, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is prioritized to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time reduction management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation is stopped, and after confirming that the "time reduction hit" is not won when the ceiling is reached, the game is shifted to the B time reduction game state. Good.

Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter when the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0, and 1 in other cases. It is better not to subtract.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 27) is completed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 131, and the like are set. .. The number of rounds is equivalent to the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 of FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined in S271 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 131 is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S281 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (for example, probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display start processing of the normal symbol. The process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is a normal electric accessory when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the variation pattern determination process of the normal symbol, and the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit. The opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, waiting time) of 146 is set. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display end processing of the normal symbol. The process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, the determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, hitting or losing the normal symbol) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 normally performs the electric accessory opening process. The process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16), a random number for hit determination of the normal symbol is generated in the range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and for example, 0 to 79 is generated. It is used as normal symbol hit judgment value data (in the case of non-time saving game state). Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit judgment value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in the non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is relatively long, for example, 1000 msec in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. It runs only for a short time. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port has, for example, a set of states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S303 that the power failure is not detected (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a restoration process of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masqueradable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of the setting key 174 at the time of turning on the power and the on / off information of the backup clear switch 176. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO in S315), the main CPU 201 performs the setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. The details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

When the game is not permitted (when the determination in S315 is NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the launch of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), and a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to the payout. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs the switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs the winning information command setting process. In this process, the winning information command (payout information) is set. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration process of the protection register saved in S311 and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (when the determination in S333 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when S333 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. ..

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs the setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25). Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (when the determination in S341 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the set value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to use this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operating.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

When it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, when it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

When it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S352). Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as an initial setting process when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area (hereinafter, referred to as a “backup area”) in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When the first normal pre-game processing is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S371). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game status information, on / off status of hit flags of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process (S371) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S372 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values (random values for hit determination of ordinary symbols, etc.) for the ordinary symbol are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. .. In addition, the main RAM 203 holds various random values (random values for hit determination of ordinary symbols, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 until the start condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied. It has a start storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). Then, in the ball passage detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is a free area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the first start opening prize is set. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first starting port 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 holds the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 until the start condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, when the upper limit is 4, (when the determination in S393 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in S393 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. In this process, prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the random number value extracted in S392, and the hit determination process and the like are performed. It also determines whether the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. In view of performing the look-ahead effect by the sub control circuit 300, it is preferable to perform the pre-reading effect, for example, before and after the processing of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the winning command of the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the number of reserved first special symbols by one, variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, variation pattern command of the special symbol), and the like. The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and performs the process in the switch input detection process (FIG. FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random value of the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the second start opening prize is set. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning of the second starting port 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 holds various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting conditions are satisfied. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). .. The main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of the second special symbols held is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit is 4, (when the determination in S400 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is changed to the switch input detection process. Return to (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (when the determination in S400 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, information on fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described later are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes the command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6). The mode of sound production is determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, a drawing request). , Sound request, lamp request, and character request, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes the voice control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 mounts an effect drive motor (not shown) on all or part of the effect members constituting the effect accessory group 58 based on a message (character request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Drive control for operation is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs the effect mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, the sub CPU 301 is, for example, an effect pattern of a sub-variation effect (hereinafter, "sub-variation") corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable effect pattern determination process for determining (referred to as an effect pattern), a look-ahead effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern for a look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as a “look-ahead effect pattern”), and the like are performed. Further, in the effect mode determination process, for example, the effect mode of the countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value and the effect mode of the B time saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value are determined. It is also performed to determine various production modes related to the progress of the game, such as processing.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. The sub-variation effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern or a character of a decorative symbol) performed by the sub CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 along with the variable display of the special symbol as an effect indicating the expected degree of the result of the variation. Production pattern, etc.).

In the sub-variation effect, expectations are placed on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol according to the sub-variation effect pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-variation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described later. Is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. The jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit.

For example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the transition timing to the B time reduction game state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 preferentially executes one of the effects. Good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is start information such as various random numbers extracted based on the winning when the first starting port 120 is in a pending state (that is, after winning the first starting port 120). Is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 until is subjected to the hit determination process of the special symbol (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead determination is made according to the pre-reading effect pattern to be executed, as time elapses (more specifically, the progress of variable display of the start information held in advance) while in the hold state. It can be shown that expectations for the outcome of the treatment are maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image showing the current hold status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result type (whether it is a time saving hit or a big hit) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the hit judgment process of the special symbol, and the special symbol. It includes a look-ahead expected value effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process to be a hit (big hit or time saving hit). That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol and the expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Is. Further, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later). See) and is done. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation effect pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-variation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in a game state in which the time reduction flag is on (high accuracy time reduction game state, low accuracy time reduction game state), but the description thereof will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 54, and displays it as a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. A sub-variation effect pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-variation effect pattern includes the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, the jackpot system reach A, B, C, and the common reach A, B, C, D, E. There is.

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving hit as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of time-saving hit. The time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit fixed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, and is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (FIG. 15). reference). The time-saving hit system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern to be read ahead, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern in the look-ahead mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", and is displayed only when the result is a "time saving hit" (Fig.). 15). This jackpot system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The jackpot reach B and the jackpot reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, the jackpot reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, whereas the jackpot reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the “look-ahead flag” column in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and in appearance, there is a possibility of a big hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not there is a sex. The common reach A is a hit (big hit, time saving hit) fixed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is lost, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "time saving hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. Further, the common reach D is a production that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Further, the common reach E is a production that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. The common reach A and the common reach B are not the sub-variation effect patterns to be read ahead, while the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are the sub-variation effect patterns to be read ahead (“look-ahead” in FIG. 15). See the "Flags" column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54), and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation effect pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes a first special symbol start storage area (0), a first special symbol start storage area (1), and a first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , The first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), and the first sub-holding area (1), as the areas corresponding to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. A sub-holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub-holding area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), various kinds of extracted random value values are used. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-holding area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the received information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first special symbol starting storage area of this time.

Further, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. The second sub-holding area (0), the second sub-holding area (1), and the second sub-holding area (2 sub-holding areas (1)) correspond to the start storage area (3) and the second special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. 2), a second sub-holding area (3), and a second sub-holding area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and in other gaming states (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). It may be performed, or it may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, as an area for displaying the reserved image, a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first A second holding area corresponding to the sub-holding area (2), a third holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (3), and a fourth holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in the look-ahead type production pattern determination process]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, the form of the hold image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. The big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the time saving hit and the big hit are included.

The look-ahead hit type effect pattern changes the form of the reserved image from, for example, the common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, or changes from the common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form. This is an effect pattern capable of suggesting a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation pattern to be read ahead is shown among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. 55, when the sub CPU 301 receives a variation pattern in which the look-ahead flag is set, the sub CPU 301 sets the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number, for example. , Determined based on fluctuation patterns and pending numbers. The number of holds here includes start information to be read ahead. That is, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is held, the number of holds after the hold corresponds to the number of holds shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 and determines the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is based on the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random number value 1. It is determined.

In FIG. 56, for convenience, the "look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number" is shown as "SASPT number", and the "look-ahead hit type effect pattern" is shown as "SAS effect pattern". The sub-effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "55", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "A" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of time-saving hit in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "B" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of a jackpot in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "C" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a time saving hit or a big hit in appearance.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is displayed in the third hold area, and the common hit system is also displayed in the second hold area after shifting from the third hold area. The look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second hold area to the first hold area, the common hit system look-ahead effect form changes to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form, and in the first hold area, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form of "A" is displayed. Will be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form of "C" is displayed in the third hold area. Then, when shifting from the third hold area to the second hold area, the common hit system look-ahead effect form is changed to the big hit system look-ahead effect form, the second hold area, and the first hold after being shifted from the second hold area. In the area, the jackpot look-ahead effect form of "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns (a) to (e). In this embodiment, the pattern that changes from the big hit type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form to the large-short hit type look-ahead effect form are the look-ahead hit type effect patterns. Although not included in, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) The time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect pattern is displayed at the time of holding, and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern). "09H").
B) The jackpot look-ahead effect pattern is displayed when it is put on hold, and the jackpot look-ahead effect pattern is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H"". ).
C) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern A (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "24H") that displays the common hit-type look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form.
D) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in the common hit-type look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form.
E) When it is put on hold, it is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form, and after that, the common hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form. Look-ahead common hit effect pattern C (for example, look-ahead hit type effect) Pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of holds, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number). ) Is determined. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and is based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub-effect selection random value value 1. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show a look-ahead hit type effect pattern in which the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of “A” is displayed at the time of holding, and then changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form of “B”. However, in this way, the sub-CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Further, in FIG. 56, as described above, the jackpot look-ahead effect mode of “B” indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be lost). Although it is an effect form, in addition to this, a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the look-ahead type effect patterns in (f) to (h) below.
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern A in which the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter.
G) At the time of being held, other look-ahead effects (for example, "A" time-saving look-ahead effect form, "B" big hit look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) are displayed. After that, the look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern B changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form.
H) At the time of being held, other look-ahead effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" jackpot system. A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern C in which the look-ahead effect form is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is changed.

Further, in FIG. 56, of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A", the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form of "B", and the common hit-type look-ahead effect form of "C", "C" is displayed at the time of being reserved. The display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form is the highest, but it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the time-saving look-ahead effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of holding, the display frequency of the jackpot look-ahead effect form of "B" is the highest. It may be made higher. Further, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form of "C" may be the lowest.

Further, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number is used. The sub-effect selection random value may not be assigned only to (that is, it is not selected by setting the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit”. Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost.

By the way, the form of the hold image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, big hit).

When a hold image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect mode, for example, changing the shape of the hold image, which is usually represented by a triangle, such as "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star". Can represent the change in expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is a rectangle, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a star.

When the hold image is displayed as the jackpot look-ahead effect mode, for example, the color of the hold image, which is usually represented by white, is changed to "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". Can represent the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is blue, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, when the hold image is displayed as the common hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit, the hold image is used, for example, the expected value for the big hit. It may be represented by both the color indicating the level and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit, or it may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The hold image on which the look-ahead effect is performed can change from an effect form in which the expected value is relatively low to an effect form in which the expected value is relatively high, but the expected value is relative from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high. It is preferable that the production form does not change to a low level. In addition, when changing the production form of the reserved image, it is not always necessary to change one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star" or "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". For example, it may be changed to "pentagon-> circle" or "yellow-> rainbow". Further, the form of the reserved image does not necessarily have to start from the quadrangle or blue having the lowest expected value, and may start from, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively, as in FIG. 56.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" indicates the high expected value for the hit (short time hit, big hit). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "quadrangle" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". Corresponds to.

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" is referred to as an expected value level "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “short-time hit” or “big hit” is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (hit time) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of holds and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, for example, the number of holds and, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the sub-effect selection random value 2. The sub-effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received. Note that, in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of holds is “1” to “3” is shown, and the case where the number of holds is “4” is omitted for convenience.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". .. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area. To "3", and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the number of holds is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". Will be done. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third hold area, the expected value level is "2" in the second hold area, and the first hold from the second hold area. The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

As described above, the sub CPU 301 uses the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (at the time of loss) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 58). Refer to), and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of holds and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value effect pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) having a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, the bias is not limited to this, and it can be changed as appropriate, for example, evenly distributed.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all “look-ahead expected value effect patterns”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific “look-ahead expected value effect pattern” is assigned. The sub-effect selection random value 2 may not be assigned only to "" (that is, the distribution rate of the specific "look-ahead expected value effect pattern" may be set to 0 and not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed hit is a normal gaming mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the hold of the look-ahead target is not at the present time, that is, whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed for the current hold. When there are a plurality of holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of hold images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only on one hold image.

When the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (see FIG. 55).

When the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not the look-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than, for example, the upper limit number that can be held (for example, 4 or 8). This process is for avoiding the transition to the B time saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the hold for which the look-ahead effect is performed, even though the look-ahead effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the maximum number that can be held, but the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not limited to this. When it is a look-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), it may be determined whether or not it is larger than the number of holds including the look-ahead target. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined with reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit". In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if this result is a "time saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "time saving hit" or the "big hit" may be determined by transmitting the winning information of the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (S3007 is NO determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (hit time) determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of hit) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) of FIG. 57. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) is referred to in FIG. 58 to determine the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of loss). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Action effect by performing look-ahead effect, extended example of look-ahead effect]
In the pre-reading effect described above, not only is it interesting to see whether the pre-reading effect form of the jackpot system or the pre-reading effect mode of the time saving system changes due to the change in the form of the reserved image, but also the expected value of the hit (big hit, time saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing a new production that has never been seen before. The timing of changing the form of the hold image is not limited to the time when the hold shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, regarding the form of the reserved image performed as the look-ahead effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)), the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special symbol of the fluctuation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined by the fluctuation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead time-saving effect pattern, and the variation in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Comparing with the probabilities determined by the pattern (see, for example, "06H", "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect is higher in the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-short hit effect pattern than in the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko machine in which the look-ahead effect is performed only when there is a possibility of a big hit, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of the hit. It becomes possible to increase.

The execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time saving effect pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big hit is higher than the expected value for the time saving hit, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off (in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state and the low probability time saving game state), the "time saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 10). reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-accuracy time-shortening game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", when the C time-saving game state is executed in combination with the A time-saving game state, and for the A time-saving game state. It is unlikely that the number of time reductions will increase in any case where the C time reduction game states are not executed repeatedly. Therefore, by making it as little as possible for the player to know that there is a possibility of winning the "time saving hit" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving hit" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and the look-ahead effect should be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-short game state and the high-accuracy low-time game state. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit system reach, a big hit system reach, or a common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading time-saving effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, the jackpot reach is not executed. Further, when the pre-reading effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot system reach as the sub-variation effect pattern, and does not execute the time saving hit system reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern or the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 can execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variation effect effect pattern. However, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variation effect pattern.

Further, a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and a look-ahead time reduction hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56). ”) And the look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern)“ 27H ”) shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 uses the sub-variation effect pattern. (For example, the sub-variation effect patterns “0AH” and “0BH” shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the time-saving hit system reach is executed, the loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving hit system reach, and then the big hit system reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end whether or not the jackpot reach with a high profit margin is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "target fluctuation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach C and After the common effect is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the game does not shift to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the effect common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the time saving hit system reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the process does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “big hit look-ahead effect”) indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 is new. Do not execute look-ahead effect. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed on a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to execute a new look-ahead effect when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which the variable display of the special symbol is started after the first hold. ), And when the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “17H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is performed in the second hold. Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may be meaningless. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and controlled to the jackpot gaming state and controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of this jackpot gaming state, for example, "time saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, the player may not be able to receive the benefits of this "time saving hit", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that is digested after the hold on which the jackpot look-ahead effect is executed.

Even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It may or may not be executed.

Further, even when the big hit look-ahead effect of Gase (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “53H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, when the time saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. You may. This is because even if a time saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player than that.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the first hold is small. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is executed, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, a look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead effect"). ) Is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a small hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, as a sub-variation effect pattern, if, for example, the first start port 120 is won and the start information is held during the execution of the jackpot system reach, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this hold.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). In the paragraph, this hold is referred to as "specific hold"), and regardless of whether the look-ahead effect is executed or the look-ahead effect is not executed for this specific hold, the sub CPU 301 is subjected to the jackpot game state after the end. , The look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold unless it is in the normal gaming state. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even if it is in the normal game state after the end of the big hit game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko gaming machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-short game state, a low-accuracy time-short game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). In the paragraph, this hold is referred to as "specific hold"), and even if this specific hold is a "time saving hit" hold, the main CPU 201 will perform a C time saving game based on the "time saving hit" after the end of the jackpot game state. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification does not execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner when the time-saving game states overlap, and the time-saving game state is controlled to the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit". The main CPU 201 does not execute the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute the look-ahead effect using the reserved image based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

60 (a) to 60 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit changes. It is a figure which shows the process. The look-ahead hit type effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) correspond to “1CH”, “3CH”, “58H”, or “78H” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f), the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are areas indicating whether or not the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4), respectively. is there. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which the information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub CPU 301 indicates the hold areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub hold area in which the hold information is stored by a triangle. It is displayed as a hold image (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "hold image"). Further, when the hold information is not stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the hold image and displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to (3), and the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In FIG. 60 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a). This indicates that the hold information is newly stored in the first sub hold area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color except for the rainbow.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level “0”), and is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The color of the reserved image is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 60 (b) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 60 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 60 (c) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reserved area 412.

FIG. 60 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 60 (d) is , Is an image showing that the color has changed from green to red (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 60 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 60 (e) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410.

Further, the color of the hold image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. ..

Further, in FIG. 60, the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, the jackpot confirmed look-ahead form is changed from the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode. The look-ahead effect that changes to the effect form may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when pre-reading effect is performed with pre-reading time saving effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading time-shortening effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit is provided. It is a figure which shows the changing process. The look-ahead time reduction hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) corresponds to “0EH”, “2EH”, “4AH”, or “6AH” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 61A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big hit is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for the time saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61B, the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level “0”), which is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The shape of the reserved image is a quadrangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 61 (b) is , Is an image showing that the quadrangle has changed to a pentagon (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 61 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 61 (c) is , It is an image which shows that it changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it was shifted to the second reserved area 412.

FIG. 61 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 61 (d) is , Is an image showing that the hexagon has changed to a circle (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 61 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 61 (e) is , This is an image showing that the circle has changed to a star (expected value level “5”) when it is shifted to the 0th region 410.

The shape of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star", for example, it changes to "pentagon → circle". You may let me.

Further, the shape of the hold image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and for example, even if it is changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. Good.

Further, in FIG. 61, the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time saving hit is derived. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit type look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when pre-reading effect is performed with the pre-reading common hit effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading common hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

62 (a) to 62 (d) are examples of pre-reading effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the system look-ahead effect form to the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. The change in the common hit system look-ahead production form is that the expected value level of the hit (time saving hit, big hit) changes, and that the type of hit changes to a big hit or a time saving hit. Is included. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 62 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 62 (d) corresponds to "43H" in FIG. 57.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are both as a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit. Is displayed.

In FIG. 62A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 show the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). .. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or the expected value for the hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow". Expectations for short hits increase in the order of "stars".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62B, the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level “0”), and the third reserved area. The form of the reserved image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 62 (b) is , Is an image showing that the yellow pentagon changed to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 62 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 62 (c) is , When shifting to the first reserved area 411, from the green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "5") It is an image showing that it has changed to.

That is, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), it is determined whether the form of the reserved image is a form showing an expected value for a big hit or a form showing an expected value for a time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62 (d), the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for the jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level “5”). It is possible to grasp that there is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is divided into a look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern showing the expected value for the time-saving hit and a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern showing the expected value for the big hit, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. , A look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time saving hit), and a look-ahead effect can be executed by any of the patterns. Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the player is given an interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to enhance the interest.

It is necessary to change the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit one by one in the order of "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star". Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → It may be changed to a "triangular star (time saving hit system look-ahead effect form)". Further, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue quadrangle having the lowest expected value, and may be started from, for example, the red circle.

Further, the form of the hold image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, in FIG. 62, the common hit system look-ahead effect form is changed to change the expected value from which one of the hits (big hit or time saving hit) is derived, or the expected hit is changed from an unknown state to a big hit. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the look-ahead effect shown below may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit type look-ahead effect form to a big hit type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modification example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the reserved image, the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit is not necessarily a color showing the expected value for the big hit and a shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead production form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both the big hit and the time saving hit, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will change in the future production mode. You will be able to play games with a sense of expectation, and you will be able to improve your interests.

63 (a) to 63 (d) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the reserved image is changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 63 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 63 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Further, FIGS. 64A to 64D are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process of changing a hold image. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d) corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 64 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 64 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In FIGS. 63 (a) and 64 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 413 and the third are displayed. 4 The reserved image is not displayed in the reserved area 414, and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a).

In both of FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b), the form of the hold image shown in the third hold area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a brilliant form. The expected value level can be changed by changing the degree of light brightness.

FIG. 63 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and is a dedicated common hit system displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 63 (b). It is an image which shows that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and is a dedicated image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 64 (b). It is an image which shows that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 63 (c) is , Is an image showing that when the first reserved area 411 is shifted, the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to a red triangle (expected value level “4” of the big hit).

On the other hand, FIG. 64 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (c), and is a hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 64 (c). It is an image which shows that when the form was shifted to the 1st hold area 411, it changed from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level "4" per time reduction).

In this way, even when the look-ahead effect form is represented by the dedicated common hit type look-ahead effect form, the big hit type look-ahead effect form and the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form can be changed from the dedicated common hit type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to give the player an interest in which way it will change, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, the output is output from the external terminal plate 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal plate 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting a signal to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal plate 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The signal output conditions from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 winning balls are paid out and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second starting opening 120 or second). If a game ball wins in the starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4), for example, three prize balls are paid out, and if a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out. Prize balls will be paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1", for example, for 120 msec, the "prize ball". The signal of "Information 1" is output. Note that the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output only at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. For example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, it is only an example that the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1". Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the trigger of occurrence in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table showing the output time and remarks of the release trigger in, the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 67).

Although the first pachinko gaming machine does not have a small hit large winning opening, FIG. 67 also describes a small hit large winning opening abnormal winning error for convenience. Further, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening for big hits.

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 67 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Examples of errors not shown in FIG. 67 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an unexhausted game ball inside the winning opening or the large winning opening for small hits, or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening entry / discharge error and the vibration sensor will operate for the specified time. A vibration sensor error or the like when it is on for a long time corresponds to this. Further, for example, in the case where a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific zone during the execution of the jackpot game control. In the case of abnormal passage to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the jackpot for big hits, it should be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure it.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection related execution executes the notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error of the big winning opening for big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if there is one winning detection after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) will have a jackpot jackpot. Winning opening abnormality It is determined that a winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of the error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "a large winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (all of which, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, when the sub CPU 301 receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error during execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, the output signal is indicated by ◯, and the non-output signal is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal game state (other than the big hit / small hit, other than the probability change / time reduction), and during the low probability time / short game state (other than the big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "external information 7" are output, and the signals of "external information 3", "external information 5" and "external information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Output. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Will be done.

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (for example) that can receive the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, in an external device capable of receiving signals (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)), a small hit game control process is executed in a pachinko gaming machine that transmits external information. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

Further, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state by controlling the main CPU (function of A time saving game state, B). The explanation has been made on the premise that the function of the time-saving game state and the function of the C time-saving game state are installed), but the description is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) are installed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Further, of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, two functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state and the function of the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state). It may be a pachinko gaming machine equipped with only a game state function) and not equipped with other functions (for example, a B time reduction game state function or a C time reduction game state function).

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called an ST machine, in which the probability change flag is set to ON with a 100% probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the function of the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state It may be configured so that neither the function of the above nor the function of the C time saving game state is installed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine called a digi-pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The explanation of the points in common with the above will be omitted as much as possible.

Further, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawing newly adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko gaming machine The explanation shall be made using a code and step number different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example. Including the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting port and the second starting port. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially fluctuating machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

The various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120 and the like) are various members arranged in the gaming area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko gaming machine. There are some things in common with, but I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. Center accessory 1115, first starting port 1120, general winning opening 1122, passing gate unit 1125, special electric accessory unit 1130, second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and ordinary electric combination It includes an object unit 1145, a small hit unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference symbol). The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. Good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 1126, the starting information of the normal symbols is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbols is held up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). .. The reserved start information of the normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

Further, the passing gate 1126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous operation device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operating device is operated. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 below) that detects the winning (passing) of a game ball into the jackpot jackpot 1131. , It is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The jackpot jackpot 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot jackpot 1131, a jackpot jackpot 1115 in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed. A big hit opening for a big hit may be arranged at the upper part of the game ball.

Further, the jackpot jackpot 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has been won in the jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the big prize opening 1131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins (passes) the jackpot jackpot 1131 and a game ball wins (passes) through the jackpot jackpot 1131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the jackpot winning opening 1131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot prize opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a gaming state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are right-handed. A game ball can be won (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 1140A and / and the second starting port 1140B.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B the game ball wins, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The generated start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b on the downstream side of the game ball as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit right but does not win the big hit opening 1131. Is formed. The game ball that was hit to the right and flowed further toward the downstream side without winning the jackpot prize opening 1131 was placed in the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by, for example, the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win a prize in the second starting port 1140A. For example, a prize in the second starting port 1140A can hardly be expected. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but has not won the second starting port 1140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate type normal electric shutter 1147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 1140B or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 1140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 1147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 1150 is a small hit large winning opening 1151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body in which a small hit shutter 1153 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 1154 capable of operating the small hit shutter 1153 are integrated.

By advancing and retreating the small hit shutter 1153 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be won (passed) into the small hit large winning opening 1151 or is easily opened, and the game to the small hit large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If a game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected in the small hit large winning opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 1151 for small hits is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 1150 is a downward flow path 1107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 1146, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball that has flowed down the lower flow path 1107b is small. Since the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 1151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 1131 and the small hit big winning opening 1151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening are open. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 1178 is any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 1120, second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, big hit big winning opening 1131, general winning opening 1122, etc.) of those fired toward the game area 1105. This is for discharging the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small hit unit 1150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The effect group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 1058 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 1300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, the processing executed when the power is turned on, the processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes the main CPU 1201, the main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), the main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), and the initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the I / O port 1205 which is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and the command output port 1206 which is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300 and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 1166 for special symbols, the display unit 1167 for probabilistic change notification, the display unit 1168 for time saving notification, the solenoid for general electric power 1148, the solenoid for special electric power 1135, the solenoid for small hit 1154 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in the error notification monitor 1172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting changing process is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first start port switch 1121, a second start port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big hit large winning opening count switch 1132, a general winning opening switch 1123, and a small hit big winning. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 1184, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 1176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) and the like that can be operated by the player are also connected to the sub control circuit 1300.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 1058 for production). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 fires a payout device 1082 and a game ball capable of paying out game balls. A launching device 1006 capable of capable of lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probability variation control nor time reduction control is executed, a high probability time reduction game state in which both probability variation control and time reduction control are executed, and time reduction control are executed although probability variation control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state that is not performed and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which probability variation control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 plays a game in any of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game does not proceed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. Good.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is a normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-shortened game state, the high-accuracy non-time-shortened game state, and the low-accuracy time-shortened game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying a normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value for big hit determination extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit judgment value data, of the large hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. To.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the winning judgment value data is determined as the "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and wins. The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the value is "missing" and determines the determination value data as the "loss determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time reduction hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the value is "missing" and determines the determination value data as the "loss determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Judgment is made, and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time reduction hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 22118 to 22966, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 22696 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the jackpot determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is set from 0. It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) excluding the big hit judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. Further, from the predetermined value, the tail end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. You may. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is overlapped, so that if the "time saving hit" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is substantially changed. It will be extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit" regardless of whether the probability variation flag is on or off. .. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 uses the selected symbol. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 uses the selected symbol command. Select "z10" as the symbol specification command, and select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69). The prize ball can be paid out by executing the control to be in the state.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the hit judgment table of the special symbol (see FIG. 71), and then the special symbol judgment table (see FIG. 71). (See 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. Further, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive a display mode of a time saving hit, a display mode of a big hit, a display mode of a small hit, or a display mode of a loss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the winning game state and / and the mode of the subsequent gaming state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol (that is, described later). (When executing the hit type determination process in S1036 of FIG. 78). The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big hit game state or the mode of the small hit game state. Further, the mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortened game state without being controlled to the hit-game state. Therefore, the mode of the subsequent game state is the C-time-shortened game state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To determine. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time reduction hit described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then then. Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time reduction flag is set on and the determined number of time reductions is set, so that the C time reduction game state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so that the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 draws a lottery for "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Further, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery of "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination processing is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 1163 and 1164. Further, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the jackpot judgment random value, that is, the hit judgment processing may be performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result. ..

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, the game is configured so as not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one mode of the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the small hit to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then determines the big prize for the small hit. By setting the number of times the mouth 1151 is opened, it becomes possible to control the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 is controlled to the small hit game state without changing either the probability change flag or the time saving flag after the end of the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the flag.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state, and the probability change flag and the time reduction as the mode of the subsequent game state. It is decided to set only the probability variation flag among the flags to on, and to set the probability variation number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the jackpot display mode described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as a mode of the jackpot game state. To decide. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, in each case, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10000 times. .. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state with high accuracy and short game time.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state, respectively. Further, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on. Further, the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state in a short time. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. The mode of time saving control in the highly accurate time saving game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “time saving performance”) is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving game state. ..

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 1201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the hit game state and the subsequent mode of the hit game state and the subsequent mode. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show the hit type determination table in FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 73.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 is extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B with reference to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 71. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value for jackpot determination (winning determination is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “small hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 72, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 1120 or the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B and the above-mentioned special symbol random value. The selected symbol command is determined based on the winning determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, the type of time saving hit, the type of big hit) derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z6”) or 300. This is the number of times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. It is 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). It becomes.

Instead of setting the expected value of the time reduction number in the A time reduction game state to be higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction game state is the time reduction number in the A time reduction game state. It may be higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of the "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving game state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. Determine the variation pattern of the symbol. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S1037 of FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74, in the main CPU 1201, the effect selection random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1120 is a specific random value. If so, set the look-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may determine.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed is a normal gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. Will be decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74. The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is larger than that in the case of determination. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, the range of the random value for effect selection is changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined is different. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of the variable display times of the special symbol per unit time are provided. The table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of is different.

Further, in the time saving hit system reach A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of FIGS. 74 and 75, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 has a hit determination table for ordinary symbols (see FIG. 16) and an ordinary symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 86), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the special symbol control process will be described again with different step numbers, including the same process as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is held for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect when the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 1301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is the main special symbol and the other is the sub-special symbol, and the effect control of the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which the left-handed hit is the normal game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-handed game is the normal game mode (for example, the high-accuracy time-short game state). , High-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol for the main special symbol, display effect of the character and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the gaming states in which right-handed striking is a normal gaming mode, in the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, other effects are performed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of counting down the remaining number of time reductions until the end of the time reduction game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1003. For example, NO is determined in S1002 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is the timing of starting the variable display (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1006. For example, NO is determined in S1005 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is the timing of starting the variable display (when the determination in S1005 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1008 is YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20 to 20). (See FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1011 is YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When no processing is executed and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, the special symbol management processing described later is performed in the order of priority. Is executed.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed by S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is processed.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1023 based on the control state number read in the processing of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). The main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when it is called in S1006, and is called in S1009. If so, the process is returned to S1010, and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1031).

When it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1031 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S1032 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1032 is NO), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1032 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss, and the second special symbol is a time saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is. Further, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, set the big hit flag to on. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the start of the C time saving game state, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit game state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit game state.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a determination process of whether or not it is a small hit is performed. Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and when it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, but a plurality of types of loss are provided to perform the hit determination process of the special symbol. If the result is a loss, the stop symbol may be determined. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, small hit, or big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination and / and the random value for effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In a gaming state in which right-handed is a normal gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start (see FIG. ) Is used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1037) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol. To. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 77). (See S1024) will be performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter update process related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1042)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S1024 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S1024 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the person to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol of the person not to be processed is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S1052.

When it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1053 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1053 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77). See) will be done. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions, but the game of the special symbol game under the specific state is provided by the symbol fixed number counter. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a big hit (when the determination in S1059 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in the variable display.

When it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (when the determination in S1061 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is in the variable display (when the determination in S1061 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in the variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S1072 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined in S1072 that the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating the jackpot (when the determination in S1072 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a stop display mode indicating a small hit (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal plate 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1076.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 sets, for example, the upper limit of the number of times of opening the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) to be opened (S1077), the external terminal plate 1184. Big hit signal set processing (S1078), special symbol control state number set to "3" (S1079), game state specification parameter setting processing (S1080), and big hit start display command transmission reservation processing (S1081). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 77). (See S1026) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S1091). Since the details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs the transmission reservation process (S1094) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of the loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening preparatory process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large winning opening opening count counter value. The jackpot opening count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening counter (the large winning opening opening counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot 1131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened in the small hit game state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 77) is completed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1028) will be performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter value. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit opening 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening, and the large winning opening winning The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 1151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. To. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to a maximum of 5, for example, when the small hit game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large winning opening is set to 10, for example, for both the large winning opening 1131 for big hits and the large winning opening 1151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (S1111) (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1121 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit, the big winning opening 1151 for the small hit) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits and the big winning opening count switch 1152 for small hits (see FIG. 70)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S1122 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 Moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 1151 for small hit) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES judgment). , The main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning big winning opening 1131, small hit big winning opening 1151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has not passed (when S1123 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 wins the big winning. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES determination), the main CPU 1201 The process is transferred to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 closes the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 1151 for small hit). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S1026 of FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the jackpot end processing is called in S1028 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1131 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, number of times the winning opening is opened) are set or reset. The process of setting or resetting the value of the counter, the large winning opening winning counter, the ceiling counter, etc. is performed. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). When the probability variation flag is set to on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to on. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high probability game state in which the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, so that the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is mainly executed. Further, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed is a normal gaming mode, so that the game is played to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. The second special symbol game based on the winning of the ball is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the first is in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 is in another game state (for example, normal game state, high-accuracy time-short game state, low-accuracy time-short game state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the right-handed game ball almost passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 1131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting port 1140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball that is right-handed and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small hit large winning opening 1151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball that is hit right and is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting port 1140A. When a game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), a stop showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate). Not only the display mode is derived, but also ultra-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 75) of the special symbol for high start, so that the small hit is large. The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state and the low accuracy time reduction game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b win the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball hit right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a wins the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 1140A is hit right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. In this way, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, but if right-handed is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed. When it is derived, the ordinary electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the large winning opening 1151 for small hits will be opened by winning a game ball in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the game ball is tentatively won in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. Even so, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and of course, is smaller than the game state in which the time saving control is executed. ..

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a high-accuracy time-shortening game state in which the special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-kind 2-kind mixer, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot game state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a hit by opening the accessory", and the game ball that has entered the released V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the start condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The explanation of the points in common with the above will be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be given using a code and step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front side surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. In addition, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. Good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 2126, the prize ball will not be paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) through the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the jackpot game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass), a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls in the winning opening, and ordinary electric. It is a unit body in which the accessory 2146 is integrated, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate type normal electric shutter 2147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passage gate 2126 in the right region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is composed of members along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of (see FIG. 88 described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, for example, by 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode of opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the opening of 900 msec may be performed twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on entering the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V attacker winning counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the open / close winning opening 2151 has not passed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers the control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a big prize opening. A round game may be performed that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning opening and the big hit game The attackers released in the state may be one by one. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that "the accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When the player enters, it is controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot game state after passing through the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. To do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later), and the game to the V winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode and the opening mode in which the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but has not been held by the locking member 2160 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2160 is unlocked by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The unlocked game ball in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) in the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2160.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 like the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an operation accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 2206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 A special symbol hold display unit 2166, a time saving notification display unit 2168, a general electric solenoid 2148, a special electric solenoid 2135, a V attacker solenoid 2154, a V shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used for transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 and / and backs up. It also includes those configured to come into contact with the clear switch 2176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 2058 for production). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out the game balls and a game ball. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the short-time game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a display area of the display device 2007, which is a normal game mode.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the jackpot determination random value of the first special symbol. Then, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "loss". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be "time saving hit", "big hit", or "feature opening hit".

It is not essential that the "winning of the character opening" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined as the "winning of the character opening". , It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "winning the character opening". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "time saving hit" and "big hit" are used as data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting port 2120. The range (width) of the random value for jackpot judgment determined as "or" loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("short-time hit judgment value data "," jackpot judgment value data "," loss judgment value data ") The relationship with is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the big hit determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "feature opening hit". The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data") is defined. There is.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential. For example, the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability or / and the accessory opening hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus open hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus open hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. You may. However, even if the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening the time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time is shortened. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins at the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. Further, the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164 derives a display mode for a short time hit, a display mode for a big hit, a display mode for opening an accessory, or a loss display mode based on the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol. To. Further, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). It is referred to when determining the time saving flag and the time saving end condition). The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the time saving game state, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state. “L” shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times per accessory opening. The remarks column in FIG. 91 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 6, N = 3. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to L = 30, M = 3, and N = 3. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 2. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 1. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be four and does not set the time saving flag to on. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine N = 2.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , The number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time reduction flag is determined to be set on, and the time reduction end conditions are determined to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory", if the jackpot game state is not controlled via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot game state. Not only does it not, but it does not set the time saving flag to on, and after executing control based on the character release hit, it returns to the game state immediately before the character release hit.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state. Neither is set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 2201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state as described above. Since it is not set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 91.

Further, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but the conditions are not limited to this, and depending on the gaming state. The conditions may be different. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B may be different from each other. It may be different only in one of the time-saving game states and the time-saving game state C. Further, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be different only in one of the time-saving game states. That is, the end condition of at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to the end condition of at least one of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. It may be different in the game state.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the effect selection random value extracted when (passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. Determined based on the effect selection random value.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol by the value of the time saving flag and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted at the time. It is considered that the game ball rarely wins a prize at the first starting port 2120 because right-handed hitting is a normal game mode in the short-time game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "per opening of the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second starting port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "per opening of the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol for the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect of, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way so as to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, although it does not appear in the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time saving flag is off, and the time saving flag is turned on. If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

The main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Further, the time-saving hit system reaches A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 92 indicate that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a hit determination table for ordinary symbols (see FIG. 16) and an ordinary symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is a YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 is a YES determination, and the first when S2004 is a YES determination. Special symbols are processed. Further, when the control state number is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2012, and then shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, big hit, accessory opening hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (time saving hit, big hit, hit by opening the accessory). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time saving hit, big hit, and accessory opening hit, but there may be one type of time saving hit, big hit, and / and accessory opening hit. .. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of time saving hits, big hits, and / and accessory opening hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 92) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination, or /. And, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is the processing called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. Will be. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

If this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), the process of setting the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and the control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S2059), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of the accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal plate 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened, which is set in this process, is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the start display command per opening of the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 of FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, is not controlled to a highly accurate gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 32 in the first pachinko gaming machine. -There are differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko gaming machine of No. 3, it is not controlled to the highly accurate gaming state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of being set to on, and it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the probability variation flag is off (see S191), the probability variation flag is off. Although the processing of S192 is performed, the third pachinko gaming machine is different in that the processing of S192 is performed without the processing of S191 because it is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2074) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the value of the maximum number of winnings. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined that the V winning detection has been detected in S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a V-per signal) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round games are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player has executed the big hit game control process. As in the case, you can win a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control can also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

Further, in the start setting process of the game control per V of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the opening of the winning combination, is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed by the determination that the V winning detection has been made (S2095 is determined to be YES) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and the V-per-V signal setting process (S2100) to the external terminal board 2184. , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the start display command per V (S2103), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the big hit end process (see S2020 of FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. FIG. When the game control per V is started by (S2095 of 100 is determined to be YES), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of gaming balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (for example, probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Expansion example]
An extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described below. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals will be omitted.

[4-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko machine and the second pachinko machine, it is decided whether or not to set the probability change flag on according to the type of jackpot, and when the probability change flag is set to on, the number of probability changes is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, when it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability change machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and cases where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and (A) is specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot can pass through the specific area in either the first open mode or the second open mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 104 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one mode may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 104, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the jackpot game control process. As an example of the above, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to that, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the winning determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the first special symbol 2 The hit selection symbol command of the special symbol is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. It is selected and "z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. It is selected and "z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (3R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R probability variation big hit A) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit B) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 10%. The selectivity of is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity of 50% is determined to be 10R probability variation jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 10R normal big hit B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable big hit B with a selection rate of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by the time control as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C). As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, and (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening counts. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the second opening mode of the other example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening is compared with the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set on.

In the above description, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective when the machine is a type 1 or type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example of providing is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one is used. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific region.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of the specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Moreover, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be compounded.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limiter. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above description, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot game state. And the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability change machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability variation control is not executed. The same applies to a gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , A so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be used.

[4-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be executed after the big hit game control process is completed. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random value among the random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, for special symbol hit determination) A random value, a symbol random value of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time saving winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time saving control, in addition to the special symbol hit determination processing. When the time saving winning judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time saving hit" in which the time saving control is executed. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving hit determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting port, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.) It may be extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, the passing of the game ball through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning judgment processing and the special symbol hit judgment processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning judgment processing is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute the control of displaying the display effect by the display device on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) in which it is impossible or difficult to visually grasp whether the processing result is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may execute the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image showing, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball recommended in the big hit game state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a recommended method of launching a game ball, for example, it is controlled so that an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the effect image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when the time saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, when the time saving hit determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time saving hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time saving flag is set to on). A control may be executed to display an effect image that can be visually grasped or easily grasped on the display device as to whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the condition for determining the time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment processing, the execution timing of the time saving winning judgment processing, and the time saving winning judgment processing. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the ending timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time reduction, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing are, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated random value for determining the time saving. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning / winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball passes through the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. The time may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting port, when the game ball wins in either the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting ports.

(Conditions for determining time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment process)
When the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time saving winning judgment random value is a specific time saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit judgment random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination processing are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time saving winning judgment random value acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly to the above, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be subjected to the time saving winning determination processing (for example, before being held), or reserves the extracted random number value. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed before the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time saving winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, or the time-saving control is not executed in the gaming state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time saving winning determination processing such as executing the time saving winning determination processing in any game state or executing the time saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state are determined in advance. When the specified condition is satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination processing may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable that the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time saving game state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set when hitting time reduction)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or additionally, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the time saving winning judgment random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit judgment value data, the time saving number is determined to be "100" and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of time reductions remaining, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit ". One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the time saving remaining number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that are being executed. The time saving number determined by the above may be newly set (that is, the remaining time saving number may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time saving times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on the "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the time reduction control during execution ends.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing being "time reduction hit" can be set to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning judgment processing becomes the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment processing is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame, even if the time saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit judgment processing is performed) based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. Good. In this case, the gaming state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. It becomes.

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning / losing determination processing being "time reduction hit" may be set after the predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started until the time saving control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU will reduce the time based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is advisable to start control.

(End timing of time saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the set time saving number of times in the game state where the time saving control is executed" and "in the game state where the time saving control is executed". , When the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened due to the derivation of the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory during the execution of the time saving control. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will be used even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to execute time saving control.

(Rewrite time saving number of times)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in a gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, a high accuracy time saving gaming state, a time saving gaming state, etc.) and the result of this time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time saving number may be rewritten, or the time saving number may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control is executed until the time saving number in the running time saving control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit judgment process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time of the time saving winning judgment process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the time reduction control during execution. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies the predetermined conditions by predetermining one of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions".

(Probability of hitting time reduction)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (hereinafter, "No. 1" The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning judgment processing") and the time saving winning judgment processing (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning judgment processing") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed, or the second time saving winning judgment processing may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving winning probability when the first time saving hit is performed, or when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed and the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment processing)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display. It is preferable that the time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit are provided in the LED display group including the special symbol display unit and the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device the number of time reductions determined based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process and / or the time reduction hit. Good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction win / loss determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the winning of the accessory opening and the big hit game control processing is not executed based on the opening of the accessory, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine, and the third pachinko machine described in the present specification play a game using a game medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize) is obtained based on the result of the game. It can be applied to all game machines to which a ball (ball, prize data, etc.) is given. That is, if the game is played by launching or inserting a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and enabling a game played by circulating the enclosed game ball or a medalless game. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for the player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium loading operation). The operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the action of paying out the game medium to the player when the winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), and the necessary game medium is provided on the line. The operation of acquiring the game) or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game may be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball as a gaming medium is launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed gaming machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game ball are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, when the game is completed, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine is settled, or a part of the ball held is transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game medium" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball possessed (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball possessed. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the game ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the game ball is also included in the enclosed game machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The game medium management device may be connected by communication. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, if the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of No. 1 with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, a general game is performed. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small hit gaming state as described above. In this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In the present specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the techniques described in the present specification may be referred to as other techniques such as pachislot machines. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in the present specification is applied to either a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, a temporary stop by a reel may be included in an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of a symbol. The "stop" of the symbol includes a main stop and a temporary stop, and the interpretation of "stop" may be either. Further, the operation for performing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, a handle, a button, touch, or the like.

In pachinko gaming machines, the manager of the gaming machine may set the production, etc. by operating the production button, but after the setting by the production button, the player may be operated to start the game. is there. In this case, as a result, it is assumed that the operation by the administrator becomes the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachislot, there is a case where the manager plays a 2-bet game and the player plays a 3-bet game with the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game established. In this case, although the player can play both the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game, the manager of the gaming machine may play the 2-bet game, so that the game played by the manager (for example, 2). Bet games, etc.), selection of hall menus, etc. may be operations for the player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the player's game method is managed by notifying whether the player is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU, and if the player's game method is not intended, a game such as an error or a warning is issued. It may be notified by the control of the sub CPU that it is unintended.

In pachislot, the player's game method such as push order (assist) by the player may be managed by the control of the main CPU, but if the player's game method is not intended, an error, warning, etc. may occur. The sub CPU may control to notify that the game is unintended.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but one board may be used. In the pachislot machine, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, a pachislot machine usually has a rectangular housing that houses devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing. However, the housing in the pachislot machine can be regarded as a frame. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as a housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as a housing, and the entire gaming machine including the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the dish unit is regarded as the housing, etc. Is possible. A unit, a middle frame, an intermediate portion, etc. provided with various control boards may exist between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, and the door, the frame, the housing, etc. There may be various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, and the like.

Hereinafter, the gaming board P1100 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The game board P1100 shown in FIG. 108 includes a transparent plate unit P1110, a game area P1120, a ball launch passage P1130, a warp passage P1140, a stage P1150, a general winning opening unit P1160, an upper attacker portion P1170, a lower attacker portion P1180, and an out opening P1190. It includes an upper movable production accessory P2000, a rotating accessory P3000, and the like.

The transparent plate unit P1110 shown in FIG. 108 is provided so as to be located on the front side of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 is formed so as to cover the entire front side of the game board P1100, including the front of the opening region 1d opened in the center of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 includes a base plate P1111 located around the opening region 1d, a base plate P1210 (see FIG. 113, etc.), a light guide plate P1112 (transparent panel) of the light guide plate unit, and the like. The light guide plate P1112 is arranged in front of the opening region 1d, and can produce light emission by light emitted from a plurality of LEDs.

The game area P1120 shown in FIGS. 108, 111, 113, etc. is an area in which the game ball can roll. The game area P1120 is formed on the front surface of the transparent plate unit P1110. The game area P1120 is formed so as to surround the opening area 1d.

The ball launch passage P1130 shown in FIG. 108 is a passage that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 6 shown in FIG. 1 and the like to the game area P1120. The ball launch passage P1130 is partitioned by the outer rail P1131 and the inner rail P1132. The ball launch passage P1130 is formed on the left side of the game area P1120.

The warp passage P1140 shown in FIG. 108 is a passage that guides the game ball to the stage P1150 described later. The warp passage P1140 is formed in a tunnel shape in which a game ball can roll. The warp passage P1140 is formed along the lower left edge of the opening region 1d. The upper end of the warp passage P1140 is opened so as to face the game area P1120. The lower end of the warp passage P1140 is opened so as to face the stage P1150 described later.

The stage P1150 shown in FIG. 108 distributes the flow area of the game ball in the game area P1120. The stage P1150 is formed at the lower edge of the opening region 1d. The stage P1150 has an upper surface on which the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The left-right central portion, the left portion, and the right portion of the upper surface of the stage P1150 are formed so as to be recessed downward and inclined forward. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage P1150 falls downward (lower game area P1120) from any of the left and right central portions, the left portion, and the right portion.

The general winning opening unit P1160 shown in FIG. 108 has a general winning opening P1161a described later in which a game ball can win a prize. The general winning opening unit P1160 is arranged in the lower left of the game area P1120 (lower left of the opening area 1d). Details of the general winning opening unit P1160 will be described later.

The upper attacker portion P1170 shown in FIG. 108 is a portion having a first large winning opening P1176 or the like, which will be described later, in which a game ball can win a prize. The upper attacker portion P1170 is located in the upper right portion of the game area P1120 (upper right of the opening region 1d). The upper attacker portion P1170 is provided with a plurality of wall portions erected forward from the game area P1120, a plurality of wall portions erected rearward from the cover P1171 described later, and the like, which will be described later. Road P1172) is formed. Details of the upper attacker portion P1170 will be described later.

The lower attacker portion P1180 shown in FIG. 108 is a portion having a second large winning opening P1300, which will be described later, a first starting opening P1350, an upper second starting opening P1250, a lower second starting opening P1360, etc. is there. The lower attacker portion P1180 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area P1120 (lower right side of the opening area 1d). In the lower attacker portion P1180, a flow path (flow path P1230) of a game ball described later is formed by a plurality of wall portions or the like erected rearward from the cover P1220 described later. Details of the lower attacker portion P1180 will be described later.

The out port P1190 shown in FIG. 108 is a portion where game balls that have not won (winned) into any of the winning openings or starting openings finally flow in. The out port P1190 is formed at the lower end portion in the left and right central portion of the game area P1120.

The upper movable effect accessory P2000 shown in FIG. 108 is an accessory that can be moved in the vertical direction. The upper movable effecting accessory P2000 is arranged behind (behind) the rotating accessory P3000, which will be described later. The operation of the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is controlled by, for example, the sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the accessory control circuit 307) shown in FIG. The details of the upper movable production accessory P2000 will be described later.

The rotating accessory P3000 shown in FIG. 108 is a rotating accessory that can be rotated and moved. The rotating accessory P3000 is arranged above the opening region 1d in front view. Further, the rotating accessory P3000 is arranged in front of the upper movable effect accessory P2000. The operation of the rotating accessory P3000 is controlled by, for example, the sub-control circuit 300 shown in FIG. The details of the rotating accessory P3000 will be described later.

Hereinafter, the details of the general winning opening unit P1160 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

The general winning opening unit P1160 includes a main body portion P1161, a reflector P1162, a left light emitting base P1163, and a right light emitting base P1164.

The main body portion P1161 is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from the front. The main body P1161 is made of a translucent material (which can transmit light). A sticker (not shown) for decorating the main body P1161 is attached to the front surface of the main body P1161. The main body portion P1161 includes a general winning opening P1161a.

The general prize opening P1161a is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls without performing a lottery when a game ball enters. The general winning opening P1161a is formed by denting the left and right central portions on the upper surface of the main body portion P1161.

The reflector P1162 is for guiding the light from the light emitting units P1163a and P1164a, which will be described later, to the front. The reflector P1162 is arranged behind the main body P1161. The reflector P1162 is made of a material that does not have translucency (does not transmit light). The reflector P1162 is provided so as to penetrate the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. The reflector P1162 includes a left light guide portion P1162a and a right light guide portion P1162b.

The left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b are formed in a substantially tubular shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The left light guide portion P1162a is arranged on the left side of the general winning opening P1161a in the front cross-sectional view. The right light guide portion P1162b is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening P1161a in the front cross-sectional view.

The left light emitting base P1163 and the right light emitting base P1164 are for emitting light behind the reflector P1162. The left light emitting base P1163 and the right light emitting base P1164 are provided with light emitting units P1163a and P1164a, respectively.

The light emitting portion P1163a is attached to the left light emitting base P1163 so as to be able to irradiate light to the front (main body portion P1161 side). The light emitting unit P1163a is arranged behind the left light guide unit P1162a of the reflector P1162. The light emitting unit P1163a is arranged inside the left light guide unit P1162a in the front cross-sectional view. The light emitting unit P1163a is composed of, for example, an LED or the like.

The light emitting portion P1164a is attached to the right light emitting base P1164 so as to be able to irradiate light to the front (main body portion P1161 side). The light emitting unit P1164a is arranged behind the right light guide unit P1162b of the reflector P1162. The light emitting unit P1164a is arranged inside the right light guide unit P1162b in a front cross-sectional view. The light emitting unit P1164a is composed of, for example, an LED or the like.

The general winning opening unit P1160 configured in this way irradiates light from the light emitting units P1163a and P1164a forward at a predetermined timing. The light passes through the left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b of the reflector P1162 and is incident on the main body portion P1161. The light travels forward in the main body P1161 and is emitted to the outside of the main body P1161. As a result, the main body P1161 can be made to emit light by the light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting units P1163a and P1164a is guided into the main body unit P1161 via the reflector P1162 which cannot transmit light. According to this, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting units P1163a and P1164a from being diffused before being guided into the main body unit P1161. In this way, the left and right light emitting portions P1163a and P1164a can easily make the main body portion P1161 emit light as intended.

Hereinafter, the details of the upper attacker portion P1170 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111.

The upper attacker portion P1170 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 includes a cover P1171, a flow path P1172, a detour entrance P1173, a detour exit P1174, a detour P1175, a first prize opening P1176, a shutter P1177, and the like.

The cover P1171 shown in FIG. 108 is a substantially plate-shaped member located on the front side of the upper attacker portion P1170. The cover P1171 has a plurality of wall portions erected rearward. The cover P1171 forms a flow path P1172, which will be described later, by means of a plurality of wall portions or the like erected forward from the game area P1120 (base plate P1111).

The flow path P1172 shown in FIG. 111 is the flow path of the game ball in the upper attacker portion P1170. The flow path P1172 is included in the game area P1120. The flow path P1172 is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball from the flow path inlet P1172a formed at the upper end portion of the upper attacker portion P1170 to the flow path outlet P1172b formed at the lower end portion via a predetermined path. To.

The detour entrance P1173 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole serving as an entrance for a game ball to the detour P1175, which will be described later. The detour entrance P1173 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour inlet P1173 is formed directly below the flow path inlet P1172a. A wall portion is formed around the detour entrance P1173 except for the upper side.

The detour exit P1174 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole serving as an exit for a game ball from the detour P1175, which will be described later. The detour exit P1174 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour exit P1174 is formed on the lower left side of the detour entrance P1173. Below the detour exit P1174, a plate-shaped wall portion with the plate surface oriented in the vertical direction is formed.

The detour circuit P1175 shown in FIG. 111 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The detour circuit P1175 is formed by a predetermined member or the like fixed to the back side of the base plate P1111. The detour circuit P1175 is formed in a tunnel shape through which game balls circulate on the back side of the game area P1120. The detour circuit P1175 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a posture of upper right and lower left. The right end of the detour circuit P1175 is connected to the detour entrance P1173. The left end of the detour circuit P1175 is connected to the detour exit P1174.

The first large winning opening P1176 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls win (win). The first large winning opening P1176 is formed in a substantially box shape in a front view with the upper side open by a plurality of wall portions and the like. The upper end of the first large winning opening P1176 is opened relatively large in the left-right direction.

Further, the first prize opening P1176 is formed directly below the detour exit P1174. Specifically, the upper left end of the first prize opening P1176 is located to the left of the detour exit P1174. The upper right end of the first prize opening P1176 is located to the right of the detour exit P1174. The first large winning opening count switch P1176a is arranged in the middle of the first large winning opening P1176 in the vertical direction. A collection port P1178 that penetrates the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the first large winning opening P1176 (below the first large winning opening count switch P1176a).

The shutter P1177 shown in FIG. 111 opens and closes the first large winning opening P1176. The shutter P1177 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. The shutter P1177 is arranged so as to close the opening at the upper end of the first winning opening P1176 so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left-right. The shutter P1177 is configured to be switchable between a state in which the shutter P1177 protrudes forward from the game area P1120 and a state in which the shutter P1177 retracts rearward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid (not shown). The shutter P1177 is in a state of protruding forward, and the first large winning opening P1176 is closed. Further, the shutter P1177 opens the first large winning opening P1176 in a state of being retracted rearward.

Hereinafter, the details of the lower attacker portion P1180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 112 to 122.

The lower attacker portion P1180 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 includes a base plate P1210, a cover P1220, a flow path P1230, a passage gate P1240, an upper second starting port P1250, an opening / closing unit P1260 (blade member P1261), and an upper detour entrance P1270. Upper detour exit P1280, upper detour P1290, second prize opening P1300, lower attacker unit P1310 (shutter P1311), lower detour entrance P1320, lower detour exit P1330, lower detour P1340, first starting port P1350 and The lower second starting port P1360 and the like are provided.

The base plate P1210 shown in FIGS. 112 to 117 is a plate-shaped member that serves as a base for the lower attacker portion P1180. The base plate P1210 is arranged with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The base plate P1210 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The base plate P1210 is arranged at the lower right portion of the transparent plate unit P1110. A first starting port P1350, which will be described later, is formed on the base plate P1210. Further, the base plate P1210 is formed with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Members such as a blade member P1261, a shutter P1311, and a passing gate switch P1241 described later are provided in a part of the plurality of holes. Further, (other) a part of the plurality of holes constitutes an upper detour entrance P1270 or the like, which will be described later.

The cover P1220 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 is a substantially plate-shaped member located on the front side of the lower attacker portion P1180. The cover P1220 is formed in a shape corresponding to the base plate P1210. As shown in FIG. 118, the cover P1220 has a plurality of wall portions erected rearward. The cover P1220 forms a flow path P1230, which will be described later, by the plurality of wall portions and the like.

The flow path P1230 shown in FIG. 113 is the flow path of the game ball in the lower attacker portion P1180. The flow path P1230 is included in the game area P1120. The flow path P1230 is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball from the flow path inlet P1231 formed at the upper end of the lower attacker portion P1180 toward the lower left side so as to pass through a predetermined path.

Further, the flow path P1230 is largely divided into two regions by the wall portion (wall portion P1232) of the cover P1220. The wall portion P1232 is formed so as to extend over the lower attacker portion P1180 in the vertical direction on the left side of the central portion in the left-right direction. That is, the flow path P1230 is divided into a right side region and a left side region with the wall portion P1232 in front view. The game ball is configured to be movable from the region on the right side of the flow path P1230 to the region on the left side via the lower detour circuit P1340 described later.

The passage gate P1240 shown in FIGS. 113, 118 and 119 is for giving an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery on condition that the game ball passes through. The passage gate P1240 is formed in a passage shape through which the game ball can pass by the wall portion of the cover P1220 or the like. As shown in FIG. 113, the passage gate P1240 is formed immediately below the flow path inlet P1231. A passage gate switch P1241 is arranged immediately below the passage gate P1240.

The upper second starting port P1250 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for giving an opportunity for a winning lottery on condition that the game ball wins (wins). The upper second starting port P1250 is formed in a substantially box shape in a front view with the upper side opened by a plurality of wall portions and the like. The upper end of the upper second starting port P1250 is opened relatively large in the left-right direction.

Further, the upper second starting port P1250 is formed below the passing gate P1240. The upper second starting port count switch P1251 is arranged in the middle of the upper second starting port P1250 in the vertical direction. At the lower end of the upper second starting port P1250 (below the upper second starting port count switch P1251), a recovery port P1252 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed.

The opening / closing unit P1260 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 has a blade member P1261 and is configured so that the blade member P1261 can be opened / closed by a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing unit P1260 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

The blade member P1261 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118 and 119 opens and closes the upper second starting port P1250. The blade member P1261 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. More specifically, the blade member P1261 is formed in an inclined shape that descends from the right side to the left side. The blade member P1261 is arranged so as to close the opening at the upper end of the upper second starting port P1250 so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left and right. The blade member P1261 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it protrudes forward from the game area P1120 and a state in which it retracts rearward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the opening / closing unit P1260. The blade member P1261 is in a state of protruding forward, and the upper second starting port P1250 is closed. Further, the blade member P1261 is retracted rearward, and the upper second starting port P1250 is opened.

The upper detour entrance P1270 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole serving as an entrance for a game ball to the upper detour circuit P1290, which will be described later. The upper detour entrance P1270 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 of the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the upper detour entrance P1270 is formed immediately above the right side portion of the blade member P1261.

The upper detour exit P1280 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole serving as an exit of a game ball from the upper detour circuit P1290, which will be described later. The upper detour exit P1280 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 of the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the upper detour exit P1280 is formed immediately above the left side portion of the blade member P1261.

The upper detour entrance P1270 and the upper detour exit P1280 are formed as one hole in the base plate P1210. Then, as shown in FIG. 113, the cover P1220 is divided into a right side and a left side in a front view by a wall portion or the like, and the portion divided on the right side is formed as an upper detour entrance P1270. Further, the portion partitioned on the left side is formed as the upper detour exit P1280.

The upper detour circuit P1290 shown in FIGS. 113 and 117 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour circuit P1290 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. The upper detour circuit P1290 is formed in the shape of a tunnel through which game balls circulate on the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour circuit P1290 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a posture of upper right and lower left. The right end of the upper detour circuit P1290 is connected to the upper detour entrance P1270. The left end of the upper detour circuit P1290 is connected to the upper detour exit P1280.

The second large winning opening P1300 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls win (win). The second large winning opening P1300 is formed in a substantially box shape in a front view with the upper side open by a plurality of wall portions and the like. The upper end of the second large winning opening P1300 is opened relatively large in the left-right direction.

Further, the second large winning opening P1300 is formed on the lower left of the upper second starting opening P1250. The second large winning opening P1300 is formed at a position separated from the upper second starting opening P1250. The second large winning opening count switch P1301 is arranged in the middle of the second large winning opening P1300 in the vertical direction. A collection port P1302 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the second large winning opening P1300 (below the second large winning opening count switch P1301).

The lower attacker unit P1310 shown in FIG. 117 has a shutter P1311 and is configured so that the shutter P1311 can be opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown). The lower attacker unit P1310 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

The shutter P1311 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118 and 119 opens and closes the second special winning opening P1300. The shutter P1311 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. The shutter P1311 is arranged so as to close the opening at the upper end of the second large winning opening P1300 so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left and right. The shutter P1311 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it protrudes forward from the game area P1120 and a state in which it retracts rearward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the lower attacker unit P1310. The shutter P1311 is in a state of protruding forward, and the second large winning opening P1300 is closed. Further, the shutter P1311 opens the second large winning opening P1300 in a state of being retracted rearward.

The lower detour entrance P1320 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole serving as an entrance for a game ball to the lower detour circuit P1340 described later. The lower detour entrance P1320 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower detour entrance P1320 is formed on the lower left side of the shutter P1311.

A wall portion P1232 is formed on the left side of the lower detour entrance P1320. That is, as described above, the passage gate P1240, the upper second starting port P1250, the opening / closing unit P1260 (blade member P1261), the upper detour entrance P1270, the upper detour exit P1280, the upper detour circuit P1290, the second major winning opening P1300, and the lower. The attacker unit P1310 (shutter P1311) and the lower detour entrance P1320 are formed in the region on the right side of the flow path P1230 partitioned by the wall portion P1232.

The lower detour exit P1330 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole serving as an exit of a game ball from the lower detour circuit P1340 described later. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed at the lower left of the base plate P1210. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed so that the vertical position is located below the lower detour entrance P1320.

The lower detour circuit P1340 shown in FIG. 113 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The lower detour circuit P1340 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. Details of the rear guide portion P1341 will be described later.

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIGS. 108 and 113 to 117 is for giving an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (wins). The first starting port P1350 is the lower left portion of the base plate P1210 and is formed above the lower detour exit P1330. The first starting port P1350 is formed in a substantially box shape with an upper opening. The rear side of the first starting port P1350 is connected to the notch formed in the base plate P1210. The first starting port P1350 is provided with a first starting port count switch (not shown).

The lower second starting port P1360 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for giving an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (wins). The lower second starting port P1360 is formed immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. The lower second starting port P1360 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side open. The rear side of the lower second starting port P1360 is connected to a hole formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower second starting port P1360 is provided with a lower second starting port count switch (not shown).

In this way, the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 are formed in the region on the left side of the flow path P1230 partitioned by the wall portion P1232. More specifically, the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 are formed at positions separated to the left from the wall portion P1232. The details of the positional relationship of the members near the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 will be described later.

Further, the lower detour circuit P1340 is formed on the back side of the game area P1120 so as to straddle the wall portion P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, to extend to the right side area and the left side area of the flow path P1230. Hereinafter, the details of the rear guide portion P1341 of the lower detour circuit P1340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122.

The rear guide portion P1341 shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is a member that guides the game ball from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour exit P1330 in the lower detour circuit P1340. The rear guide portion P1341 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210. The rear guide portion P1341 is formed in a longitudinal shape. The rear guide portion P1341 is arranged in a slightly inclined posture with the longitudinal direction facing the upper right and lower left in the front view. The rear guide portion P1341 is formed in a substantially box shape with the front side open. The upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 (lower side surface) of the rear guide portion P1341 is formed so that the game ball can roll. The rear guide portion P1341 includes a first inclined portion P1344, a second inclined portion P1345, a right side guide portion P1346, and a left side guide portion P1347.

The first inclined portion P1344 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 whose upper surface is inclined downward to the left. The first inclined portion P1344 is formed so as to extend from the right end portion to the vicinity of the left end portion of the bottom plate P1343.

The second inclined portion P1345 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 whose upper surface is inclined forward and downward. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed at the left end portion of the bottom plate P1343. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed on the left side of the first inclined portion P1344 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion P1344 in the left-right direction. A step is provided in the vertical direction at the connecting portion between the second inclined portion P1345 and the first inclined portion P1344. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed so that the height of the upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 is the lowest as compared with other portions. The front end portion of the second inclined portion P1345 is formed so as to project forward from the front end portion of the first inclined portion P1344.

The right side guide portion P1346 is a portion in the rear side guide portion P1341 for guiding the game ball toward the lower left. The right guide portion P1346 is formed in a substantially right-angled triangular shape in a plan view with the hypotenuse surface facing the left front. The right guide portion P1346 is formed at the right rear end portion of the first inclined portion P1344.

The left guide portion P1347 is a portion in the rear guide portion P1341 for guiding the game ball forward. The left guide portion P1347 is formed in a substantially right-angled triangular shape in a plan view with the hypotenuse surface facing forward to the right. The left guide portion P1347 is formed at the left end portion of the second inclined portion P1345.

In this way, the lower detour circuit P1340 is formed on the back side of the game area P1120 so as to straddle the wall portion P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, to extend to the right side area and the left side area of the flow path P1230.

In the following, the details of the positional relationship of the members near the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the following, for convenience, the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 may be referred to as "three ports".

As shown in FIG. 123, the three mouths are arranged so as to be continuous in the vertical direction with substantially no gap. Specifically, in the three ports, the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 are arranged in order from the upper side to the lower side. Above the three mouths, a stage P1150, more specifically, a left and right central portion (hereinafter referred to as "stage central portion P1151") recessed downward of the stage P1150 is arranged.

Further, the three mouths are arranged at positions separated to the left from the wall portion P1232 of the lower attacker portion P1180. Specifically, the three mouths are arranged on the left side of the wall portion P1232 with a width at least equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. A game area P1120 is formed between the three mouths and the wall portion P1232. Further, a lower detour circuit P1340 (rear side guide portion P1341) is arranged on the rear side of the game area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall portion P1232. Further, above the three mouths and the lower attacker portion P1180, a stage P1150, more specifically, a lower right portion of the stage P1150 (hereinafter referred to as "stage right portion P1152") is arranged. Will be done.

Further, the three mouths are arranged at positions separated to the right from the general winning mouth unit P1160. Specifically, the three mouths are arranged on the right side of the general winning mouth unit P1160 with a width at least equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. A game area P1120 is formed between the three mouths and the general winning mouth unit P1160. Further, above the three mouths and the lower attacker portion P1180, a stage P1150, more specifically, a lower left portion of the stage P1150 (hereinafter referred to as "stage left portion P1153") is arranged. Will be done.

Hereinafter, the main flow of the game ball in the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. The thick black line (solid line and dotted line) arrows shown in FIGS. 124 to 128 indicate an example of the flow of the game ball. The thick black dotted arrow shown in FIG. 124 shows an example of the flow of the game ball in the warp passage P1140. Further, the dotted black line arrows shown in FIGS. 125 to 128 show an example of the flow of the game ball in various detours (the flow of the game ball on the back side of the game area P1120).

As shown in FIG. 124, the game ball launched from the launching device 6 shown in FIG. 1 and the like is guided to the game area P1120 by the ball launch passage P1130. Then, depending on the momentum of the launched game ball, the ball flows in a region on the left side of the opening region 1d or a region on the right side of the opening region 1d. Although not shown for convenience, a large number of game nails are provided in the game area P1120. In this way, the game ball guided to the game area P1120 repeatedly collides with the game nail and bounces in various directions while falling down the game area P1120.

When the game ball falls in the game area P1120 on the left side of the opening area 1d (when a so-called left-handed hit is performed), some of the game balls enter the inside of the warp passage P1140, and the stage P1150 is provided by the warp passage P1140. You will be guided to. The game ball guided to the stage P1150 falls downward (lower game area P1120) from any of the left and right central portions, the left portion, and the right portion of the stage P1150, as will be described later.

Further, when the game ball falls in the game area P1120 on the right side of the opening area 1d (when a so-called right-handed hit is performed), the game ball is first guided to the upper attacker portion P1170.

As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball guided to the upper attacker portion P1170 flows into the inside of the upper attacker portion P1170 from the flow path inlet P1172a. Then, the game ball is guided from the detour entrance P1173 to the detour P1175, and rolls on the detour P1175 (that is, the back side of the game area P1120). Next, the game ball that has rolled the detour P1175 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the detour exit P1174, and rolls the shutter P1177. At this time, if the shutter P1177 is opened, the game ball wins the first prize opening P1176. Further, the game ball that has rolled the shutter P1177 falls downward and is discharged to the outside of the upper attacker portion P1170 from the flow path outlet P1172b. Then, the game ball discharged to the outside of the upper attacker portion P1170 is guided to the lower attacker portion P1180.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the game ball guided to the lower attacker portion P1180 flows into the inside of the lower attacker portion P1180 from the flow path inlet P1231. Then, the game ball falls inside the lower attacker portion P1180 and is distributed in two directions at the upper second starting port P1250 (see the thick black arrows R1a and R1b). Then, the game ball distributed to the left indicated by the thick black arrow R1a rolls the blade member P1261 and is guided from the upper detour entrance P1270 to the upper detour P1290 on the way to the upper detour P1290 (that is, the upper detour P1290 (that is,). , The back side of the game area P1120). Then, the game ball that has rolled the upper detour circuit P1290 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the upper detour circuit exit P1280, and rolls the blade member P1261. At this time, if the blade member P1261 is opened, the game ball enters the upper second starting port P1250.

Then, the game ball that has rolled the blade member P1261 falls and is distributed in two directions at the second large winning opening P1300 (see the thick black arrows R2a and R2b). Then, the game ball distributed to the left indicated by the thick black arrow R2a rolls the shutter P1311. At this time, if the shutter P1311 is opened, the game ball wins the second prize opening P1300. Then, the game ball that has rolled the shutter P1311 is guided from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour circuit P1340 (in the back direction of the game board P1100), and the rear guide portion P1341 (that is, the game area) of the lower detour circuit P1340. (Back side of P1120) is rolled. Then, the game ball that has rolled on the lower detour circuit P1340 is returned to the game area P1120 side (front direction of the game board P1100) again from the lower detour circuit exit P1330.

As described above, the lower second starting port P1360 is arranged immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, when the game ball is returned to the game area P1120 side again from the lower detour exit P1330, the game ball is easily moved to the lower second starting port P1360 as shown by the thick black arrow R3. Will be entered into.

At the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second starting port P1360, only the game balls that have flowed from the right game area P1120 (that is, the game balls that have flowed from the lower attacker portion P1180 via the lower detour P1340). Instead, the game ball flowing from the game area P1120 on the left side also falls. For example, a game ball that has rolled on stage P1150 falls.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128, the game ball that has fallen from the stage left portion P1153 of the stage P1150 has the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second as shown by the thick black arrow R4. It falls to the left of the starting port P1360. Further, as shown by the thick black arrow R5, the game ball that has fallen from the stage right portion P1152 of the stage P1150 is to the right of the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 (that is, 3). The area between one mouth and the wall part P1232) is dropped.

Further, the game ball that has fallen from the stage central portion P1151 of the stage P1150 falls to the first starting port P1350 arranged directly below as shown by the thick black arrow R6. Then, if the dropped game ball can pass through between the game nails (not shown), the first starting port P1350 will be awarded.

Further, even if the game ball has fallen from the central portion P1151 of the stage, for example, when it collides with a game nail (not shown), it is flipped to the left as shown by, for example, the thick black arrow R6b, and the three mouths (the third mouth) 1 The game area P1120 between the starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second starting port P1360) and the general winning port unit P1160 is dropped.

Further, even if the game ball has fallen from the central portion P1151 of the stage, when it collides with a game nail (not shown), it is flipped to the right as shown by, for example, the thick black arrow R6a, and the three mouths (first starting port) are described. The game area P1120 between P1350, the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second starting port P1360) and the wall portion P1232 is dropped.

In this way, in the game area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall portion P1232, although the game ball when hitting right flows from the right side to the left side, the game ball Rolls on the lower detour circuit P1340 on the back side of the game area P1120, so that it is possible to prevent a collision with a game ball (see thick black arrows R5 and R6a) falling from above. That is, since the areas where the game balls roll in the two directions (right direction and downward direction) can be overlapped in the front view, it is possible to save space in the rolling areas of the game balls, for example, a plurality of areas. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging game parts, such as forming a winning opening.
Further, since the game areas P1220 can be secured on the left and right sides of the lower detour exit P1330, the game balls discharged from the lower detour exit P1330 are not uniformly guided to the lower second start port P1360, but the lower second start. It is also possible to generate a lost ball that does not win a prize in the mouth P1360, and it is possible to improve the playability.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a large winning opening unit having a guide path for guiding a game ball launched on the right side of the gaming board to a large winning opening has been disclosed. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-35176.

However, since it is necessary to secure a wide winning area, the large winning opening is often formed to be relatively large, and even if another winning opening is to be formed in the vicinity of the large winning opening, it is difficult to secure an arrangement space. There was a point.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily securing a space for arranging winning openings.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is
A gaming machine provided with a gaming board P1100 having a gaming area P1120 on which a gaming ball can roll.
The game board P1100
A first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) provided in the game area P1120 and
A first ball passage (for example, a flow path P1172 of the upper attacker portion P1170 and a flow path P1230 of the lower attacker portion P1180) provided on the front side of the game board and on which the game ball can roll.
An inflow port (lower detour entrance P1320) provided on the downstream side of the first ball passage and guiding the game ball toward the back surface of the game board P1100, and
A second ball passage (lower detour circuit P1340) on which the game ball flowing in from the inflow port (lower detour entrance P1320) can roll.
A discharge port (lower detour exit P1330) provided on the downstream side of the second ball passage (lower detour circuit P1340) and guiding the game ball toward the front surface of the game board P1100.
A second winning opening (lower second starting port P1360) provided in the game area P1120 and provided below the discharge port (lower detour exit P1330) is provided.
The second winning opening (lower second starting port P1360) is provided below the first winning opening (first starting port P1350).
On the left and right sides of the first winning opening (first starting port P1350), a gaming area P1120 is formed in which a game ball that has not flowed into the first winning opening (first starting port P1350) can roll downward. Has been
Of the game areas P1120 formed on the left and right of the first winning opening (first starting port P1350), at least one of the game areas is the front side of the game board of the second ball passage (lower detour circuit P1340). It is characterized in that it is formed in.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the winning openings.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the "first winning opening" is set to the first starting port P1350, and the "second winning opening" is set to the lower second starting port P1360, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, the configuration of the rear guide portion P1341 is not limited to that according to the present embodiment. For example, the rear guide portion P1341 is expected to have various configurations such as having a shape that is curved or bent when viewed from the front.

Hereinafter, the upper movable effect effect P2000 and the upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 148.

[Upper movable production character P2000]
The upper movable production accessory P2000 produces an effect by moving. Specifically, the upper movable effectable object P2000 performs an effect using the first effect unit P2110 and the second effect unit P2120, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, the upper movable effecting object P2000 rotates around the axis extending in the left-right direction to perform the effect, but in the following, the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113 (first effect surface). The explanation will be given based on the state in which the is facing forward.

The upper movable effect object P2000 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The upper movable effect object P2000 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. The upper movable effectable object P2000 mainly includes a first effect unit P2110, a second effect unit P2120, an elevating part P2140, and a drive mechanism P2200.

[First production department P2110]
The first effect unit P2110 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, 135 and the like is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. Specifically, the first production unit P2110 is decorated to imitate the eyes and eyebrows on both the left and right sides of a person. The first effect unit P2110 is provided on the front surface of the upper movable effect object P2000. The first production unit P2110 mainly includes an eyebrow movable body P2111, a movable body support arm P2112, a pupil decoration body P2113, an accessory lighting substrate P2114, a rear cover P2115, an outer lens P2116, a diffusion sheet P2117, a light guide lens P2118, and an inner lens. It includes P2119.

The eyebrow movable body P2111 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is a movable portion when performing an effect. The movable eyebrow body P2111 is formed in a shape imitating a human eyebrow. A pair of left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided on the front portion of the first effect unit P2110. The left eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the right. The right eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the left. The left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided so as to be symmetrical with each other. An eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided at the rear portion of the eyebrow movable body P2111 (see FIG. 131). The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided so as to extend rearward from the eyebrow movable body P2111 with the axis directed in the front-rear direction.

The movable body support arm P2112 shown in FIG. 131 supports the eyebrow movable body P2111. The movable body support arm P2112 is formed in an arm shape. A pair of left and right movable body support arms P2112 are provided behind the eyebrow movable body P2111. The movable body support arm P2112 on the left side is provided so as to descend to the right in the longitudinal direction. The movable body support arm P2112 on the right side is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the left. The left and right movable body support arms P2112 are provided so as to be symmetrical with each other. Hereinafter, the movable body support arm P2112 on the left side will be described, and the description of the movable body support arm P2112 on the right side will be omitted.

An insertion hole (not shown) is formed on the front surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The insertion hole is provided in the vicinity of the left end portion of the movable body support arm P2112. The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a of the eyebrow movable body P2111 is inserted into the insertion hole.

Further, an arm shaft portion P2112a is formed on the rear surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is provided near the right end portion of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is provided so as to extend rearward from the rear surface of the movable body support arm P2112 with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The arm shaft portion P2112a is supported by a drive mechanism P2200 described later.

In this way, the movable body support arm P2112 rotatably supports the eyebrow movable body P2111 around the eyebrow shaft portion P2111a.

The pupil decoration body P2113 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is a portion constituting the front surface of the first effect unit P2110. The pupil decoration body P2113 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The pupil decoration body P2113 is provided behind the eyebrow movable body P2111 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. A pupil through hole P2113a is formed in the pupil decoration body P2113 (see FIG. 131). The pupil penetration hole P2113a is formed in a shape imitating a human pupil in front view. A pair of left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed, and the left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed so as to be symmetrical with each other. The surface (front surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 constitutes the "first effect surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory illumination substrate P2114 shown in FIG. 131 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination substrate P2114 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board P2114 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination board P2114. By emitting the LED, it is possible to irradiate the front of the accessory illumination substrate P2114 with light.

The rear cover P2115 shown in FIG. 131 is a portion constituting the rear portion of the first effect unit P2110. The rear cover P2115 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The rear cover P2115 is provided behind the accessory illumination board P2114 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right, and supports the accessory illumination board P2114.

An outer lens P2116, a diffusion sheet P2117, a light guide lens P2118, and an inner lens P2119 are provided in order from the front between the pupil decoration body P2113 and the accessory illumination substrate P2114 (see FIG. 131). A pair of left and right outer lenses P2116 and the like are provided at positions corresponding to the pupil through holes P2113a of the pupil decoration body P2113. By providing these outer lenses P2116 and the like, it is possible to illuminate the portion where the pupil through hole P2113a is formed as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory illumination substrate P2114.

[Second production section P2120]
The second effect unit P2120 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. Specifically, the second production unit P2120 is decorated to imitate the pupils and eyebrows on one side of the left and right sides of a person. The second effect unit P2120 is provided on the lower surface of the upper movable effect object P2000. The second effect unit P2120 mainly includes an eyebrow decoration body P2121, an accessory illumination substrate P2122, a light guide lens P2123, an upper cover P2124, and a pupil movable body unit P2130.

The eyebrow decoration body P2121 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is a portion constituting the lower surface of the second effect unit P2120. The eyebrow decoration body P2121 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The eyebrow decoration body P2121 is provided at the lower part of the second effect portion P2120 with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The eyebrow decoration body P2121 is formed in a shape that imitates the eyebrows on one side of a person on the left and right sides in bottom view. The surface (lower surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 constitutes the "second effect surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory illumination substrate P2122 shown in FIG. 133 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination substrate P2122 is provided with its plate surface facing up and down and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. On the lower surface of the accessory illumination board P2122, a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination substrate P2122. By emitting the LED, it is possible to irradiate the eyebrow decoration body P2121 side with light.

A light guide lens P2123 is provided between the eyebrow decoration body P2121 and the accessory illumination substrate P2122 (see FIG. 133). By providing the light guide lens P2123, the eyebrow decoration body P2121 can be illuminated as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory illumination substrate P2122.

The upper cover P2124 shown in FIG. 133 is a portion constituting the upper part of the second effect unit P2120. The upper cover P2124 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The upper cover P2124 is provided above the accessory illumination board P2122 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right, and supports the accessory illumination board P2122.

The pupil movable body unit P2130 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is a movable portion when performing an effect. A pair of left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are provided above the upper cover P2124. The pupil movable body unit P2130 includes a pupil movable body P2131, an illumination substrate P2132, and a light guide lens P2133. The left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical with each other. Therefore, in the following, the left pupil movable body unit P2130 will be described, and the right pupil movable body unit P2130 will be omitted.

The pupil movable body P2131 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is formed in a shape that imitates a part (half) of the pupil on one side of a person on the left and right sides in bottom view. The pupil movable body P2131 is provided on the lowermost side of the pupil movable body unit P2130.

The illuminated substrate P2132 shown in FIG. 134 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The illumination substrate P2132 is provided above the pupil movable body P2131 with its plate surface facing up and down. On the lower surface of the illuminated substrate P2132, a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided over substantially the entire left and right sides of the illuminated substrate P2132. By emitting the LED, it is possible to irradiate the lower part of the illumination substrate P2132 with light.

A light guide lens P2133 is provided between the pupil movable body P2131 and the illumination substrate P2132 (see FIG. 134). By providing the light guide lens P2133, the pupil movable body P2131 can be illuminated as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the illumination substrate P2132.

The pupil movable body P2131, the illumination substrate P2132, and the light guide lens P2133 are fixed to each other and unitized. The left pupil cover P2231, which will be described later, is also fixed to the left pupil movable body unit P2130 (see FIG. 134). Further, the right pupil cover P2322, which will be described later, is also fixed to the right pupil movable body unit P2130 (see FIG. 134).

[Elevating part P2140]
The lifted portion P2140 shown in FIGS. 130, 132, and 135 is a portion that is lifted and lowered by the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300, which will be described later. The elevating portion P2140 is provided so as to be interposed between the first effect unit P2110 and the second effect unit P2120 and the upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 described later. The lifted portion P2140 mainly includes a base member P2141, a left mounting shaft member P2142, a right mounting shaft member P2143, a left mounting guide P2144, a right mounting guide P2145, a left carriage P2146, and a right carriage P2147.

The base member P2141 shown in FIGS. 130 and 135 and the like constitutes the left and right central portions of the elevating portion P2140. The base member P2141 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction behind the first effect portion P2110 and the second effect portion P2120 so that both the left and right ends thereof bend forward. The left-right width of the base member P2141 is formed to be substantially the same as that of the first effect unit P2110 and the second effect unit P2120.

The left mounting shaft member P2142 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 mounts the left rotating shaft (insertion member P2213 described later) of the upper movable effecting accessory P2000. The left mounting shaft member P2142 is fixed to the left end portion of the base member P2141.

The right mounting shaft member P2143 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 attaches a rotating shaft (rotating shaft P2143a to be described later) on the right side of the upper movable effecting accessory P2000. The right mounting shaft member P2143 is fixed to the right end portion of the base member P2141. The right mounting shaft member P2143 is provided with a rotating shaft P2143a. The rotating shaft P2143a is provided so as to extend to the left from the right mounting shaft member P2143 with the axis directed to the left and right. The rotation shaft P2143a is inserted into a through hole provided at the right end of the base member P2141.

The left mounting guide P2144 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is a member for mounting the left carriage P2146, which will be described later, to the left mounting shaft member P2142. The left mounting guide P2144 is fixed to the left side of the left mounting shaft member P2142. A shaft hole P2144a and an elongated hole P2144b are formed in the left mounting guide P2144.

The shaft hole P2144a shown in FIG. 136 is formed so as to penetrate the vicinity of the upper end portion of the left mounting guide P2144 in the front-rear direction.

The elongated hole P2144b shown in FIG. 136 is provided below the shaft hole P2144a with the stretching direction oriented substantially left and right. The elongated hole P2144b is formed in an arc shape centered on the first pin P2146a, which will be described later, in front view.

The right mounting guide P2145 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 is a member for mounting the right carriage P2147, which will be described later, to the right mounting shaft member P2143. The right mounting guide P2145 is fixed to the right side of the right mounting shaft member P2143.

The left carriage P2146 shown in FIGS. 129, 130 and 135 is a portion attached to the upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 (left guide portion P2310) described later. The left carriage P2146 is fixed to the left mounting guide P2144. The left carriage P2146 is formed so as to be movable up and down along the left guide portion P2310. The left carriage P2146 is provided with a first pin P2146a and a second pin P2146b.

Both the first pin P2146a and the second pin P2146b are provided so as to extend forward from the left carriage P2146. The first pin P2146a is provided above the second pin P2146b. The first pin P2146a is inserted through the shaft hole P2144a, and the second pin P2146b is inserted through the elongated hole P2144b (see FIG. 136).

The right carriage P2147 shown in FIGS. 129, 130 and 135 is a portion attached to the upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 (right guide portion P2320) described later. The right carriage P2147 is fixed to the right mounting guide P2145. The right carriage P2147 is formed so as to be movable up and down along the right guide portion P2320. The right carriage P2147 is provided with a pressing member P2147a.

The pressing member P2147a shown in FIG. 135 regulates the forward movement of the right mounting guide P2145. The pressing member P2147a is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view. More specifically, the pressing member P2147a is composed of a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending to the left from the lower end of the portion. The pressing member P2147a is provided in front of the right mounting guide P2145.

[Drive mechanism P2200]
The drive mechanism P2200 drives the first effect unit P2110 and the second effect unit P2120. The drive mechanism P2200 includes an accessory rotation drive unit P2210, an eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220, and a pupil rotation drive unit P2230.

[Accessory rotation drive unit P2210]
The accessory rotation drive unit P2210 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 rotates and drives the upper movable effect accessory P2000. The accessory rotation drive unit P2210 mainly includes a left shaft hole member P2211, a rotation bush P2212, an insertion member P2213, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, a rotation drive motor P2216, and a right shaft hole member P2217.

The left shaft hole member P2211 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 includes a plate-shaped portion P2211a with the plate surface oriented in the left-right direction, so that the plate-shaped portion P2211a is located to the right of the left mounting shaft member P2142. It is provided (see FIG. 140). The left shaft hole member P2211 is placed on the left end of the accessory illumination substrate P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow decoration body P2121. A shaft hole P2211b and a guide P2211c are formed in the left shaft hole member P2211.

The shaft hole P2211b shown in FIG. 140 is formed so as to penetrate the plate-shaped portion P2211a. Further, a guide P2211c is formed on the surface of the plate-shaped portion P2211a facing to the left. The guide P2211c is formed so as to project to the left from the plate-shaped portion P2211a. The guide P2211c is formed in an arc shape concentric with the shaft hole P2211b in the left side view. The guide P2211c is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the left mounting shaft member P2142 in the rear upper part of the shaft hole P2211b in the left side view.

The rotary bush P2212 shown in FIG. 140 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotary bush P2212 is provided in the shaft hole P2211b so as to be rotatable around the axis with the axis directed to the left and right. A protrusion (not shown) is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating bush P2212. The rotary bush P2212 is provided so that its axis coincides with the axis of the rotary shaft P2143a.

The insertion member P2213 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 is formed in a substantially columnar shape, and is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the rotating bush P2212 with its axis directed in the left-right direction. A groove P2213a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the insertion member P2213. The protrusion (not shown) of the rotary bush P2212 is engaged with the groove P2213a. The left end of the insertion member P2213 is fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142.

The transmission gear P2214 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 is provided on the right side of the insertion member P2213 with the axis directed in the left-right direction, and is fixed to the insertion member P2213. The transmission gear P2214 is provided so that its axis coincides with the rotation shaft P2143a.

The motor gear P2215 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits a driving force to the transmission gear P2214. The motor gear P2215 is provided above the rear of the transmission gear P2214 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The motor gear P2215 is provided so as to mesh with the transmission gear P2214.

The rotary drive motor P2216 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 rotates the motor gear P2215. The rotary drive motor P2216 is provided on the right side of the motor gear P2215 with the output shaft P2216a facing left. A motor gear P2215 is fixed to the left end of the output shaft P2216a. The rotary drive motor P2216 is supported by a motor bracket (not shown). The motor bracket is placed on the accessory illumination board P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow decoration body P2121.

The right shaft hole member P2217 shown in FIG. 138 is provided so as to be located to the left of the right mounting shaft member P2143. The right shaft hole member P2217 is placed on the right end of the accessory illumination substrate P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow decoration body P2121. A shaft hole (not shown) is formed in the right shaft hole member P2217, and the rotation shaft P2143a of the right mounting shaft member P2143 is inserted into the shaft hole.

By configuring the accessory rotation drive unit P2210 in this way, the upper movable effect accessory P2000 can be rotated around the rotation shaft P2143a. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIGS. 139 and 141.

First, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven. When the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, the motor gear P2215 rotates. Here, the transmission gear P2214 is fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142 via the insertion member P2213. Therefore, when the motor gear P2215 that meshes with the transmission gear P2214 rotates, the rotation drive motor P2216 and the upper movable effecting object P2000 (parts other than the insertion member P2213 and the elevating part P2140) are moved to the rotation shaft P2143a and the rotation bush P2212. Rotate around the axis.

[Eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220]
The eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 moves the eyebrow movable body P2111. The eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 mainly includes a movable rack P2221, an idle gear P2222, a first bevel gear P2223, a second bevel gear P2224, a bevel gear shaft P2225, a shaft gear P2226, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, and a rotary drive motor P2216. The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 belong to the accessory rotation drive unit P2210 as described above, but also belong to the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220.

The movable rack P2221 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 is provided behind the pupil decoration body P2113 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 (see FIG. 131) so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable rack P2221 is formed with a long hole P2221a, a guide hole P2221b, a gear P2221c, and an engaging portion P2221d.

The elongated holes P2221a shown in FIG. 142 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the movable rack P2221 with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The protrusion P2115a of the rear cover P2115 is inserted into the elongated hole P2221a. As a result, the movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

The guide hole P2221b shown in FIG. 142 guides the movable body support arm P2112. The guide hole P2221b is formed so as to extend to the left in front view, then to the upper left, and further to the left. A pair of left and right guide holes P2221b is formed. A movable body support arm P2112 is inserted through the guide hole P2221b.

The gear P2221c shown in FIG. 142 is formed at the upper end of the movable rack P2221 on the left side of the guide hole P2221b.

The engaging portion P2221d shown in FIG. 139 is a portion that engages with the movable rack P2234 described later. The engaging portion P2221d is formed so as to project rearward from the left and right halfway portions of the movable rack P2221.

The idle gear P2222 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits a driving force to the gear P2221c. The idle gear P2222 is provided so as to mesh with the gear P2221c with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

The first bevel gear P2223 shown in FIGS. 139, 142 and 143 transmits a driving force to the idle gear P2222. The first bevel gear P2223 is provided on the upper left side of the idle gear P2222 with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The first bevel gear P2223 is provided so as to mesh with the idle gear P2222.

The second bevel gear P2224 shown in FIGS. 139 and 142 transmits a driving force to the first bevel gear P2223. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided behind the first bevel gear P2223 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided so as to mesh with the first bevel gear P2223.

The bevel gear shaft P2225 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits a driving force to the second bevel gear P2224. The bevel gear shaft P2225 is provided with the stretching direction directed to the left-right direction. The right end of the bevel gear shaft P2225 is fixed to the second bevel gear P2224.

The shaft gear P2226 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits a driving force to the bevel gear shaft P2225 (second bevel gear P2224). The shaft gear P2226 is fixed to the left end of the bevel gear shaft P2225 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The shaft gear P2226 is provided above the transmission gear P2214 so as to mesh with the transmission gear P2214.

Since the transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

By configuring the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 in this way, the eyebrow movable body P2111 can be rotated. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIGS. 139, 141 and 142.

First, when the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable effect object P2000 (parts other than the insertion member P2213 and the elevating portion P2140) rotates around the axes of the rotary shaft P2143a and the rotary bush P2212. To do. Then, the shaft gear P2226 moves along the outer circumference of the transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. As a result, the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224 also rotate. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 that meshes with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the idle gear P2222 that meshes with the first bevel gear P2223 also rotates. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 that meshes with the idle gear P2222 moves in the left-right direction. As a result, the movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 are guided by the guide hole P2221b and rotate around the eyebrow shaft portion P2111a. In this way, the eyebrow movable body P2111 also rotates at the same time as the rotation of the upper movable effect object P2000 (the portion other than the elevating portion P2140 and the like).

[Eye rotation drive unit P2230]
The pupil rotation drive unit P2230 shown in FIGS. 134, 139 and 143 moves the pupil movable body unit P2130. The pupil rotation drive unit P2230 mainly includes a left pupil cover P2231, a right pupil cover P2232, a movable gear P2233, a movable rack P2234, a movable rack P2221, an idle gear P2222, a first bevel gear P2223, a second bevel gear P2224, a bevel gear shaft P2225, and a shaft gear. It includes P2226, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, and a rotary drive motor P2216. The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 belong to the accessory rotation drive unit P2210 and the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 as described above, and the movable rack P2221, the idle gear P2222, the first bevel gear P2223, and the first The two bevel gears P2224, the bevel gear shaft P2225, and the shaft gear P2226 belong to the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220, but also belong to the pupil rotation drive unit P2230.

The left pupil cover P2231 shown in FIGS. 134, 139 and 143 covers the left pupil movable body unit P2130 from above. A left transmission gear P2231a is formed on the left pupil cover P2231.

The left transmission gear P2231a is provided on the right rear portion of the left pupil cover P2231 with the axis directed in the vertical direction.

The right pupil cover P2232 covers the right pupil movable body unit P2130 from above. The first right transmission gear P2322a and the second right transmission gear P2232b are formed on the right pupil cover P2232.

The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided on the left rear portion of the right pupil cover P2232 with the axis directed in the vertical direction. The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided so as to mesh with the left transmission gear P2231a.

The second right transmission gear P2232b is provided above the first right transmission gear P2232a with the axis directed in the vertical direction. The second right transmission gear P2232b is integrated with the first right transmission gear P2232a.

The movable gear P2233 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 is provided in front of the second right transmission gear P2232b with the axis directed in the vertical direction. The movable gear P2233 is provided so as to mesh with the second right transmission gear P2232b.

The movable rack P2234 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 transmits a driving force to the movable gear P2233. The movable rack P2234 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The movable rack P2234 is provided above the movable gear P2233 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. A protruding portion of the movable gear P2233 is inserted into the elongated hole formed in the movable rack P2234, and engages with the movable gear P2233 at the protruding portion. The movable rack P2234 engages with the engaging portion P2221d of the movable rack P2221 at its front portion.

Since the transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

By configuring the pupil rotation drive unit P2230 in this way, the pupil movable body unit P2130 can be rotated. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIGS. 139 and 143.

First, when the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable effect object P2000 (parts other than the insertion member P2213 and the elevating portion P2140) rotates around the axes of the rotary shaft P2143a and the rotary bush P2212. To do. Then, the shaft gear P2226 moves along the outer circumference of the transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. As a result, the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224 also rotate. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 that meshes with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the idle gear P2222 that meshes with the first bevel gear P2223 also rotates. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 that meshes with the idle gear P2222 moves in the left-right direction. Then, the movable rack P2234 that engages with the movable rack P2221 also moves in the left-right direction, and the movable gear P2233 rotates. Then, the second right transmission gear P2232b and the first right transmission gear P2232a rotate, and the left transmission gear P2231a that meshes with the first right transmission gear P2232a also rotates. As a result, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates. In this way, the pupil movable body unit P2130 also rotates at the same time as the rotation of the upper movable effect object P2000 (the portion other than the elevating part P2140 and the like) and the eyebrow movable body P2111.

[Upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300]
The upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 shown in FIGS. 129 and 144 to 148 elevates and drives the upper movable effect accessory P2000 and the lower movable effect accessory (not shown). The upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 mainly includes a left side guide portion P2310, a right side guide portion P2320, a left side drive mechanism P2330, and a right side drive mechanism P2340.

The left guide portion P2310 shown in FIG. 144 guides the upper movable effecting accessory P2000 and the lower movable effecting accessory (not shown) up and down. The left guide portion P2310 is provided on the game board P1100 with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. On the right side surface of the left side guide portion P2310, a left side elevating shaft P2311 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion to the upper end portion is formed. The left elevating shaft P2311 is inserted inside the left carriage P2146 to guide the left carriage P2146 (and thus the upper movable effect P2000) up and down.

The right side guide portion P2320 shown in FIG. 147 guides the upper movable effecting accessory P2000 and the lower movable effecting accessory (not shown) up and down. The right side guide portion P2320 is provided on the game board P1100 with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. On the left side surface of the right side guide portion P2320, a right side elevating shaft P2321 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion to the upper end portion is formed. The right elevating shaft P2321 is inserted inside the right carriage P2147 to guide the right carriage P2147 (and thus the upper movable effect P2000) up and down.

The left side drive mechanism P2330 shown in FIGS. 144 to 146 drives the upper movable effect object P2000 up and down. The left drive mechanism P2330 mainly includes an upper pulley P2331, a lower pulley P2332, a belt P2333, a transmission gear P2334, and an elevating drive motor P2335.

The upper pulley P2331 shown in FIG. 145 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley P2331 is rotatably supported near the upper end of the right side of the left guide portion P2310.

The lower pulley P2332 shown in FIG. 146 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley P2332 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the right side of the left guide portion P2310 (below the upper pulley P2331). A gear P2332a is formed on the lower pulley P2332.

The belt P2333 shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 supports the upper movable effecting object P2000. The belt P2333 is wound around the upper pulley P2331 and the lower pulley P2332.

The transmission gear P2334 shown in FIG. 146 transmits a driving force to the lower pulley P2332. The transmission gear P2334 is arranged so as to mesh with the gear P2332a formed on the lower pulley P2332.

The elevating drive motor P2335 shown in FIG. 146 is a drive source for elevating and lowering the upper movable effect object P2000. The elevating drive motor P2335 is provided near the lower end of the right side of the left guide portion P2310. The driving force from the output shaft (not shown) of the elevating drive motor P2335 is transmitted to the transmission gear P2334. When the transmission gear P2334 is rotated by the driving force of the elevating drive motor P2335, the lower pulley P2332 rotates with the rotation of the transmission gear P2334. As a result, the belt P2333 rotates between the upper pulley P2331 and the lower pulley P2332.

The right-side drive mechanism P2340 shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 drives the upper movable effect object P2000 up and down. The right side drive mechanism P2340 mainly includes an upper pulley (not shown), a lower pulley P2342, a belt P2343, a transmission gear P2344, and an elevating drive motor P2345. Since the right side drive mechanism P2340 is configured to be substantially the same as the left side drive mechanism P2330 (substantially symmetrical), the configuration will be briefly described below.

The upper pulley (not shown) and the lower pulley P2342 are provided on the left surface of the right guide portion P2320. A belt P2343 is wound around the upper pulley (not shown) and the lower pulley P2342. The driving force of the elevating drive motor P2345 is transmitted to the lower pulley P2342 via the transmission gear P2344. The belt P2343 is rotated by the driving force of the elevating drive motor P2345.

By configuring the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 in this way, the upper movable effect accessory P2000 can be raised and lowered and tilted. Specifically, when the belt P2333 and the belt P2343 rotate, the left carriage P2146 fixed to the belt P2333 and the right carriage P2147 fixed to the belt P2343 move up and down, and eventually the upper movable effecting object P2000 is moved. It can be raised and lowered and tilted.

[Operation of the upper movable production character P2000 during production]
Hereinafter, the operation of the upper movable production accessory P2000 when performing the production will be described.

The upper movable effecting accessory P2000 is located behind the rotating accessory P3000 in the state (initial position) before the effect is performed, and is not visible to the player (see FIG. 108).

When performing the effect, first, the elevating drive motor P2335 of the left side drive mechanism P2330 is driven to rotate the belt P2333 and lower the left carriage P2146. Similarly, the elevating drive motor P2345 of the right side drive mechanism P2340 is driven to rotate the belt P2343 and lower the right carriage P2147.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 149, the upper movable effect effect P2000 is lowered to a position visible to the player. As a result, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 moves to an effect position that is easily visible to the player. At this time, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 projects outward (upward) from the end portion of the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 in the front view.

Next, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven to rotate the upper movable effect object P2000 (a portion other than the elevating portion P2140 or the like) counterclockwise when viewed from the left side (see FIG. 139 or the like).

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 150, the eyebrow decoration body P2121 of the upper movable effect effect P2000 is directed to the front (front). As a result, the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 moves to an effect position that is easily visible to the player. At this time, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is directed upward, that is, moves to a standby position that is difficult for the player to see.

At this time, by driving the rotary drive motor P2216, the movable rack P2221 moves and the movable gear P2233 rotates. As a result, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates (see FIG. 143 and the like).

Then, as shown in FIG. 150, the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 (pupil movable body P2131) each project from the inside to the outside (downward) of the end portion of the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121. .. As a result, the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 form a shape that imitates the left and right pupils in the front view.

By rotating the upper movable effect P2000 in this way, the effect surface visually recognized by the player is from the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113 (first effect surface) to the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (second effect surface). ) Is changed. Further, the pupil movable body unit P2130 moves (rotates) so as to be visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, when the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven to move the movable rack P2221, the movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 rotate (with respect to the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113). (Move in parallel) (see FIG. 142 and the like).

Then, as shown in FIG. 151, the left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 move so as to fit inside the outer peripheral end portion of the pupil decoration body P2113 in a plan view.

In this way, when the upper movable production accessory P2000 rotates, the eyebrow movable body P2111 of the first production unit P2110 rotates and retracts inward at the same time as the rotation, so that the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable production accessory P2000. It is possible to prevent the movable eyebrow body P2111 from hitting the eyebrow.

Further, by driving the rotary drive motor P2216, the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 can be visually recognized by the player on the upper movable effect object P2000 (the part other than the elevating part P2140 and the like). The eyebrow movable body unit P2130 can be moved so as to protrude downward from the eyebrow decorative body P2121, and the eyebrow movable body P2111 can be moved so as to fit inside the pupil decorative body P2113. That is, various movements can be expressed by one drive source, and various effects can be performed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the upper movable effect effect P2000 is tilted. Specifically, the elevating drive motor P2345 is driven so that the right carriage P2147 is raised, and the elevating drive motor P2335 is driven so that the left carriage P2146 is lowered. Then, the upper movable effect object P2000 (a part other than the elevating part P2140 and the like) rotates counterclockwise in the front view around the first pin P2146a (see FIG. 136). This rotation range is regulated by the second pin P2146b and the elongated hole P2144b, and the upper movable effecting object P2000 (a portion other than the elevating portion P2140 and the like) is tilted to a predetermined angle. When tilting the upper movable effect object P2000, it is not necessary to drive only the elevating drive motor P2345 so that the right carriage P2147 rises, and not to drive the elevating drive motor P2335.

Here, the light guide plate P1112 has a light emitting region P1112a capable of reflecting light forward by partial surface treatment. The light emitting region P1112a is provided around the pupil movable body unit P2130 (at least a part around the eyebrow decoration body P2121). The light emitting region P1112a is formed in a shape that imitates the pupils and eyebrows on one side of the left and right sides in front view (see FIG. 153). In a state where the upper movable effect object P2000 is tilted, the light is most strongly reflected forward in the light emitting region P1112a by irradiating the light guide plate P1112 in front of the illuminated substrate P2132 with light. It is possible to perform an interesting production that reminds us of human eyes and eyebrows.

Further, as the upper movable effect object P2000 is tilted, the angle of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 in the longitudinal direction is such that the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is directed forward (see FIG. 149). The angle in the longitudinal direction of the movable eyebrow body P2111 is substantially the same. As a result, the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113 (first effect surface) is visible to the player (first aspect), and the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (second effect surface) is visible to the player. The relevance to the possible state (second aspect) can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, when the upper movable effect effect P2000 is tilted to the upper right, the right mounting guide P2145 or the like provided on the right side of the upper movable effect P2000 is pulled out to the left. Become. At this time, since the pressing member P2147a is formed so as to extend to the left from the lower end thereof, even if the right mounting guide P2145 is pulled out to the left, the right mounting guide P2145 is moved forward by the portion extending to the left. Can be pressed from. Therefore, the forward movement of the right mounting guide P2145 can be restricted.

At the end of the production, the upper movable production accessory P2000 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 108) by performing an operation opposite to the operation described so far. At that time, when the upper movable production object P2000 is rotated so that the surface (second production surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 faces downward (moves to a standby position that is difficult for the player to see), the left and right pupil movable bodies The unit P2130 moves on the back surface side of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (second effect surface) so as to fit inside the outer peripheral end portion of the eyebrow decoration body P2121.

In this way, when the upper movable effect object P2000 rotates, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates and retracts inward at the same time as the rotation, so that the pupil movable body unit is attached to the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable effect object P2000. It is possible to prevent P2130 from hitting.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. It is a gaming machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device).
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and an effect position that is easy for the player to see.
The eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first effect surface and
An effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided.
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When the first effect surface is moved and controlled from the standby position to the effect position, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 that is housed inside the end of the first effect surface at the standby position is said. The movement is controlled so as to project from the inside to the outside of the end of the first effect surface.
When the first effect surface is moved and controlled from the effect position to the standby position, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 protruding outward from the end of the first effect surface at the effect position is said. The movement is controlled so that it fits inside the end of the first effect surface.

According to such a configuration, the fun of the production content can be improved. Further, when the effect surface is moved and controlled to the standby position, it is possible to prevent interference with other members.

Specifically, when the upper movable effect P2000 rotates from a state in which the first effect surface is visible to a state in which the second effect surface is visible, the first effect unit P2110 simultaneously rotates. Since the eyebrow movable body P2111 rotates and fits inside the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113, it is possible to prevent the eyebrow movable body P2111 from hitting the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable effect effect P2000.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. It is a gaming machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device).
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and an effect position that is easy for the player to see.
The eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first effect surface and
An effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided.
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When the first effect surface is moved and controlled to the effect position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), the eyebrow movable body P2111 is moved in parallel with the first effect surface. As a result, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 that is housed inside the end of the first effect surface at the standby position is moved so as to project from the inside to the outside of the end of the first effect surface. It controls.
That is, the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of switching between the first effect surface and the second effect surface to control the movement is provided at the effect position that is easily visible to the player. Here, switching the production surface means that the first production surface is easy to see and the second production surface is difficult to see, and the first production surface is difficult to see and the second production surface is easy to see. It is to control the movement of the movable body so as to be.

According to such a configuration, the fun of the production content can be improved. Furthermore, the effect can be executed without widening the width of the effect device in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, since the eyebrow movable body P2111 is formed so as to move in parallel with the first effect surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113), the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 causes an upper movable effect effect. The width of the object P2000 in the front-rear direction does not widen, and interference between members can be suppressed.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. It is a gaming machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device).
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and an effect position that is easy for the player to see.
The pupil movable body P2131 (movable body) provided on the second production surface and
The pupil movable body P2131 is provided with an effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement.
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When the second effect surface is moved and controlled to the effect position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), at least a part of the pupil movable body P2131 is moved from the end of the second effect surface. Control the movement so that it protrudes outward,
When the second effect surface is moved and controlled to the standby position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), the effect projecting outward from the end of the second effect surface at the effect position. At least a part of the pupil movable body P2131 is moved and controlled so as to be accommodated inside the end portion of the second effect surface on the back surface side of the second effect surface.

According to such a configuration, the fun of the production content can be improved. Further, when the effect surface is moved and controlled to the standby position, it is possible to prevent interference with other members.

Specifically, the pupil movable body P2131 is not on the same surface as the eyebrow decoration body P2121, but is provided above the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (see FIG. 133). Therefore, when the second effect surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) is easily visible to the player, the pupil movable body P2131 is located on the back surface side (rear side) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121. Therefore, the pupil movable body P2131 can be used to produce a deep effect. Then, in a state where the second effect surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) is difficult for the player to see (the state where the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 is directed downward), the pupil movable body P2131 is the eyebrow decoration body P2121. Since it fits inside the outer peripheral end of the eyebrow decoration P2121 on the back surface side of the eyebrow, it is possible to prevent interference with other members.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. A gaming machine including an upper movable effecting accessory P2000 (effecting device) and a light guide plate P1112 (displaying means) provided on the front side of the upper movable effecting accessory P2000.
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface is provided at an effect position that is easily visible to the player.
The first effect surface includes the decorative portion of the first aspect (decoration imitating the pupils and eyebrows on both the left and right sides of a person).
The second effect surface includes a decorative portion of the second aspect (a part of the pupil on one side of a person's left and right and a decoration imitating an eyebrow) related to a part of the first aspect.
The light guide plate P1112 (display means) has an effect of a third aspect (another portion of the pupil on one of the left and right sides of a person) related to a part of the first aspect in at least a part around the second effect surface. The effect using the light emitting region P1112a imitating the above) is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the fun of the production content can be improved. Further, the effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) is performed by using the second effect surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) and the display means (light guide plate P1112). You can achieve a novel effect by executing it.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. It is a gaming machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device).
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface is provided at an effect position that is easily visible to the player.
The first effect surface includes the decorative portion of the first aspect.
The second effect surface includes a decorative portion of the second aspect related to a part of the first aspect.
When the second effect surface is moved and controlled to an effect position that is easily visible to the player, the upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 (tilting means) for inclining the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
Even if the effect device is tilted, the relationship between a part of the first aspect and the second aspect is maintained.

According to such a configuration, a novel effect can be realized by executing the effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface by using the second effect surface and the display means.

Specifically, the vertical angle of the eyebrow decorative body P2121 is approximately the same as the longitudinal angle of the eyebrow movable body P2111 in the effect displayed on the first effect surface due to the tilting of the upper movable effect object P2000. It will be the same. As a result, the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113 (first effect surface) is visible to the player (first aspect), and the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (second effect surface) is visible to the player. It is possible to enhance the relevance to the possible state (second aspect) and to perform an interesting effect on the player.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has an effect rotating body having a built-in light emitting unit and having a plurality of effect surfaces, and can display an effect during a big hit, game information, and the like on a plurality of effect surfaces. Has been done.

However, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the production content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It has a plurality of production surfaces including a first production surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) and a second production surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration body P2121) which is a production surface different from the first production surface. It is a gaming machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device).
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface to an effect position that is easily visible to the player.
The eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first effect surface is provided.
The first effect surface includes the decorative portion of the first aspect.
The second effect surface includes a decorative portion of the second aspect related to a part of the first aspect.
In the first aspect, the eyebrow movable body P2111 moves in one direction.
In the second aspect, the second effect surface moves in the one direction.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
Even if the second effect surface moves in the first direction, the relationship between a part of the first aspect and the second aspect is maintained.

According to such a configuration, the fun of the production content can be improved. Further, a novel effect can be realized by executing the effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface by using the second effect surface and the display means.

Specifically, in a state where the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is visible to the player (first aspect), the right eyebrow movable body P2111 is moved and controlled in a direction of tilting to the upper right. ing. Then, in a state where the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 is visible to the player (second aspect), the upper movable effect object P2000 is moved and controlled in a direction of tilting to the upper right. That is, since the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first aspect and the upper movable effect effect P2000 in the second aspect are moved and controlled in substantially the same direction, the effect of the first aspect and the second effect Can be more relevant.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the first production unit P2110 and the second production unit P2120 are decorated to imitate human eyes and eyebrows, but the decoration may be arbitrary. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, one drive source (rotational drive motor P2216) rotates the upper movable effect object P2000 (a part other than the elevating part P2140 and the like), moves the pupil movable body unit P2130, and eyebrows. Although it is assumed that the movable body P2111 is moved, each of these operations may be performed by a separate drive source.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eyebrow movable body P2111 is assumed to protrude from the outer peripheral end portion of the pupil decoration body P2113 in the front view at both the initial position shown in FIG. 108 and the effect position shown in FIG. 149. However, as described above, the drive source for rotating the upper movable effect object P2000 (the part other than the elevating part P2140, etc.) and the drive source for moving the eyebrow movable body P2111 are used as separate drive sources, and the eyebrows are movable. The body P2111 is housed inside the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration P2113 in the initial position (FIG. 108), and when it moves to the effect position (FIG. 149) (as it moves), the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration P2113. It may be moved so as to project from the inside to the outside of the.

By doing so, the player can visually recognize the movement of the right eyebrow movable body P2111. Here, in a state where the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is visible to the player (first aspect), the right eyebrow movable body P2111 moves in the direction of tilting to the upper right. Then, in a state where the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 is visible to the player (second aspect), the upper movable effect object P2000 moves in a direction of tilting to the upper right. That is, since the player visually recognizes that the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first aspect and the upper movable effect effect P2000 in the second aspect move in substantially the same direction, the first aspect of the first aspect. The relevance between the production and the second production can be further enhanced.

Hereinafter, the rotating accessory P3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 170.

The rotating accessory P3000 performs a predetermined effect by rotating the rotating body P3400, which will be described later, and causing the light emitting means P3300 to emit light. The rotating accessory P3000 is arranged on the upper part of the game board P1100. The rotating accessory P3000 mainly includes a left side support portion P3100, a right side support portion P3200, a light emitting means P3300, a rotating body P3400, a driving means P3500, and a shielding means P3600.

The left side support portion P3100 shown in FIGS. 154 to 156 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The left side support portion P3100 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The rear portion of the left support portion P3100 is fixed to the game board P1100 by a screw or the like.

The right side support portion P3200 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The right side support portion P3200 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right side support portion P3200 is arranged on the right side of the left side support portion P3100 with a predetermined distance from the left side support portion P3100. The rear portion of the right side support portion P3200 is fixed to the game board P1100 with screws or the like.

A rotating body P3400 or the like, which will be described later, is arranged between the left side support portion P3100 and the right side support portion P3200. The rotating body P3400 and the like are fixed to the game board P1100 by the left side support portion P3100 and the right side support portion P3200.

The light emitting means P3300 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 irradiates light to the outside of the rotating body P3400 by irradiating the inside of the rotating body P3400 to be described later. The light emitting means P3300 mainly includes a support shaft P3310, a substrate support portion P3320, a substrate P3330, a light emitting portion P3340, and a rotation support portion P3350.

The support shaft P3310 shown in FIGS. 156, 158, and 159 is a member that supports the substrate support portion P3320 and the like, which will be described later. The support shaft P3310 is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The support shaft P3310 is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The left and right ends of the support shaft P3310 are supported by the left side support portion P3100 and the right side support portion P3200, respectively. The support shaft P3310 is fixed to the left side support portion P3100 and the right side support portion P3200 so as to be non-rotatable.

The substrate support portion P3320 is a member that supports the substrate P3330, which will be described later. The substrate support portion P3320 mainly includes a support plate portion P3321 and a boss portion P3322.

The support plate portion P3321 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The support plate portion P3321 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right in the rear view. A recess P3321a is formed in the support plate portion P3321.

The recess P3321a is a portion formed so that the back surface of the support plate portion P3321 is recessed forward. The recess P3321a is formed in the upper and lower halfway portion (upper and lower substantially center) of the support plate portion P3321. The recess P3321a is formed from the left end to the right end of the support plate portion P3321 along the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the support plate portion P3321. The support shaft P3310 is arranged so as to be fitted in the recess P3321a of the support plate portion P3321. In this way, the support plate portion P3321 (board support portion P3320) is supported by the support shaft P3310.

The boss portion P3322 is a portion for attaching the substrate P3330, which will be described later, to the support plate portion P3321. The boss portion P3322 is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The boss portion P3322 is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing forward and backward. The boss portion P3322 is formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the support plate portion P3321. A plurality of boss portions P3322 are provided on the support plate portion P3321.

The substrate P3330 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 is a member provided with a light emitting unit P3340 described later. The substrate P3330 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The substrate P3330 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The vertical width and the horizontal width of the substrate P3330 are formed so as to be substantially the same as the vertical width and the horizontal width of the support plate portion P3321. The substrate P3330 is arranged in front of the support plate portion P3321. The substrate P3330 is fixed to the boss portion P3322 with screws or the like. As a result, the substrate P3330 is supported by the substrate support portion P3320.

The light emitting unit P3340 is a member capable of emitting light. As the light emitting unit P3340, for example, an LED capable of emitting light in an appropriate color is used. The light emitting unit P3340 is provided on the front surface of the substrate P3330. A plurality of light emitting units P3340 are provided over substantially the entire front surface of the substrate P3330.

The rotation support portion P3350 shown in FIGS. 155, 157 and 158 is a portion that rotatably supports the rotating body P3400 described later. The rotation support portion P3350 is formed in a circular shape in a side view. The rotation support portion P3350 is arranged on the left side of the substrate support portion P3320 and the substrate P3330. The rotation support portion P3350 is fixed to the left end portion of the substrate support portion P3320. A support shaft P3310 is inserted through the center of the rotation support portion P3350 so as to be relatively non-rotatable.

The rotating body P3400 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161 has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) effect surfaces and is rotatable. The rotating body P3400 mainly includes a first effect surface P3410, a first lens member P3420, a second effect surface P3430, a second lens member P3440, a first connecting surface P3450, a second connecting surface P3460, and a left side surface. It includes P3470 and P3480 on the right side. That is, in the present embodiment, the first effect surface P3410 is provided as an example of the first effect unit, and the second effect surface P3430 is provided as an example of the second effect unit. It should be noted that the effect unit may be an effect unit formed in an uneven shape or an effect unit formed in a curved shape, which may be a non-planar shape.

As will be described later, the rotating body P3400 is provided so as to be rotatable. Therefore, in the following, as shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160, 161 and the like, the first effect surface P3410 is directed forward and the second effect surface P3430 is directed rearward. The configuration of the rotating body P3400 will be described based on the above.

The first effect surface P3410 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159 and 160 is a portion that has been appropriately decorated. The first effect surface P3410 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The first production surface P3410 is arranged with the plate surface facing back and forth. Appropriate characters, figures, symbols, coloring and the like are provided as decorations on the front surface of the first effect surface P3410. A portion (first translucent portion) capable of transmitting light is formed on the first effect surface P3410. In the present embodiment, the entire first effect surface P3410 is formed to be the first translucent portion.

The first lens member P3420 shown in FIGS. 156 and 159 is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing or the like) the light emitted to the first effect surface P3410. The first lens member P3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The first lens member P3420 is arranged with the plate surface facing back and forth. The first lens member P3420 is fixed to the rear surface of the first effect surface P3410.

The second effect surface P3430 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161 is a portion provided with appropriate decoration. The second effect surface P3430 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second production surface P3430 is arranged with the plate surface facing back and forth. The second effect surface P3430 is arranged behind the first effect surface P3410. The rear surface of the second production surface P3430 is decorated with appropriate characters, figures, symbols, coloring, and the like. The second production surface P3430 is decorated differently from the first production surface P3410. A portion (second translucent portion) capable of transmitting light is formed on the second effect surface P3430. In the present embodiment, the entire second effect surface P3430 is formed to be the second translucent portion. That is, the shape, characters, figures, symbols, coloring, etc. of the second effect surface P3430 (second translucent part) are different from those of the first effect surface P3410 (first translucent part). Is formed in.

The second lens member P3440 shown in FIGS. 155, 159, 160 and 161 is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing or the like) the light emitted to the second effect surface P3430. The second lens member P3440 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second lens member P3440 is arranged with the plate surface facing back and forth. The second lens member P3440 is fixed to the front surface of the second effect surface P3430.

The first connecting surface P3450 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161 is a portion connecting the first effect surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430. The first connecting surface P3450 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The first connecting surface P3450 is arranged with the plate surface facing up and down. The front end portion of the first connecting surface P3450 is fixed to the upper end portion of the first effect surface P3410. The rear end portion of the first connecting surface P3450 is fixed to the upper end portion of the second effect surface P3430. As a result, the first connecting surface P3450 connects the upper ends of the first effect surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430. The upper surface of the first connecting surface P3450 is appropriately decorated. In the present embodiment, the first connecting surface P3450 is formed so that light cannot be transmitted.

The second connecting surface P3460 is a portion that connects the first effect surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430. The second connecting surface P3460 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second connecting surface P3460 is arranged with the plate surface facing up and down. The front end portion of the second connecting surface P3460 is fixed to the lower end portion of the first effect surface P3410. The rear end portion of the second connecting surface P3460 is fixed to the lower end portion of the second effect surface P3430. As a result, the second connecting surface P3460 connects the lower ends of the first effect surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430 to each other. The lower surface of the second connecting surface P3460 is appropriately decorated. In the present embodiment, the second connecting surface P3460 is formed so that light cannot be transmitted.

The left side surface P3470 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 160 and 161 is a portion forming the left side portion of the rotating body P3400. The left side surface P3470 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The left side surface P3470 is fixed to the left end portion of the first effect surface P3410, the second effect surface P3430, the first connecting surface P3450, and the second connecting surface P3460. A circular hole P3471 is formed in the left side surface P3470.

The circular hole P3471 is a hole that penetrates the left side surface P3470 to the left and right. The circular hole P3471 is formed in a circular shape in a side view.

The right side surface P3480 is a portion forming the right side portion of the rotating body P3400. The right side surface P3480 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right side surface P3480 is fixed to the right end portion of the first effect surface P3410, the second effect surface P3430, the first connecting surface P3450, and the second connecting surface P3460. A gear P3481 is formed on the right side surface P3480.

The gear P3481 transmits the driving force from the driving means P3500, which will be described later. The gear P3481 is integrally formed on the right surface of the right surface P3480 with the axis directed to the left and right.

As described above, the rotating body P3400 has six surfaces by the first effect surface P3410, the second effect surface P3430, the first connecting surface P3450, the second connecting surface P3460, the left side surface P3470 and the right side surface P3480. It is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape.

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 158 and 159, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate support portion P3320, the substrate P3330 and the light emitting portion P3340 of the light emitting means P3300. As shown in FIG. 158, the rotation support portion P3350 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted into the left side surface P3470 (circular hole P3471 shown in FIG. 160) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. A support shaft P3310 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted into the right side surface P3480 (central portion of the gear P3481) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. The gear P3481 on the right side surface P3480 is inserted into the accommodating portion P3510 of the drive means P3500, which will be described later. In this way, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate P3330 and the like, and is arranged so as to be rotatable around the support shaft P3310.

The drive means P3500 shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 162 controls the rotation of the rotating body P3400. The drive means P3500 mainly includes an accommodating portion P3510, a motor P3520, a drive gear P3530, a first detection gear P3540, a second detection gear P3550, a first detection sensor P3560, and a second detection sensor P3570.

The accommodating portion P3510 accommodates a drive gear P3530, a first detection gear P3540, and a second detection gear P3550, which will be described later. The accommodating portion P3510 is formed in a box shape having an internal space. The accommodating portion P3510 is fixed to the right side supporting portion P3200. Note that FIG. 162 shows a state in which the right portion of the accommodating portion P3510 is opened in order to show the inside of the accommodating portion P3510 (drive gear P3530 or the like).

The motor P3520 generates a driving force (driving source) for rotationally driving the rotating body P3400. The motor P3520 is fixed to the right side surface of the accommodating portion P3510.

The drive gear P3530 shown in FIG. 162 is rotated by the driving force of the motor P3520. The drive gear P3530 is arranged inside the accommodating portion P3510 with the axis directed to the left and right. The drive gear P3530 is fixed to an output shaft (not shown) of the motor P3520. The drive gear P3530 is arranged below the rear of the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 inserted into the accommodating portion P3510. The drive gear P3530 is meshed with the gear P3481.

The first detection gear P3540 is for detecting the rotation position of the rotating body P3400. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged inside the accommodating portion P3510 with its axis directed to the left and right. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged above the rear of the gear P3481. The first detection gear P3540 is meshed with the gear P3481.

The second detection gear P3550 is for detecting the rotation position of the rotating body P3400. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged inside the accommodating portion P3510 with its axis directed to the left and right. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged below the front of the gear P3481. The second detection gear P3550 is meshed with the gear P3481.

The first detection sensor P3560 shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 detects whether or not the first detection gear P3540 is in a predetermined rotation position. The first detection sensor P3560 is fixed to the upper part of the accommodating portion P3510. A part (detection unit) of the first detection sensor P3560 is inserted into the accommodating unit P3510, and it is possible to detect whether or not the first detection gear P3540 is in a predetermined rotation position.

The second detection sensor P3570 shown in FIG. 155 detects whether or not the second detection gear P3550 is in a predetermined rotation position. The second detection sensor P3570 is fixed to the lower part of the accommodating portion P3510. A part (detection unit) of the second detection sensor P3570 is inserted into the accommodating unit P3510, and it is possible to detect whether or not the second detection gear P3550 is in a predetermined rotation position.

When the motor P3520 is driven in the drive means P3500 configured in this way, the driving force of the motor P3520 is transmitted to the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 via the drive gear P3530. As a result, the rotating body P3400 rotates about the support shaft P3310 of the light emitting means P3300.

Further, as the rotating body P3400 rotates, the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 rotate. The rotation position of the rotating body P3400 is detected by the first detection sensor P3560 and the second detection sensor P3570 to detect whether or not the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 are in the predetermined rotation positions. Can be detected.

Specifically, the rotating body P3400 faces the first effect surface P3410 toward the front (front), that is, the position where the first effect surface P3410 is visible to the player (hereinafter, this position is simply referred to as the "effect position". The first detection sensor P3560 detects that the first detection gear P3540 is in a predetermined rotation position in a state of being rotated to the position (referred to as). That is, the first detection sensor P3560 can detect that the first effect surface P3410 is in the effect position.

Further, in a state where the rotating body P3400 faces the second effect surface P3430 to the front (front), that is, in a state where the second effect surface P3430 is rotated until it is positioned at the effect position, the second detection sensor P3570 is a second detection sensor. It is detected that the detection gear P3550 of No. 2 is in a predetermined rotation position. That is, the second detection sensor P3570 can detect that the second effect surface P3430 is in the effect position.

In this way, the first detection sensor P3560 and the second detection sensor P3570 can detect that either the first effect surface P3410 or the second effect surface P3430 is located at the effect position. .. By driving or stopping the motor P3520 based on the detection, either one of the first effect surface P3410 or the second effect surface P3430 can be arbitrarily rotated and moved to the effect position.

The shielding means P3600 shown in FIGS. 159 and 163 to 166 limits the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface of the rotating body P3400 to a predetermined range. The shielding means P3600 mainly includes a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and a rotating body side shielding means P3620.

The light emitting means side shielding means P3610 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 164 and 166 is a member fixed to the light emitting means P3300. The light emitting means side shielding means P3610 mainly includes a left shielding portion P3611, a right shielding portion P3612, an upper connecting portion P3613, a lower connecting portion P3614, a left fixing portion P3615, and a right fixing portion P3616.

The left shielding portion P3611 is a portion forming the left portion of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The left shielding portion P3611 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the vertical width of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300. The front end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed in a side view arc shape so as to bulge forward from the rear end portion. More specifically, as will be described later, when the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 is attached to the substrate P3330, the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 has an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 in the side view. (See FIG. 159). The left shielding portion P3611 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding portion P3611 according to the present embodiment is formed so as to extend substantially vertically in front view, and a step (bent portion) is formed in the middle of the upper and lower portions so that the lower portion is located to the left with respect to the upper portion. Has been done.

The right shielding portion P3612 is a portion forming the right portion of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding portion P3612 is arranged to the right of the left shielding portion P3611. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3611 in side view. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding portion P3612 according to the present embodiment is inclined to the left from both the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower middle portions so that the upper and lower middle portions are located inside (left) with respect to the upper and lower both ends in the front view. It is formed like this.

The upper connecting portion P3613 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The upper connecting portion P3613 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The left and right ends of the upper connecting portion P3613 are connected to the upper ends of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612, respectively. As a result, the upper connecting portion P3613 connects the upper end portions of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612 to each other.

The lower connecting portion P3614 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The lower connecting portion P3614 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The left and right ends of the lower connecting portion P3614 are connected to the lower ends of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612, respectively. As a result, the lower connecting portion P3614 connects the lower end portions of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612 to each other.

The left fixing portion P3615 is a portion fixed to the substrate P3330. The left fixing portion P3615 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The upper and lower ends of the left fixing portion P3615 are connected to the left portions of the upper connecting portion P3613 and the lower connecting portion P3614, respectively.

The right fixing portion P3616 is a portion fixed to the substrate P3330. The right fixing portion P3616 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The upper and lower ends of the right fixing portion P3616 are connected to the right portions of the upper connecting portion P3613 and the lower connecting portion P3614, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the left fixing portion P3615 and the right fixing portion P3616 are fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 with screws or the like. As a result, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 is attached to the left and right central portions of the substrate P3330. At this time, among the plurality of light emitting units P3340 provided on the substrate P3330, the light emitting unit P3340 arranged at the left and right central portions of the substrate P3330 is inside the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 (in front view, the left shielding portion P3611, It is arranged in the right shielding portion P3612, the range surrounded by the upper connecting portion P3613 and the lower connecting portion P3614).

The rotating body side shielding means P3620 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 165 and 166 is a member fixed to the rotating body P3400. The rotating body side shielding means P3620 mainly includes a left shielding portion P3621, a right shielding portion P3622, a first connecting portion P3623, and a second connecting portion P3624.

The left shielding portion P3621 is a portion forming the left portion of the rotating body side shielding means P3620. The left shielding portion P3621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the vertical width of the second lens member P3440. The left shielding portion P3621 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding portion P3621 according to the present embodiment is formed so as to extend substantially vertically in front view, and a step (bent portion) is formed in the middle of the upper and lower portions so that the upper portion is located to the left with respect to the lower portion. Has been done. A recess P3621a is formed in the left shielding portion P3621.

The recess P3621a is formed so that the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 is recessed rearward. The recess P3621a is formed at a substantially central portion above and below the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3621. The recess P3621a is formed in a substantially arc shape in a side view. More specifically, as will be described later, when the rotating body side shielding means P3620 is attached to the second lens member P3440, the recess P3621a is formed so as to have an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 in the side view. (See FIG. 159). Further, the radius of the recess P3621a is formed so as to be substantially the same as the arc-shaped radius of the left shielding portion P3611 of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 (strictly speaking, slightly larger).

The right shielding portion P3622 is a portion forming the right portion of the rotating body side shielding means P3620. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding portion P3622 is arranged to the right of the left shielding portion P3621. The distance between the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622 (left and right spacing) is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612 of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3621 in side view. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding portion P3622 according to the present embodiment is inclined to the left from both the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower middle portions so that the upper and lower middle portions are located inside (left) with respect to the upper and lower both ends in the front view. It is formed like this. A recess P3622a is formed in the right shielding portion P3622.

The recess P3622a is formed so that the front end portion of the right shielding portion P3622 is recessed rearward. The recess P3622a is formed at a substantially central portion above and below the front end portion of the right shielding portion P3622. The recess P3622a is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the recess P3621a of the left shielding portion P3621 in a side view.

The first connecting portion P3623 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The first connecting portion P3623 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. The left and right ends of the first connecting portion P3623 are connected to the upper ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. As a result, the first connecting portion P3623 connects the upper end portions of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622 to each other.

The second connecting portion P3624 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The second connecting portion P3624 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. The left and right ends of the second connecting portion P3624 are connected to the lower ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. As a result, the second connecting portion P3624 connects the lower end portions of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622 to each other.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the first connecting portion P3623 and the second connecting portion P3624 are fixed to the front surface of the second lens member P3440 by screws or the like. As a result, the rotating body side shielding means P3620 is attached to the left and right central portion (the same position as the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 in the left and right direction) of the second lens member P3440.

Hereinafter, an effect mode by the rotating accessory P3000 configured as described above will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 166, a case where the first effect surface P3410 is located at a position facing the front (effect position) among the effect surfaces of the rotating body P3400 will be described.

In this case, the first effect surface P3410 is easily visible to the player. Further, since the second production surface P3430 faces rearward, it is difficult for the player to see it. At this time, the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second effect surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is located behind the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed to the inside of the second effect surface P3430 are separately separated (hereinafter, simply ". It is called "separated state"). In the separated state, a large gap is formed between the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the first effect surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400. Therefore, the light from the plurality of light emitting units P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 passes through the gap between the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the first effect surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400, and is the second of the rotating body P3400. The entire area of the lens member P3420 of 1 is irradiated. The light transmitted through the first lens member P3420 is applied to the entire inside of the first effect surface P3410. As a result, as shown in FIG. 167, the entire first effect surface P3410 is irradiated with light substantially uniformly to the outside, and the entire first effect surface P3410 emits light substantially uniformly. That is, in this case, light is irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 to the entire inner surface side (first irradiation range) of the first effect surface P3410 according to the first effect surface P3410 (first light transmitting portion). ..

Next, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, a case where the second effect surface P3430 is located at a position facing the front (effect position) among the effect surfaces of the rotating body P3400 will be described.

In this case, the second production surface P3430 is easily visible to the player. Further, since the first production surface P3410 faces rearward, it is difficult for the player to see it. At this time, the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second effect surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is located in front of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the front end of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 fits into the recesses (recessed P3621a and recess P3622a) of the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed to the inside of the second effect surface P3430. It is located so that it can be crowded. In this way, a state in which one tubular member extending from the substrate P3330 to the second effect surface P3430 is formed by the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 (hereinafter, simply "restricted state"". Is called). In the restricted state, the shielding means P3600 limits the irradiation range of light from the plurality of light emitting units P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 to a predetermined range.

Specifically, among the plurality of light emitting units P3340, the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 arranged inside the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3610) may be emitted to the outside of the shielding means P3600. Can not. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 is emitted only to the range of the second effect surface P3430 located inside the shielding means P3600 in front view (see FIG. 170).

On the other hand, among the plurality of light emitting units P3340, the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 arranged outside the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3610) cannot enter the inside of the shielding means P3600. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 is emitted only to a range of the second effect surface P3430 located outside the shielding means P3600 in front view (see FIG. 170).

In this way, when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the shielding means P3600 is in the restricted state, and the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 to the inside of the second effect surface P3430 is set. It can be limited to a predetermined range (a range located inside or outside the shielding means P3600 in front view). That is, the light irradiation range (first irradiation range) when the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position, and the light irradiation when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position. The range (second irradiation range) can be different from that of the range (second irradiation range). As a result, for example, the inner light emitting portion P3340 and the outer light emitting portion P3340 of the shielding means P3600 are made to emit light in different modes (for example, different brightness, color, timing, etc.), thereby causing the second effect surface P3430 to be non-uniform. Can be made to emit light.

In particular, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the shape of the shielding means P3600 in the front view is formed so as to correspond to the decoration applied to the second effect surface P3430. As a result, the irradiation range (second irradiation range) of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 is made to correspond to the second effect surface P3430 (second translucent portion), and the decoration of the second effect surface P3430 is made. Can be made to emit light so as to enhance it. For example, by forming the characters applied to the second effect surface P3430 and the shielding means P3600 so as to coincide with each other in the front view, the characters can be made to emit light in a manner different from other decorations.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the restricted state, the rear end portion of the rotating body side shielding means P3620 is located behind the substrate P3330 (see FIG. 168). As a result, it is effective that the light emitted from the light emitting portion P3340 provided on the front surface of the substrate P3330 wraps around from the rear of the shielding means P3600 (irradiates from the inside to the outside or from the outside to the inside of the shielding means P3600). Can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 has a shape that bulges in an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 (rotation center of the rotating body P3400) and is formed on the rotating body side. The shielding means P3620 has a shape that is recessed in an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310. Thereby, the gap between the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620) in the restricted state can be reduced while eliminating the interference between the members when the rotating body P3400 rotates. ..

That is, by forming an arc-shaped portion along the rotation locus of the rotating body P3400 on the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 interfere with each other. Can be avoided. Further, with such a configuration, the portion where the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 face each other (the portion formed in an arc shape) can be brought close to each other to reduce the gap, and the light shielding property can be reduced. Can be improved. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the light emitted from the light emitting unit P3340 from leaking beyond the shielding means P3600.

In this way, the light emitting mode of the decorative surface by the light emitting means P3300 can be different depending on the type of the effect surface (first effect surface P3410 or second effect surface P3430) whose movement is controlled to the effect position. As a result, different effects (light emitting effects) can be performed according to the type of decorative surface, and the interest of the effects produced by the rotating accessory P3000 can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2018-161333 has a game machine having a built-in light emitting unit and a rotating body having a plurality of effect surfaces, and capable of displaying an effect during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of effect surfaces. It is disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine provided with a rotating body P3400 having a translucent portion and formed from a plurality of effect surfaces (effect units) visible to the player.
A light emitting means P3300 provided inside the rotating body P3400 and capable of irradiating light toward the outside of the rotating body P3400 through the translucent portion by irradiating the inner surface side of at least one effect surface with light.
The shielding means P3600 that limits the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the effect surface to a predetermined range, and
The rotating body P3400 is provided with a drive means P3500 for rotating and controlling one of the plurality of production surfaces to a production position that is easily visible to the player.
The plurality of production surfaces
The first production surface P3410 and
A second production surface P3430, which is a production surface different from the first production surface P3410, is included.
In the rotating body P3400, the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position by the shielding means P3600, and the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position. It is characterized in that the irradiation range of the light emitted to the inner surface side of the effect surface is different.

Further, the shielding means P3600 according to the present embodiment is
With the rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotating body P3400,
With the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300,
Including
The shielding means P3600 is
When the rotating body side shielding means P3620 moves with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the effect surface (effect unit) together with the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The irradiation range can be limited to a predetermined range,
When the movement of the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to the effect position, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the first effect surface P3410 becomes the first irradiation range. When the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the second effect surface P3430 is the first irradiation range. It is characterized by having a different second irradiation range.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the light emitting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 can be determined. Can be different. That is, different light emitting effects can be produced depending on the type of effect surface whose movement is controlled to the effect position, which in turn can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2018-161333 has a game machine having a built-in light emitting unit and a rotating body having a plurality of effect surfaces, and capable of displaying an effect during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of effect surfaces. It is disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine having a translucent portion and a rotating body formed of a plurality of directing portions that can be seen by the player.
A light emitting means provided inside the rotating body and capable of irradiating light toward the outside of the rotating body through the translucent portion by irradiating the inner surface side of at least one effect unit with light.
A shielding means that limits the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the effect unit to a predetermined range.
It is provided with a driving means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any of the plurality of effect units to an effect position that is easy for the player to see.
The plurality of production surfaces
The first production surface P3410 and
A second production surface P3430, which is a production surface different from the first production surface P3410, is included.
The shielding means P3600 is
The rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided in the rotating body P3400 is included.
The rotating body side shielding means P3620
By moving with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position, and the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position. It is characterized in that the irradiation range of the light radiated to the inner surface side of the effect surface is different depending on the case.

Further, the first effect surface P3410 according to the present embodiment is
It has a first translucent portion formed in a predetermined shape,
The second production surface P3430 is
It has a second light-transmitting portion formed in a shape different from that of the first light-transmitting portion, and has a second light-transmitting portion.
The rotating body side shielding means P3620
When the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to move to the effect position by moving with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 is the first. When the first translucent portion emits light by setting the first irradiation range according to the translucent portion of the above and the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the light emitting means It is characterized in that the second transmissive portion emits light when the irradiation range of the light emitted from P3300 becomes the second irradiation range corresponding to the second transmissive portion.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the light emitting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 can be determined. Can be different. That is, different light emitting effects can be produced depending on the type of effect surface whose movement is controlled to the effect position, which in turn can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a production device has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2018-161333 has a game machine having a built-in light emitting unit and a rotating body having a plurality of effect surfaces, and capable of displaying an effect during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of effect surfaces. It is disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effect content displayed on the effect surface is not interesting because the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine having a translucent portion and a rotating body formed of a plurality of directing portions that can be seen by the player.
A light emitting means provided inside the rotating body and capable of irradiating light toward the outside of the rotating body through the translucent portion by irradiating the inner surface side of at least one effect unit with light.
A shielding means that limits the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the effect unit to a predetermined range.
It is provided with a driving means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any of the plurality of effect units to an effect position that is easy for the player to see.
The shielding means P3600 is
With the rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotating body P3400,
With the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300,
Including
The shielding means P3600 is
By moving the rotating body side shielding means P3620 with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the effect surface is determined together with the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. It is characterized in that it can be switched between a state in which the range is limited to the above range and a state in which the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the effect surface is not limited.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is moved and controlled to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the light emitting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 can be determined. Can be different. That is, different light emitting effects can be produced according to the rotation of the rotating body P3400, which in turn can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement (rotation) of the rotating body P3400 by the driving means P3500 and the irradiation of light by the light emitting means P3300 can be arbitrarily controlled. By appropriately setting the timings of both, various modes of production can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the entire first effect surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430 are translucent portions (light can be transmitted as a whole), but the first effect It is also possible to make only a part of the surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430 a translucent part (only a part of the surface P3430 can transmit light). For example, the first effect surface P3410 can be formed by combining a member having translucency and a member having no translucency, depending on the decoration applied to the surface.

It is also possible to use only the rotating body side shielding means P3620 as the shielding means P3600. That is, it is also possible to omit the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. In this case, when the second effect surface P3430 is moved and controlled to the effect position, the light irradiation range is limited by the rotating body side shielding means P3620.

Further, the configuration (shape, size, etc.) of the shielding means P3600 is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, it is possible to make an appropriate shape, size, etc. according to the decoration applied to the production surface.

Further, the shielding means P3600 does not necessarily have to be provided on the rotating body P3400 like the rotating body side shielding means P3620 of the present embodiment. That is, the shielding means P3600 may be capable of switching between a state in which the light irradiation range is limited and a state in which the light irradiation range is not limited according to the movement control (rotation) of the rotating body P3400. For example, according to the movement control of the rotating body P3400, the light irradiation range is moved to a position where the light irradiation range is limited and a position where the light irradiation range is not limited by a separately provided driving means (or by using the driving force of the driving means P3500). It is also possible to use the shielding means P3600 as a possible member.

Hereinafter, the effect device P4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 191.

The effect device P4000 shown in FIG. 171 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. For convenience, the effect device P4000 is provided on the gaming board P1100 of another example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

The effect device P4000 is installed on the game board P1100. The effect device P4000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 at a position visible to the player in the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The effect device P4000 includes a movement control mechanism P4010, a movable body P4300, and a reinforcing cover P4400.

The movement control mechanism P4010 sets the movable body P4300 into a standby position shown in FIG. 171 which is a position difficult for the player to see, and an effect position shown in FIGS. 185 to 187 which is a position visible to the player. It controls movement. A detailed description of the movable body P4300 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the standby position is set below the opening region 1d of the game board P1100 (a position overlapping the lower portion of the game board P1100). Further, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, the effect position is the lower portion in the opening region 1d. The movement control mechanism P4010 includes an ascending / descending movement control mechanism P4100 and a left / right movement control mechanism P4200.

The vertical movement control mechanism P4100 shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 and 185 controls the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction. Here, the movable body P4300 is provided in the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 described later, and the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 moves and controls the movable body P4300 via the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. That is, the ascending / descending movement control mechanism P4100 directly controls the movement of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction. A detailed description of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 171 and 185, the ascending / descending movement control mechanism P4100 controls the movement of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200 (movable body P4300) between the standby position and the effect position. In the following, the configuration of the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 will be described mainly based on the state in which the movable body P4300 is positioned in the standby position. The elevating movement control mechanism P4100 includes a left side movement unit P4110 and a right side movement unit P4160.

The left-side movement unit P4110 moves the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction on the left side of the game board P1100 and guides the movement in the vertical direction. The left side moving unit P4110 includes a base portion P4120, a first motor P4130, a first transmission portion P4140, and an elevating shaft P4150.

The base portion P4120 is provided with the first motor P4130, the first transmission portion P4140, and the elevating shaft P4150, which will be described later. The base portion P4120 is fixed to the left side portion of the game board P1100. The base portion P4120 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the base portion P4120 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

The first motor P4130 shown in FIG. 171 is a drive source for moving the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction. The first motor P4130 is installed in the upper portion of the base portion P4120. Further, the first motor P4130 is installed on the left side portion of the base portion P4120. As shown in FIG. 172, the first motor P4130 is provided so that the output shaft P4131 penetrates the base portion P4120 back and forth and projects rearward.

The first transmission unit P4140 shown in FIG. 172 transmits the driving force generated by the first motor P4130 to the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 side. The first transmission unit P4140 is installed on the left side portion of the base unit P4120. The first transmission unit P4140 includes an output gear P4141, a first gear P4142, and a second gear P4143.

The output gear P4141 takes out the driving force of the first motor P4130. The output gear P4141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P4131 of the first motor P4130.

The first gear P4142 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4141 and meshes with the output gear P4141. The first gear P4142 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 around an axial center facing in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4143 is arranged substantially below the first gear P4142 and meshes with the first gear P4142. The second gear P4143 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 around an axial center facing in the front-rear direction.

The elevating shaft P4150 guides the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The elevating shaft P4150 has a substantially cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4150 is installed on the right side portion of the base portion P4120. Further, the elevating shaft P4150 is installed so as to be separated from the rear surface of the base portion P4120.

The right-side movement unit P4160 guides the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 on the right side of the game board P1100. The right side moving unit P4160 includes a base portion P4170 and an elevating shaft P4180.

The base portion P4170 is provided with the elevating shaft P4180, which will be described later. The base portion P4170 is fixed to the right side portion of the game board P1100. The base portion P4170 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the base portion P4170 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

The elevating shaft P4180 guides the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The elevating shaft P4180 has a substantially cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4150 is installed on the left side portion of the base portion P4170. Further, the elevating shaft P4180 is installed so as to be separated from the rear surface of the base portion P4170.

The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 shown in FIGS. 171 to 178 and 185 to 187 supports the movable body P4300 and controls the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 moves and controls the movable body P4300 at the effect position. Further, the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is moved and controlled in the vertical direction by the up-and-down movement control mechanism P4100. The left / right movement control mechanism P4200 is arranged between the left side movement unit P4110 and the right side movement unit P4160. The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 includes a base portion P4210, a cover portion P4220, a connecting portion P4230, a rack portion P4240, a guide portion P4250, a second motor P4260, and a second transmission portion P4270.

In the base portion P4210 shown in FIGS. 172 and 174 to 178, a second motor P4260 and a second transmission portion P4270, which will be described later, are installed. The base portion P4210 includes a main body portion P4211 and a support portion P4219.

The main body portion P4211 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes most of the base portion P4210. The main body P4211 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the main body portion P4211 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The main body portion P4211 includes a front wall portion P4212, an upper wall portion P4215, a lower wall portion P4216, a left wall portion P4217, and a right wall portion P4218.

The front wall portion P4212 constitutes the front side portion of the main body portion P4211. The front wall portion P4212 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P4212 includes a guide hole portion P4213 and a first urging portion receiving portion P4214.

The guide hole portion P4213 shown in FIGS. 174 and 177 guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The guide hole portion P4213 is formed so as to penetrate the front wall portion P4212 in the front-rear direction. The guide hole portion P4213 is formed in a substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the front wall portion P4212. The guide hole portion P4213 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction.

The first urging portion receiving portion P4214 shown in FIG. 178 receives the urging force of the urging portion described later. The first urging portion receiving portion P4214 is provided on the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212 so as to project rearward.

The upper wall portion P4215 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes the upper portion of the main body portion P4211. The upper wall portion P4215 is provided at the upper end portion of the front wall portion P4212. The upper wall portion P4215 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The upper wall portion P4215 includes a notch portion P4215a.

The cutout portion P4215a is a cutout of a rear portion of the upper wall portion P4215. The cutout portion P4215a is formed in the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion P4215.

The lower wall portion P4216 constitutes the lower portion of the main body portion P4211. The lower wall portion P4216 is provided at the lower end portion of the front wall portion P4212. The lower wall portion P4216 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction.

The left wall portion P4217 constitutes the left side portion of the main body portion P4211. The left wall portion P4217 is provided at the left end portion of the front wall portion P4212. The left wall portion P4217 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed to the left and right.

The right wall portion P4218 constitutes the right portion of the main body portion P4211. The right wall portion P4218 is provided at the right end portion of the right wall portion P4218. The right wall portion P4218 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed to the left and right.

The support portion P4219 supports the guide portion P4250, which will be described later. The support portion P4219 is formed so as to extend upward from the right end portion of the main body portion P4211.

The cover portion P4220 shown in FIG. 172 covers the opening of the main body portion P4211. The cover portion P4220 has a plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The cover portion P4220 and the main body portion P4211 form a housing for accommodating the second transmission portion P4270 described later.

The connecting portion P4230 connects the cover portion P4220 (base portion P4210) and the rack portion P4240 described later. The connecting portion P4230 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The right side portion of the connecting portion P4230 is fixed to the left end portion on the rear surface of the cover portion P4220. Further, the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230 projects to the left of the left end portion of the cover portion P4220.

The rack portion P4240 shown in FIGS. 172 to 174 converts the rotation transmitted by the first transmission unit P4140 into the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The rack portion P4240 is fixed to the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230. The rack portion P4240 includes a main body portion P4241, a guide hole portion P4242, and a rack tooth portion P4243.

The main body portion P4241 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 constitutes most of the rack portion P4240. The main body P4241 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The main body P4241 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The lower portion of the main body portion P4241 is fixed to the front surface of the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230.

The guide hole portion P4242 is a hole that penetrates the main body portion P4241 in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4150 of the left side moving unit P4110 is inserted through the guide hole P4242. By inserting the elevating shaft P4150 through the guide hole P4242, the vertical movement of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the left side portion of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200.

The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 of the first transmission portion P4140. The rack tooth portion P4243 is provided at the left end portion of the main body portion P4241. The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 with the elevating shaft P4150 inserted through the guide hole portion P4242.

The guide unit P4250 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 guides the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The guide portion P4250 is fixed to the upper end portion of the support portion P4219. The guide portion P4250 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The guide portion P4250 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The guide portion P4250 includes a guide hole portion P4251.

The guide hole portion P4251 is a hole that penetrates the guide portion P4250 in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4180 of the right side moving unit P4160 is inserted through the guide hole P4251. By inserting the elevating shaft P4180 through the guide hole P4251, the vertical movement of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the right side portion of the left / right movement control mechanism P4200.

The second motor P4260 shown in FIG. 173 is a drive source for moving the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The second motor P4260 is installed on the left side portion of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211). As shown in FIG. 176, the second motor P4260 is provided so that the output shaft P4261 penetrates the base portion P4210 back and forth and projects rearward.

The second transmission unit P4270 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 transmits the driving force generated by the second motor P4260 to the movable body P4300. The second transmission unit P4270 includes an output gear P4271, a first gear P4272, a second gear P4273, a belt P4274, a tension pulley P4275, a tension applying unit P4276, a first pulley P4277 and a second pulley P4278. ..

The output gear P4271 shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 extracts the driving force of the second motor P4260. The output gear P4271 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P4261 of the second motor P4260.

The first gear P4272 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4271 and meshes with the output gear P4271. The first gear P4272 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4273 is arranged substantially to the right of the first gear P4272 and meshes with the first gear P4272. The second gear P4273 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing the front-rear direction. Further, a belt P4274, which will be described later, is wound around the second gear P4273.

The belt P4274 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 is formed in an endless shape and is wound around a second gear P4273 and a tension pulley P4275 described later. The belt P4274 is arranged on the front wall portion P4212 above the guide hole portion P4213 so as to extend in the left-right direction.

The belt P4274 rotates with the rotation of the second gear P4273. The belt P4274 has a rack-shaped tooth portion P4274a formed on a part of the inner peripheral surface (the surface facing the second gear P4273). The tooth portion P4274a meshes with the second gear P4273.

The tension pulley P4275 shown in FIG. 178 is for winding the belt P4274. The tension pulley P4275 is rotatably supported around the axial center facing the front-rear direction on the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212 via the tension applying portion P4276 described later.

The tension applying portion P4276 rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275 and applies tension to the belt P4274. The tension applying portion P4276 is arranged on the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212. The tension applying portion P4276 includes a tension pulley supporting portion P4276a and an urging portion P4276d.

The tension pulley support portion P4276a rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275. The tension pulley support portion P4276a is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The tension pulley support portion P4276a is configured to support the tension pulley P4275 on the left side portion. Further, the tension pulley support portion P4276a includes a hole portion P4276b and a second urging portion receiving portion P4276c.

The hole portion P4276b is a hole that penetrates the tension pulley support portion P4276a back and forth. The hole portion P4276b is formed on the right side portion of the tension pulley support portion P4276a. The hole portion P4276b has an elongated hole shape that is long in the left-right direction. A first urging portion receiving portion P4214 formed in the front wall portion P4212 is inserted into the hole portion P4276b.

The second urging unit receiving portion P4276c receives the urging force of the urging unit P4276d, which will be described later. The second urging portion receiving portion P4276c is provided so as to project rearward from the right end portion of the tension pulley supporting portion P4276a.

The urging portion P4276d urges the tension pulley support portion P4276a to the right. By urging the tension pulley P4275 to the right via the tension pulley support portion P4276a by the urging portion P4276d, a constant tension can be applied to the belt P4274. The urging portion P4276d is interposed between the first urging portion receiving portion P4214 and the second urging portion receiving portion P4276c of the tension pulley support portion P4276a, and is interposed between the first urging portion receiving portion P4214 and the first urging portion receiving portion P4214. A compression spring is configured to urge the second urging portion receiving portion P4276c so as to be separated from each other.

The first pulley P4277 shown in FIGS. 174, 176 and 177 is arranged substantially to the right of the second gear P4273. The first pulley P4277 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to abut on the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. Further, the first pulley P4277 is arranged so that the upper end portion is located above the lower end portion of the second gear P4273. The first pulley P4277 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing the front-rear direction. The first pulley P4277 rotates according to the rotation of the belt P4274.

The second pulley P4278 shown in FIGS. 174, 177 and 178 is arranged substantially to the left of the tension pulley P4275. The second pulley P4278 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to abut on the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. The second pulley P4278 is arranged so that the upper end portion is located above the lower end portion of the tension pulley P4275. Further, the second pulley P4278 is arranged at substantially the same height as the first pulley P4277. The second pulley P4278 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing the front-rear direction. The second pulley P4278 rotates according to the rotation of the belt P4274.

The movable body P4300 shown in FIGS. 173 to 182 is movable in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by movement control by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 and the left / right movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 is installed so as to be movable in the left-right direction with respect to the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the movable body P4300 has a shape imitating a fighter aircraft. The movable body P4300 includes a base portion P4310, an engaging portion P4320, a substrate P4330, and a cover portion P4340.

The base portion P4310 shown in FIG. 179 holds the substrate P4330 and the cover portion P4340, which will be described later. The base portion P4310 is installed in the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The base portion P4310 includes a main body portion P4311, a roller accommodating portion P4312, and a guided portion P4313.

The main body portion P4311 constitutes most of the base portion P4310. The main body P4311 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The main body P4311 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front.

The roller accommodating portion P4312 accommodates the roller P4322, which will be described later. A pair of roller accommodating portions P4312 are arranged on both sides in the left-right direction in the lower portion of the main body portion P4311. The roller accommodating portion P4312 is open rearward and downward.

The guided portion P4313 shown in FIGS. 177, 179, 181 and 182 is a portion guided in the left-right direction by the guide hole portion P4213 of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The guided portion P4313 is provided so as to extend downward from the central portion in the left-right direction in the lower portion of the main body portion P4311. The guided portion P4313 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. The guided portion P4313 includes a protrusion portion P4314 and a diameter-expanded portion P4315.

The protrusion P4314 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 projects rearward from the rear surface of the guided portion P4313. A pair of protrusions P4314 are provided at intervals in the left-right direction. The protrusion P4314 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The protrusion P4314 is inserted through the guide hole P4213.

The enlarged diameter portion P4315 is provided at the rear end portion of the protruding portion P4314. The diameter-expanded portion P4315 has a shape that is larger than that of the protrusion P4314. The outer diameter of the enlarged diameter portion P4315 is formed to be larger than the vertical dimension of the guide hole portion P4213.

By inserting the protrusion P4314 described above into the guide hole P4213, it is possible to guide the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction along the guide hole P4213. Further, by providing the above-mentioned enlarged diameter portion P4315 at the rear end portion of the protruding portion P4314, it is possible to prevent the protruding portion P4314 from coming off with respect to the guide hole portion P4213.

The engaging portion P4320 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 is fixed to the base portion P4310 and engages with the belt P4274. The engaging portion P4320 includes a fixing portion P4321, a roller P4322, and an engaging guide portion P4323.

The fixing portion P4321 is fixed to the rear surface of the base portion P4310. The fixed portion P4321 has a long shape in the left-right direction. The fixing portion P4321 is fixed to the base portion P4310 via an appropriate stopper.

The roller P4322 shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is rotatably supported around the axial center facing the front-rear direction with respect to the fixed portion P4321. The roller P4322 has a disk shape. Rollers P4322 are provided at both ends in the left-right direction on the front surface of the fixed portion P4321. The roller P4322 is accommodated in the roller accommodating portion P4312 in a state where the fixing portion P4321 is fixed to the base portion P4310. Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the roller P4322 is grounded on the upper surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211).

The engagement guide portion P4323 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 engages with the belt P4274 and guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The engagement guide portion P4323 is provided at a central portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the fixed portion P4321. The engagement guide portion P4323 includes a guide portion P4324, an engagement portion P4325, and an engagement maintenance portion P4326.

The guide portion P4324 shown in FIGS. 180 to 182 guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The guide portion P4324 has a long shape in the left-right direction. The left-right dimension of the guide portion P4324 is formed smaller than the left-right dimension of the fixed portion P4321. The guide portion P4324 includes a vertical portion P4324a and a horizontal portion P4324b.

The vertical portion P4324a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that projects downward from the rear end portion on the lower surface of the fixed portion P4321. The vertical portion P4324a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4324b is a portion that protrudes forward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4324a. The horizontal portion P4324b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction.

The guide portion P4324 described above has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4324b of the guide portion P4324 faces the lower surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211). As a result, the guide portion P4324 can guide the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction by sandwiching the upper wall portion P4215 together with the roller P4322.

The engaging portion P4325 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 engages with the belt P4274. The engaging portion P4325 is provided at a central portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The engaging portion P4325 includes a vertical portion P4325a and a horizontal portion P4325b.

The vertical portion P4325a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that protrudes downward from the front end portion on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4325a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4325b is a portion that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4325a. The horizontal portion P4325b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. On the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4325b, a tooth portion P4325c that meshes with the tooth portion P4274a of the belt P4274 is formed.

The engaging portion P4325 described above has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engaging portion P4325 holds the belt P4274 so as to be vertically sandwiched by the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4325b. Further, in this state, the tooth portion P4325c of the engaging portion P4325 and the tooth portion P4274a of the belt P4274 mesh with each other. As a result, the engaging portion P4325 can be engaged with the belt P4274, and the operation of the belt P4274 can be transmitted to the movable body P4300.

The engagement maintaining portion P4326 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 maintains the engagement between the engaging portion P4325 and the belt P4274. The engagement maintenance portion P4326 is provided on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. Further, a pair of engagement maintaining portions P4326 are provided on both left and right sides of the engaging portion P4325. The engagement maintaining portion P4326 includes a vertical portion P4326a and a horizontal portion P4326b.

The vertical portion P4326a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that protrudes downward from the rear end portion on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4326a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4326b is a portion that protrudes forward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4326a. The horizontal portion P4326b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction.

The above-mentioned engagement maintaining portion P4326 has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engagement maintaining portion P4326 holds the belt P4274 so as to be vertically sandwiched by the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4326b. Further, the vertical portion P4326a of the engagement maintaining portion P4326 can restrict the rearward movement of the belt P4274 engaged with the engaging portion P4325. As a result, it is possible to prevent the belt P4274 from being disengaged from the engaging portion P4325.

The substrate P4330 shown in FIG. 179 is equipped with appropriate electronic components (functional components). The substrate P4330 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion P4310. The substrate P4330 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate P4330 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The front surface of the substrate P4330 is a mounting surface on which an appropriate light emitting means is mounted.

The cover portion P4340 constitutes the appearance of the movable body P4300 in the front view. The cover portion P4340 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion P4310 so as to cover the base portion P4310 and the substrate P4330. The cover portion P4340 includes a main body portion P4341, a contact portion P4342, and a positioning protrusion P4343.

The main body portion P4341 constitutes most of the cover portion P4340. The main body P4341 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the main body portion P4341 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The main body P4341 is formed of a transmissive member capable of transmitting light by a light emitting means provided on the substrate P4330.

The contact portion P4342 projects forward on the front surface of the main body portion P4341. The contact portion P4342 is arranged at the left end portion at the lower end portion of the main body portion P4341. As shown in FIG. 177, the contact portion P4342 is arranged to the left of the guide portion P4324 of the engaging portion P4320. Further, the contact portion P4342 is arranged below the guide portion P4324. The contact portion P4342 has a substantially columnar shape.

The positioning protrusion P4343 projects downward from the lower end of the main body P4341. The positioning protrusion P4343 is provided at the central portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4341. The positioning protrusion P4343 has a shape in which the left-right dimension becomes smaller toward the bottom when viewed from the front.

The reinforcing cover P4400 shown in FIGS. 171 and 183 and 184 connects the left side moving unit P4110 and the right side moving unit P4160. The reinforcing cover P4400 is arranged on the lower portion of the rear surface of the game board P1100. Further, the reinforcing cover P4400 is arranged in front of the movable body P4300. The reinforcing cover P4400 includes a main body portion P4410, a regulating means P4420, and a notch portion P4430.

The main body P4410 constitutes most of the reinforcing cover P4400. The main body P4410 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. Further, the main body portion P4410 has a long shape in the left-right direction. Both ends of the main body P4410 in the left-right direction are fixed to the lower portion of the left side moving unit P4110 and the lower part of the right side moving unit P4160 via appropriate fasteners.

The regulating means P4420 restricts the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction within a predetermined movement range by contacting the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 in a predetermined case. The regulating means P4420 constitutes a pair of wall portions separated in the left-right direction. The regulating means P4420 is provided so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the main body P4410. Further, the regulating means P4420 is arranged to the left of the central portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4410. Further, as shown in FIG. 171, the regulating means P4420 is located to the left of the central portion in the left-right direction in the opening region 1d of the game board P1100. The regulating means P4420 includes a first wall portion P4421, a second wall portion P4422, and a third wall portion P4423.

The first wall portion P4421 constitutes the upper portion of the regulating means P4420. The first wall portion P4421 makes it possible to limit the movement of the movable body P4300 in the effect position in the left-right direction within the first range R1 which is a range between the left and right first wall portions P4421. The first wall portion P4421 is formed closer to the effect position than the standby position.

The first wall portion P4421 has a shape extending linearly in the vertical direction. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion P4421 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the first range R1 has a shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical dimension of the first wall portion P4421 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 in the front view.

The second wall portion P4422 constitutes the lower portion of the regulatory means P4420. The second wall portion P4422 moves the movable body P4300 that moves in the vertical direction from the standby position to the substantially central portion in the vertical direction in the regulating means P4420, and moves between the left and right second wall portions P4422. It is possible to limit within the second range R2 which is a range. The second wall portion P4422 is formed closer to the standby position than the effect position.

The second wall portion P4422 has a shape extending linearly in the vertical direction. The distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the width of the second range R2 in the left-right direction is formed smaller than the width of the first range R1 in the left-right direction. Further, the vertical dimension of the second wall portion P4422 is formed to be larger than the distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422. That is, the second range R2 has a shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 in the front view.

The third wall portion P4423 constitutes a portion between the first wall portion P4421 and the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 moves the movable body P4300 that moves in the vertical direction between the first range R1 and the second range R2 in the horizontal direction, and the range between the left and right third wall portions P4423. It is possible to limit it within the third range R3.

The third wall portion P4423 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first wall portion P4421 and the upper end portion of the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 has a curved shape so that the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 gradually decreases as the distance decreases downward (so that the width of the third range R3 becomes narrower). To. Further, the third wall portion P4423 has an arc shape that is convex toward the center in the left-right direction of the third range R3 when viewed from the front. Further, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 are continuous so that no corner is formed. Further, the vertical dimension of the third wall portion P4423 and the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 are formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 in the front view.

The cutout portion P4430 is a portion formed in a notch shape at the lower end portion of the main body portion P4410. The cutout portion P4430 is formed in a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4410. As shown in FIG. 171, a starting port (first starting port P1350) through which the game ball wins (passes) is arranged in the cutout portion P4430.

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIG. 171 is located at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction in the opening region 1d of the game board P1100. Further, below the first starting port P1350 on the rear surface of the game board P1100, a positioning recess P4001 for receiving the positioning protrusion P4343 of the movable body P4300 in the standby state is provided. By accepting the positioning protrusion P4343 by the positioning recess P4001, the movable body P4300 can be positioned in the standby state.

Hereinafter, the movement control of the effect device P4000 configured as described above will be described. In the following, the movement control for moving the movable body P4300, which is the standby position, at the effect position will be described.

In the standby position shown in FIG. 171, the movable body P4300 is located below the opening region 1d of the game board P1100 (a position overlapping the lower portion of the game board P1100) in the front view. In the standby position, the movable body P4300 is hidden behind the game board P1100 and is in a position that is difficult for the player to see. In this state, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 189 (a), the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is located in the second range R2 in the regulating means P4420.

First, the movement control by the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 will be described. When the first motor P4130 is driven, the second gear P4143 rotates about the axis through the output gears P4141 and the first gear P4142 that are meshed with each other as shown in FIG. 172.

The rotation of the second gear P4143 is transmitted to the rack portion P4240 of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 189 (b), the movable body P4300 moves upward via the left-right movement control mechanism P4200.

As described above, when the movable body P4300 is moved and controlled upward, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves upward in the second range R2 and the third range R3 in the regulating means P4420.

By controlling the movement as described above, the movable body P4300 becomes the effect position. In the effect position, the movable body P4300 is in a position that can be visually recognized by the player in the lower portion of the opening region 1d. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 185, the movable body P4300 is located at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction in the opening region 1d.

Next, the movement control by the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 will be described. When the second motor P4260 is driven, the second gear P4273 rotates about the axis through the output gears P4271 and the first gear P4272 which are meshed with each other as shown in FIG. 176. The rotation of the second gear P4273 is transmitted to the belt P4274 wound around the second gear P4273 and the tension pulley P4275, and the belt P4274 rotates. As a result, the movable body P4300 engaged with the belt P4274 is moved and controlled to the right as shown in, for example, FIGS. 186 and 190 (a).

Further, if the second motor P4260 is driven so as to rotate in the reverse direction to the movement control described above, the movable body P4300 is moved and controlled to the left as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190 (b). To. In this way, the movable body P4300 can be moved and controlled in the left-right direction at the effect position.

As described above, when the movable body P4300 at the effect position is moved and controlled in the left-right direction, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves in the left-right direction in the first range R1 in the regulating means P4420. The movable body P4300 is moved and controlled in the left-right direction so that the contact portion P4342 does not come into contact with the left and right first wall portions P4421. The regulating means P4420 may be configured to regulate the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction within a predetermined range over the entire movable range of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction. For example, no matter where the movable body P4300 is located in the effect position, the movable body P4300 is shaped so that the movement in the left-right direction is restricted within the first range R1 by the first wall portion P4421. Regulatory means P4420 may be formed. Further, the regulated range may be different depending on the place where the movable body P4300 is located.

Next, the movement control in which the movable body P4300, which is the effect position, is set as the standby position will be described. In the following example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190 (b), the movable body P4300 whose movement is controlled to the left at the effect position is moved and controlled to the standby position.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191 the movable body P4300 is moved diagonally downward when the movable body P4300 set as the effect position is set as the standby position. At this time, the movement control to the right by the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 and the downward movement control by the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 are performed at the same time.

As described above, when the movable body P4300 is controlled to move diagonally downward, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves diagonally downward in the third range R3 of the regulating means P4420. The movable body P4300 is moved and controlled so that the contact portion P4342 does not come into contact with the left and right third wall portions P4423.

As described above, by moving the movable body P4300 diagonally downward, the movable body P4300 can be positioned at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the opening region 1d. Next, the movable body P4300 is moved and controlled downward by the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 so as to be in the standby position.

As described above, when the movable body P4300 is moved and controlled downward, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves downward in the second range R2 in the regulating means P4420.

According to the effect device P4000 as described above, the range in which the movable body P4300 can move in the left-right direction is set to the left and right wall portions (first wall portion P4421, second wall portion P4422, and third wall portion P4422) constituting the regulating means P4420. It can be limited to the range (first range R1, second range R2 and third range R3) between the wall portions P4423). As a result, even when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the regulating means P4420, and the movable body P4300 can be moved. It is possible to prevent the game board P1100 from coming into contact with other members.

Further, the width of the second range R2 is narrower than the width of the first range R1 in the regulating means P4420. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is positioned in the standby position, the movement of the movable body P4300 is restricted within a relatively narrow range, so that a space for arranging other members can be secured around the regulating means P4420. At the same time, by widening the range in which the movable body P4300 can be moved in the left-right direction at the effect position, the effect mode can be varied.

Further, since the regulating means P4420 third wall portion P4423 has a curved surface shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be made continuous so that no corners are formed. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the production position and the standby position, an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 becomes the third wall portion. When in contact with P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 can be smoothly guided by the third wall portion P4423. Further, in the present embodiment, the third wall portion P4423 has an arc shape that is convex toward the center in the left-right direction of the third range R3. As a result, it is possible to secure a relatively wide space for arranging other members on the outside of the third wall portion P4423.

Further, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324 of the movable body P4300 (a position displaced in the left-right direction (left side) from the guide portion P4324). As a result, the contact portion P4342 and the guide portion P4324 overlap to increase the thickness of the movable body P4300, so that an extra moving space is not required in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and another space is used in that space. Members can be placed. Further, since the impact when the contact portion P4342 and the regulating means P4420 come into contact with each other is not directly applied to the guide portion P4324, the guide portion P4324 is damaged or the engagement between the guide portion P4324 and the belt P4274 is defective. It can be prevented from occurring.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, the technology of a game machine including a movable object (movable body) configured to be movable has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-1934 includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case capable of accommodating the movable accessory, and a gaming machine capable of accommodating the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. Is disclosed.

However, in such a gaming machine, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to a movable accessory, there is a risk that the gaming machine may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other gaming members and be damaged. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between the standby position and the production position,
A movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300, and
Regulatory means P4420 that regulates the movement of the movable body P4300, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The movable body P4300 is moved in a vertical direction (first direction), which is a moving direction from the standby position to the effect position, and in a left-right direction (second direction) different from the vertical direction at the effect position. Movable and
The movable body P4300 has an abutting portion P4342 capable of contacting the regulating means P4420.
The regulating means P4420 limits the distance at which the movable body P4300 can move in the left-right direction within a predetermined range by abutting against the contact portion P4342.
The predetermined range is narrowed as the movable body P4300 moves from the effect position to the standby position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body P4300 from coming into contact with other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the regulating means P4420, and the movable body P4300 can play the game. It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, the width of the second range R2 is narrower than the width of the first range R1 in the regulating means P4420. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is positioned in the standby position, the movement of the movable body P4300 is restricted within a relatively narrow range, so that a space for arranging other members can be secured around the regulating means P4420. At the same time, by widening the range in which the movable body P4300 can be moved in the left-right direction at the effect position, the effect mode can be varied.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, the technology of a game machine including a movable object (movable body) configured to be movable has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-1934 includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case capable of accommodating the movable accessory, and a gaming machine capable of accommodating the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. Is disclosed.

However, in such a gaming machine, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to a movable accessory, there is a risk that the gaming machine may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other gaming members and be damaged. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between the standby position and the production position,
A movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300, and
Regulatory means P4420 that regulates the movement of the movable body P4300, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
A vertical movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the effect position by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction.
A left-right movement control mechanism P4200 (second movement control means) capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction, and
Including
The movable body P4300 has an abutting portion P4342 capable of contacting the regulating means P4420.
The restricting means P4420 can limit the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction by abutting against the contact portion P4342, is formed closer to the effect position than the standby position, and is formed on the left and right sides of the movable body P4300. The first wall portion P4421 capable of limiting the movement in the direction within the first range R1 and the movable body P4300 formed closer to the standby position than the effect position, and the movement in the left-right direction of the movable body P4300 is the first range. A second wall portion P4422 which is narrower in the left-right direction than R1 and can be restricted within the second range R2, and has a curved surface continuous with the first wall portion P4421 and the second wall portion P4422. It has a wall portion P4423 of 3.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body P4300 from coming into contact with other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the regulating means P4420, and the movable body P4300 can play the game. It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, by forming the third wall portion P4423 into a curved surface shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be made continuous so that no corners are formed. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the production position and the standby position, an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 becomes the third wall portion. When in contact with P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 can be smoothly guided by the third wall portion P4423.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, the technology of a game machine including a movable object (movable body) configured to be movable has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-1934 includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case capable of accommodating the movable accessory, and a gaming machine capable of accommodating the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. Is disclosed.

However, in such a gaming machine, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to a movable accessory, there is a risk that the gaming machine may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other gaming members and be damaged. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between the standby position and the production position,
A movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300, and
Regulatory means P4420 that regulates the movement of the movable body P4300, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
An elevating movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the effect position by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction (first direction).
The movable body P4300 includes a left-right movement control mechanism P4200 (second movement control means) capable of moving and controlling the movable body P4300 in a left-right direction (second direction) different from the direction of movement control by the up-and-down movement control mechanism P4100.
The movable body P4300 has an abutting portion P4342 capable of contacting the regulating means P4420 and a guide portion P4324 for guiding in the left-right direction.
The regulating means P4420 limits the distance at which the movable body P4300 can move in the left-right direction within a predetermined range by abutting against the contact portion P4342.
The contact portion P4342 is provided in the movable body P4300 at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body P4300 from coming into contact with other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the regulating means P4420, and the movable body P4300 can play the game. It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, it is possible to secure a movable range of the movable body P4300, and it is possible to effectively use the space below the guide portion P4324 while the movable body P4300 is located at the standby position. That is, it is necessary to provide an unnecessary moving space in the depth direction by providing the contact portion P4342 and the regulating means P4420 at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324 (a position displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the guide portion P4324). Can be placed and other members can be placed.

The elevating movement control mechanism P4100 is a form of the first movement control means.
Further, the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is a form of the second movement control means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement control by the elevating movement control mechanism P4100 and the movement control by the left / right movement control mechanism P4200 are not limited to the above-described aspects. For example, the order of each movement control may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the movable body P4300 may be movable and controlled in an oblique direction, and various directions can be adopted as the direction in which the movable body P4300 is moved and controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body P4300 is modeled after a fighter aircraft, but the shape of the movable body P4300 is not limited to such a mode, and various shapes can be adopted.

Hereinafter, the gaming board P1100 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment in that it has a different accessory from the upper movable effecting accessory P2000 and the rotating accessory P3000. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment has, as accessories, a movable effect accessory P5000 (lower accessory device P5100, right part accessory device P5200, and upper left accessory device P5300) and an effect device P6000. To be equipped.

Hereinafter, the movable effecting accessory P5000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 204.

In FIG. 195, the accessory decorative body P5111 is not shown for convenience. Further, in FIG. 197, the base member P5130 is not shown for convenience. Further, in FIG. 201 (and FIGS. 205 to 207 described later), the link arm P5120 and the base member P5130 are not shown for convenience. Further, in FIGS. 202 to 204, the illustration of the accessory decorative body P5111 is omitted for convenience.

As described above, the movable effect accessory P5000 shown in FIG. 192 includes a lower accessory device P5100, a right accessory device P5200, and an upper left accessory device P5300.

[Lower accessory device P5100]
First, the configuration of the lower accessory device P5100 will be described.

The lower accessory device P5100 shown in FIGS. 192 to 198 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The lower accessory device P5100 is provided on the lower portion of the game board P1100 with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The lower accessory device P5100 includes a lower accessory P5110, a link arm P5120, a base member P5130, a crank gear P5140, a motor gear P5150, a rotary drive motor P5160, a cover member P5170, and a screw P5180. Although the details will be described later, in the lower accessory device P5100, the lower accessory P5110 is formed so as to be displaceable between the standby position and the effect position. In the following, the lower accessory P5110 is in the standby position. The explanation will be given based on the condition.

The lower accessory P5110 shown in FIGS. 193 to 200 and 202 is to produce an effect by moving. The lower accessory P5110 includes an accessory decorative body P5111, an accessory illumination substrate P5112, a rear cover P5113, and an accessory control arm P5114.

The accessory decorative body P5111, shown in FIGS. 194 and 200, constitutes the front portion of the lower accessory P5110 and is a portion visually visible to the player. The accessory decorative body P5111 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens). The accessory decorative body P5111 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left-right (more specifically, the accessory decorative body P5111 is slightly downward to the right). The accessory decorative body P5111 is appropriately decorated.

The accessory illumination substrate P5112 shown in FIGS. 195 and 200 is provided so that the plate surface thereof faces the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction is slightly downward to the right. The accessory illumination substrate P5112 is provided behind the accessory decoration P5111. A plurality of LEDs P5112a are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board P5112 over substantially the entire area of the accessory illumination substrate P5112. By causing the LED P5112a to emit light, it is possible to irradiate the front of the accessory illumination substrate P5112 with light. By irradiating light from the LED P5112a of the accessory illumination substrate P5112, the accessory decoration P5111 can be illuminated as a whole.

The rear cover P5113 shown in FIGS. 195 to 200 and 202 is a portion constituting the rear portion of the lower accessory P5110. The rear cover P5113 is provided behind the accessory illumination board P5112 and supports the accessory illumination board P5112. The rear cover P5113 includes a rear cover main body P5113A, an arm portion P5113B, a first boss portion P5113a, a second boss portion P5113b, a third boss portion P5113c, and a fourth boss portion P5113d.

The rear cover main body P5113A shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 constitutes the main structure of the rear cover P5113. The rear cover main body P5113A is provided with the longitudinal direction facing left and right.

The arm portion P5113B shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 is formed so as to extend downward from substantially the center of the left and right sides of the rear cover main body P5113A.

The first boss portion P5113a shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 of the link arm P5120 described later and the first control hole P5131 of the base member P5130 described later. The first boss portion P5113a is formed so as to project rearward from the left portion of the rear cover main body P5113A. The first boss portion P5113a is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed in the front-rear direction.

The second boss portion P5113b shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted into the second control hole P5132 of the base member P5130, which will be described later. The second boss portion P5113b is formed so as to project rearward from the upper and lower halfway portions of the arm portion P5113B. The second boss portion P5113b is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The second boss portion P5113b is provided on the lower right side of the first boss portion P5113a.

The third boss portion P5113c shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a of the accessory control arm P5114, which will be described later. The third boss portion P5113c is formed so as to project rearward from the substantially central portion of the rear cover main body P5113A. The third boss portion P5113c is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The third boss portion P5113c is provided to the right of the first boss portion P5113a and above the second boss portion P5113b.

The fourth boss portion P5113d shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is inserted into the control hole P5114b of the accessory control arm P5114, which will be described later. The fourth boss portion P5113d is formed so as to project rearward from the right portion of the rear cover main body P5113A. The fourth boss portion P5113d is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The fourth boss portion P5113d is provided to the right and below the third boss portion P5113c (and the first boss portion P5113a) and above the second boss portion P5113b.

The accessory control arm P5114 shown in FIGS. 197 to 200 and 202 is for smoothly moving the lower accessory P5110. The accessory control arm P5114 is provided behind the rear cover P5113. The accessory control arm P5114 includes a rotation shaft hole P5114a, a control hole P5114b, and a boss portion P5114c.

The rotation shaft hole P5114a shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is provided on the left side of the accessory control arm P5114. The rotation shaft hole P5114a is formed so as to penetrate the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. The third boss portion P5113c of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the rotating shaft hole P5114a (see FIG. 200).

The control holes P5114b shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 are formed in an arc shape (partially annular) centered on the rotation shaft hole P5114a in the rear view. The control hole P5114b is formed so as to penetrate the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. The control hole P5114b is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft hole P5114a. The fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the control hole P5114b (see FIGS. 200 and 202).

The boss portion P5114c shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is inserted into the second control hole P5132 of the base member P5130, which will be described later. The boss portion P5114c is formed so as to project rearward from the right portion of the accessory control arm P5114. The boss portion P5114c is provided to the right and below the rotation shaft hole P5114a and the control hole P5114b.

In this way, the accessory control arm P5114 is rotatably provided with respect to the rear cover P5113 about the axis of the third boss portion P5113c inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a.

The link arm P5120 shown in FIGS. 194, 195, 197 to 199 and 202 transmits a driving force to the lower accessory P5110. The link arm P5120 is provided with the longitudinal direction oriented substantially vertically. The link arm P5120 is provided behind the left portion of the lower accessory P5110. The link arm P5120 includes a rotation shaft P5121, a first elongated hole P5122, and a second elongated hole P5123.

The rotation shaft P5121 shown in FIGS. 199 to 199 and 202 is a portion serving as a rotation center of the link arm P5120. The rotation shaft P5121 is formed so as to project rearward from the lower portion of the link arm P5120. The rotating shaft P5121 is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft P5121 includes a through hole P5121a.

The through hole P5121a shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 is through which the shaft P5133 provided in the base member P5130, which will be described later, is inserted. The through hole P5121a is formed so as to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction at the center of the rotation shaft P5121.

The first elongated hole P5122 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and 202 is an elongated hole extending vertically in the upper part of the link arm P5120. The first elongated hole P5122 is formed so as to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction. The first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second elongated hole P5123 shown in FIGS. 199 to 199 and 202 is through which the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140, which will be described later, is inserted. The second elongated hole P5123 is an elongated hole extending substantially vertically in the lower portion of the link arm P5120. More specifically, the second elongated hole P5123 is formed so that its upper portion is slightly inclined to the left. The second elongated hole P5123 is formed so as to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction. The second elongated hole P5123 is provided below the first elongated hole P5122.

The base member P5130 shown in FIGS. 194 to 196 and 198 constitutes the rear portion of the lower accessory device P5100. The base member P5130 is provided with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The base member P5130 includes a first control hole P5131, a second control hole P5132, and a shaft P5133.

The first control hole P5131 shown in FIGS. 196, 198 and 202 is an elongated hole formed substantially in the center of the base member P5130 in the left-right direction. The first control hole P5131 is formed in a linear shape with the longitudinal direction (stretching direction) oriented substantially in the left-right direction. More specifically, the first control hole P5131 is formed so as to be slightly downward-sloping. The first control hole P5131 is formed so as to penetrate the base member P5130 back and forth. The first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the first control hole P5131 (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second control hole P5132 shown in FIGS. 196, 198, and 202 is formed in an arc shape that descends to the left in the rear view. The second control hole P5132 is formed so that its right end (upper end) is located to the right and above the first control hole P5131. The second control hole P5132 is formed so that its left end (lower end) is located below the first control hole P5131 and between the right end and the left end of the first control hole P5131 in the left-right direction. The second boss portion P5113b of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the second control hole P5132. Further, the boss portion P5114c of the accessory control arm P5114 is inserted into the second control hole P5132 (see FIGS. 196 and 202).

The shaft P5133 shown in FIGS. 195 and 198 is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft P5133 is provided with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The shaft P5133 is fitted to the base member P5130 so as to project forward from the base member P5130. The shaft P5133 is inserted into the through hole P5121a of the rotation shaft P5121 of the link arm P5120 (see FIG. 198).

In this way, the base member P5130 supports the link arm P5120 so as to be swingable to the left and right about the axis of the shaft P5133.

The crank gear P5140 shown in FIGS. 195, 197 to 199 and 202 transmits a driving force to the link arm P5120. The crank gear P5140 is provided with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The crank gear P5140 includes a gear portion P5141 and a crank portion P5142.

The gear portion P5141 shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 is a portion that meshes with the motor gear P5150 described later. The gear portion P5141 is formed in a substantially columnar shape, and is formed so that teeth are provided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The gear portion P5141 is provided on the right portion of the crank gear P5140 with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The gear portion P5141 includes a through hole P5141a.

The through hole P5141a shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is through which the shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170, which will be described later, is inserted. The through hole P5141a is provided in the right portion of the crank gear P5140 (center of the gear portion P5141). The through hole P5141a is formed so as to penetrate the gear portion P5141 in the front-rear direction.

The crank portion P5142 shown in FIG. 202 is formed so as to project rearward from the left portion of the crank gear P5140. The crank portion P5142 is provided on the lower left side of the through hole P5141a. The crank portion P5142 is inserted into the second elongated hole P5123 of the link arm P5120.

The motor gear P5150 shown in FIGS. 199 to 199 and 202 transmits a driving force to the crank gear P5140. The motor gear P5150 is provided on the lower right side of the crank gear P5140 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The motor gear P5150 is provided so as to mesh with the gear portion P5141 of the crank gear P5140.

The rotary drive motor P5160 shown in FIGS. 193 to 195 and 198 rotates the motor gear P5150. The rotary drive motor P5160 is provided in front of the motor gear P5150 with the output shaft P5161 facing rearward. A motor gear P5150 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P5161. The rotary drive motor P5160 is fixed to a cover member P5170, which will be described later.

The cover member P5170 shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, 197, 198 and 201 constitutes the front portion of the lower accessory device P5100. The cover member P5170 is provided with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The cover member P5170 is provided so as to cover the lower portion of the base member P5130 from the front, and is fixed to the base member P5130. The cover member P5170 includes a cover main body P5171, a bearing portion P5172, a shaft portion P5173, a screw hole P5174, and a rib P5175.

The cover main body P5171 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 constitutes a main structure of the cover member P5170. The cover body P5171 is provided with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction.

The bearing portion P5172 shown in FIG. 198 serves as a bearing for the shaft P5133 provided on the base member P5130. The bearing portion P5172 is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the cover main body P5171. The bearing portion P5172 is provided at a position corresponding to the shaft P5133 provided on the base member P5130, and the shaft P5133 is fitted to the inner peripheral surface side of the bearing portion P5172.

The shaft portion P5173 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion P5173 is provided with the axis line directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P5173 is formed so as to project rearward from the inner bottom surface P5171a (see FIG. 201) of the cover main body P5171. The shaft portion P5173 is integrally molded with the cover main body P5171. The shaft portion P5173 is inserted into the through hole P5141a of the crank gear P5140. At this time, the crank gear P5140 is inserted into the shaft portion P5173 so that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is located in front of the top portion (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173.

The screw hole P5174 shown in FIG. 201 is for inserting the screw P5180, which will be described later. The screw hole P5174 is formed in the central portion of the shaft portion P5173 in the rear view. A female screw portion is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174. The screw hole P5174 is formed so as to extend forward from the rear end portion of the shaft portion P5173. A part of the screw hole P5174 is formed in the cover body P5171. More specifically, the screw hole P5174 is formed so as to extend from the rear end of the shaft portion P5173 to the front of the inner bottom surface P5711a of the cover main body P5711 and to the rear of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5711. .. That is, the screw hole P5174 is formed from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover main body P5171.

The rib P5175 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed so as to project rearward from the periphery of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is formed in an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion P5173 in the rear view. The height of the rib P5175 is formed to be lower than the height of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is provided so as to be in contact with the front surface of the gear portion P5141.

The screw P5180 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 fixes the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170 in a rotatable state. The screw P5180 includes a screw shaft portion P5181 and a screw head P5182.

A male screw portion is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. The screw shaft portion P5181 is inserted into the screw hole P5174 and screwed into the screw hole P5174. The screw shaft portion P5181 is formed to have substantially the same length as the screw hole P5174.

As a result, the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174, which is provided on the shaft portion P5173 (rear portion and midway front and rear), and on the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174, which is provided on the cover body P5171. Contact both (front). That is, the screw shaft portion P5181 (screw P5180) is provided so as to straddle both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171. Further, the tip end (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174 (see FIG. 201).

The screw head P5182 is formed so that its diameter is larger than the diameter of the shaft portion P5173. The screw head P5182 is provided so as to abut the tip (rear end) of the shaft portion P5173. At this time, a gap is provided between the screw head P5174a and the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140.

The cover member P5170 and the screw P5180 formed in this way rotatably support (fix) the crank gear P5140 around the shaft portion P5173.

[Right part accessory device P5200]
The right accessory device P5200 shown in FIG. 192 is provided on the right portion of the game board P1100 with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. Since the configuration of the right accessory device P5200 is substantially the same as that of the lower accessory device P5100, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Upper left part accessory device P5300]
The upper left accessory device P5300 shown in FIG. 192 is provided on the upper left portion of the game board P1100 with the longitudinal direction oriented substantially vertically. Since the configuration of the left upper accessory device P5300 is almost the same as that of the lower accessory device P5100, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Operation of lower accessory device P5100 during production]
Hereinafter, the operation of the lower accessory device P5100 when performing the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 204.

The lower accessory P5110 of the lower accessory device P5100 can be displaced between a state before the effect (see FIG. 202) and a state in which the effect is performed (see FIG. 204). In the following, the positions of the lower accessory P5110, the link arm P5120, and the crank gear P5140 in the state before the effect (see FIG. 202) are referred to as "accessory standby position", "arm standby position", and "gear standby position", respectively. It is called. Further, the positions of the lower accessory P5110, the link arm P5120, and the crank gear P5140 in the state of performing the effect (see FIG. 204) are referred to as the "character effect position", the "arm effect position", and the "gear effect position", respectively. Refer to.

Most of the lower accessory P5110 is located behind the game board P1100 in the accessory standby position shown in FIG. 202, and only a part of the lower accessory P5110 is visible to the player.

When performing the effect, first, the rotary drive motor P5160 (see FIG. 198 and the like) is driven. As a result, the motor gear P5150 fixed to the output shaft P5161 of the rotary drive motor P5160 rotates. Then, the crank gear P5140 (crank gear P5140 in the gear standby position) that meshes with the motor gear P5150 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear with the axis of the through hole P5141a (shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170) as the center.

Then, the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140 moves substantially upward inside the second elongated hole P5123 of the link arm P5120 in the arm standby position. When the crank portion P5142 presses the inner peripheral surface of the second elongated hole P5123, the link arm P5120 rotates counterclockwise with respect to the axis of the rotation shaft P5121 (shaft P5133 provided on the base member P5130). Rotate (see FIG. 203).

Then, the first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 of the link arm P5120 is pressed substantially to the right. In this way, the link arm P5120 transmits the driving force of the rotary drive motor P5160 to the lower accessory P5110 (rear cover P5113), so that the first boss portion P5113a of the lower accessory P5110 becomes the first control hole P5131. The inside is moved (downward to the right) along the extending direction of the first control hole P5131. Further, the second boss portion P5113b of the lower accessory P51 10 moves inside the second control hole P5132 along the extending direction of the second control hole P5132 (upward to the right). By doing so, the lower accessory P5110 that was in the accessory standby position moves upward to the right while changing the inclination so that the height of the right portion of the lower accessory P5110 becomes higher (see FIG. 203).

Further, when the lower accessory P5110 moves upward to the right while changing the inclination, the accessory control arm P5114 moves the rear cover P5113 around the axis of the third boss portion P5113c of the rear cover P5113 inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a. It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back. By rotating the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113, the lower accessory P5110 can be smoothly moved. The relative movement of the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113 is regulated by the control hole P5114b and the fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113.

In this way, the crank gear P5140 moves to the gear effect position shown in FIG. 204, and the link arm P5120 moves to the arm effect position shown in FIG. 204, whereby the lower accessory P5110 is moved to the accessory effect shown in FIG. 204. It can be moved to a position. Most of the lower accessory P5110 is visible to the player at the accessory production position shown in FIG. 204.

At the end of the production, the lower accessory P5110, the link arm P5120, and the crank gear P5140 are moved from the standby position (accessory standby position, arm standby position, and gear standby position) to the effect position (accessory effect position, arm effect), respectively. The operation is opposite to that when moving to the position (position and gear effect position). As a result, the lower accessory P51 10 moves from the accessory effect position shown in FIG. 204 to the accessory standby position shown in FIG. 202.

As described above, the link arm P5120 is displaced between the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) and the arm effect position (see FIG. 204) each time the effect is executed and ended, so that the shaft portion of the cover member P5170 is displaced. The swing is repeated many times around P5173. Then, a large force is applied to the shaft portion P5173 due to the swing of the link arm P5120.

Here, in the present embodiment, the screw P5180 comes into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171 (so as to straddle both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171) to fix the crank gear P5140. Therefore, the force applied to the root of the shaft portion P5173 can be received by the screw P5180. Therefore, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the shaft portion P5173 from being broken from the root. The shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171 may be formed of separate members so as to be fixed to each other. Further, the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171 may be configured to be fixed to different members.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, the technology of gaming machines such as pachinko machines has been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-180975.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-180975 discloses a gaming machine in which a movable body can rotate with respect to a predetermined member by inserting a shaft portion provided in the movable body into a bearing portion provided in the predetermined member. ing.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
Crank gear P5140 (movable body) and
A cover member P5170 (base portion) to which the crank gear P5140 can be mounted and
A shaft portion P5173 (receiving portion) provided on the cover member P5170 and to which the crank gear P5140 can be attached,
A screw P5180 (fixing means) capable of fixing the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170 in an movable state, and
It is equipped with.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
Further, in the present embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is fixed to the shaft portion P5173 in a rotatable state. Then, by rotating the crank gear P5140, the lower accessory P5110 can be moved to a position (effect position) visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the production content.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is a shaft portion P5173 that is erected from the cover member P5170 (cover body P5711).
The crank gear P5140 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion P5173.
The screw P5180 comes into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover member P5170 to fix the crank gear P5140.

According to such a configuration, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed by dispersing the force applied to the shaft portion P5173.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 includes both a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the shaft portion P5173 and a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover main body P5711. Contact. As a result, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be dispersed, and by extension, the shaft portion P5173 can be prevented from breaking from the root.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is integrally molded with the cover member P5170 (cover body P5171).

According to such a configuration, the number of members can be reduced.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw hole P5174 is formed from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover body P5171). Therefore, by integrally molding the shaft portion P5173 with the cover member P5170, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the cover body P5711 side and the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the shaft portion P5173 side. As a result, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 includes a screw hole P5174 (hole portion) into which the screw P5180 can be inserted.
The crank gear P5140 is fixed to the cover member P5170 by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174.

According to such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw hole P5174 is formed from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover body P5171). By inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174 formed in this way, the screw P5180 covers the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the shaft portion P5173 and the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174. The crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed in a state of being in contact with both of the portions provided on the main body P5171.

Further, the hole portion is a screw hole P5174, and is
The screw P5180 is a screw inserted into the screw hole P5174, and the crank gear P5140 is fixed by the screw head P5182 of the screw P5180.

According to such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170 by the screw head P5182 of the screw P5180.
Further, in the present embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is inserted into the shaft portion P5173 so that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is located in front of the top portion (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173. Therefore, when the screw head P5182 comes into contact with the top portion (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173, the crank gear P5140 can be fixed in a rotatable state rather than an inoperable state.
Further, in the present embodiment, the rib P5175 is provided so as to be in contact with the front surface of the gear portion P5141. Therefore, the position of the crank gear P5140 in the front-rear direction can be regulated by the screw head P5182 and the rib P5175. Further, by receiving the force from the crank gear P5140 by the rib P5175, the force (burden) applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be reduced.

Further, the screw hole P5174 is formed from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover body P5171).

According to such a configuration, by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174, the screw P5180 can be easily brought into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided on both the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the shaft portion P5173 and the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover main body P5711. Along with the contact, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided so as to abut the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174. As a result, the space portion of the screw hole P5174 can be filled, and the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be received by both the outer peripheral surface and the bottom surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. Therefore, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the crank gear P5140 is provided with a crank portion P5142 (crank portion) that can operate at the gear standby position (first position) shown in FIG. 202 and the gear effect position (second position) shown in FIG. 204. It is a rotary gear.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, other members can be operated by the crank portion P5142.
Further, in the present embodiment, the crank gear P5140 can be displaced to the gear standby position (first position) and the gear effect position (second position) by rotating the motor gear P5150 by the rotary drive motor P5160. ..

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is brought into the arm standby position (third position) shown in FIG. 202 and the arm effect position (fourth position) shown in FIG. 204 by contacting the crank portion P5142. It is provided with a movable link arm P5120 (second movable body).

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the link arm P5120 can be operated by the crank portion P5142.
Further, in the present embodiment, the link arm P5120 is displaced to the gear standby position (first position) and the gear effect position (second position) by shifting the crank gear P5140 to the arm standby position (third position). And the arm effect position (fourth position).

Further, when the link arm P5120 comes into contact with the link arm P5120, the accessory standby position (fifth position) shown in FIG. 202 and the accessory effect position shown in FIG. It is provided with a lower accessory P5110 (third movable body) that can operate at (sixth position).

According to such a configuration, the lower accessory P5110 can be operated by operating the link arm P5120.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first control hole P5131 of the base member P5130 is formed in a linear shape, and the second control hole P5132 is formed in an arc shape. The first boss portion P51 13a of the lower accessory P51 10 is inserted into the first control hole P5131, and the second boss portion P5113b and the boss portion P5114c are inserted into the second control hole P5132. By controlling the operation of the lower accessory P5110 by the linear hole and the arc-shaped hole in this way, the lower accessory P5110 moves to a position visible to the player while changing the inclination. Therefore, the fun of the production can be improved.
Further, in the present embodiment, the lower accessory P5110 includes an accessory control arm P5114 rotatably provided with respect to the rear cover P5113, and the rear cover P5113 (second boss portion P5113b) and the accessory control. It is supported by the arm P5114 (boss portion P5114c) and the second control hole P5132 of the base member P5130. As a result, the lower accessory P51 10 can be smoothly moved along the second control hole P5132. Further, the lower accessory P5110 is supported by the first control hole P5131 and the second control hole P5132 at a plurality of locations (three points of the first boss portion P5113a, the second boss portion P5113b, and the boss portion P5114c). , The stability of the posture of the lower accessory P5110 can be improved.

Further, the link arm P5120 is a swinging member that swings.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the link arm P5120 can be swung by the crank portion P5142.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the link arm P5120 moves from the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) to the arm effect position (see FIG. 204), the lower accessory P5110 is in the accessory standby position (see FIG. 202). (Position that substantially overlaps with the lower accessory P5110 in the rear view). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a new space for swinging the link arm P5120, so that space can be saved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 is in contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174, but the screw shaft portion P5181 is attached to the shaft portion P5173 of the inner peripheral surfaces of the screw hole P5174. If it is in contact with both the provided portion and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover main body P5711 (if it is provided so as to straddle both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5711). As shown in FIG. 205, it does not have to be in contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174.

Further, in the present embodiment, the screw hole P5174 of the shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170 is formed so as to extend to the front of the inner bottom surface P5711a of the cover body P5711 and to the rear of the outer bottom surface P5711b of the cover body P5711. However, as shown in FIG. 206, it may be formed so as to penetrate the cover main body P5711 (extend to the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5711). This makes it possible to facilitate the processing of the screw hole P5174.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 206, the screw P5180 may be provided so as to penetrate to the front of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5711. As a result, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be easily received by the screw P5180. Alternatively, even when the screw hole P5174 penetrates the cover main body P5171, the screw P5180 extends to the front of the inner bottom surface P5711a of the cover main body P5711 and outside the cover main body P5711 as shown in FIG. 207. It may be provided so as to extend to the rear of the bottom surface P5171b.

As described above, in another example of the present embodiment, the screw hole P5174 is provided so as to penetrate the cover member P5170.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the processing of the screw hole P5174.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 206, the screw P5180 is provided so as to penetrate to the front of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5171. As a result, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be easily received by the screw P5180, and the damage of the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing means (screw P5180) according to the present invention fixes the movable body (crank gear P5140) in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft portion (shaft portion P5173). The movable body to be fixed by the fixing means is not limited to a rotatable one, and may be capable of any movement (for example, linear movement). For example, the fixing means according to the present invention can also be applied to fixing the link arm P5120 and the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140. Further, the fixing means according to the present invention can also be applied to fixing the base member P5130 and the lower accessory P5110.

[Direction device P6000]
Hereinafter, the effect device P6000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192, 208 to 233.

In the drawings (for example, FIG. 213, etc.) used in the following description, the members may be appropriately colored for convenience in order to clarify the outer shell of each member.

The effect device P6000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. As shown in FIG. 192, the effect device P6000 is installed on the game board P1100. More specifically, the effect device P6000 is installed above the opening region 1d of the game board P1100. The effect device P6000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the opening / closing accessory P6300 and the decorative accessory P6600, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 208 to 213, the effect device P6000 includes a base portion P6100, an opening / closing control means P6200, an opening / closing accessory P6300, a bullet control means P6400, a bullet accessory P6500, a decorative accessory P6600, and a fixed decorative portion P6700. Equipped.

The base portion P6100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 is provided with an opening / closing control means P6200, an opening / closing accessory P6300, a bullet control means P6400, a bullet accessory P6500, a decorative accessory P6600, and a fixed decorative portion P6700. A detailed description of the opening / closing control means P6200, the opening / closing accessory P6300, the bullet control means P6400, and the bullet accessory P6500 will be described later. The base portion P6100 includes a first base portion P6110, a second base portion P6120, and a third base portion P6130.

The first base portion P6110 shown in FIGS. 210, 211, 213 and 214 constitutes the front portion of the base portion P6100 (see FIG. 213). Further, the first base portion P6110 includes a part of the bullet control means P6400 (drive transmission gear P6420 and guide gear P6430 described later) and an opening / closing accessory P6300 (right logo accessory P6310 and left logo accessory P6320 described later). Provided (see FIG. 211). The first base portion P6110 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The first base portion P6110 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. The first base portion P6110 includes a bearing opening P6111, a right shaft bearing portion P6112, and a left shaft bearing portion P6113.

The bearing opening P6111 shown in FIG. 214 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The bearing opening P6111 is located at substantially the center in the left-right direction and substantially in the center in the up-down direction of the first base portion P6110. The bearing opening P6111 rotatably supports the guide gear P6430, which will be described later, around the axis facing the front-rear direction.

The right shaft bearing portion P6112 shown in FIG. 211 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The right shaft bearing portion P6112 is located above the right portion of the first base portion P6110. The right shaft bearing portion P6112 pivotally supports the right crankshaft P6312 (main shaft P6312a) of the right logo accessory P6310, which will be described later.

The left shaft bearing portion P6113 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 is located above the left portion of the first base portion P6110. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 pivotally supports the left crankshaft P6322 (main shaft P6322a) of the left logo accessory P6320, which will be described later.

The second base portion P6120 shown in FIGS. 210, 213 and 214 covers the rear side of the first base portion P6110 and houses the bullet accessory P6500. The second base portion P6120 includes a cover portion P6121 and a holder portion P6122.

The cover portion P6121 covers the opening on the rear side of the first base portion P6110. The cover portion P6121 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The cover portion P6121 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. The cover portion P6121 is fixed to the rear portion of the first base portion P6110.

The holder portion P6122 accommodates the bullet accessory P6500. The holder portion P6122 has a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom that opens forward. The holder portion P6122 is formed so as to project rearward from the cover portion P6121. The holder portion P6122 is located substantially in the center of the cover portion P6121 in the horizontal direction and substantially in the center of the vertical direction. Further, the holder portion P6122 is positioned so as to overlap the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 in the rear view. The holder portion P6122 includes a bottom portion P6122a and a side portion P6122c.

The bottom portion P6122a shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 constitutes the bottom wall of the holder portion P6122. The bottom portion P6122a is located at the rear end of the holder portion P6122. The bottom portion P6122a includes a bearing portion P6122b.

The bearing portion P6122b rotatably supports the bullet accessory P6500 (regulation portion P6530 described later) around the axis facing the front-rear direction. The bearing portion P6122b penetrates the bottom portion P6122a in the front-rear direction.

The side portion P6122c constitutes a side wall of the holder portion P6122. The side portion P6122c comprises an opening P6122d.

The opening P6122d is a portion that opens in the side portion P6122c. The opening P6122d has a shape in which the upper portion and the lower portion of the side portion P6122c are cut out. In the illustrated example, an example in which the opening P6122d is provided in the vicinity of the bottom P6122a is shown.

The third base portion P6130 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 is provided with the opening / closing control means P6200. The third base portion P6130 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The third base portion P6130 is fixed to the rear portion of the first base portion P6110. The third base portion P6130 is arranged behind the cover portion P6121 of the second base portion P6120 (see FIG. 213). The third base portion P6130 includes an opening P6131, a right side guide pin through hole P6132, and a left side guide pin through hole P6133.

The opening P6131 shown in FIGS. 212 and 214 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6131 is located at substantially the center in the left-right direction and substantially in the center in the up-down direction of the third base portion P6130. The holder portion P6122 is inserted through the opening portion P6131 from the front (see FIG. 214). Further, as will be described later, the opening P6131 is inserted with the front-rear sensor P6450 provided on the right side of the holder portion P6122 in the cover portion P6121.

The right guide pin through hole P6132 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin through hole P6132 is located at the upper part in the right side portion of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin through hole P6132 is an arc-shaped elongated hole that is inclined in the lower right direction in the rear view. The right side crank guide pin P6312c of the right side crankshaft P6312, which will be described later, is inserted into the right side guide pin through hole P6132. The right guide pin through hole P6132 guides the movement of the right crank guide pin P6312c.

The left guide pin through hole P6133 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin through hole P6133 is located at the upper part in the left side portion of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin through hole P6133 is an arc-shaped elongated hole that is inclined in the lower right direction in the rear view. The left side crank guide pin P6322c of the left side crankshaft P6322, which will be described later, is inserted into the left side guide pin through hole P6133. The left guide pin through hole P6133 guides the movement of the left crank guide pin P6322c.

The opening / closing control means P6200 shown in FIGS. 210 and 212 controls the movement of the opening / closing accessory P6300 to the closed position shown in FIGS. 208 and 209 and the open position shown in FIGS. 215 and 216. Further, the open / close control means P6200 regulates the rotational operation of the bullet accessory P6500 (regulation unit P6530), which will be described later. A detailed description of the opening / closing accessory P6300 will be described later.

The opening / closing control means P6200 moves and controls the opening / closing accessory P6300 in response to a control signal from the effect device control circuit 338 (control means). The open / close control means P6200 includes a first motor P6210, an output gear P6220, a guide portion P6230, a slide rack P6240, and a slide sensor P6250.

The first motor P6210 shown in FIG. 212 is a drive source for opening and closing the opening / closing accessory P6300. The first motor P6210 is provided on the left side portion of the front surface of the third base portion P6130. The first motor P6210 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the third base portion P6130 back and forth and projects rearward.

The output gear P6220 takes out the driving force of the first motor P6210. The output gear P6220 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of the first motor P6210. The slide rack P6240 slides in the left-right direction by the driving force transmitted via the output gear P6220. A detailed description of the slide rack P6240 will be described later.

The guide portion P6230 shown in FIG. 212 guides the slide in the left-right direction of the slide rack P6240. The guide portion P6230 includes a right side guide pin P6231 and a left side guide pin P6232.

The right side guide pin P6231 guides the right side portion of the slide rack P6240. The right guide pin P6231 is inserted into the right guide hole P6242 of the slide rack P6240, which will be described later. The right guide pin P6231 projects rearward on the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin P6231 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin P6231 is provided on the upper part of the third base portion P6130 on the right side. A washer is provided at the rear end of the right guide pin P6231 to prevent it from falling out of the right guide hole P6242.

The left guide pin P6232 guides the left side portion of the slide rack P6240. The left guide pin P6232 is inserted into the left guide hole P6243 of the slide rack P6240 described later. The left guide pin P6232 projects rearward on the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin P6232 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin P6232 is provided at substantially the center in the vertical direction in the left portion of the third base portion P6130. A washer is provided at the rear end of the left guide pin P6232 to prevent the left guide pin P6243 from falling off.

The slide rack P6240 shown in FIGS. 210, 212, 217 and 218 slides in the left-right direction with respect to the third base portion P6130 to move the opening / closing accessory P6300 and the bullet accessory P6500 (regulatory portion). It is possible to regulate the rotational operation of P6530). The slide rack P6240 has a closed state located on the left side in the slide direction shown in FIG. 212, an open / locked state located in the middle of the slide direction shown in FIG. 217, and an open / unlocked state located on the right side in the slide direction shown in FIG. 218. The state and can be slid to. A detailed description of the closed state, the open / locked state, and the open / unlocked state will be described later.

The slide rack P6240 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The slide rack P6240 is arranged behind the third base portion P6130. The slide rack P6240 includes a rack tooth portion P6241, a right side guide hole P6242, a left side guide hole P6243, a right side crank guide hole P6244, a left side crank guide hole P6245, an opening P6246, a lock portion P6247, and a detected portion P6248.

The rack tooth portion P6241 meshes with the output gear P6220. The rack tooth portion P6241 is located at the lower portion in the left side portion of the slide rack P6240. The rotation (driving force) transmitted by the output gear P6220 is transmitted to the rack tooth portion P6241 so that the slide rack P6240 can move in the left-right direction.

The right guide hole P6242 is through which the right guide pin P6231 is inserted. The right guide hole P6242 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The right guide hole P6242 has an elongated hole shape that is long in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the right guide hole P6242 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the right guide pin P6231. The right guide hole P6242 is located at the top of the slide rack P6240 on the right side.

The left guide hole P6243 is through which the left guide pin P6232 is inserted. The left guide hole P6243 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The left guide hole P6243 has an elongated hole shape that is long in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the left guide hole P6243 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the left guide pin P6232. The left guide hole P6243 is located above the rack tooth portion P6241 in the left portion of the slide rack P6240.

The right crank guide hole P6244 is inserted with the right crank guide pin P6312c of the right crank shaft P6312, which will be described later. The right crank guide hole P6244 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The right crank guide hole P6244 is an elongated hole that is bent in a substantially S shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the right crank guide hole P6244 has a shape in which the right side portion extends in the left-right direction, a central portion (inclined portion) extends diagonally to the lower left, and a left portion extends in the left-right direction. There is. The right crank guide hole P6244 is located below the right guide hole P6242 in the right portion of the slide rack P6240.

The left crank guide hole P6245 is inserted with the left crank guide pin P6322c of the left crankshaft P6322, which will be described later. The left crank guide hole P6245 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The left crank guide hole P6245 is an elongated hole that is bent in a substantially S shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the left crank guide hole P6245 has a shape in which the right side portion extends in the left-right direction, a central portion (inclined portion) has a shape extending diagonally to the lower left, and a left side portion has a shape extending in the left-right direction. There is. The left crank guide hole P6245 is located above the left guide hole P6243 in the left portion of the slide rack P6240.

The opening P6246 is through which the holder portion P6122 and the front-rear sensor P6450 described later are inserted. The opening P6246 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6246 has a long shape in the left-right direction. Further, the opening P6246 has a substantially circular shape in the middle portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. The opening P6246 is located substantially in the center of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction and substantially in the center of the up-down direction.

The lock portion P6247 locks a part of the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. A detailed description of the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 will be described later. The lock portion P6247 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the slide rack P6240. The lock portion P6247 has a long shape to the left and right when viewed from the rear. A pair of lock portions P6247 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the opening P6246. The lock portion P6247 is located substantially in the center of the opening P6246 in the left-right direction.

The detected portion P6248 shown in FIG. 212 is a portion detected by the slide sensor P6250 described later. The detected portion P6248 projects downward at the lower part of the slide rack P6240. The detected portion P6248 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The detected unit P6248 is located at the center of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction. The detected unit P6248 includes a first detected unit P6248a, a second detected unit P6248b, and a third detected unit P6248c.

The first detected portion P6248a constitutes the right side portion of the detected portion P6248.

The second detected portion P6248b constitutes a central portion in the left-right direction of the detected portion P6248. The lower end of the second detected portion P6248b is located above the first detected portion P6248a.

The third detected portion P6248c constitutes the left side portion of the detected portion P6248. The lower end of the third detected portion P6248c is located above the second detected portion P6248b.

The slide sensor P6250 can detect the detected unit P6248. The slide sensor P6250 is provided below the detected portion P6248. The slide sensor P6250 includes a first slide sensor P6251, a second slide sensor P6252, and a third slide sensor P6253.

The first slide sensor P6251 can detect the first detected portion P6248a. The first slide sensor P6251 detects the first detected portion P6248a when it overlaps with the first detected portion P6248a in the rear view. The first slide sensor P6251 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping with the first detected portion P6248a of the closed slide rack P6240 shown in FIG. 212. In the present embodiment, the first slide sensor P6251 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end portion of the first detected portion P6248a of the closed slide rack P6240. As a result, the first slide sensor P6251 does not overlap with the first detected portion P6248a (becomes undetectable) when the slide rack P6240 slides to the right from the closed state.

The second slide sensor P6252 can detect the second detected portion P6248b. The second slide sensor P6252 detects the second detected portion P6248b when it overlaps with the second detected portion P6248b in the rear view. The second slide sensor P6252 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping the second detected portion P6248b of the closed slide rack P6240 shown in FIG. 212. Further, the second slide sensor P6252 is at a position where it does not overlap with the second detected portion P6248b when the closed slide rack P6240 slides to the right and reaches the open / locked state shown in FIG. 217. It is placed at (a position where it cannot be detected). As a result, the second slide sensor P6252 can detect the second detected portion P6248b from the closed state to just before the slide rack P6240 is in the open / locked state, and when the slide rack P6240 is in the open / locked state, the second slide sensor P6252 can be detected. The detected portion P6248b of 2 cannot be detected.

The third slide sensor P6253 can detect the third detected portion P6248c. The third slide sensor P6253 detects the third detected portion P6248c when it overlaps with the third detected portion P6248c in the rear view. The third slide sensor P6253 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping the third detected portion P6248c of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state shown in FIG. 212 and the open / locked state shown in FIG. 217. Further, the third slide sensor P6253 and the third detected portion P6248c when the slide rack P6240 in the open / unlocked state slides to the right and reaches the open / unlocked state shown in FIG. 218. It is placed at a position where it does not overlap (a position where it cannot be detected). As a result, the third slide sensor P6253 can detect the third detected portion P6248c from the closed state to just before the slide rack P6240 is in the open / unlocked state, and the slide rack P6240 can be in the open / unlocked state. For example, the third detected portion P6248c cannot be detected.

As the first slide sensor P6251, the second slide sensor P6252, and the third slide sensor P6253, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6248, such as a photo sensor, can be adopted.

The opening / closing accessory P6300 shown in FIGS. 208 to 213 can be moved between the closed position and the open position by the movement control by the opening / closing control means P6200. The opening / closing accessory P6300 includes a right logo accessory P6310 and a left logo accessory P6320.

The right logo accessory P6310 constitutes the right side portion of the opening / closing accessory P6300. The right logo accessory P6310 is rotatably connected around the axis facing the front-rear direction in the right portion of the first base portion P6110. The right logo accessory P6310 includes a right accessory main body P6311 and a right crankshaft P6312.

The right side accessory main body P6311 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player by the rotating operation. The right accessory main body P6311 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. A pattern imitating a logo is provided on the front surface of the right accessory body P6311.

The right crankshaft P6312 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the left-right movement of the slide rack P6240 to the right accessory main body P6311. The right crankshaft P6312 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. The right crankshaft P6312 includes a main shaft P6312a, an arm P6312b and a right crankguide pin P6312c.

The main shaft P6312a is inserted through the right shaft bearing portion P61112 of the first base portion P6110. The main shaft P6312a is rotatably supported by the right shaft bearing portion P6112 around an axial center facing in the front-rear direction. The front end of the main shaft P6312a is fixed to the right accessory main body P6311.

The arm P6312b connects the main shaft P6312a and the right crank guide pin P6312c described later. The arm P6312b is formed so as to extend from the rear end portion of the main shaft P6312a in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211).

As shown in FIG. 212, the right crank guide pin P6312c is inserted into the right guide pin through hole P6132 of the third base portion P6130 and the right crank guide hole P6244 of the slide rack P6240. The right crank guide pin P6312c projects rearward from the tip of the arm P6312b (the end on the anti-main shaft P6312a side). The right crank guide pin P6312c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction.

A washer is provided at the rear end of the right crank guide pin P6312c to prevent it from falling out of the right crank guide hole P6244. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension of the right side guide pin through hole P6132 and the right side crank guide hole P6244 (the dimension orthogonal to the longitudinal direction in the rear view).

The left logo accessory P6320 constitutes the left side portion of the opening / closing accessory P6300. The left logo accessory P6320 is rotatably connected around the axis facing the front-rear direction in the left portion of the first base portion P6110. The left logo accessory P6320 includes a left accessory main body P6321 and a left crankshaft P6322.

The left accessory main body P6321 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player by the rotating motion. The left accessory main body P6321 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. A pattern imitating a logo is provided on the front surface of the left accessory main body P6321.

The left crankshaft P6322 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the left-right movement of the slide rack P6240 to the left accessory main body P6321. The left crankshaft P6322 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. The left crankshaft P6322 includes a main shaft P6322a, an arm P6322b, and a left crankguide pin P6322c.

The main shaft P6322a is inserted through the left shaft bearing portion P6113 of the first base portion P6110. The main shaft P6322a is rotatably supported by the left shaft bearing portion P6113 around an axial center facing the front-rear direction. The front end of the main shaft P6322a is fixed to the left accessory main body P6321.

The arm P6322b connects the main shaft P6322a and the left crank guide pin P6322c described later. The arm P6322b is formed so as to extend from the rear end portion of the main shaft P6322a in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211).

The left crank guide pin P6322c is inserted into the left guide pin through hole P6133 of the third base portion P6130 and the left crank guide hole P6245 of the slide rack P6240. The left crank guide pin P6322c projects rearward from the tip of the arm P6322b (the end on the anti-main shaft P6322a side). The left crank guide pin P6322c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction.

A washer is provided at the rear end of the left crank guide pin P6322c to prevent it from falling off from the left crank guide hole P6245. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension of the left guide pin through hole P6133 and the left crank guide hole P6245 (dimensions orthogonal to the longitudinal direction in the rear view).

Hereinafter, the closing position and the opening position of the opening / closing accessory P6300 as described above will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 208 and 209, the closing position is such that the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 have a left-right central portion (bullet accessory P6500 described later) on the front surface of the first base portion P6110. It is a position to cover in front view so that it is difficult for the player to see. In the closed position, the logo on the front of the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are combined to display a continuous logo (character) so as to give a specific meaning.

As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the opening position of the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 is the central portion in the left-right direction on the front surface of the first base portion P6110 (the portion where the bullet control means P6400 is located). Is the position where the logo is exposed in the front view so that the player can see it.

The right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 rotate around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a as the slide rack P6240 of the opening / closing control means P6200 slides, so that they can be moved to the closed position and the open position. Moving.

The right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the closed position when the slide rack P6240 is in the closed state. Further, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the open position when the slide rack P6240 is in the open / locked state and the open / unlocked state.

Hereinafter, the states of the effect device P6000 in which the slide rack P6240 is in the closed state, the open / locked state, and the open / unlocked state will be described with reference to FIGS. 212, 217, and 218.

In the closed state shown in FIG. 212, the slide rack P6240 is located on the left side in the slide direction. In the closed state, the opening / closing accessory P6300 (right side logo accessory P6310 and left logo accessory P6320) is set to the closed position.

In the closed state, the right side guide pin P6231 and the left side guide pin P6232 are located at the right end of the right side guide hole P6242 and the left side guide hole P6243. Further, in the closed state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the right ends of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Further, in the closed state, each of the first detected unit P6248a, the second detected unit P6248b, and the third detected unit P6248c of the detected unit P6248 It is located at a position that can be detected by the second slide sensor P6252 and the third slide sensor P6253.

In the open / locked state shown in FIG. 217, the slide rack P6240 is located in the middle of the slide direction. In the open / locked state, the opening / closing accessory P6300 (right logo accessory P6310 and left logo accessory P6320) is in the open position.

In the open / locked state, the right side guide pin P6231 and the left side guide pin P6232 are located in the middle of the right side guide hole P6242 and the left side guide hole P6243 in the left-right direction. Further, in the open / locked state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the left end portion of the inclined portion of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Further, in the open / locked state, the first detected portion P6248a and the second detected portion P6248b are located at positions that cannot be detected by the first slide sensor P6251 and the second slide sensor P6252. Further, the third detected portion P6248c is located at a position that can be detected by the third slide sensor P6253.

In the open / unlocked state shown in FIG. 218, the slide rack P6240 is located on the right side in the slide direction. In the open / unlocked state, the opening / closing accessory P6300 (right logo accessory P6310 and left logo accessory P6320) is in the open position.

In the open / unlocked state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are located at the left ends of the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243. Further, in the closed state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the left ends of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Further, in the open / unlocked state, each of the first detected portion P6248a, the second detected portion P6248b, and the third detected portion P6248c of the detected unit P6248 is the first slide of the slide sensor P6250. It is located at a position that cannot be detected by the sensor P6251, the second slide sensor P6252, and the third slide sensor P6253.

The control means can determine the position of the slide rack P6240 based on the information regarding the detection of the detected portion P6248 by the slide sensor P6250.

The bullet control means P6400 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, 225 to 227 transfers the bullet accessory P6500 from the standby position shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and the standby position as shown in FIGS. 219 and 220. It controls the effect position moved forward and the operation of moving to. A detailed description of the bullet accessory P6500 will be described later. The bullet control means P6400 moves and controls the bullet accessory P6500 in response to a control signal from the effect device control circuit 338 (control means). The bullet control means P6400 includes a second motor P6410, a drive transmission gear P6420, a guide gear P6430, a rotation sensor P6440, and a front-rear sensor P6450.

The second motor P6410 shown in FIG. 211 is a drive source for operating the bullet accessory P6500. The second motor P6410 is provided on the right side portion of the second base portion P6120 (not shown in FIG. 211). The second motor P6410 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the second base portion P6120 back and forth and projects forward.

The drive transmission gear P6420 takes out the driving force of the second motor P6410 and transmits the driving force to the guide gear P6430 described later. The drive transmission gear P6420 includes an output gear P6421, a first gear P6422, a second gear P6423, and a third gear P6424.

The output gear P6421 extracts the driving force of the second motor P6410. The output gear P6421 is fixed to the front end of the output shaft of the second motor P6410.

The first gear P6422 is arranged substantially to the left of the output gear P6421 and meshes with the output gear P6421. The first gear P6422 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 around an axial center facing the front-rear direction.

The second gear P6423 is arranged substantially on the upper left side of the first gear P6422 and meshes with the first gear P6422. The second gear P6423 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 around an axial center facing the front-rear direction.

The third gear P6424 is arranged substantially to the lower left of the second gear P6423 and meshes with the second gear P6423. The third gear P6424 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 around an axial center facing the front-rear direction.

The guide gear P6430 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, 225 to 227 transmits the driving force transmitted via the drive transmission gear P6420 to the bullet accessory P6500. The guide gear P6430 is rotatably supported by the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 around the axis facing in the front-rear direction. The guide gear P6430 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The guide gear P6430 is arranged with the opening direction facing the front-rear direction. Behind the guide gear P6430, a cover portion P6121 of the second base portion P6120 is provided so as to be slidable with each other (see FIG. 214). The guide gear P6430 includes a fitting portion P6431, a gear portion P6432, a protrusion P6433, and a detected portion P6434.

The fitting portion P6431 shown in FIGS. 225 to 227 is rotatably fitted to the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 around the axis facing in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 214). .. The fitting portion P6431 constitutes a front side portion of the guide gear P6430.

The gear portion P6432 meshes with the third gear P6424. The gear portion P6432 is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of the guide gear P6430.

The protrusion P6433 projects on the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. A pair of protrusions P6433 are provided on the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. The protrusion P6433 is provided on the inner surface of the fitting portion P6431.

The detected unit P6434 is detected by the rotation sensor P6440, which will be described later. The detected portion P6434 projects on the outer surface of the guide gear P6430. The detected portion P6434 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The detected portion P6434 is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of the guide gear P6430.

The rotation sensor P6440 shown in FIG. 211 detects the detected unit P6434. The rotation sensor P6440 is arranged on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 on the left side of the guide gear P6430. The rotation sensor P6440 is arranged so that the detected portion P6434 can be detected while the bullet accessory P6500 is located at a lockable position described later. As the rotation sensor P6440, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6434, such as a photo sensor, can be adopted.

The front-rear sensor P6450 shown in FIG. 210 can detect the position of the outer spiral member P6510 of the bullet accessory P6500, which will be described later. The front-rear sensor P6450 has a lever portion (not shown) that detects a rearward pressure. As will be described later, when the bullet accessory P6500 moves rearward, the lever portion is pressed by the bullet accessory P6500 (pressing portion P6513a), and the front-rear sensor P6450 causes the bullet accessory P6500 to be in a predetermined front-rear position (described later). It can be detected that it is in the standby position). The front-rear sensor P6450 is provided on the rear surface of the cover portion P6121 of the second base portion P6120 on the right side of the holder portion P6122.

The bullet accessory P6500 shown in FIGS. 214 and 221 to 229 can be moved to a standby position and an effect position by movement control by the bullet control means P6400. The bullet accessory P6500 has a long shape in the front-rear direction. The bullet accessory P6500 is capable of a straight-ahead motion (front-back motion) that moves in the front-rear direction and a rotation motion (rotation motion) that rotates around an axis that faces the front-back direction. The bullet accessory P6500 includes an outer spiral member P6510, an inner spiral member P6520, a regulation unit P6530, and a light emitting unit P6540.

The outer spiral member P6510 shown in FIGS. 225, 226, 228 and 229 constitutes the outer portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer spiral member P6510 has an elongated shape in the front-rear direction. The outer spiral member P6510 has a hollow shape. The outer spiral member P6510 includes an outer body portion P6511, a protrusion P6512, a rear portion P6513, a bullet portion P6514, and a first spring P6515.

The outer body portion P6511 constitutes the body portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer body portion P6511 has a substantially cylindrical shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The outer body portion P6511 is arranged inside the guide gear P6430. The outer body portion P6511 includes an outer spiral groove portion P6511a and a front-rear groove portion P6511b.

The outer spiral groove portion P6511a shown in FIGS. 226 (a), 228 and 229 is a spiral groove formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The outer spiral groove portion P6511a is formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511 over substantially the entire front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is formed into two parallel spiral grooves (double spiral groove). Further, in the present embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a has a length that substantially goes around the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The shape such as the length of the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is appropriately set according to the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is engaged with a pair of protrusions P6433 of the guide gear P6430.

The front-rear groove portion P6511b shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is a linear groove formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The front-rear groove portion P6511b is formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511 from the front end portion of the outer body portion P6511 to an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. A pair of front and rear groove portions P6511b are provided on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The front-rear groove portion P6511b has a contact surface P6511c.

The contact surface P6511c is a surface facing forward in the front-rear groove portion P6511b. The contact surface P6511c constitutes a rear end portion (termination portion) of the front-rear groove portion P6511b.

The protrusion P6512 shown in FIGS. 226 (b) and 229 projects on the inner surface of the outer body portion P6511. A pair of protrusions P6512 are provided on the inner surface of the outer body portion P6511. The protrusion P6512 is provided on the rear side portion of the inner surface of the outer body portion P6511.

The rear P6513 shown in FIG. 228 constitutes the rear portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The rear P6513 has an annular shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The rear P6513 is fixed to the rear end of the outer fuselage P6511. The rear portion P6513 includes a pressing portion P6513a.

The pressing portion P6513a presses the lever portion of the front-rear sensor P6450. The pressing portion P6513a has a concave shape that opens toward the rear. The pressing portion P6513a is located on the right side portion of the rear portion P6513. The pressing portion P6513a presses the lever portion of the front-rear sensor P6450 with the bullet accessory P6500 in the standby position.

The bullet portion P6514 constitutes a front portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The bullet portion P6514 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light. The bullet portion P6514 includes a bullet main body portion P6514a and a collar portion P6514b.

The bullet body portion P6514a constitutes most of the bullet portion P6514. The bullet body P6514a has a shape that imitates a bullet (warhead). Specifically, the bullet body portion P6514a has a substantially cylindrical shape at the rear side portion and a sharp shape toward the front side portion.

The collar portion P6514b constitutes a rear portion of the bullet portion P6514. The collar portion P6514b has a substantially disk shape having a diameter larger than that of the rear portion of the bullet body portion P6514a. The outer diameter of the collar portion P6514b is larger than the outer diameter of the outer body portion P6511. The collar portion P6514b is provided at the tip end portion of the outer body portion P6511.

The first spring P6515 is a spring fitted to the outer body portion P6511. The first spring P6515 constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the first spring P6515 comes into contact with the flange P6514b.

The inner spiral member P6520 shown in FIGS. 226 (b), 228 and 229 can be accommodated inside the outer spiral member P6510. The inner spiral member P6520 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The inner spiral member P6520 has a hollow shape. The outer diameter of the inner spiral member P6520 is smaller than the inner diameter of the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The inner spiral member P6520 includes an inner spiral groove portion P6521.

The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a spiral (spiral) groove formed on the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is formed on the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520 over substantially the entire front-rear direction. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a spiral in the direction opposite to that of the outer spiral groove portion P6511a. In the present embodiment, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is formed into two parallel spiral grooves (double spiral groove). In the present embodiment, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 has a length that substantially goes around the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The shape such as the length of the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is appropriately set according to the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is engaged with a pair of protrusions P6512 of the outer body portion P6511.

From FIG. 212 to FIG. 214, the regulating portion P6530 shown in FIG. 228 rotatably supports the bullet accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P6520) with respect to the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120, and also supports the bullet. The rotational movement of the accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P6520) can be regulated. The regulating portion P6530 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The regulating portion P6530 has a shape in which the upper and lower portions of a circle are cut out in a front view. The regulating portion P6530 is fixed to the rear end portion of the inner spiral member P6520. The regulation portion P6530 includes a shaft portion P6531, a regulation piece portion P6532, and an opening portion P6533.

The shaft portion P6531 is a portion pivotally supported by the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120 (see FIG. 214). The shaft portion P6531 has a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis centered in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P6531 is rotatably supported on the bearing portion P6122b of the bottom portion P6122a of the holder portion P6122 around the axis facing in the front-rear direction. As a result, the inner spiral member P6520 is rotatably supported by the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120 via the shaft portion P6531 of the regulation portion P6530.

The regulation piece portion P6532 is a portion capable of regulating the rotational movement of the bullet accessory P6500. The regulation piece portion P6532 constitutes an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the regulation portion P6530. The regulation piece P6532 has a flat surface shape. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the regulation piece portion P6532 is exposed through the opening P6122d of the side portion P6122c of the holder portion P6122. That is, the regulation piece portion P6532 overlaps with the opening P6122d in a plan view (bottom view). The rotation of the restricting portion P6530 (inner spiral member P6520) is restricted by the abutting of the restricting piece portion P6532 with the pair of lock portions P6247.

The opening P6533 shown in FIG. 228 penetrates the regulating portion P6530 in the front-rear direction. In the illustrated example, the opening P6533 has an elongated shape in the vertical direction.

The light emitting unit P6540 shown in FIG. 228 emits light from the bullet unit P6514. The light emitting portion P6540 is provided on the bottom portion P6122a of the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120. The light emitting unit P6540 emits light in response to a control signal from the control means. The light emitting unit P6540 includes a substrate P6541 and an inner lens P6542.

An appropriate light emitting means is mounted on the substrate P6541.

The inner lens P6542 guides the light of the light emitting means forward. In the illustrated example, the inner lens P6542 has a shape in which the central portion in the vertical direction and the central portion in the horizontal direction protrudes forward. The portion of the inner lens P6542 that protrudes forward is inserted through the opening P6533 of the regulation portion P6530.

From FIG. 221 to FIG. 225, the decorative accessory P6600 shown in FIG. 227 is movable as the bullet accessory P6500 operates. The decorative accessory P6600 has a two-layer laminated structure in the front-rear direction (two independent members (first decorative accessory P6610 and second decorative accessory P6620, which will be described later), but at least a part of each other when viewed in the front-rear direction. (Structure arranged so as to overlap). The decorative accessory P6600 includes a first decorative accessory P6610 and a second decorative accessory P6620.

The first decorative accessory P6610 constitutes a layer (first layer) on the front side of the decorative accessory P6600. The first decorative accessory P6610 is fitted to the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The first decorative accessory P6610 can be moved back and forth and rotated in accordance with the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. The first decorative accessory P6610 includes a first decorative base portion P6611 and a first decorative portion P6612.

The first decorative base portion P6611 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227 (c) is fitted to the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The first decorative base portion P6611 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. The first decorative base portion P6611 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The first decorative base portion P6611 includes an opening P6611a, a protrusion P6611b, a spring receiving portion P6611c, a shaft portion P6611d, and a second spring P6611f.

The opening P6611a penetrates the first decorative base portion P6611 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6611a is larger than the outer diameter of the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. Further, the inner diameter of the opening P6611a is smaller than the outer diameter of the flange portion P6514b of the bullet portion P6514. The outer body portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6611a.

The protrusion P6611b projects on the inner surface of the opening P6611a. A pair of protrusions P6611b are provided on the inner surface of the opening P6611a. The protrusion P6611b is engaged with the front-rear groove portion P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body portion P6511) so as to be relatively movable in the front-rear groove portion P6511b (see FIG. 230). Further, the protrusion P6611b is engaged with the front-rear groove P6511b so as to be relatively immovable in the circumferential direction of the outer spiral member P6510.

The spring receiving portion P6611c receives the first spring P6515. The spring receiving portion P6611c has a shape recessed rearward on the front surface of the first decorative base portion P6611. The spring receiving portion P6611c is provided around the opening P6611a. The other end (rear end) of the first spring P6515 comes into contact with the spring receiving portion P6611c.

The shaft portion P6611d projects rearward of the first decorative base portion P6611. The shaft portion P6611d has a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis centered in the front-rear direction. A plurality of shaft portions P6611d (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the outer portion of the first decorative base portion P6611 at intervals in the circumferential direction. At the rear end of the shaft portion P6611d, a diameter-expanded portion P6611e having a diameter larger than that of other portions is provided.

The second spring P6611f is a spring fitted to the shaft portion P6611d. The second spring P6611f constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the second spring P6611f comes into contact with the rear surface of the first decorative base portion P6611.

The first decorative portion P6612 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration in the first decorative accessory P6610. The first decorative portion P6612 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The first decorative portion P6612 is provided on the front surface of the first decorative base portion P6611. A plurality of first decorative portions P6612 are provided in the outer portion of the first decorative base portion P6611 at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The second decorative accessory P6620 constitutes a layer (second layer) on the rear side of the decorative accessory P6600. The second decorative accessory P6620 is fitted to the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged behind the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the first decorative accessory P6610 in the front view. The second decorative accessory P6620 can be moved back and forth and rotated in accordance with the operation of the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decorative accessory P6620 includes a second decorative base portion P6621 and a second decorative portion P6622.

The second decorative base portion P6621 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227 (d) is supported with respect to the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510 and is connected to the first decorative base portion P6611. .. The second decorative base portion P6621 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. The second decorative base portion P6621 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The outer diameter of the second decorative base portion P6621 is larger than the outer diameter of the first decorative base portion P6611. The second decorative base portion P6621 includes an opening P6621a and a shaft receiving portion P6621b.

The opening P6621a penetrates the second decorative base portion P6621 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6621a is larger than the outer diameter of the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The outer body portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6621a.

The shaft receiving portion P6621b penetrates the second decorative base portion P6621 in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P6621b is inserted with the shaft portion P6611d (the portion excluding the enlarged diameter portion P6611e). The number of shaft receiving portions P6621b is provided according to the number of shaft portions P6611d (three in this embodiment). The inner diameter of the shaft receiving portion P6621b is smaller than the outer diameter of the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

As shown in FIG. 230, the second decorative base portion P6621 is connected to the first decorative base portion P6611 via the shaft portion P6611d. The other end (rear end) of the second spring P6611f comes into contact with the peripheral portion of the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. Further, the portion around the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 can be brought into contact with the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

The second decorative portion P6622 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration in the second decorative accessory P6620. The second decorative portion P6622 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The second decorative portion P6622 is provided on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. A plurality of second decorative portions P6622 are provided in the outer portion of the second decorative base portion P6621 at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The fixed decorative portion P6700 shown in FIG. 209 is a decoration fixed to the front surface of the base portion P6100. The fixed decorative portion P6700 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The fixed decorative portion P6700 is arranged outside the second decorative portion P6622 in the front view. A plurality of fixed decorative portions P6700 are provided at intervals from each other.

Hereinafter, the states of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 as described above in the standby position and the effect position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, 213, 214, 221 and 222, the standby position is the rearmost side of the range in which the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can be moved in the front-rear direction. The position of. In the standby position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are located behind the right logo accessory P6310 (right accessory body P6311) and the left logo accessory P6320 (left accessory body P6321). In the standby position, the bullet portion P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are in close proximity to each other.

In the standby position, if the opening / closing accessory P6300 is set to the closed position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are covered with the opening / closing accessory P6300 in the front view, which makes it difficult for the player to see.

In the following, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 in the standby position is the bullet accessory standby position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the standby position is the first decorative accessory standby position, and the position of the second decoration in the standby position is the second decoration. The position of the accessory P6620 will be described as a second decorative accessory standby position.

As shown in FIGS. 214, 221 and 230 (a), in the bullet accessory P6500, substantially the entire inner spiral member P6520 is inside the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body portion P6511) at the bullet accessory standby position. Is housed in.

As shown in FIGS. 214 and 230 (a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is positioned at the first decorative accessory standby position by being pressed backward by the urging force of the first spring P6515. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is positioned at the first decorative accessory standby position by being pressed against the collar portion P6514b of the bullet portion P6514 via the first spring P6515. At this time, the rear surface of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611) comes into contact with the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620, whereby the first decoration Further movement of the accessory P6610 to the rear is restricted. In the first decorative accessory standby position, the first spring P6515 is housed in the spring receiving portion P6611c.

The second decorative accessory P6620 is positioned at the second decorative accessory standby position by being pressed backward by the urging force of the second spring P6611f. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6620 is positioned at the second decorative accessory standby position by being pressed against the first decorative base portion P6611 via the second spring P6611f. At this time, the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620 comes into contact with the front surface of the first base portion P6110, so that the second decorative accessory P6620 can be further moved rearward. Be regulated.

As shown in FIGS. 219, 220, 223 and 224, the effect position is the most forward position in the range in which the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can be moved in the front-rear direction. In the production position, the bullet portion P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located in front of the right logo accessory P6310 (right accessory body P6311) and the left logo accessory P6320 (left accessory body P6321). Further, in the effect position, the bullet portion P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are separated from each other.

At the production position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 move forward to give a visual impression (impact) to the player.

In the present embodiment, at the standby position shown in FIG. 213, the front end portion of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative portion P6612) and the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative portion P6622) The front and rear positions of the front end are almost the same. Further, in the standby position, the front end portion of the first decorative accessory P6610 and the front end portion of the second decorative accessory P6620 are located behind the front end portion of the fixed decorative accessory P6700. Further, in the effect position shown in FIG. 219, the front end portion of the first decorative accessory P6610 is located in front of the front end portion of the second decorative accessory P6620, and the front end portion of the second decorative accessory P6620 is located. , Located in front of the front end of the fixed decorative portion P6700. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are greatly projected forward, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the following, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 in the effect position is the bullet accessory effect position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the effect position is the first decorative accessory effect position, and the position of the second decorative accessory in the effect position is the second decorative accessory. The position of P6620 will be described as a second decorative accessory production position.

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 231 (b), the bullet accessory P6500 has a portion other than the front portion of the inner spiral member P6520 outside the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body portion P6511) at the bullet accessory effect position. Located in.

As shown in FIG. 231 (b), the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward with respect to the inner spiral member P6520 and is pressed backward by the urging force of the first spring P6515. It is located in the position of the decorative accessory production. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is positioned at the first decorative accessory effect position by being pressed against the collar portion P6514b of the bullet portion P6514 via the first spring P6515. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611) comes into contact with the contact surface P6511c of the front-rear groove portion P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body portion P6511). Further rearward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is restricted.

The second decorative accessory P6620 is located at the second decorative accessory effect position by moving forward with respect to the inner spiral member P6520 and being pressed backward by the urging force of the second spring P6611f. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6620 is positioned at the second decorative accessory effect position by being pressed against the first decorative base portion P6611 via the second spring P6611f. At this time, the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620 comes into contact with the enlarged diameter portion P6611e of the shaft portion P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610, so that the second decorative accessory P6611e comes into contact with the second decorative accessory. Further rearward movement of P6620 is restricted.

Hereinafter, the operation of the effect device P6000 configured as described above will be described. That is, the operation of the opening / closing accessory P6300 by the operation control of the opening / closing control means P6200 and the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 by the operation control of the bullet control means P6400 will be described.

First, the operation of setting the opening / closing accessory P6300 in the closed position to the open position and moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 in the standby position to the effect position will be described.

In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 212, the restricting portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located between the pair of locking portions P6247. In this state, the rotation of the regulating portion P6530 is restricted by the contact of the regulating piece portion P6532 with the pair of locking portions P6247. As a result, the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted.

When the first motor P6210 is driven, the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. 212 rotates. As a result, the driving force of the first motor P6210 is transmitted via the rack tooth portion P6241 meshing with the output gear P6220, and the slide rack P6240 moves to the right. The driving of the first motor P6210 is performed in response to a control signal of the control means.

When the slide rack P6240 moves to the right, the right crank guide pin P6312c of the right logo accessory P6310 and the left crank guide pin P6322c of the left logo accessory P6320 move to the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank of the slide rack P6240. It is guided along the guide hole P6245.

At this time, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 217, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are inclined portions (parts extending diagonally downward to the left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245. Guided by, move down. Along with this, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 rotate counterclockwise in the front view around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is in the open / locked state shown in FIG. 217 by moving the slide rack P6240 to the right. In this state, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the open position, and the bullet accessory P6500 can be moved back and forth.

In the open / locked state, a portion (right end) of the restricting portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located between the pair of locking portions P6247. In this state, the rotation of the regulating portion P6530 (inner spiral member P6520) is restricted as in the case of the closed position.

When the second motor P6410 is driven, the output gear P6421 shown in FIG. 211 rotates. The rotation of the output gear P6421 is transmitted to the guide gear P6430 via the first gear P6422, the second gear P6423, and the third gear P6424. The second motor P6410 is driven in response to a control signal of the control means.

Here, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), the protrusion P6433 of the guide gear P6430 is engaged with the outer spiral groove portion P6511a of the outer spiral member P6510. The rotation of the guide gear P6430 is converted into a linear operation of the outer spiral member P6510 by the protrusion P6433 moving relative to the outer spiral groove portion P6511a. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, when the slide rack P6240 is in the open / locked state, the rotation of the regulating unit P6530 is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted. That is, the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward while the inner spiral member P6520 is fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the protrusion P6512 of the outer spiral member P6510 is engaged with the inner spiral groove portion P6521 of the inner spiral member P6520. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 is guided by the inner spiral groove portion P6521 as it moves forward, and rotates around a rotation axis facing the front-rear direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230A, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611) is relative to the front-rear groove portion P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 in the circumferential direction. Is immovably engaged in. The rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610 via the protrusion P6611b.

Further, the first decorative accessory P6610 is connected to the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621) via the shaft portion P6611d. The rotation of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620 via the shaft portion P6611d.

From the above, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 rotate according to the operation of the outer spiral member P6510.

Further, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward, the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend as shown in FIG. 230 (b). The first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward as the second spring P6611f extends. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611) relatively moves in the front-rear groove portion P6511b. Further, when the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward, the shaft portion P6611d moves forward relative to the inside of the shaft receiving portion P6621b of the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621). Move to.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the contact surface P6511c of the front-rear groove portion P6511b comes into contact with the protrusion P6611b. Further, the enlarged diameter portion P6611e of the shaft receiving portion P6621b comes into contact with the second decorative base portion P6621.

In this state, the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c as the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward. As a result, the forward movement of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610, and the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward. Further, in this state, the second decorative base portion P6621 is pressed against the enlarged diameter portion P6611e as the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward. As a result, the forward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620, and the second decorative accessory P6620 moves forward.

In the above description, for convenience, an example in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend at substantially the same timing is given, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend. The timing is not limited to the above example. As the timing at which each of the springs is extended, various modes can be adopted depending on the spring constant of each spring and the like.

As shown in FIG. 231 (b), if the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward until the protrusion P6512 is located at the front end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are in the production position. Become. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are the bullet accessory effect position, the first decorative accessory effect position, and the second decorative accessory effect position, respectively. Located in.

As shown in FIG. 232, the moving distance L1 of the bullet accessory P6500 in the front-rear direction is larger than the moving distance L2 of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the front-rear direction. Further, the moving distance L2 of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the front-rear direction is larger than the moving distance L3 of the second decorative accessory P6620 in the front-rear direction.

With the above configuration, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional effect in which the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction at the effect position, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

The control means controls the operation of the bullet control means P6400 so as to move the bullet accessory P6500 to the effect position, and then drives the first motor P6210 again so that the slide rack P6240 is in the open / unlocked state. .. As a result, the slide rack P6240 moves to the right.

Further, the control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is in the open / unlocked state due to the movement of the slide rack P6240 to the right.

In the open / unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 218, the restricting portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located to the left of the locking portion P6247. In this state, the rotation restriction by the lock portion P6247 of the regulation portion P6530 is released. As a result, the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is allowed.

When the second motor P6410 is driven in the open / unlocked state, the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the inner spiral member P6520 via the protrusion P6512 located at the front end of the inner spiral groove portion P6521. .. As a result, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates as the outer spiral member P6510 rotates.

With the above configuration, the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 can be rotated at the effect position. That is, in a state where the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted, further rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is impossible at the effect position where the protrusion P6512 of the outer spiral member P6510 is located at the front end of the inner spiral groove portion P6521. .. On the other hand, if the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is allowed, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates with the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510, so that the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6610 at the effect position are rotated. The decorative accessory P6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 in the effect position to the standby position and setting the opening / closing accessory P6300 in the open position as the closed position will be described.

First, the control means stops driving the second motor P6410 so that the rotation position of the bullet accessory P6500 stops at the lockable position. Here, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 218, the lockable position is the rotation position of the bullet accessory P6500 in which the rotation of the regulation portion P6530 can be regulated by the slide rack P6240 in the open / locked state and the closed state. .. At the lockable position, the upper and lower surfaces of the upper and lower regulation piece portions P6532 of the regulation portion P6530 face upward and downward, respectively. When the bullet accessory P6500 is in the lockable position, the rotation sensor P6440 detects the detected portion P6434. As a result, the control means can detect that the bullet accessory P6500 is in the lockable position.

If the first motor P6210 is driven so as to rotate in the reverse direction to the movement control described above, the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. 218 rotates in the reverse direction. As a result, the slide rack P6240 moves to the left.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is opened / locked by moving the slide rack P6240 to the left.

If the second motor P6410 is driven so as to rotate in the reverse direction to the above-mentioned movement control in the open / unlocked state, the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, in the open / unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 217, the rotation of the regulating unit P6530 is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 is guided by the inner spiral groove portion P6521 as it moves backward, and rotates around a rotation axis facing the front-rear direction.

At this time, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 also rotate according to the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward, as shown in FIG. 233 (a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed rearward via the contracting first spring P6515. As a result, the rearward movement of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611) relatively moves in the front-rear groove portion P6511b.

Further, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward, the second decorative accessory P6620 is pressed rearward via the contracting second spring P6611f. As a result, the rearward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620. At this time, the shaft portion P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610 relatively moves rearward in the shaft receiving portion P6621b of the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621).

In the above description, for convenience, an example in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract at substantially the same timing is given, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract. The timing is not limited to the above example. As the timing at which each of the springs contracts, various modes can be adopted depending on the spring constant of each spring and the like.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward until the protrusion P6512 is located at the rear end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are in the standby position. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are in the bullet accessory standby position, the first decorative accessory standby position, and the second decorative accessory standby position, respectively. Located in.

When the bullet accessory P6500 is in the standby position, the lever portion of the front-rear sensor P6450 is pressed by the pressing portion P6513a. As a result, the control means can detect that the bullet accessory P6500 has reached the standby position.

The control means stops driving the second motor P6410 when the bullet accessory P6500 reaches the standby position. Further, the control means drives the first motor P6210 and moves the slide rack P6240 to the left.

At this time, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are guided upward by the inclined portion (the portion extending diagonally to the lower left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245. Along with this, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 rotate clockwise around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is closed due to the movement of the slide rack P6240 to the left. In this state, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the closed position.

According to the effect device P6000 as described above, it is possible to diversify the effect mode and improve the enjoyment of the game. That is, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can be operated in a plurality of operation modes of straight-ahead operation and rotational operation.

Further, the bullet control means P6400 according to the present embodiment enables the bullet accessory P6500 to move straight and rotate by the driving force of a single motor (second motor P6410). Thereby, the mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620) is operated along with the operation of the bullet accessory P6500, the mechanism should be further simplified. Can be done.

Further, the bullet control means P6400 according to the present embodiment can switch between a state of restricting the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 (open / locked state) and a state of allowing the rotation (open / unlocked state). This makes it possible to regulate the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 and rotate the outer spiral member P6510 while moving it in the front-rear direction, and to rotate the outer spiral member P6510 without moving it in the front-rear direction. Become.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known. For example, as described in JP-A-2016-59498.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-59498 discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It is equipped with a first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and a second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610).
The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) can move from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory effect position).
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is brought into contact with the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) as the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves. It is characterized by operating by.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production mode and improve the fun of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in association with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is provided.
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that the operating distances are different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) operates from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory effect position), the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) It operates by contacting the first part (contact surface P6511c) of the bullet accessory P6500).
When the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) operates from the second position (bullet accessory effect position) to the first position (bullet accessory standby position), the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) It is characterized in that it operates by abutting on a second portion (first spring P6515) of the bullet accessory P6500).

With such a configuration, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) can be operated by utilizing the operation of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

Further, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When operating from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory effect position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes (straight movement and rotation operation). It is a feature.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in association with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is provided.
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
The urging means (first spring P6515 and second spring P6613f) according to the positional relationship between the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500). ) Is in the third position (second decorative accessory standby position), and the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is moved from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the first position. It operates from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory effect position) as it operates at the second position (bullet accessory effect position). It is characterized by.

With such a configuration, the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) can be operated by utilizing the operation of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

Further, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When operating from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory effect position), in a plurality of different operation modes (front-back operation and rotational operation). It is characterized by being operable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in association with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is provided.
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) operates from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory production position). It is characterized in that it can operate in a plurality of different operation modes (front-back operation and rotation operation).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in association with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is provided.
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that they have a laminated structure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When operating from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory effect position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes.
The plurality of operation modes are characterized by including at least a straight-ahead operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When operating from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory effect position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes.
The plurality of operation modes are characterized in that they are a straight-ahead operation and a rotational operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, when the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is located at the second position (bullet accessory effect position), the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) performs a rotational operation but does not perform a straight-ahead operation (front-back operation). Is to be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A spiral first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a) is provided on the outer surface of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).
The first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a) comes into contact with the first protrusion (protrusion portion P6433) of the guide gear P6430 provided on the outside of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500), and the guide gear The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves straight by transmitting the rotational driving force from the driving means (second motor P6410) to P6430.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various effects using the rotational driving force of the driving means.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
An internal spiral member (inner spiral member P6520) is housed inside the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and is provided with a spiral second groove portion (inner spiral groove portion P6521) on the outer surface. Prepare,
A second protrusion (protrusion P6512) is provided on the inner surface of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).
The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves straight in a state where the second protrusion (protrusion P6512) is in contact with the second groove (inner spiral groove P6521). The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is characterized in that it rotates.

With such a configuration, more various effects can be produced by using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

The bullet accessory P6500 is a form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is a form of the first groove portion.
The first spring P6515 is a form of urging means.
Further, the inner spiral member P6520 is a form of the inner spiral member.
Further, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a form of the second groove portion.
Further, the first decorative accessory P6610 is a form of the second movable body.
The second spring P6613f is a form of urging means.
Further, the second decorative accessory P6620 is a form of the third movable body.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known. For example, as described in JP-A-2016-59498.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-59498 discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and a second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) are provided.
In a state where the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is between the first position (standby position) and the second position (effect position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is It is movable and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is inoperable, and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is inoperable.
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (effect position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) are present. ) And can operate together.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production mode and improve the fun of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A locking means (slide rack P6240) for locking the operation of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is provided.
The locking means (slide rack P6240) is in a state where the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is between the first position (standby position) and the second position (effect position). When in the position 3 (open / locked state), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) can operate and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) becomes inoperable.
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (effect position) and the locking means is in the fourth position (open / unlocked state), the first movable body is movable. The body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) can both operate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the operation of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) using the locking means (slide rack P6240).

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
It is characterized in that a first operation (rotational operation) and a second operation (straight-ahead operation) different from the first operation can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) can execute the first operation (rotational operation).
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is provided with a regulating member (regulating portion P6530) that regulates the first motion (rotational motion).
The locking means (slide rack P6240) comes into contact with the regulating member (regulating portion P6530) at the third position (open / locked state), whereby the first of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520). It is characterized by locking the operation (rotational operation) of.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
In a state where the locking means (slide rack P6240) locks the first operation (rotational operation) of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) It is characterized in that the second operation (straight-ahead operation) is possible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The first operation is a rotation operation, and the second operation is a straight-ahead operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is provided with a spiral first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a).
In a state of being in contact with the first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a), the rotational driving force from the driving means (second motor P6410) is transmitted to move the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) straight. The guide gear P6430 is provided.

With such a configuration, various effects can be produced by using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is provided with a protrusion P6611b.
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is provided with a spiral second groove portion (inner spiral groove portion P6521).
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) with respect to the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) in a state where the protrusion P6611b and the second groove portion (inner spiral groove portion P6521) are in contact with each other. Is characterized in that the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) can rotate when the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves straight.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is the first movable body (outer side) in a state where the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the first position (standby position). The outside of the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is housed inside the spiral member P6510) and the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (effect position). It is characterized by being located in.

With such a configuration, compactness can be achieved at the first position (standby position).

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It is characterized by including a third movable body (opening / closing accessory P6300) that operates in association with the operation of the locking means (slide rack P6240).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A fourth movable body (decorative accessory) that operates as the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (effect position). P6600) is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
It is possible to execute a first operation (rotational operation) and a second operation (straight-ahead operation) different from the first operation.
The fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is characterized in that the first operation and the second operation can be performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production mode more diverse.

Further, the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is
As the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (effect position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) becomes It works by being abutted,
Depending on the positional relationship with the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510), the urging force of the urging means (first spring P6515 and second spring P6613f) causes the urging force to move to the first position (standby position). It is characterized by being urged.

With such a configuration, the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) can be operated by utilizing the movement of the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510).

The outer spiral member P6510 is a form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is a form of the first groove portion.
The first spring P6515 is a form of urging means.
Further, the inner spiral member P6520 is a form of the second movable body.
Further, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a form of the second groove portion.
Further, the regulation unit P6530 is a form of a regulation member.
Further, the slide rack P6240 is a form of locking means.
Further, the opening / closing accessory P6300 is a form of a third movable body.
Further, the decorative accessory P6600 is a form of the fourth movable body.
The second spring P6613f is a form of urging means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are moved from the standby position to the effect position, the first decorative accessory P6610 first moves forward with the extension of the second spring P6611f. However, if the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c to move forward, but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, the first decorative accessory P6610 may be configured to move forward by pressing the protrusion P6611b against the contact surface P6511c over the entire range from the standby position to the effect position.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the standby position, the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620) is moved backward via the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f. Although it is configured to be pressed against, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the standby position, the bullet accessory P6500 may directly press the first decorative accessory P6610 rearward without the intervention of the urging member. Further, in the standby position, the second decorative accessory P6620 may be directly pressed backward by the first decorative accessory P6610.

Further, in the present embodiment, the straight-ahead motion of the bullet accessory P6500 is defined as a front-back motion, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Various directions can be adopted for the straight-ahead operation of the bullet accessory P6500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable body is modeled as a bullet, but the shape of the first movable body is not limited to such a mode, and various shapes can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative accessory P6600 is modeled as a vortex, but the shape of the decorative accessory P6600 is not limited to such an embodiment, and various shapes can be adopted.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the first to third embodiments in that it has the effect device P7000. Hereinafter, the effect device P7000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 272.

The effect device P7000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. As shown in FIG. 234, the effect device P7000 is provided on the game board P1100. The effect device P7000 is fitted in the opening region 1d of the game board P1100 with the front side portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game board P1100. The effect device P7000 is configured so that a game ball that rolls in the game area P1120 can be introduced inside, and the game ball can be distributed to, for example, the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later. The effect device P7000 is decorated to imitate the wall surface of the tower in various parts visible to the player. In the illustrated example, the illustration of the decoration is omitted as appropriate.

The effect device P7000 includes a front cover portion P7100, a rear cover portion P7200, a drive unit P7300, a tower accessory P7400, and a specific area unit P7900.

First, the configuration of the front cover portion P7100 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

The front cover portion P7100 shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 covers the drive unit P7300, the tower accessory P7400, and the specific area unit P7900, which will be described later, from the front. The front cover portion P7100 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The front cover portion P7100 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the front cover portion P7100 is formed so that the width dimension (left and right dimension) of the upper portion is reduced. The front cover portion P7100 includes a front wall portion P7110, a side wall portion P7120, an external discharge passage P7130, and a decorative portion P7140.

The front wall portion P7110 constitutes the front wall of the front cover portion P7100. The front wall portion P7110 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P7110 includes an upper window portion P7111 and a lower window portion P7112.

The upper window portion P7111 shown in FIG. 236 is a window portion provided on the upper portion of the front wall portion P7110. The upper window portion P7111 is made of a transparent material. The player can visually recognize the drive unit P7300, which will be described later, via the upper window portion P7111. In addition, in FIG. 234 and FIG. 235, the illustration of the upper window portion P7111 is omitted.

The lower window portion P7112 shown in FIG. 236 is a window portion provided below the upper window portion P7111. The lower window portion P7112 is made of a transparent material. The player can visually recognize the tower accessory P7400, which will be described later, through the lower window portion P7112. In addition, in FIG. 234 and FIG. 235, the illustration of the lower window portion P7112 is omitted.

The side wall portion P7120 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 constitutes the upper, lower, left and right side walls of the front cover portion P7100. The side wall portion P7120 includes a supply section P7121, a discharge section P7122, and a recovery section P7123.

The supply unit P7121 serves as an entrance for a game ball that rolls in the game area P1120. A game ball is supplied (introduced) into the effect device P7000 via the supply unit P7121. The supply portion P7121 is formed in a passage shape penetrating the side wall portion P7120 in the thickness direction. The supply portion P7121 is provided on the upper portion of the side wall portion P7120. A pair of supply portions P7121 are provided so as to be located on both the left and right sides of the side wall portion P7120.

The discharge unit P7122 is an outlet for discharging a part of the game ball supplied to the inside of the effect device P7000 to the outside. The discharge unit P7122 is provided below the supply unit P7121. Discharge portions P7122 are provided on both left and right side portions of the side wall portion P7120. The right discharge portion P7122 is formed to include a portion penetrating the right side portion of the side wall portion P7120 in the left-right direction and a passage-shaped portion extending substantially in the front-rear direction. The discharge unit P7122 on the right side discharges the game ball to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100. Further, the discharge portion P7122 on the left side (not shown) is formed including a portion penetrating the left side portion of the side wall portion P7120 in the left-right direction, and discharges the game ball to the game area P1120. The right discharge unit P7122 may also be configured to discharge the game ball to the game area P1120 in the same manner as the left discharge unit P7122.

The collection unit P7123 collects a game ball that rolls in the game area P1120. Specifically, the collection unit P7123 collects the game ball that has finished rolling in the left and right areas of the game area P1120, respectively. As described above, the collection unit P7123 has a role as a so-called out port. A pair of recovery portions P7123 are provided so as to be located on the left and right sides of the lower portion of the side wall portion P7120. In this way, the game ball that rolls in the game area P1120 is collected from the collection unit P7123 into the effect device P7000 when the various winning openings and the like are not won.

The external discharge passage P7130 shown in FIG. 234 is a passage for discharging the game balls collected from the collection unit P7123 and the game balls that have passed through the non-specific area P7912 of the specific area unit P7900 described later to the back side of the game board P1100. .. The external discharge passage P7130 is located on the rear side (back side) of the front wall portion P7110 and is provided invisible to the player.

The decorative portion P7140 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 covers the side of the tower accessory P7400. The decorative portion P7140 is provided behind the side wall portion P7120. The decorative portion P7140 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the left-right direction.

Next, the configuration of the rear cover portion P7200 of the effect device P7000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236.

The rear cover portion P7200 covers the drive unit P7300, the tower accessory P7400, and the specific area unit P7900 from the rear. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the front. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view (rear view).

Next, the configuration of the drive unit P7300 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

The drive unit P7300 shown in FIGS. 236, 241 to 245, and 250 is for operating the tower accessory P7400 and distributing the game balls supplied to the effect device P7000. The drive unit P7300 is arranged behind the upper portion of the front cover portion P7100. The drive unit P7300 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The drive unit P7300 includes an upper cover portion P7310, a croon portion P7320, a drive base portion P7330, a discharge guide portion P7340, a drive unit P7350, a distribution unit P7360, a drive gear P7370, and a disk unit P7380.

The upper cover portion P7310 shown in FIGS. 235, 241 and 242 covers the Kroon portion P7320, the drive base portion P7330, and the like, which will be described later, from above. The upper cover portion P7310 is formed in a lid shape with the front and lower sides open. The upper cover portion P7310 is arranged at the uppermost portion of the drive unit P7300. The upper cover portion P7310 includes a sensor portion P7311.

The sensor unit P7311 detects the passage of the game ball supplied via the supply unit P7121 of the front cover unit P7100. That is, the sensor unit P7311 detects the game ball supplied from the game area P1120 to the inside of the effect device P7000. The sensor unit P7311 is arranged inside (downstream side) of the pair of supply units P7121 of the front cover unit P7100.

In the croon portion P7320 shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, 246, 247 and 250, a game ball supplied via the supply portion P7121 rolls. That is, the croon portion P7320 is for distributing the game balls supplied from the game area P1120 to the inside of the effect device P7000. The croon portion P7320 includes a croon main body P7321, a supply passage portion P7322, and a croon support portion P7323.

The Kroon body P7321 is a portion where the game ball rolls. The Kroon body P7321 is formed in a substantially dish shape that opens upward. Further, the Kroon main body P7321 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The upper surface of the Kroon main body P7321 is formed so that the height gradually decreases from the outer portion toward the central portion. The Kroon body P7321 includes a hole P7321a.

The hole portion P7321a is a hole that penetrates the Kroon main body P7321 up and down. The game ball that rolls on the Kroon body P7321 passes through the hole P7321a and falls downward. The hole P7321a is formed at substantially the center of the Kroon main body P7321 in a plan view. Three holes P7321a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Specifically, one of the three holes P7321a is formed in the central portion in the left-right direction of the Kroon main body P7321. Further, the other two hole portions P7321a are formed at the left and right front sides of the hole portion P7321a formed in the central portion in the left-right direction (positions deviated from the central portion in the left-right direction of the Kroon main body P7321). In this way, the game ball that rolls on the Kroon main body P7321 falls from any of the three holes P7321a (is distributed to any of the holes P7321a).

The supply passage unit P7322 is a passage that guides the game ball supplied via the supply unit P7121 to the croon main body P7321. The upstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is connected to the supply portion P7121 (not shown). The downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is connected to the Kroon main body P7321. Further, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is opened in the outer portion of the Kroon main body P7321 in the circumferential direction in a plan view. In this way, the game ball guided from the supply passage portion P7322 to the Kroon main body P7321 first rolls around the outer portion of the Kroon main body P7321 in the circumferential direction. A pair of supply passage portions P7322 are provided on both the left and right sides of the Kroon main body P7321 so that the game balls that have passed through the pair of sensor portions P7311 can be guided.

The Kroon support portion P7323 supports the Kroon main body P7321 and the supply passage portion P7322. The Kroon support portion P7323 is provided below the Kroon main body P7321 and the supply passage portion P7322. The Kroon support portion P7323 is fixed to the upper portion of the drive base portion P7330 described later.

The drive base portion P7330 shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, 246, 247 and 250 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The drive base portion P7333 includes a drive base main body portion P7331, a support portion P7332, and a swing sensor P7333.

The drive base main body portion P7331 constitutes an upper portion of the drive base portion P7330. The drive base main body P7331 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. The drive base main body P7331 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. A Kroon support portion P7323 is fixed to the upper portion of the drive base main body portion P7331. The bottom of the drive base body P7331 is provided below the Kroon body P7321 (more specifically, the three holes P7321a) supported by the Kroon support P7323. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the hole P7321a of the Kroon main body P7321 falls to the bottom of the drive base main body P7331. The bottom portion of the drive base main body portion P7331 is inclined so that the height of the central portion in the left-right direction is low. On both the left and right sides of the front side portion of the bottom portion of the drive base main body portion P7331, convex portions formed in an upward convex shape are provided. At the rear of the drive base main body P7331, a relay board that relays signals related to the control of the effect device P7000 is provided. The drive base main body portion P7331 includes a rolling guide portion P7331a.

The rolling guide portion P7331a guides the game ball to roll forward at the bottom of the drive base main body portion P7331. The rolling guide portion P7331a is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction between the left and right convex portions. The rolling guide portion P7331a and the left and right convex portions are formed so as to be located in front of the three holes P7321a of the Kroon main body P7321 in a plan view. The rolling guide portion P7331a is formed at the central portion in the left-right direction of the drive base main body portion P7331. The rolling guide portion P7331a is inclined so that the height on the front end portion side is lower than that on the rear end portion.

In this way, the drive base main body P7331 moves the game ball that has fallen from the hole P7321a of the Kroon main body P7321 to the bottom of the drive base main body P7331 (more specifically, of the bottom, behind the rolling guide portion P7331a). Part) and roll at the bottom. Then, the game ball that rolls on the bottom portion of the drive base main body portion P7331 rolls the rolling guide portion P7331a of the bottom portion toward the front end portion side. The game ball that rolls the rolling guide portion P7331a toward the front end portion falls downward when it reaches the front end portion.

The support portion P7332 supports the discharge guide portion P7340, which will be described later. The support portion P7332 constitutes a lower portion of the drive base portion P7330. A pair of support portions P7332 are provided on the left and right sides of the front side portion of the drive base main body portion P7331 so as to project to both sides in the left-right direction. The support portion P7332 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens downward. The support portion P7332 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view.

Further, the left and right support portions P7332 are separated from each other in the left-right direction. Here, as described above, the drive base main body portion P7331 is arranged on the upper side between the left and right support portions P7332. Further, a discharge guide portion P7340, which will be described later, is arranged on the lower side between the left and right support portions P7332. In this way, a substantially rectangular opening P7332a is formed between the left and right support portions P7332 in the left-right direction in a long front view.

The swing sensor P7333 can detect the detected portion P7363a of the distribution portion P7360, which will be described later. The swing sensor P7333 is provided below the drive base main body P7331. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 269, the swing sensor P7333 is provided at a position where the detected portion P7363a can be detected with the distribution portion P7360 facing left.

The discharge guide unit P7340 receives a part of the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide unit P7331a of the drive base unit P7330 and guides the ball to be discharged to the outside of the front cover portion P7100. The discharge guide portion P7340 is formed in a long shape in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the discharge guide portion P7340 is formed in a substantially plate shape. Further, the upper surface of the discharge guide portion P7340 is formed so as to be inclined diagonally downward from the central portion in the left-right direction to both end portions in the left-right direction in front view. The discharge guide portion P7340 is fixed to the front end portion of the pair of support portions P7332 of the drive base portion P7330. The discharge guide portion P7340 is provided so as to be located below the rolling guide portion P7331a of the drive base portion P7330 via the opening P7332a in the front view. The right end portion of the discharge guide portion P7340 communicates with the discharge portion P7122 on the right side of the front cover portion P7100. Further, the left end portion of the discharge guide portion P7340 communicates with the discharge portion P7122 on the left side (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100. The discharge guide unit P7340 includes a sensor unit P7341.

The sensor unit P7341 detects the passage of the game ball that rolls on the discharge guide unit P7340 (discharged via the left and right discharge units P7122). Sensor units P7341 are provided (pair) at both left and right ends of the discharge guide unit P7340.

In this way, when the discharge guide unit P7340 receives the game ball that has fallen from the roll guide unit P7331a of the drive base unit P7330, the discharge guide unit P7340 rolls the game ball toward both ends in the left-right direction of the discharge guide unit P7340. Then, the game ball that rolls to the left end side of the discharge guide portion P7340 is discharged to the game area P1120 again via the discharge portion P7122 on the left side (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100. Further, the game ball that rolls to the right end side of the discharge guide portion P7340 is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100 via the discharge portion P7122 on the right side of the front cover portion P7100.

The drive unit P7350 shown in FIGS. 241 and 243 to 245 drives the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution unit P7360, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 241, the drive unit P7350 is fixed to the lower portion of the drive base unit P7330 (drive base main body unit P7331). That is, the drive unit P7350 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200 via the drive base portion P7330. The drive unit P7350 includes a drive frame P7351, a spring unit P7352, a first motor P7353, an output gear P7354, and a swing shaft portion P7355.

The drive frame P7351 is fixed to the drive base main body P7331. The drive frame P7351 is formed in a substantially annular shape in a plan view. The drive frame P7351 includes a locking portion P7351a.

The locking portion P7351a locks the spring portion P7352, which will be described later. The locking portion P7351a projects upward from the upper surface of the drive frame P7351. The locking portion P7351a is provided at the right rear portion on the upper surface of the drive frame P7351.

The spring portion P7352 biases the distribution portion P7360, which will be described later, to the right. One end of the spring portion P7352 is locked to the locking portion P7351a of the drive frame P7351, and the other end is locked to the locking portion P7362a of the distribution portion P7360 described later. The spring portion P7352 constitutes a tension spring.

The first motor P7353 is a drive source for the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution unit P7360. The first motor P7353 is provided on the left rear portion of the upper surface of the drive frame P7351. The first motor P7353 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the drive frame P7351 up and down and projects downward.

The output gear P7354 shown in FIG. 245 extracts the driving force of the first motor P7353. The output gear P7354 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the first motor P7353.

The swing shaft portion P7355 shown in FIGS. 243, 244 and 251 is a shaft that is the center of swing of the distribution portion P7360. The swing shaft portion P7355 is formed in a long shape and is arranged with the axial direction directed in the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided inside the drive frame P7351 (position separated from the drive frame P7351) in a plan view. Specifically, the swing shaft portion P7355 is provided so as to be located at the rear portion inside the drive frame P7351. The upper end of the swing shaft portion P7355 is fixed to the lower portion of the drive base main body portion P7331. The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided so as to extend downward from the drive base main body portion P7331.

The distribution unit P7360 shown in FIGS. 235, 241, 243, 244, and 250 receives a part of the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide unit P7331a of the drive base unit P7330 at a predetermined timing, and will be described later. It guides to the specific area P7911 side (the part where a prize can be won). The distribution portion P7360 is provided so as to be swingable to the left and right with the swing shaft portion P7355 as the swing center (see FIGS. 244, 269 to 271). In this way, the distribution unit P7360 constitutes a mobile winning opening (see FIG. 250). Most of the distribution portion P7360 except for the front side portion is provided below the drive base main body portion P7331 of the drive base portion P7330. The front portion of the distribution portion P7360 is provided so as to be located in front of the drive base main body portion P7331 and above the discharge guide portion P7340.

Further, the distribution portion P7360 is provided so as to be suspended from the drive base portion P7330 (drive base main body portion P7331) via the swing shaft portion P7355. Further, the distribution portion P7360 is obliquely shown in FIG. 271 from a position where the tip portion (front end portion) of the distribution portion P7360 faces the diagonally front left side shown in FIG. 269 with the swing shaft portion P7355 as the swing center. It is provided so that the range up to the position facing the front right can be swung. In the following, the shape and the like of the distribution unit P7360 will be described with reference to the position where the tip of the distribution unit P7360 faces forward as shown in FIG. 244. The distribution portion P7360 includes a distribution main body portion P7361, a plate portion P7362, a decorative portion P7363, and an inclined portion P7364.

The distribution main body portion P7361 is the main structure of the distribution portion P7360. The distribution main body portion P7361 is formed to be long in the front-rear direction. The distribution main body portion P7361 includes a bearing portion P7361a, a passage portion P7361b, a hole portion P7361c, and a guide groove portion P7361d.

The bearing portion P7361a is a portion through which the swing shaft portion P7355 is inserted. The bearing portion P7361a is formed so as to penetrate vertically at the rear end portion of the distribution main body portion P7361.

The passage portion P7361b receives the game ball dropped from the rolling guide portion P7331a and guides the ball to roll toward the tower accessory P7400. The passage portion P7361b is formed in a groove shape that opens upward and extends in the front-rear direction. The passage portion P7361b is formed over substantially the entire front-rear direction of the distribution main body portion P7361. The bottom portion of the passage portion P7361b is inclined so that the height of the rear end portion is lower than that of the front end portion. As a result, the game ball located in the passage portion P7361b rolls toward the rear end portion side of the passage portion P7361b. The tip end (front end portion) of the passage portion P7361b projects forward through the opening P7332a between the left and right support portions P7332 (see FIGS. 244 and 246). In this way, the tip portion of the passage portion P7361b is provided so as to be located in front of the drive base main body portion P7331 and above the discharge guide portion P7340.

The hole P7361c shown in FIG. 244 is a hole that penetrates vertically at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7361b. The game ball rolling on the passage portion P7361b passes through the hole portion P7361c and falls downward.

The guide groove portion P7361d shown in FIG. 244 receives the swing transmission portion P7413e of the tower accessory P7400, which will be described later, and transmits the drive via the swing transmission portion P7413e. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed below the passage portion P7361b at a position substantially overlapping in a plan view. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed in a groove shape that opens downward and extends in the front-rear direction. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed in the middle portion in the front-rear direction of the distribution main body portion P7361.

The plate portion P7362 shown in FIGS. 243 and 244 projects outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the rear portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The plate portion P7362 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The plate portion P7362 includes a locking portion P7362a.

The locking portion P7362a locks the spring portion P7352. The locking portion P7362a projects upward from the upper surface of the right plate portion P7362 of the left and right plate portions P7362. The locking portion P7362a locks the other end of the spring portion P7352 (the end opposite to the side locked to the locking portion P7351a). By locking the spring portion P7352 to the locking portion P7362a, the distribution portion P7360 is urged to the right by the spring portion P7352.

The decorative portion P7363 projects outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the front portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The decorative portion P7363 is formed in an arc shape with the swing shaft portion P7355 as the center of the circle in a plan view. The front surface of the decoration part P7363 is decorated to imitate the wall of the tower. The decorative portion P7363 can prevent the rear portion of the distribution portion P7360 from being visually recognized by the player even when the distribution portion P7360 swings left and right. The decorative portion P7363 includes a detected portion P7363a.

The detected portion P7363a is a portion detected by the swing sensor P7333. The detected portion P7363a projects rearward from the rear surface of the left decorative portion P7363 among the left and right decorative portions P7363. As shown in FIG. 269, the detected unit P7363a is detected by the swing sensor P7333 when the distribution unit P7360 is in a state of facing left (when the position is obliquely forward and leftward).

The inclined portion P7364 guides the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a so as to roll toward the discharge guide portion P7340. The inclined portion P7364 projects outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the front end portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The inclined portion P7364 is provided at a position overlapping the discharge guide portion P7340 in a plan view. The upper surface of the inclined portion P7364 is inclined so that the height of the tip portion in the protruding direction is low. As a result, the game ball located on the inclined portion P7364 rolls toward the tip end portion in the protruding direction of the inclined portion P7364. Further, the game ball that rolls on the inclined portion P7364 falls downward (to the discharge guide portion P7340 side) from the tip portion of the inclined portion P7364 in the protruding direction.

Here, the distribution portion P7360 is provided so as to be swingable to the left and right with the swing shaft portion P7355 as the swing center as described above. That is, of the distribution portion P7360, the portion located in front of the drive base main body portion P7331 (the portion located above the discharge guide portion P7340), specifically, the tip portion (front end portion) and the left and right of the passage portion P7361b. The relative positional relationship between the inclined portion P7364 and the rolling guide portion P7331a of the drive base main body portion P7331 is constantly changing. That is, as the distribution portion P7360 swings left and right, the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 is positioned in front of the rolling guide portion P7331a without shifting in the left-right direction (falls from the rolling guide portion P7331a). The rolling guide is divided into a state in which the game ball can enter the passage portion P7361b) and a state in which the game ball is displaced (a state in which the game ball falling from the rolling guide portion P7331a cannot enter the passage portion P7361b). The communication state between the portion P7331a and the distribution portion P7360 (passage portion P7361b) is constantly changing.

In this way, when the distribution portion P7360 receives the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a of the drive base portion P7330 in the passage portion P7361b, the distribution portion P7360 passes through the passage portion P7361b and the hole portion P7361c to the tower accessory P7400. It guides to the side (specific region P7911 side or non-specific region P7912 side described later). Further, when the game ball dropped from the rolling guide portion P7331a is not received by the passage portion P7361b but is received by the inclined portion P7364, the distribution portion P7360 passes through the inclined portion P7364 to the discharge guide portion P7340 side (effect). It is guided to the side that discharges to the outside of the device P7000).

The drive gear P7370 shown in FIGS. 243 and 245 transmits the driving force from the output gear P7354 of the drive unit P7350. The drive gear P7370 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The drive gear P7370 is rotatably attached to the lower part of the drive frame P7351 so as to be relatively rotatable with the drive frame P7351. The drive gear P7370 includes a gear portion P7371 and an opening P7372.

The gear portion P7371 is a portion that meshes with the output gear P7354. The gear portion P7371 is formed on the outer circumference of the drive gear P7370.

The opening P7372 is an opening that penetrates the drive gear P7370 up and down. The opening P7372 is formed in a circular shape in a plan view. The opening P7372 is formed at a position eccentric with respect to the circular center of the drive gear P7370 in a plan view. Specifically, the center position of the opening P7372 is provided at a position shifted forward with respect to the center position of the drive gear P7370.

The disk portion P7380 shown in FIGS. 238, 243 and 245 is provided in the opening P7372 of the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The outer diameter of the disk portion P7380 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the opening P7372 of the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is provided so as to be rotatable relative to the drive gear P7370 in a state of being arranged in the opening P7372 of the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is fixed to the upper surface of the upper end portion P7413 (main body portion P7413a) of the tower accessory P7400, which will be described later. The disk portion P7380 includes an opening portion P7381 and a wall portion P7382.

The opening P7381 is an opening that penetrates the disk portion P7380 up and down. The opening P7381 is formed in an elliptical shape elongated in the front-rear direction in a plan view. The fitting portion P7413b of the tower accessory P7400, which will be described later, is fitted into the opening P7381. The opening P7381 is formed so as to overlap the hole P7361c of the distribution portion P7360 in a plan view even when the distribution portion P7360 swings left and right.

The wall portion P7382 is a wall that projects upward from the rear portion of the opening P7381 in the disk portion P7380. The wall portion P7382 is formed in an arc shape corresponding to the rear portion of the opening P7381 in a plan view.

Next, the configuration of the tower accessory P7400 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

From FIG. 237 to FIG. 240, the tower accessory P7400 shown in FIG. 268 can be operated by the driving force of the driving unit P7300. As shown in FIG. 237, the tower accessory P7400 is formed in a substantially truncated cone shape that is long in the vertical direction. The tower accessory P7400 has an appearance that imitates a tower. In the tower accessory P7400, the substantially central portion in the plan view (bottom view) at the lower end is rotatably supported by the specific area unit P7900 described later, and the upper end is rotated in a circular motion (swivel operation). , Swinging motion) is possible (see FIG. 268).

The tower accessory P7400 uses the game ball from the drive unit P7300 at the upper, middle and lower stages of the tower accessory P7400, the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600 and the third stage portion P7700. In turn, it is led out to the specific area unit P7900, which will be described later. A detailed description of the first stage unit P7500, the second stage unit P7600, and the third stage unit P7700 will be described later. The tower accessory P7400 includes a rear frame P7410, a front frame P7420, a first stage portion P7500, a second stage portion P7600, a third stage portion P7700, and a cover portion P7800.

First, the configuration of the rear frame P7410 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

The rear frame P7410 shown in FIGS. 239, 240 and 248 constitutes a rear portion of the tower accessory P7400 and is operably connected to the drive unit P7300. The rear frame P7410 includes a frame cover portion P7411, a rear strut portion P7412, and an upper end portion P7413.

The frame cover portion P7411 is a cover-like member having an outer shell similar to the rear half having a substantially truncated cone shape. The front and lower sides of the frame cover portion P7411 are open. The frame cover portion P7411 covers the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700, which will be described later, from behind. The frame cover portion P7411 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In this way, as shown in FIG. 248, a part of the plate portion P7514 of the first stage base portion P7510 and a part of the first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is exposed to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening. ing. As shown in FIG. 248, a part of the plate portion P7613 and the second drive transmission portion P7640 of the second stage base portion P7610, which will be described later, is exposed to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening. .. The frame cover portion P7411 includes a swing shaft portion P7411a.

The swing shaft portion P7411a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is a shaft that is the center of swing of the swing operation of the first stage portion P7500 (support portion P7520 and first stage main body P7530) described later. The swing shaft portion P7411a is formed in a long shape and is arranged with the axis direction directed in the front-rear direction. The swing shaft portion P7411a is provided so as to project forward on the front surface of the frame cover portion P7411.

The rear strut portion P7412 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes a strut of the rear frame P7410. The rear strut portions P7412 are provided on both sides of the frame cover portion P7411 in the left-right direction (pair). The rear strut portion P7412 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the rear strut portion P7412 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The pair of rear strut portions P7412 are provided so as to be inclined so as to approach each other toward the upper end side.

The upper end portion P7413 shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, 250 and 251 constitutes the upper end portion of the rear frame P7410. As shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper end portion P7413 is formed as a member separate from the frame cover portion P7411 and the rear strut portion P7412. The upper end portion P7413 is fixed to the upper end portion (substantially semi-disk-shaped portion) of the frame cover portion P7411. The upper end portion P7413 includes a main body portion P7413a, a fitting portion P7413b, a hole portion P7413c, a sensor portion P7413d, and a swing transmission portion P7413e.

The main body portion P7413a shown in FIG. 237 is the main structure of the upper end portion P7413. The main body portion P7413a is formed in a substantially disk shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 238, the disk portion P7380 of the drive unit P7300 is fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a.

The fitting portion P7413b is a portion that fits into the opening P7381 of the disk portion P7380. The fitting portion P7413b is formed in a wall shape protruding upward from the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a. In a plan view, the fitting portion P7413b is formed in an arc shape forming an elliptical wall corresponding to the shape of the opening P7381 together with the wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380.

On the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a, the inner portion of the elliptical wall surrounded by the wall portion P7382 and the fitting portion P7413b of the disk portion P7380 passed through the hole portion P7361c of the distribution portion P7360 and fell downward. The game ball rolls.

The hole portion P7413c is a hole that penetrates the main body portion P7413a up and down. The hole portion P7413c is formed in an inner portion of an elliptical wall surrounded by a wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380 and a fitting portion P7413b. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a passes through the hole portion P7413c and falls downward.

The sensor unit P7413d shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 detects the passage of a game ball that has fallen through the hole portion P7413c. The sensor portion P7413d is provided below the hole portion P7413c.

The oscillating transmission unit P7413e shown in FIGS. 237, 245, 250 and 251 transmits the rotational operation of the tower accessory P7400 to the distribution unit P7360. The rocking transmission portion P7413e is formed so as to project upward on the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a. The oscillating transmission unit P7413e is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the vertical direction. The swing transmission portion P7413e is provided in front of the fitting portion P7413b. The upper end portion of the swing transmission portion P7413e is received by the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360.

Next, the configuration of the front frame P7420 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

The front frame P7420 shown in FIGS. 239, 240 and 249 constitutes a front side portion of the tower accessory P7400. The front frame P7420 includes a front strut portion P7421, a first guide portion P7422, a second guide portion P7423, and a third guide portion P7424.

The front strut portion P7421 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes a strut of the front frame P7420. The front strut portions P7421 are provided in front of each (pair) of the pair of rear strut portions P7412 of the rear frame P7410. The front strut portion P7421 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear strut portion P7412 in the front view. The front strut portion P7421 includes a discharge passage P7421a, a first sensor portion P7421b, and a second sensor portion P7421c.

The discharge passage P7421a shown in FIGS. 240, 249, 259, and 267 is a passage for leading the game ball to the specific region unit P7900 (non-specific region P7912), which will be described later. The discharge passage P7421a is formed over substantially the entire front strut portion P7421. The discharge passage P7421a is formed in a passage shape extending substantially in the vertical direction as a whole, in which a portion opened rearward is closed by a rear strut portion P7412 of the rear frame P7410. In this way, the discharge passage P7421a is formed so as to communicate with each other from the upper end portion to the lower end portion inside the front strut portion P7421.

The first sensor unit P7421b shown in FIGS. 249 and 258 is provided at a position between the first stage unit P7500 and the second stage unit P7600 in the discharge passage P7421a, and the game ball passes through the position. Is to be detected.

The second sensor unit P7421c shown in FIGS. 249 and 266 is provided at a position between the second stage unit P7600 and the third stage unit P7700 in the discharge passage P7421a, and the game ball passes through the position. Is to be detected.

The first guide portion P7422 shown in FIGS. 240 and 252 to 255 guides the game ball that has rolled the first stage portion P7500 to the second stage portion P7600 side and the discharge passage P7421a side. Is. The first guide portion P7422 is provided so as to cover the first stage portion P7500 from the front to the bottom. The first guide portion P7422 includes a second stage portion side guide portion P7422a and a discharge passage side guide portion P7422b.

The second stage portion side guide portion P7422a shown in FIGS. 240, 252 and 253 is a part of the game ball that has rolled the first stage portion P7500 (the first wall of the first stage main body P7530 described later). The game ball that has fallen from the unit P7532) is received, and the game ball is guided so as to roll to the second stage unit P7600 side (passage unit P7512 of the first stage base unit P7510 described later). .. The second stage portion side guide portion P7422a is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction. The bottom portion of the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a is inclined so that the height of the rear end portion is lowered. As a result, the game ball located in the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a rolls toward the rear end portion side of the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a.

The discharge passage side guide portion P7422b shown in FIGS. 240 and 252 is a part of the game ball that has rolled the first stage portion P7500 (a game that has fallen from the second wall portion P7533 of the first stage main body P7530 described later). The ball) is accepted, and the game ball is guided so as to roll toward the discharge passage P7421a. The discharge passage side guide portions P7422b are provided (pair) on each of the left and right sides of the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a. As shown in FIG. 240, the pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7422b communicate with the upper end portions of the pair of discharge passages P7421a, respectively.

The second guide portion P7423 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259 covers the second stage portion P7600 from the front to the lower side, and rolls the second stage portion P7600. Is guided to the discharge passage P7421a side. The second guide portion P7423 includes a cover portion P7423a and a discharge passage side guide portion P7423b.

The cover portion P7423a covers the central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage portion P7600 from the front to the bottom.

The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b guides the game ball that has rolled the second stage portion P7600 to the discharge passage P7421a side. The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is formed in a groove shape with an open upper portion. The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is formed in a substantially arc shape that is convex outward in a plan view. A pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7423b are provided so as to be located on the left and right sides of the cover portion P7423a. The downstream side (opposite side to the second stage portion P7600) of the pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7423b communicates with the vertical intermediate portion of the pair of discharge passages P7421a, respectively.

The third guide portion P7424 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266, and 267 guides the game ball that has rolled the third stage portion P7700 to the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later. To do. The third guide portion P7424 is provided so as to cover the third stage portion P7700 from the front. The third guide portion P7424 includes a specific region side guide portion P7424a and a non-specific region side guide portion P7424b.

The specific area side guide unit P7424a guides the game ball that has rolled the third stage unit P7700 to the specific area P7911 side, which will be described later. The specific area side guide portion P7424a is formed in a box shape that opens in the vertical direction and rearward. The specific area side guide portion P7424a is provided at the center portion in the left-right direction of the third guide portion P7424. The specific area side guide portion P7424a communicates the central portion in the left-right direction of the third stage portion P7700 with the specific region P7911 described later.

The non-specific region side guide unit P7424b guides the game ball that has rolled the third stage unit P7700 to the non-specific region P7912 side. The non-specific region side guide portion P7424b is formed so as to extend substantially in the vertical direction and the lower end portion to be curved inward in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 263). Further, the lower end portion of the discharge passage P7421a is connected to the middle portion of the non-specific region side guide portion P7424b in the extending direction (see FIG. 240). The non-specific area side guide portions P7424b are provided (pair) on each of the left and right sides of the specific region side guide portion P7424a. The non-specific region side guide portion P7424b communicates with the right portion of the third stage portion P7700 and the non-specific region P7912 on the right side. Further, the non-specific region side guide portion P7424b communicates with the left portion of the third stage portion P7700 and the left non-specific region P7912 (see FIG. 263).

Next, the configuration of the first stage portion P7500 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

In the first stage portion P7500 shown in FIGS. 252 to 256, the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7413c of the rear frame P7410 rolls, and the game ball is moved to the second stage portion P7600 side or the discharge passage P7421a. It is distributed to the side. The first stage portion P7500 is provided on the upper portion of the tower accessory P7400. The first stage portion P7500 includes a first stage base portion P7510, a support portion P7520, a first stage main body P7530, and a first drive transmission portion P7540.

The first stage base portion P7510 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and the support portion P7520, the first stage main body P7530, and the first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, are fixed. Is provided. The first stage base portion P7510 includes a fixing portion P7511, a passage portion P7512, a swing shaft portion P7513, and a plate portion P7514.

The fixing portion P7511 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7511 constitutes the rear end portion of the first stage base portion P7510. By fixing the fixing portion P7511 to the frame cover portion P7411, the first stage base portion P7510 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7512 guides the game ball that has rolled the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 so as to roll toward the second stage portion P7600 side. The passage portion P7512 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7511. Further, the passage portion P7512 is provided so as to be located behind the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a so as to communicate with the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a. The passage portion P7512 is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction. The bottom portion of the passage portion P7512 is inclined so that the height of the rear end portion is lower than that of the front end portion. As a result, the game ball located in the passage portion P7512 rolls toward the rear end portion side of the passage portion P7512. The passage portion P7512 includes a hole portion P7512a.

The hole P7512a is a hole that penetrates up and down at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7512. The game ball that rolls on the passage portion P7512 passes through the hole portion P7512a and falls downward.

The swing shaft portion P7513 is a shaft that is the center of swing of the swing operation of the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530, which will be described later. The swing shaft portion P7513 is provided so as to project rearward above the passage portion P7512. The swing shaft portion P7513 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The axis of the swinging shaft portion P7513 is provided so as to overlap the swinging shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 in the front-rear direction.

The plate portion P7514 shown in FIGS. 248, 249, 255 and 256 constitutes the left side portion of the first stage base portion P7510 and is provided with the first drive transmission portion P7540 described later. The plate portion P7514 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 248, the plate portion P7514 projects to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. The plate portion P7514 is formed with a hole through which the upper portion of the first shaft P7541 of the first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is inserted. The plate portion P7514 includes a rotation sensor P7514a.

The rotation sensor P7514a shown in FIG. 249 can detect the detected portion P7541a of the first shaft P7541 described later. The rotation sensor P7514a is provided below the plate portion P7514.

The support portion P7520 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 256 and 272 is provided on the first stage base portion P7510 and supports the first stage main body P7530 described later. The support portion P7520 includes a swing bearing portion P7521, a fixing portion P7522, and an engaging portion P7523.

The swing bearing portion P7521 is a portion pivotally supported by the swing shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 and the swing shaft portion P7513 of the first stage base portion P7510. The oscillating bearing portion P7521 is formed so as to open in the front-rear direction. A pair of swing bearing portions P7521 are provided in the front-rear direction. A swing shaft portion P7411a and a swing shaft portion P7513 are inserted into the pair of swing bearing portions P7521, respectively, and are relative to the swing shaft portion P7411a and the swing shaft portion P7513 via a predetermined bearing member, a screw, or the like. It is rotatably connected to.

The fixing portion P7522 is a portion to which the first stage main body P7530, which will be described later, is fixed. The fixing portion P7522 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The fixed portion P7522 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the swing bearing portion P7521.

The engaging portion P7523 shown in FIGS. 256, 257 and 272 is a portion in which the swing transmitting portion P7543 of the first drive transmitting portion P7540, which will be described later, is relatively movably engaged. The engaging portion P7523 is formed in a groove shape that opens toward the rear. The engaging portion P7523 is provided on the lower surface of the fixed portion P7522 on the left side of the swing bearing portion P7521 (that is, a position deviated to the left from the position of the first stage body P7530 which is the swing center). The engaging portion P7523 is integrally formed with the fixing portion P7522.

The support portion P7520 has the swing shaft portion P7411a and the swing shaft portion P7411a as shown in FIG. 272 by transmitting the operation of the swing transmission section P7543 of the first drive transmission section P7540, which will be described later, via the engagement section P7523. With the swing shaft portion P7513 (not shown in FIG. 272) as an axis, the swing shaft portion P7513 is repeatedly and alternately tilted left and right. A detailed description of the swinging operation of the support portion P7520 via the first drive transmission portion P7540 will be described later.

The first stage main body P7530 shown in FIGS. 252 to 255 is a portion that is supported by the support portion P7520 and the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7413c of the rear frame P7410 rolls on the upper surface. The first stage main body P7530 is fixed in a state of being placed on the fixing portion P7522 of the support portion P7520. The first stage main body P7530 swings integrally with the support portion P7520 as the support portion P7520 swings.

The first stage body P7530 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The upper surface of the first stage body P7530 is inclined so that the height of the central portion in the left-right direction is lower, and the height of the front end portion is lower than that of the rear end portion. As a result, the game ball located on the first stage main body P7530 rolls toward the center portion side in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530 and also rolls toward the front end portion side. Further, the first stage main body P7530 includes a passing portion P7531, a first wall portion P7532, and a second wall portion P7533.

The passing portion P7531 is a portion through which the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 is passed to the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a side of the first guide portion P7422. The passing portion P7531 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The passing portion P7531 is opened up and down so that the game ball can pass downward. The passing portion P7531 is provided at the front end portion (central portion in the left-right direction) of the first stage main body P7530 in a state of projecting forward. The passing portion P7531 is formed so as to overlap the front end portion of the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 in a plan view. The passing portion P7531 includes a sensor portion P7531a.

The sensor unit P7531a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects a game ball passing through the passing unit P7531. The sensor unit P7531a is provided below the passing unit P7531.

The first wall portion P7532 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 guides a game ball rolling on the first stage main body P7530 toward the passing portion P7531. The first wall portion P7532 is formed on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 so as to extend in the front-rear direction from the front end portion of the first stage main body P7530 to the middle portion in the front-rear direction. The first wall portions P7532 are formed in pairs at intervals in the left-right direction. The pair of first wall portions P7532 are located at the central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530. The pair of first wall portions P7532 form a passage communicating with the passing portion P7531 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.

The second wall portion P7533 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 divides a part of the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 back and forth. The second wall portion P7533 is provided on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 behind the first wall portion P7532. A pair of second wall portions P7533 are provided at intervals on the left and right. The pair of second wall portions P7533 are provided at positions where the left and right outer ends correspond to the left and right outer ends of the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b of the first guide portion P7422. The pair of second wall portions P7533 are formed in an arc shape that is convex diagonally rearward in a plan view. The pair of second wall portions P7533 form a passage communicating with the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b between the pair of first wall portions P7532 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.

The first drive transmission unit P7540 shown in FIGS. 249, 255 and 256 transmits the driving force of the second motor P7741 described later to the support unit P7520 and the first stage main body P7530. The first drive transmission unit P7540 is provided on the plate portion P7514 of the first stage base portion P7510. The first drive transmission unit P7540 includes a first shaft P7541, a first stage gear unit P7542, and a swing transmission unit P7543.

The first shaft P7541 is a portion where the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via the second drive transmitting unit P7640 described later. The first shaft P7541 is formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape. The upper portion of the first shaft P7541 is inserted into the hole of the plate portion P7514, and the first shaft P7541 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing in the vertical direction. The first shaft P7541 includes a detected portion P7541a.

The detected portion P7541a shown in FIG. 249 is a portion detected by the rotation sensor P7514a. The detected portion P7541a is fixed on the first shaft P7541 so as to be located below the plate portion P7514. The detected portion P7541a projects in a predetermined direction along the radial direction of the first shaft P7541. The detected unit P7541a is detected by the rotation sensor P7514a in a state where the first shaft P7541 is in a predetermined rotation position.

The first stage gear portion P7542 is fixed to the upper end portion of the first shaft P7541. The first stage gear portion P7542 rotates around the axis of the first shaft P7541 integrally with the first shaft P7541 in the vertical direction as the first shaft P7541 rotates.

The rocking transmission unit P7543 shown in FIGS. 255 to 257 and 272 transmits the driving force transmitted from the first stage gear unit P7542 to the support unit P7520. The swing transmission unit P7543 is arranged in front of the first stage gear unit P7542. The swing transmission portion P7543 is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the plate portion P7514 around an axial center facing in the vertical direction. The swing transmission portion P7543 includes a main body portion P7543a, a gear portion P7543b, and a spiral portion P7543c.

The main body portion P7543a is the main structure of the swing transmission portion P7543. The main body portion P7543a is formed in a substantially disk shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction.

The gear portion P7543b meshes with the first stage gear portion P7542. The gear portion P7543b is fixed to the lower portion of the main body portion P7543a.

The spiral portion P7543c shown in FIGS. 256, 257 and 272 is a portion that operably engages with the engaging portion P7523 of the support portion P7520. The spiral portion P7543c is integrally formed with the main body portion P7543a, and is provided so as to project radially outward from the radial outer peripheral surface of the main body portion P7543a. As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the spiral portion P7543c is formed in a shape in which the height of the front end portion is higher than the height of the rear end portion and a pair of semi-circular spirals symmetrical to each other are combined. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 256, the spiral portion P7543c is received by the groove formed in the engaging portion P7523 of the supporting portion P7520 and slidably engages with the engaging portion P7523.

Next, the configuration of the second stage portion P7600 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

In the second stage portion P7600 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259, the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 rolls, and the game ball is transferred to the third stage portion P7600. It is distributed to the stage portion P7700 side or the discharge passage P7421a side. The second stage portion P7600 is provided in the middle portion of the tower accessory P7400. The second stage portion P7600 includes a second stage base portion P7610, a second stage main body P7620, a second stage rotating portion P7630, a second drive transmission portion P7640, and a rotating cover portion P7650.

The second stage base portion P7610 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and the second stage main body P7620, the second stage rotating portion P7630, and the second stage rotating portion P7630, which will be described later, are used. The drive transmission unit P7640 is provided. The second stage base portion P7610 includes a fixing portion P7611, a passage portion P7612, and a plate portion P7613.

The fixing portion P7611 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7611 constitutes the rear end portion of the second stage base portion P7610. By fixing the fixing portion P7611 to the frame cover portion P7411, the second stage base portion P7610 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7612 guides the game ball that has passed through the passage portion P7621 of the second stage main body P7620, which will be described later, so as to roll toward the third stage portion P7700. The passage portion P7612 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7611. The passage portion P7612 is formed in a groove shape extending from the upper end portion (front end portion) while curving downward and backward. The front end of the passage portion P7612 is open upward. The bottom of the passage portion P7612 is inclined so that the height of the rear end portion is lower than that of the front end portion. As a result, the game ball located in the passage portion P7612 rolls toward the rear end portion side of the passage portion P7612. The passage portion P7612 includes a hole portion P7612a.

The hole P7612a is a hole that vertically penetrates the passage P7612 at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7612. The game ball rolling on the passage portion P7612 passes through the hole portion P7612a and falls downward.

The plate portion P7613 shown in FIG. 259 constitutes the left side portion of the second stage base portion P7610 and is a portion provided with the second drive transmission portion P7640 described later. The plate portion P7613 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 248, the plate portion P7613 projects to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. A hole through which the lower end of the first shaft P7541 of the first drive transmission unit P7540 is inserted and an upper portion of the second shaft P7641 of the second drive transmission unit P7640, which will be described later, are inserted into the plate portion P7613. The holes to be formed are formed.

The second stage main body P7620 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259 is a portion where the game ball that has passed through the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 rolls on the upper surface. The second stage body P7620 is fixed to the upper part of the second stage base portion P7610. The second stage body P7620 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view. Further, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed in a substantially dish shape in which the central side is inclined downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the second stage main body P7620 is formed so as to overlap the hole portion P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 in a plan view. Further, the second stage main body P7620 communicates with a pair of second guide portions P7423 of the front frame P7420. More specifically, the right front end portion and the left front end portion of the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 communicate with the upstream side of the left and right discharge passage side guide portions P7423b provided on the front frame P7420, respectively. The second stage main body P7620 includes a passing portion P7621.

The passing portion P7621 is a hole that vertically penetrates the second stage main body P7620. The passing portion P7621 is formed substantially in the center of the second stage main body P7620 in a plan view. The passing portion P7621 constitutes a passage through which the game ball can pass downward. The passing portion P7621 includes a sensor portion P7621a. The passing portion P7621 communicates with the upper end portion (front end portion) of the passage portion P7612 via the sensor portion P7621a described later.

The sensor unit P7621a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects a game ball passing through the passing unit P7621. The sensor unit P7621a is provided below the passing unit P7621.

The second stage rotating portion P7630 shown in FIGS. 258 to 261 rotates around the axis of the second stage main body P7620 in the vertical direction outward in the radial direction. The second stage rotating portion P7630 is formed in a substantially annular shape in a plan view. The second stage rotating portion P7630 includes an opening P7631, a gear portion P7632, and a rolling inhibition portion P7633.

The opening P7631 shown in FIGS. 259 to 261 is an opening that vertically penetrates the second stage rotating portion P7630. The inner diameter of the opening P7631 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the second stage body P7620. The opening P7631 accepts the second stage body P7620 relatively operably.

The gear portion P7632 shown in FIGS. 249, 260 and 261 is a portion to which the driving force of the second drive transmission unit P7640, which will be described later, is transmitted. The gear portion P7632 is formed on the radial outer peripheral surface of the second stage rotating portion P7630. As shown in FIG. 249, the gear portion P7632 meshes with the second stage gear portion P7462 (third gear P7642c) of the second drive transmission unit P7640 described later.

The roll inhibition unit P7633 shown in FIGS. 260 to 262 reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620. A plurality (four in this embodiment) of the rolling inhibition portions P7633 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. Note that FIG. 262 shows one of the plurality of roll-inhibiting portions P7633 located in the front portion. The rolling inhibition portion P7633 includes a vertical portion P7633a and a protruding portion P7633c.

The vertical portion P7633a is a portion that protrudes upward from the upper portion of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The vertical portion P7633a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. Further, the vertical portion P7633a is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed in the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The vertical portion P7633a includes a hole portion P7633b.

The hole portion P7633b is a hole that penetrates the vertical portion P7633a in the thickness direction. The hole portion P7633b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the thickness direction of the vertical portion P7633a. The upper end of the hole P7633b is located above the second stage body P7620.

The protruding portion P7633c protrudes inward in the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630 from the upper end portion of the vertical portion P7633a. The protruding portion P7633c overlaps with the outer portion of the second stage body P7620 in a plan view. The protrusion P7633c is located slightly above the upper surface of the second stage body P7620. The protruding portion P7633c is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. When the protruding portion P7633c comes into contact with the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced. The protruding portion P7633c includes a notched portion P7633d.

The cutout portion P7633d is a cutout of an upper portion of the protruding portion P7633c at the tip end portion in the protruding direction.

The second stage rotating portion P7630 as described above is fitted to the second stage main body P7620 so as to receive the second stage main body P7620 by the opening P7631. Further, the second stage rotating portion P7630 is rotatably provided around the axis center facing in the vertical direction with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the four projecting portions P7633c can be moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620.

As a result, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 can collide with the protruding portion P7633c that moves in the circumferential direction on the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620. Further, since the hole portion P7633b is formed in the vertical portion P7633a, even when the game ball is located behind the rolling inhibition portion P7633, the game ball is visually recognized by the player through the hole portion P7633b. Can be made to. That is, the player can visually recognize how the rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) comes into contact with the game ball and reduces the rolling speed of the game ball.

The second drive transmission unit P7640 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 transmits the driving force of the second motor P7741 described later to the second stage rotation unit P7630 and the first drive transmission unit P7540. The second drive transmission unit P7640 is provided on the plate portion P7613 of the second stage base portion P7610. The second drive transmission unit P7640 includes a second shaft P7641 and a second stage gear unit P7642.

The second shaft P7641 is a portion where the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via the third drive transmission unit P7740, which will be described later. The second shaft P7641 is formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape. The upper portion of the second shaft P7641 is inserted into the hole of the plate portion P7613, and the second shaft P7641 is rotatably supported around an axial center facing in the vertical direction.

The second stage gear portion P7642 transmits the driving force of the second shaft P7641 to the second stage rotating portion P7630. The second stage gear portion P7462 includes a first gear P7462a, a second gear P7462b, and a third gear P7462c.

The first gear P7642a is fixed to the upper end of the second shaft P7641. As the second shaft P7641 rotates, the first gear P7642a rotates integrally with the second shaft P7641 about an axial center facing in the vertical direction.

The second gear P7462b is arranged behind the first gear P7462a. The second gear P7462b constitutes a two-stage gear that meshes with the first gear P7462a and the third gear P7462c described later. The second gear P7642b is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the plate portion P7613 around an axial center facing in the vertical direction.

The third gear P7462c is fixed to the lower portion of the first shaft P7541. The third gear P7462c meshes with the second gear P7462b. Further, the third gear P7642c meshes with the gear portion P7632 of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The third gear P7462c rotates integrally with the first shaft P7541.

The rotating cover portion P7650 shown in FIGS. 252, 253 and 260 covers the second stage rotating portion P7630 from the front. The rotation cover portion P7650 is formed so as to cover the front side portion (first half portion) of the second stage rotation portion P7630 excluding the roll inhibition portion P7633. The rotary cover portion P7650 is fixed to the front side portion of the second stage main body P7620.

Next, the configuration of the third stage portion P7700 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

In the third stage portion P7700 shown in FIGS. 263 to 267, the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7612a of the second stage portion P7600 rolls, and the game ball is specified as the specific area unit P7900 described later. It is distributed to the region P7911 side or the non-specific region P7912 side. The third stage portion P7700 is provided in the lower portion of the tower accessory P7400. The third stage portion P7700 includes a third stage base portion P7710, a third stage main body P7720, a third stage rotating portion P7730, a third drive transmission portion P7740, and a rotating cover portion P7750.

The third stage base portion P7710 shown in FIGS. 263 to 265 is fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and the third stage main body P7720, the third stage rotating portion P7730, and the third stage rotating portion P7730, which will be described later, are fixed to the frame cover portion P7411. The drive transmission unit P7740 of the above is provided. The third stage base portion P7710 constitutes the bottom portion of the tower accessory P7400. The third stage base portion P7710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The third stage base portion P7710 includes a fixing portion P7711, a gear holding portion P7712, a connecting portion P7713, and a rotation restricting shaft portion P7714.

The fixing portion P7711 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7711 constitutes the rear end portion of the third stage base portion P7710. By fixing the fixing portion P7711 to the frame cover portion P7411, the third stage base portion P7710 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The gear holding portion P7712 shown in FIG. 267 constitutes a left side portion of the third stage base portion P7710 and is provided with a third drive transmission portion P7740 described later. The gear holding portion P7712 is formed with a hole through which the lower end of the second shaft P7641 is inserted.

The connecting portion P7713 shown in FIGS. 263 to 265 is a portion connected to the ball shaft portion P7921 of the support portion P7920 provided in the specific region unit P7900 described later. The connecting portion P7713 penetrates the third stage base portion P7710 up and down. The connecting portion P7713 is provided at substantially the center of the third stage portion P7700 of the tower accessory P7400 in a plan view.

The rotation control shaft portion P7714 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 rotates the tower accessory P7400 in the circumferential direction around the ball shaft portion P7921 (support portion P7920) described later (in other words, the tower function in a plan view). It regulates the rotation of the object P7400). The rotation control shaft portion P7714 projects downward from the lower surface of the third stage base portion P7710. The rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis centered in the vertical direction. The lower end of the rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 has a larger diameter than the other portions. The rotation control shaft portion P7714 is provided so as to be located on the right rear side of the connecting portion P7713.

The third stage main body P7720 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266, and 267 is a portion where the game ball that has passed through the hole P7612a of the second stage portion P7600 rolls on the upper surface. The third stage body P7720 is fixed to the upper part of the third stage base portion P7710. The third stage body P7720 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The upper surface of the third stage body P7720 is formed so that the front end portion is inclined forward and downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the third stage body P7720 is formed so as to overlap the rear end portion (hole portion P7612a) of the passage portion P7612 of the second stage portion P7600 in a plan view. Has been done. The third stage main body P7720 communicates with the third guide portion P7424 of the front frame P7420. More specifically, the front end portion of the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 communicates with the upper end portion of the specific region side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424. Further, the right front end portion and the left front end portion of the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 communicate with the upper end portions of the left and right non-specific region side guide portions P7424b of the third guide portion P7424, respectively. The third stage body P7720 includes a protrusion P7721.

The protrusion P7721 projects upward on the upper surface of the third stage body P7720. A plurality of protrusions P7721 (10 in the example) are provided. Further, in the illustrated example, an example in which the protrusion P7721 is not provided at the central portion of the third stage main body P7720 in the front view is shown. According to the protrusion P7721, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720.

The third stage rotating portion P7730 shown in FIGS. 260, 261, 266, and 267 rotates about the axial center of the third stage main body P7720 in the vertical direction in the radial direction. The third stage rotating portion P7730 is formed in a substantially annular shape in a plan view. The third stage rotating portion P7730 includes an opening P7731, a gear portion P7732, and a rolling inhibition portion P7733.

The opening P7731 shown in FIGS. 260 and 261 is an opening that vertically penetrates the third stage rotating portion P7730. The inner diameter of the opening P7731 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the third stage body P7720. The opening P7731 relatively operably accepts the third stage body P7720.

The gear portion P7732 is a portion to which the driving force of the third drive transmission unit P7740, which will be described later, is transmitted. The gear portion P7732 is formed on the radial outer peripheral surface of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The gear portion P7732 meshes with the third stage gear portion P7743 of the third drive transmission unit P7740, which will be described later.

The roll inhibition unit P7733 reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720. A plurality (7 in this embodiment) of the rolling inhibition portions P7733 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The rolling inhibition portion P7733 includes a vertical portion P7733a and a protruding portion P7733b.

The vertical portion P7733a is a portion that protrudes upward from the upper portion of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The vertical portion P7733a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730. Further, the vertical portion P7733a is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed in the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730.

The protruding portion P7733b protrudes inward in the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730 from the upper end portion of the vertical portion P7733a. The protruding portion P7733b overlaps with the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720 in a plan view. The protrusion P7733b is located slightly above the upper surface of the third stage body P7720. The protruding portion P7733b is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. When the protruding portion P7733b comes into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced.

The third stage rotating portion P7730 as described above is fitted to the third stage main body P7720 so as to receive the third stage main body P7720 by the opening P7731. Further, the third stage rotating portion P7730 is rotatably provided around the axis center facing in the vertical direction with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the plurality of projecting portions P7733b can be moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 can collide with the protruding portion P7733b that moves in the circumferential direction on the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720.

The third drive transmission unit P7740 shown in FIGS. 249 and 267 transmits the driving force of the second motor P7741, which will be described later, to the third stage rotation unit P7730 and the second drive transmission unit P7640. The third drive transmission unit P7740 is provided on the gear holding unit P7712 of the third stage base unit P7710. The third drive transmission unit P7740 includes a second motor P7741, an output gear P7742, and a third stage gear unit P7743.

The second motor P7741 is a drive source for the first stage main body P7530 (support portion P7520), the second stage rotating portion P7630, and the third stage rotating portion P7730. The second motor P7741 is provided at the rear portion of the lower surface of the gear holding portion P7712. The second motor P7741 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the gear holding portion P7712 up and down and projects upward.

The output gear P7742 extracts the driving force of the second motor P7741. The output gear P7742 is fixed to the upper end of the output shaft of the second motor P7741.

The third stage gear portion P7743 transmits the driving force of the output gear P7742 to the third stage rotating portion P7730. The third stage gear portion P7743 meshes with the gear portion P7732 of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The third stage gear portion P7743 is fixed to the lower portion of the second shaft P7641. Further, with the rotation of the third stage gear portion P7743, the second shaft P7641 rotates around the axis facing in the vertical direction.

The rotation cover portion P7750 shown in FIGS. 260, 263 and 264 covers the third stage rotation portion P7730 from the front. The rotation cover portion P7750 is formed so as to cover the front side portion (first half portion) of the third stage rotation portion P7730 excluding the roll inhibition portion P7733. The rotary cover portion P7750 is fixed to the front portion of the third stage main body P7720.

Next, the configuration of the cover portion P7800 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

The cover portion P7800 shown in FIG. 237 is a decoration that covers the rear frame P7410 and the front frame P7420. The cover portion P7800 includes a rear cover portion P7810, a left cover portion P7820, and a right cover portion P7830.

The rear cover portion P7810 covers the entire rear frame P7410. The rear cover portion P7810 is decorated to imitate the appearance of the tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the rear cover portion P7810.

The left cover portion P7820 covers the left side portion of the front frame P7420. The left cover portion P7820 is decorated to imitate the appearance of the tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the left cover portion P7820.

The right cover portion P7830 covers the right portion of the front frame P7420. The right cover portion P7830 is decorated to imitate the appearance of the tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the right cover portion P7830.

Next, the configuration of the specific area unit P7900 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

The specific region unit P7900 shown in FIGS. 263 to 267 has a specific region P7911 and a non-specific region P7912, and supports the tower accessory P7400 from below. The specific region unit P7900 includes a base portion P7910 and a support portion P7920.

The base portion P7910 constitutes a lower portion of the effect device P7000. The base portion P7910 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. Further, the base portion P7910 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The base portion P7910 is fixed to the lower portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200 (see FIG. 236). That is, the base portion P7910 (and by extension, the specific region unit P7900) is configured to be relatively inoperable with respect to the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The base portion P7910 includes a specific area P7911, a non-specific area P7912, and a discharge passage P7913.

The specific area P7911 detects the passage of a game ball related to a V winning that can shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in the jackpot gaming state. The specific region P7911 opens in the vertical direction. The specific region P7911 is located below the specific region side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424. Further, the upper portion of the specific region P7911 communicates with the specific region side guide portion P7424a. Further, the lower portion of the specific region P7911 communicates with the discharge passage P7913 described later. The specific region P7911 includes a sensor unit P7911a.

The sensor unit P7911a detects a game ball passing through the specific region P7911. The sensor unit P7911a is provided below the specific region P7911.

The non-specific area P7912 detects the passage of a game ball that does not win a V prize. The non-specific region P7912 opens in the vertical direction. Non-specific areas P7912 are provided on both sides of the specific area P7911 in the left-right direction (pair). The upper portion of the non-specific region P7912 communicates with the pair of non-specific region side guide portions P7424b (see FIG. 263). That is, the lower end portion (downstream side end portion) of the non-specific region side guide portion P7424b is arranged above the non-specific region P7912. Further, the lower portion of the non-specific region P7912 communicates with the external discharge passage P7130 provided in the front cover portion P7100 shown in FIG. 234. The non-specific region P7912 includes a sensor unit P7912a.

The sensor unit P7912a detects a game ball passing through the non-specific region P7912. The sensor unit P7912a is provided below the non-specific region P7912.

The discharge passage P7913 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a passage for discharging the game ball that has passed through the specific region P7911 to the outside of the specific region unit P7900. The discharge passage P7913 is formed in a shape of a passage curved from the upper end portion toward the rear lower part. The game ball discharged by the discharge passage P7913 is discharged to the outside of the game board P1100 via an appropriate passage.

The support portion P7920 shown in FIGS. 264 and 265 supports the tower accessory P7400. The support portion P7920 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion P7910. The support portion P7920 includes a ball shaft portion P7921, a bearing portion P7922, and a rotation-regulated bearing portion P7923.

The ball shaft portion P7921 is connected to the tower accessory P7400 and is a portion that serves as an axis for the turning operation (swinging operation) of the tower accessory P7400. The ball shaft portion P7921 includes a ball portion P7921a, a lower shaft portion P7921b, and an upper shaft portion P7921c.

The ball portion P7921a is a portion formed in a spherical shape. The ball portion P7921a constitutes a lower portion of the ball shaft portion P7921.

The lower shaft portion P7921b is a portion that protrudes downward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The lower shaft portion P7921b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis center oriented substantially in the vertical direction.

The upper shaft portion P7921c is a portion that protrudes upward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The upper shaft portion P7921c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis center oriented substantially in the vertical direction. The upper shaft portion P7921c is fixed to the connecting portion P7713 in a state of being inserted into the connecting portion P7713 of the tower accessory P7400. In this way, the upper shaft portion P7921c is fixed to the connecting portion P7713, so that the specific region unit P7900 and the tower accessory P7400 are connected to each other via the ball shaft portion P7921.

The bearing portion P7922 shown in FIG. 265 is a portion that receives the ball shaft portion P7921 so as to be able to swing (swing). The bearing portion P7922 includes a lower bearing portion P7922a and an upper bearing portion P7922b.

The lower bearing portion P7922a constitutes the lower portion of the bearing portion P7922. The lower bearing portion P7922a is formed with a recess that is recessed upward. The recess of the lower bearing portion P7922a is formed in a shape corresponding to the lower portion (lower half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. Further, the lower bearing portion P7922a is formed with a hole through which the lower shaft portion P7921b is inserted and the ball shaft portion P7921 is allowed to rotate.

The upper bearing portion P7922b constitutes an upper portion of the bearing portion P7922. The upper bearing portion P7922b is formed with a recess that is recessed downward. The recess of the upper bearing portion P7922b is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper portion (upper half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. Further, the upper bearing portion P7922b is formed with a hole through which the upper shaft portion P7921c is inserted and the ball shaft portion P7921 is allowed to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 265, in a state where the ball shaft portion P7921 is received by the bearing portion P7922, the ball shaft portion P7921 is held so as to be able to rotate with respect to the bearing portion P7922 via the upper shaft portion P7921c. That is, by connecting (fixing) the upper shaft portion P7921c of the ball shaft portion P7921 to the connecting portion P7713 of the tower accessory P7400, the tower accessory P7400 is held so as to be able to rotate with respect to the specific region unit P7900. ..

The rotation-regulating bearing portion P7923 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 receives the rotation-regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400. The rotation-regulated bearing portion P7923 is formed in a concave shape in which the upper surface of the specific region unit P7900 (more specifically, the support portion P7920) is recessed downward. The rotation regulation bearing portion P7923 is formed so as to be located on the right rear side of the ball shaft portion P7921. That is, the rotation-regulated bearing portion P7923 is formed at a position away from the center of the turning operation of the tower accessory P7400 in a plan view.

The rotation-regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed so as to allow the turning operation of the tower accessory P7400 in a state of accepting the rotation-regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400. Further, in a state where the rotation regulation shaft portion P7714 is received by the rotation regulation bearing portion P7923, the rotation regulation shaft portion P7714 comes into contact with the inside of the opening of the rotation regulation bearing portion P7923, so that the tower centered on the support portion P7920. The rotation (rotation) of the accessory P7400 in the circumferential direction is restricted. As a result, the tower accessory P7400 can be turned while the front side (front frame P7420 side) of the tower accessory P7400 is always facing forward (player side).

Hereinafter, the operation of the effect device P7000 configured as described above will be described.

In the effect device P7000, various members are configured to be able to execute their respective operations. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 268, an operation (swinging operation) in which the tower accessory P7400 turns so that the upper end portion draws a circle is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271, the distribution unit P7360 of the drive unit P7300 swings in the left-right direction around the swing shaft portion P7355. Further, each stage of the tower accessory P7400 (first stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600, and third stage portion P7700) swings (see FIG. 272) or rotates (FIGS. 259 and FIG. (See 267) The operation is performed. Each of the above-mentioned operations will be described below.

First, the turning operation (swinging operation) of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

If the first motor P7353 shown in FIG. 245 or the like provided in the drive unit P7300 is driven, the output gear P7354 will rotate. As a result, the drive gear P7370 meshing with the output gear P7354 rotates. The driving of the first motor P7353 is performed in response to a control signal of a predetermined control means.

As shown in FIG. 245 and the like, a disk portion P7380 is provided in the opening P7372 provided at a position eccentric with respect to the center of the drive gear P7370. As the drive gear P7370 rotates, the disk portion P7380 provided in the opening P7372 slides on the opening P7372 as shown in FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271, and the circle of the drive gear P7370. It moves around the heart in a circular trajectory in a plan view. In the illustrated example, an example in which the disk portion P7380 is moved clockwise in a plan view is shown.

When the disk portion P7380 moves in this way, the upper end portion P7413 (see FIG. 238, etc.) of the tower accessory P7400 (rear frame P7410) fixed to the disk portion P7380 moves around the center of the drive gear P7370 together with the disk portion P7380. Moves in a circular trajectory in a plan view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265 and the like, the lower end portion (third stage portion P7700) of the tower accessory P7400 is specified via the ball shaft portion P7921 (that is, centered on the substantially center of the lower end portion). It is held by the support portion P7920 of the region unit P7900 so as to be swivelable. As a result, when the upper end portion P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 moves around the center of the drive gear P7370, the tower accessory P7400 is centered on the support portion P7920 of the specific area unit P7900, as shown in FIG. (With the axis extending in the longitudinal direction of the tower accessory P7400 tilted with respect to the vertical direction).

Further, at this time, the rotation-regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400 comes into contact with the inside of the opening of the rotation-regulating bearing portion P7923, so that the tower accessory P7400 is moved in the circumferential direction with the support portion P7920 as the axis. Rotation (rotation) is regulated. As a result, the tower accessory P7400 turns with the front side (front frame P7420 side) always facing forward (player side).

A game of rolling on the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700 of the tower accessory P7400 by executing the turning operation (swinging operation) of the tower accessory P7400. The movement of the ball can be changed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Next, the swinging operation of the distribution unit P7360 of the drive unit P7300 will be described.

Along with the turning operation of the tower accessory P7400, the swing transmitting portion P7413e provided at the upper end portion P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 swings, so that the distribution portion P7360 moves left and right around the swing shaft portion P7355. Swing in the direction. Hereinafter, the operation of the distribution unit P7360 when the tower accessory P7400 turns clockwise in a plan view will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the tower accessory P7400 is tilted forward (a state in which the upper end portion P7413 is located forward). In this state, the swing transmission portion P7413e is located at the front end portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. Further, in this state, the distribution unit P7360 is in a state of facing forward. Here, the distribution portion P7360 is urged to the right by the spring portion P7352. Further, the distribution portion P7360 is restricted from moving to the right by the urging force of the spring portion P7352 because the surface of the guide groove portion P7361d facing to the right is in contact with the swing transmission portion P7413e.

As shown in FIG. 269, when the tower accessory P7400 is operated so as to tilt to the left (the upper end portion P7413 is located to the left), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d toward the rear end portion. While relatively moving (sliding) toward, the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d is pressed to the left against the urging force of the spring portion P7352. In the state shown in FIG. 269, the swing transmission portion P7413e is located in the middle portion in the front-rear direction of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. Further, the swing transmission unit P7413e is located to the left of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution unit P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction position. In this way, by being pressed with the operation of the swing transmission section P7413e, the distribution section P7360 swings so as to face to the left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, when the tower accessory P7400 operates so as to tilt backward (the upper end portion P7413 is located rearward), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves the rear end portion in the guide groove portion P7361d. It moves (slides) relatively toward the side. In the state shown in FIG. 270, the swing transmission portion P7413e is located at the rear end portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. Further, the swing transmission unit P7413e is located at the same position as the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution unit P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction position. In this way, the swing transmission unit P7413e moves backward as shown in FIG. 270 from the position shown in FIG. 269, so that the distribution unit P7360 is allowed to move to the right. As a result, the distribution portion P7360 swings so as to face forward due to the urging force of the spring portion P7352.

Further, as shown in FIG. 271, when the tower accessory P7400 is operated so as to tilt to the right (the upper end portion P7413 is located to the right), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d to the front end portion side. It moves (slides) relatively toward. In the state shown in FIG. 271, the swing transmission portion P7413e is located in the middle portion in the front-rear direction of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. Further, the swing transmission unit P7413e is located to the right of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution unit P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction position. In this way, the swing transmission unit P7413e moves forward as shown in FIG. 271 from the position shown in FIG. 270, whereby the distribution unit P7360 is allowed to move further to the right. As a result, the distribution portion P7360 swings so as to face to the right due to the urging force of the spring portion P7352.

In the present embodiment, since the distribution portion P7360 is urged to the right by the spring portion P7352 shown in FIG. 244, the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360 is always brought into contact with the swing transmission portion P7413e. be able to. Thereby, for example, when the direction of pressing the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d of the swing transmission portion P7413e is changed, it is possible to prevent the operation of the distribution portion P7360 from becoming loose, and the swing transmission portion P7413e is used. The driving force can be smoothly transmitted to the distribution unit P7360.

Next, the operation of each stage of the tower accessory P7400 (first stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600, and third stage portion P7700) will be described.

If the second motor P7741 provided in the third drive transmission unit P7740 of the third stage unit P7700 shown in FIGS. 249 and 267 is driven, the output gear P7742 will rotate. The second motor P7741 is driven in response to a control signal of a predetermined control means.

The rotation of the output gear P7742 is transmitted to the third stage rotating portion P7730 via the third stage gear portion P7743. As a result, the third stage rotating unit P7730 rotates with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the rolling inhibition portion P7733 (protruding portion P7733b) of the third stage rotating portion P7730 moves (rotates) the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720 in the circumferential direction.

When the rolling inhibition portion P7733 (protruding portion P7733b) of the third stage rotating portion P7730 that rotates as described above hits the game ball on the third stage main body P7720, the movement of the game ball changes. It can be given and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the rotation of the third stage gear portion P7743 is transmitted to the second drive transmission portion P7640 of the second stage portion P7600 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 via the second shaft P7641. That is, the first gear P7642a of the second drive transmission unit P7640 (second stage gear unit P7462) rotates with the rotation of the second shaft P7641. The rotation of the first gear P7642a is transmitted to the second stage rotating portion P7630 via the second gear P7642b and the third gear P7642c. As a result, the second stage rotating unit P7630 rotates with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) of the second stage rotating portion P7630 moves (rotates) the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620 in the circumferential direction.

When the rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) of the second stage rotating portion P7630 rotating as described above hits the game ball on the second stage main body P7620, the movement of the game ball is changed. It can be given and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the rotation of the third gear P7642c is transmitted to the first drive transmission unit P7540 of the first stage unit P7500 shown in FIGS. 255 and 256 via the first shaft P7541. That is, the first stage gear portion P7542 of the first drive transmission portion P7540 rotates with the rotation of the first shaft P7541. The rotation of the first stage gear portion P7542 is transmitted to the swing transmission portion P7543. As a result, the swing transmission unit P7543 rotates around the axis facing in the vertical direction.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 256, 257, and 272, the engaging portion P7523 of the support portion P7520 is engaged with the spiral portion P7543c of the swing transmission portion P7543. As the swing transmission portion P7543 rotates, the spiral portion P7543c slides with respect to the engaging portion P7523 in a state of being engaged with the engaging portion P7523. At this time, since the spiral portion P7543c is formed in a spiral shape, the height position (that is, the engagement) of the portion where the spiral portion P7543c and the engaging portion P7523 are engaged with the rotation of the swing transmission portion P7543 is performed. The height position of the joint P7523) changes. Here, the engaging portion P7523 is provided at a position deviated to the left from the position of the swing center of the first stage main body P7530). Therefore, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 swing around the swing shaft portion P7411a and the swing shaft portion P7513 shown in FIG. 253 as the height position of the engaging portion P7523 changes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), when the position of the engaging portion P7523 is the highest position, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 are tilted to the right (the right portion moves downward). Swing like). Further, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), when the position of the engaging portion P7523 is the lowest position, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 are tilted to the left (the left side portion moves downward). Swing to. In this way, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 swing so as to tilt to the right or to the left each time the swing transmission portion P7543 rotates half a turn. As a result, the movement of the game ball on the first stage main body P7530 can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the effect device P7000 that executes various operations, as described above, the game ball that rolls in the game area P1120 can be introduced inside, and the game ball can be introduced to the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area. It can be distributed to the P7912 side or the like. Hereinafter, a mode of rolling of the game ball introduced in the effect device P7000 will be described.

First, among the effect devices P7000, the mode of rolling of the game ball in the drive unit P7300 will be described.

The game ball that rolls in the game area P1120 is introduced into the effect device P7000 from the supply unit P7121 shown in FIG. 235 and the like. Then, as shown in FIG. 250 and the like, the game ball introduced from the supply unit P7121 is first guided to the croon unit P7320. Specifically, the game ball introduced from the supply unit P7121 passes through the supply passage portion P7322 of the croon portion P7320 and is guided to the croon main body P7321.

Here, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is opened in the outer portion of the Kroon main body P7321 in the circumferential direction in a plan view. Therefore, the game ball guided from the supply passage portion P7322 to the Kroon main body P7321 rolls so as to rotate in the circumferential direction around the Kroon main body P7321 (around the three holes P7321a). Then, as the rolling momentum of the game ball decreases, the game ball approaches the center side (three hole portions P7321a side) of the Kroon main body P7321 and finally moves downward from any of the three hole portions P7321a. Fall.

The game ball falling from the Kroon main body P7321 (three hole portions P7321a) is then guided to the drive base portion P7330. Specifically, the game ball falling from the three holes P7321a is received by the bottom of the drive base main body P7331 of the drive base P7330 and rolls on the bottom.

Here, at the bottom of the drive base main body P7331, the rolling guide portion P7331a is located in front of the place where the game ball falling from the three holes P7321a is received (that is, in the direction in which the received game ball rolls). And (on the left and right of the rolling guide portion P7331a), convex portions are formed. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the drive base main body P7331 moves forward on the rolling guide P7331a while colliding with the left and right convex portions, for example.

In the present embodiment, of the three hole portions P7321a of the Kroon main body P7321, the game ball that has fallen from the hole portion P7321a in the central portion in the left-right direction is relatively unlikely to collide with the convex portion. Easy to move smoothly (relatively straight). On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen from the other two holes P7321a is relatively easy to collide with the convex portion, so that it is difficult for the rolling guide portion P7331a to move smoothly forward. In this way, the game ball that has rolled to the front end portion of the rolling guide portion P7331a falls from the front end portion of the rolling guide portion P7331a.

Here, below the front end portion of the rolling guide portion P7331a, the front end portion of the distribution portion P7360 (more specifically, the front end portion of the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 and the left and right inclined portions P7364). Have been placed. Further, a discharge guide portion P7340 is arranged below the front end portion of the distribution portion P7360. Then, the distribution unit P7360 swings left and right. Therefore, the destination of the game ball falling from the front end portion of the rolling guide portion P7331a is changed according to the timing (the position where the game ball falls and the position of the distribution portion P7360 when the game ball falls).

Specifically, when the game ball falls, if the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 is located at the position where the game ball has fallen, the dropped game ball is the passage portion P7361b (distribution portion P7360). Can be received by. On the other hand, when the game ball falls, if the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 is not located (shifted to the left or right) at the position where the game ball has fallen (see FIGS. 269 and 271). The dropped game ball is not received by the passage portion P7361b, collides with the edge portion (side plate) of the passage portion P7361b and the left and right inclined portions P7364, and is guided to the discharge guide portion P7340. In this way, the destination of the game ball falling from the rolling guide unit P7331a is changed (sorted) according to the timing.

Of the game balls guided to the discharge guide unit P7340, the game ball that rolls toward the left end side of the discharge guide unit P7340 is again via the discharge unit P7122 on the left side (not shown) of the front cover unit P7100. It is discharged to the game area P1120. Further, the game ball that rolls to the right end side of the discharge guide portion P7340 is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100 via the discharge portion P7122 on the right side of the front cover portion P7100.

Further, the game ball received by the passage portion P7361b (distribution portion P7360) rolls toward the rear end portion side of the passage portion P7361b. Then, when the game ball reaches the rear end of the passage portion P7361b, it passes through the hole portion P7361c and falls downward. The game ball falling from the distribution portion P7360 (hole portion P7361c) is then guided to the upper end portion P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 via the opening P7381 of the disk portion P7380. That is, the game ball falling from the distribution portion P7360 (hole portion P7361c) is discharged from the drive unit P7300 and then introduced into the tower accessory P7400.

Next, in the effect device P7000, the mode of rolling of the game ball in the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 250, the game ball guided to the upper end portion P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a of the upper end portion P7413, and then passes through the hole portion P7413c and falls downward. ..

The game ball falling from the upper end portion P7413 (hole portion P7413c) is then guided to the first stage portion P7500. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole portion P7413c is received by the first stage main body P7530 of the first stage portion P7500 and rolls on the first stage main body P7530.

Here, as shown in FIG. 252, the first stage main body P7530 is located in front of the place where the game ball falling from the hole P7413c is received (that is, in the direction in which the received game ball rolls). The first wall portion P7532 and the second wall portion P7533 are formed. Further, the tower accessory P7400 and the first stage portion P7500 perform different operations (swivel operation and rocking operation) from each other. Therefore, the game ball that moves forward on the first stage main body P7530 is affected by the movements of the tower accessory P7400 and the first stage portion P7500, and is moved to the first wall portion P7532 and the second wall portion P7533. Move forward while colliding (moving in irregular directions gradually).

The game ball that has rolled to the front ends at the center of the left and right of the first stage main body P7530 falls downward from the passing portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the center of the left and right of the first stage body P7530 to the front end that is displaced to the left and right falls downward from the position that is displaced to the left and right of the passing portion P7531 (not the passing portion P7531). To do.

Here, the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 is arranged below the passing portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the passing portion P7531 is received by the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a, and the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a is rolled rearward. The game ball that has rolled backward on the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a is guided by the passage portion P7512, passes through the hole portion P7512a, and falls.

On the other hand, the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b of the first guide portion P7422 is arranged below the position shifted to the left and right of the passing portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the position shifted to the left and right of the passing portion P7531 is received by the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b, and is received by the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b, and the discharge passage of the front strut portion P7421 (shown in FIG. It is guided to P7421a. In this way, the destination of the game ball guided to the first stage portion P7500 is changed (sorted) according to the place where it falls from the first stage main body P7530. The game ball guided to the discharge passage P7421a is guided to the non-specific region P7912 of the specific region unit P7900 via the non-specific region side guide portion P7424b of the third stage portion P7700.

The game ball falling from the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 is then guided to the second stage portion P7600. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole portion P7512a is received by the second stage main body P7620 of the second stage portion P7600, and rolls the second stage main body P7620.

Here, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed in a substantially dish shape in which the central side is inclined downward. Further, immediately above the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620, the four protruding portions P7633c of the rolling inhibition portion P7633 move in the circumferential direction. Further, the tower accessory P7400 is executing a turning operation. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the second stage main body P7620 rolls or moves toward the center according to the inclination of the second stage main body P7620 while being affected by the movement of the tower accessory P7400. It moves in an irregular direction by colliding with the portion P7633c. In this way, the game ball that rolls on the second stage main body P7620 finally passes through the passing portion P7621 and falls downward, or the discharge passage from the right front end portion and the left front end portion of the second stage main body P7620. It falls to the side guide portion P7423b.

In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the passing portion P7621 is received by the passage portion P7612 of the second stage base portion P7610, and the passage portion P7612 is rolled backward. The game ball that has rolled backward through the passage portion P7612 passes through the hole portion P7612a and falls downward. On the other hand, the game ball that has moved to the discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is guided to the discharge passage P7421a of the front strut portion P7421 (shown in FIG. 240 and the like) by the discharge passage side guide portion P7423b. In this way, the destination of the game ball guided to the second stage portion P7600 is changed (sorted) according to the place where it falls from the second stage main body P7620.

As shown in FIGS. 252 and 263, the game ball falling from the hole P7612a of the second stage portion P7600 is then guided to the third stage portion P7700. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole portion P7612a is received by the third stage main body P7720 of the third stage portion P7700, and rolls the third stage main body P7720.

Here, as shown in FIG. 263, on the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720, the front end portion is inclined forward and downward, and a plurality of protrusions P7721 are formed. Further, a plurality of protruding portions P7733b of the rolling inhibition portion P7733 move in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720. Further, the tower accessory P7400 is executing a turning operation. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the third stage main body P7720 rolls forward according to the inclination of the third stage main body P7720 while being influenced by the movement of the tower accessory P7400, and the protrusion P7721 or the like. It moves in an irregular direction by colliding with the moving protrusion P7733b. In this way, the game ball that rolls on the third stage main body P7720 falls from the front end portion of the third stage main body P7720 to the specific area side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424, or the third stage. It falls from the front end portion and the left front end portion of the main body P7720 to the non-specific region side guide portion P7424b of the third guide portion P7424.

In this way, the game ball that has fallen to the specific area side guide unit P7424a is guided to the specific area P7911 of the specific area unit P7900 by the specific area side guide unit P7424a. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen to the non-specific area side guide unit P7424b is guided to the non-specific area P7912 of the specific area unit P7900 by the non-specific area side guide unit P7424b. In this way, the destination of the game ball guided to the third stage portion P7700 is changed (sorted) according to the place where it falls from the third stage main body P7720.

In this way, in the effect device P7000, the game balls introduced inside can be distributed in multiple stages to the specific area P7911 side and the non-specific area P7912 side while each of the various members is configured to be able to execute the operation. .. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see JP-A-2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first movable body (drive gear P7370), a second movable body (tower accessory P7400), and a third movable body (distribution portion P7360) are provided.
The first movable body (drive gear P7370) can be operated by a driving force from a first drive source (first motor P7353).
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is in contact with the first movable body (drive gear P7370) and can be operated in association with the operation of the first movable body (drive gear P7370).
The third movable body (distribution unit P7360) is in contact with the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) and can move with the operation of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400). Yes,
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) and the third movable body (distribution unit P7360) operate in different operation modes.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) can be operated with a predetermined portion (front portion) always facing the player side.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the first movable body (drive gear P7370) and the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) can be operated by utilizing the operation of the first movable body (drive gear P7370).

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) and the third movable body (distribution portion P7360) are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, the third movable body (distribution unit P7360) can be operated by utilizing the operation of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a flow path of a game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).
The third movable body (taxiing portion P7360) is provided with a guide path (passage portion P7361b) for guiding the game ball to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the operation mode of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is a rotation operation or a swing operation.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the operation mode of the third movable body (distribution unit P7360) is a swing operation.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the third movable body (taxiing unit P7360) reaches the game ball that arrives at a predetermined timing according to the operation of the third movable body (taxiing unit P7360) in the guide path (passage unit P7361b). ) To the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, a winning device (specific area unit P7900) capable of detecting the winning of a game ball passing through the flow path of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided.
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a second flow path (non-specific area P7912) different from the first flow path. A flow path that communicates with)
The winning device (specific area unit P7900) includes a first detection unit (specific area P7911) for detecting a winning of a game ball that has passed through the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911), and the above-mentioned. It includes a second detection unit (non-specific area P7912) for detecting a winning of a game ball that has passed through a second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912).

With such a configuration, the game balls can be distributed.

Further, a winning device (specific area unit P7900) capable of detecting the winning of a game ball passing through the flow path of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided.
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is in contact with the first movable body (drive gear P7370) in the upper portion, and can operate with respect to the winning device (specific area unit P7900) in the lower portion. It is supported.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily win a prize for a game ball that has passed through a second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). Is provided with a different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912), and can be operated by a driving force from a second drive source (second motor P7741). The first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) of the game ball supplied to the movable body (tower accessory P7400). It is provided with a distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) that can be distributed to.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). Is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided in the first flow path (the first flow path (the first flow path). A distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and second stage unit) that can be distributed to the specific area P7911 (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912). Equipped with 3 stage parts P7700)
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). Is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided in the first flow path (the first flow path (the first flow path). A distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and second stage unit) that can be distributed to the specific area P7911 (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912). Equipped with 3 stage parts P7700)
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.
The plurality of distribution units (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). Is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided in the first flow path (the first flow path (the first flow path). A distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and second stage unit) that can be distributed to the specific area P7911 (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912). Equipped with 3 stage parts P7700)
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.
The plurality of distribution units (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes.
The plurality of operation modes include at least a rotation operation.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). Is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is provided in the first flow path (the first flow path (the first flow path). A distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and second stage unit) that can be distributed to the specific area P7911 (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912). Equipped with 3 stage parts P7700)
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.
The plurality of distribution units (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes.
The plurality of operation modes include at least a swing operation.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

As shown in parentheses above
The drive gear P7370 is a form of the first movable body.
Further, the tower accessory P7400 is a form of the second movable body.
Further, the distribution unit P7360 is a form of a third movable body.
Further, the passage portion P7361b is a form of a guide path.
Further, the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700 are one form of the distribution unit.
Further, the specific area unit P7900 is a form of a winning device.
Further, the specific region P7911 is a form of the first detection unit.
Further, the non-specific region P7912 is a form of the second detection unit.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine having a structural portion including a first portion (tower accessory P7400), a second portion (distribution portion P7360), and a base portion (specific area unit P7900).
The first portion (tower accessory P7400) includes a flow path of a game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400).
The second portion (taxiing portion P7360) includes a guide path (passage portion P7361b) for guiding the game ball to the first portion (tower accessory P7400).
The base portion (specific area unit P7900) includes a detection means (sensor unit P7911a) capable of detecting a winning of a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the first portion (tower accessory P7400).
At least one of the first portion (tower accessory P7400) and the second portion (distribution portion P7360) is movable with respect to the base portion (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
Both the first portion (tower accessory P7400) and the second portion (distribution portion P7360) are movable with respect to the base portion (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second portion (distribution unit P7360) is movable with respect to the base portion (specific area unit P7900).
A game ball that has reached the second portion (taxiing portion P7360) at a predetermined timing is guided to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) via the guide path (passage portion P7361b). ..

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first portion (tower accessory P7400), the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) are It is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912).

With such a configuration, the game balls can be distributed.

Further, the first portion (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated with the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). Distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912). ) Is provided.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first portion (tower accessory P7400), the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) are A different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated with the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). A distribution unit that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912) is provided.
A plurality of the distribution sections are provided.
Of the plurality of distribution units (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700), the upstream distribution unit communicates with the first flow path (specific region P7911). The game ball that has passed through the flow path) can be transferred to the distribution section on the downstream side.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the first portion (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated with the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). Distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912). )
The distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) is a deceleration unit (rolling) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on the distribution unit. It is provided with an inhibitory portion P7633).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the first portion (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated with the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). Distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912). )
The distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) is a deceleration unit (rolling) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on the distribution unit. Inhibiting portion P7633, protrusion P7721 and rolling inhibiting portion P7733) are provided.
The deceleration unit (rolling inhibition unit P7633, protrusion P7721 and rolling inhibition unit P7733) reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by contacting the distribution unit with the rolling game ball. ..

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the first portion (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (flow path communicating to the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated to the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). A distribution section (second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912) is provided.
The distribution unit (second stage unit P7600 and third stage unit P7700) is a deceleration unit (rolling inhibition unit P7633, protrusion P7721) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on the distribution unit. , Rolling inhibition part P7733)
The deceleration portion (rolling inhibition portion P7633, protrusion portion P7721 and rolling inhibition portion P7733) is formed in a protrusion shape protruding in one direction.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first portion (tower accessory P7400), the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) are A different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game ball supplied to the first portion (tower accessory P7400) is communicated with the first flow path (communication to the specific area P7911). A distribution section (second stage section P7600) that can be distributed to the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912) is provided.
The distribution unit (second stage unit P7600) includes a deceleration unit (rolling inhibition unit P7633) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on the distribution unit.
The distribution unit (first stage unit P7500, second stage unit P7600, and third stage unit P7700) is a game ball whose rolling speed is reduced by the deceleration unit (rolling inhibition unit P7633). It is provided with a visual recognition portion (hole portion P7633b) that can be visually recognized by a player.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the first portion (tower accessory P7400), the second portion (distribution portion P7360), and the base portion (specific area unit P7900) are separate members.

With such a configuration, the movable member and the inoperable member can be made separate members.

As shown in parentheses above
The tower accessory P7400 is a form of the first part.
Further, the distribution unit P7360 is a form of the second part.
Further, the passage portion P7361b is a form of a guide path.
Further, the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700 are one form of the distribution unit.
Further, the rolling inhibition portion P7633, the protrusion P7721 and the rolling inhibiting portion P7733 are one form of the deceleration portion.
Further, the hole portion P7633b is a form of a visual recognition portion.
Further, the specific region unit P7900 is a form of a base portion.
Further, the specific region P7911 is a form of the first detection unit.
Further, the non-specific region P7912 is a form of the second detection unit.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which both the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution unit P7360 are operated with respect to the specific region unit P7900 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, one of the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution unit P7360 may be configured to operate with respect to the specific area unit P7900.

Further, in the present embodiment, the tower accessory P7400 is configured to be capable of turning (swinging), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As the operation of the tower accessory P7400, various operations capable of distributing the game balls, such as a swing operation, a rotation operation, and a reciprocating operation, can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution unit P7360 is configured to be swingable, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As the operation of the distribution unit P7360, various operations capable of distributing the game ball, such as a turning operation, a rotating operation, and a reciprocating operation, can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a device for inhibiting the rolling of the game ball, a rolling inhibition section P7633 of the second stage portion P7600, a rolling inhibition section P7733 of the third stage portion P7700, and a protrusion P7721 are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As a device that hinders the rolling of the game ball, for example, a plate-shaped member (for example, a shutter) configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface (rolling surface) of the game area P1120 with the plate surface facing up and down. ), Various configurations that can inhibit the rolling of the game ball can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing the hole portion P7633b in the roll inhibition portion P7633 of the second stage portion P7600, a game ball that rolls on the second stage main body P7620 via the hole portion P7633b. Although an example in which the visual recognition is possible is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. As a configuration that enables the visual recognition of the game ball on the stage (for example, the second stage portion P7600), for example, the whole or a part of the rolling inhibition portion P7633 may be formed of a transparent material or a winning opening. Various configurations can be adopted, such as forming the front side surface of various units arranged in the game area P1120, such as a unit or an attacker unit, with a material having transparency.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory (tower accessory P7400) is modeled as a tower, but the shape of the movable accessory is not limited to such an embodiment, and various shapes can be adopted. Is.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to display the effect image and the decorative design, a display device 7 as shown in FIG. 4 can be provided. That is, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display device 7 to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the effect image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the effect image during the big hit game state, and the demo. It is possible to display an effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like.

Further, the movable accessory (tower accessory P7400) of the present embodiment is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st type or the 1st type 2nd kind mixer, but is mounted on the so-called 2nd type pachinko gaming machine. You can also do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which the distribution unit P7360 is used as a "movable winning opening" by guiding the game ball received at a predetermined timing to the specific area P7911 side (which can win a prize). However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the fact that the game ball is received at the tip of the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 (that is, the detection that the game ball is received at the tip of the passage portion P7361b by a predetermined sensor) may be awarded as a prize. Further, in that case, the prize in the distribution unit P7360 may be a prize in the first or second starting port, or may be a prize in a specific area.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration having a specific region in which a prize can be won is illustrated as a unit (specific region unit P7900) at the lower end of the effect device P7000, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the unit at the lower end of the effect device P7000 may have a first or second starting port that can win a prize.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the first to fourth embodiments in that it has the effect device C1000. Hereinafter, the configuration of the effect device C1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 288. In the above drawings, the members are not shown as appropriate for convenience of explanation. For example, in FIGS. 276 to 278, the logo accessory C1500 is not shown.

The effect device C1000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The effect device C1000 is installed on the upper part of the game board P1100. The effect device C1000 mainly includes a movable effect accessory C1100, a drive mechanism C1200, a holding mechanism C1300, a shock absorbing means C1400, and a logo accessory C1500.

The logo accessory C1500 shown in FIGS. 273 to 275 is appropriately decorated. Specifically, the logo accessory C1500 is decorated to imitate a logo composed of appropriate characters (for example, "ABC"). The logo accessory C1500 is arranged in front of the movable production accessory C1100. The logo accessory C1500 and the movable effect accessory C1100 are configured to be movable relative to each other.

The movable effecting accessory C1100 shown in FIGS. 273 to 279 and the like performs an effect by operating. Specifically, the movable effect object C1100 is provided so as to be able to move up and down by a drive mechanism C1200 described later. The movable effect object C1100 is provided with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The operation of the movable effect accessory C1100 is controlled by the effect operation control circuit 89. Although the details will be described later, the movable effect object C1100 has a position before the effect (standby position shown in FIG. 289) and a position below the standby position during the effect (FIG. 291). (Intermediate position shown in FIG. 295), which is movably provided at a position below the intermediate position (protruding position shown in FIG. 295) while the effect is being performed. The movable production accessory C1100 mainly includes a harpoon accessory C1120 and a support C1130.

The harpoon accessory C1120 shown in FIGS. 276 to 279 and the like is appropriately decorated and is operated to produce an effect. Specifically, the harpoon accessory C1120 is decorated to imitate a harpoon. The harpoon accessory C1120 is provided behind the logo accessory C1500. The harpoon accessory C1120 mainly includes an accessory decorative body C1121, a light guide plate C1122, an accessory illumination substrate C1123, and a base portion C1124.

The accessory decorative body C1121 shown in FIGS. 276, 278 and 279 is a portion that is appropriately decorated and is movable when performing an effect. The accessory decorative body C1121 is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. The accessory decorative body C1121 mainly includes a first decorative body C1121a, a second decorative body C1121b, and a first decorative lens C1121c.

The first decorative body C1121a is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. The first decorative body C1121a is provided with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The first decorative body C1121a is provided at the center on the left and right of the accessory decorative body C1121. An opening that penetrates the first decorative body C1121a in the front-rear direction is formed in the substantially center of the front view of the first decorative body C1121a, and a second decorative lens C1121d formed of a transparent material is formed in the opening. It is provided. The second decorative lens C1121d is formed in a rhombus shape in front view.

The second decorative body C1121b is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. The second decorative body C1121b is provided with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The second decorative body C1121b is provided on the left side and the right side of the first decorative body C1121a, respectively. The second decorative body C1121b is rotatably formed clockwise and counterclockwise around the upper portion of the second decorative body C1121b by a drive mechanism (not shown).

The first decorative lens C1121c is formed of a transparent material. The first decorative lens C1121c is provided between the first decorative body C1121a and the left and right second decorative bodies C1121b, respectively.

The light guide plate C1122 shown in FIG. 279 and the like diffuses light. The light guide plate C1122 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The light guide plate C1122 is provided behind the accessory decorative body C1121.

The accessory illumination substrate C1123 shown in FIG. 279 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination board C1123 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The accessory illumination board C1123 is provided behind the light guide plate C1122. A plurality of light emitting units C1123a are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board C1123 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination board C1123. The light emitting unit C1123a is composed of LEDs. By causing the light emitting unit C1123a to emit light, it is possible to irradiate the front of the accessory illumination substrate C1123 with light.

The base portion C1124 shown in FIG. 279 and the like supports the accessory decorative body C1121, the light guide plate C1122, and the accessory illumination substrate C1123. The base portion C1124 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The base portion C1124 is provided with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. A guided portion C1124a is formed on the base portion C1124.

The guided portion C1124a shown in FIG. 279 (and FIG. 294) is a portion guided by the inclined guide portion C1230 described later. The guided portion C1124a is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed to the left and right. The guided portion C1124a is provided at the left end of the base portion C1124.

In the harpoon accessory C1120 formed in this way, the first decorative lens C1121c and the second decorative lens C1121d can be illuminated by irradiating light from the light emitting portion C1123a of the accessory illumination substrate C1123.

The support C1130 shown in FIG. 278 and the like rotatably supports the harpoon accessory C1120. The support C1130 is provided behind the harpoon accessory C1120. The support C1130 mainly includes a base member C1131, a rotation shaft C1132, and a slider C1133.

The base member C1131 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base member C1131 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The base member C1131 is provided behind the upper part of the harpoon accessory C1120.

The rotation shaft C1132 is a portion serving as a rotation center of the harpoon accessory C1120. The rotating shaft C1132 is inserted through the harpoon accessory C1120 with the axis directed to the left and right, and is rotatably provided on the base member C1131. A pair of left and right rotating shafts C1132 are provided.

The slider C1133 is a portion guided by the shaft C1217 and the shaft C1227, which will be described later. The slider C1133 is provided at the left end portion and the right end portion of the base member C1131, respectively. A shaft C1217, which will be described later, is inserted through the slider C1133 (through hole) on the left side. A shaft C1227, which will be described later, is inserted into the slider C1133 (through hole) on the right side. The left slider C1133 is provided at a higher position than the right slider C1133.

The drive mechanism C1200 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 280 to 286, and the like drives the movable effect object C1100. The drive mechanism C1200 includes a left-side elevating mechanism C1210, a right-side elevating mechanism C1220, and an inclination guide portion C1230.

The left-side elevating mechanism C1210 shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, 280, 281 and the like constitutes the left portion of the elevating mechanism that drives the movable effect object C1100 up and down. The left elevating mechanism C1210 mainly includes a base portion C1211, an upper pulley C1212, a lower pulley C1213, a belt C1214, a transmission gear C1215, an elevating drive motor C1216, a shaft C1217, and a carriage C1218.

The base portion C1211 shown in FIGS. 277 and 280 to 286 and the like supports various members of the left elevating mechanism C1210. The base portion C1211 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base portion C1211 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing up and down. Pin C1211a is provided on the base portion C1211.

The pin C1211a shown in FIG. 286 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion C1211 and is provided so as to project forward from the base portion C1211. The pins C1211a are provided at three positions corresponding to the groove portion C1333a described later and at two positions corresponding to the groove portion C1411 described later.

The upper pulley C1212 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley C1212 is rotatably supported near the upper end portion of the front surface of the base portion C1211. A gear (not shown) is formed on the upper pulley C1212.

The lower pulley C1213 shown in FIGS. 281, 283 and 284 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley C1213 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion C1211 (below the upper pulley C1212).

The belt C1214 shown in FIGS. 278 and 280 to 284 and the like is for moving the carriage C1218, which will be described later, up and down. The belt C1214 is wound around the upper pulley C1212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The transmission gear C1215 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 transmits a driving force to the upper pulley C1212. The transmission gear C1215 is arranged so as to mesh with a gear (not shown) formed on the upper pulley C1212.

The elevating drive motor C1216 shown in FIGS. 278, 281 and 282 is a drive source for raising the movable effect accessory C1100. The elevating drive motor C1216 is fixed to the upper part of the base portion C1211. The driving force from the output shaft (not shown) of the elevating drive motor C1216 is transmitted to the transmission gear C1215. When the transmission gear C1215 is rotated by the driving force of the elevating drive motor C1216, the upper pulley C1212 rotates with the rotation of the transmission gear C1215. As a result, the belt C1214 rotates between the upper pulley C1212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The shaft C1217 shown in FIGS. 278 and 280 to 284 and the like guides the movable effect object C1100 up and down. A pair of left and right shafts C1217 are provided behind the base portion C1211. The shaft C1217 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the lower end portion of the base portion C1211 to the vicinity of the upper end portion. The shaft C1217 is inserted through the left slider C1133 (through hole) to guide the slider C1133 and, by extension, the movable effect object C1100 up and down.

The carriage C1218 shown in FIGS. 280, 281, 283 and 284 is for moving the movable effecting object C1100 upward. As shown in FIG. 284, the carriage C1218 is formed so as to sandwich the belt C1214, whereby the carriage C1214 is fixed to the belt C1214. A shaft C1217 is inserted inside the carriage C1218. The carriage C1218 thus formed can move up and down along the shaft C1217 by rotating the belt C1214 between the upper pulley C1212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The right-side elevating mechanism C1220 shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and 280 constitutes the right portion of the elevating mechanism for vertically driving the movable effect object C1100 up and down. The right elevating mechanism C1220 mainly includes a base portion C1221, an upper pulley (not shown), a lower pulley (not shown), a belt C1224, a transmission gear (not shown), an elevating drive motor C1226, a shaft C1227, and a carriage C1228. Since the right-side elevating mechanism C1220 is configured to be substantially the same as the left-side elevating mechanism C1210 (substantially symmetrical), the configuration will be briefly described below.

A belt C1224 is wound around an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley (not shown), and the belt C1224 is rotated by the driving force of the elevating drive motor C1226.

The shaft C1227 is inserted inside the slider C1133 on the right side to guide the slider C1133 and, by extension, the movable effect object C1100 up and down. A shaft C1227 is inserted inside the carriage C1228, and the belt C1224 rotates between an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley (not shown), so that the carriage C1228 moves upward along the shaft C1227. ..

The tilt guide portion C1230 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278 and 285 guides the harpoon accessory C1120 by rotating it around the rotation shaft C1132 so as to tilt it. The tilt guide portion C1230 is provided on the lower right side portion of the left side elevating mechanism C1210. The inclined guide portion C1230 includes a guide surface C1231 and a folded portion C1232.

The guide surface C1231 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is a surface for guiding the movable effect object C1100. The guide surface C1231 is formed so as to incline downward.

The folded-back portion C1232 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is formed so that the front end of the guide surface C1231 is folded back and upward.

The holding mechanism C1300 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 280, 281 and 285 to 287 holds the movable effect object C1100 at a predetermined position. Specifically, the holding mechanism C1300 sets the movable effecting accessory C1100 at a position before the effect is performed (standby position shown in FIG. 289) and below the standby position during the effect. (Intermediate position shown in FIG. 291). The holding mechanism C1300 includes an upper left holding portion C1310, an upper right holding portion C1320, a lower left holding portion C1330, and a lower right holding portion C1340.

The upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 shown in FIGS. 277 and 280 and the like hold the movable effect accessory C1100 in the standby position. The upper left holding portion C1310 is provided above the base portion C1211 of the left elevating mechanism C1210. The upper right holding portion C1320 is provided above the base portion C1221 of the right elevating mechanism C1220. The upper left holding portion C1310 is provided above the upper right holding portion C1320.

The lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 shown in FIGS. 277 and 280 and the like hold the movable effect accessory C1100 at an intermediate position. The lower left holding portion C1330 is provided below the base portion C1211 of the left elevating mechanism C1210 (below the upper left holding portion C1310). The upper right holding portion C1320 is provided below the base portion C1221 of the right elevating mechanism C1220 (below the upper right holding portion C1320). The lower left holding portion C1330 is provided above the lower right holding portion C1340.

The upper left holding portion C1310, the upper right holding portion C1320, the lower left holding portion C1330, and the lower right holding portion C1340 have substantially the same configuration. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the lower left holding portion C1330 will be described, and the description of the configurations of the upper left holding portion C1310, the upper right holding portion C1320 and the lower right holding portion C1340 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 287, the lower left holding portion C1330 includes a claw portion C1331, a solenoid C1332, and a solenoid holder C1333.

The claw portion C1331 shown in FIGS. 277, 285 and 287 is a portion on which the movable effect object C1100 is placed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 285, the slider C1133 of the movable effect object C1100 is placed on the claw portion C1331. As shown in FIG. 287, the claw portion C1331 includes a main body portion C1331a, a rotating pin C1331b, and an engaging portion C1331c.

The main body portion C1331a shown in FIG. 287 forms the main structure of the claw portion C1331. The main body portion C1331a is formed in a substantially L-shape in side view. More specifically, the main body portion C1331a is mainly composed of a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending rearward from the lower end portion of the portion. The main body portion C1331a is provided so that a part thereof (the portion extending forward) projects rearward from the base portion C1211.

The rotation pin C1331b shown in FIG. 287 is a portion serving as a rotation center of the claw portion C1331. The rotating pin C1331b is inserted into the upper part of the main body portion C1331a with the axis directed to the left and right. Further, the rotation pin C1331b is inserted into the solenoid holder C1333 described later.

The engaging portion C1331c shown in FIG. 287 is formed so as to extend from the arm-shaped portion provided on the upper portion of the main body portion C1331a toward the right side (left-right center side of the game board P1100). The engaging portion C1331c is provided in front of the rotating pin C1331b.

The claw portion C1331 formed in this way is rotatably formed around the axis of the rotating pin C1331b.

The solenoid C1332 shown in FIG. 287 is a drive source for the claw portion C1331. The solenoid C1332 is provided on the front side of the base portion C1211. The solenoid C1332 attracts the plunger holder C1332a by being excited. As a result, the plunger holder C1332a moves upward. Further, the plunger holder C1332a returns to its original position by the urging force of the urging means C1332b when the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is released. A recess C1332c is formed in the plunger holder C1332a.

The recess C1332c is formed so that the left surface of the plunger holder C1332a is recessed to the right. The recess C1332c is formed so that the engaging portion C1331c can enter.

The solenoid holder C1333 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 to 287 supports the solenoid C1332 and covers the solenoid C1332. The solenoid holder C1333 is provided in front of the base portion C1211. The solenoid holder C1333 is formed in a box shape with an open rear surface. A groove C1333a is formed in the solenoid holder C1333.

The groove C1333a shown in FIG. 286 is formed in the shape of a substantially elongated hole in the front view with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The groove C1333a is formed so as to penetrate the solenoid holder C1333 in the front-rear direction. Grooves C1333a are provided at one location on the right side of the solenoid holder C1333 and at two locations so as to line up vertically on the left portion of the solenoid holder C1333. These three groove portions C1333a are provided at positions corresponding to a part of the pin C1211a, and the pin C1211a is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the moving direction of the lower left holding portion C1330 can be regulated in the vertical direction, and the movable range can be regulated.

In the lower left holding portion C1330 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 290, the solenoid C1332 is excited and the plunger holder C1332a moves upward, so that the engaging portion C1331c of the claw portion C1331 becomes the lower surface of the recess C1332c. Engage (contact) with. Then, the recess C1332c of the plunger holder C1332a pushes up the engaging portion C1331c of the claw portion C1331, so that the claw portion C1331 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the left side with the axis of the rotation pin C1331b as the center. As a result, the claw portion C1331 (the portion protruding rearward from the base portion C1211) is retracted forward from the rear surface of the base portion C1211.

The shock absorbing means C1400 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 285 and 286 absorbs the shock received by the holding mechanism C1300 from the movable effecting accessory C1100.

The shock absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340, respectively. The shock absorbing means C1400 is provided on the base portion C1211 of the left elevating mechanism C1210 and the base portion C1221 of the right elevating mechanism C1220, respectively. The shock absorbing means C1400 includes a receiving portion C1410, a supporting portion C1420, and an urging means C1430. Hereinafter, the description will be given focusing on the shock absorbing means C1400 immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330.

The receiving portion C1410 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 supports the holding mechanism C1300 from below. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the solenoid holder C1333 of the lower left holding portion C1330 is placed on the receiving portion C1410. The receiving portion C1410 is formed in a substantially L-shape in side view. More specifically, the receiving portion C1410 is mainly composed of a portion having a substantially rectangular plate shape in front view and a portion extending forward from the upper end portion of the portion. The receiving portion C1410 includes a groove portion C1411 and a pin C1412.

The groove C1411 shown in FIGS. 286 and 288 is formed in a substantially elongated hole shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The groove portion C1411 is formed so as to penetrate the receiving portion C1410 in the front-rear direction. The groove C1411 is formed at two locations so as to be arranged at intervals on the left and right. The two groove portions C1411 are provided at positions corresponding to a part of the pin C1211a, and the pin C1211a is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the moving direction of the receiving portion C1410 can be regulated in the vertical direction, and the movable range can be regulated.

The pin C1412 shown in FIG. 288 is formed in a columnar shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The pin C1412 is fixed at substantially the center of the left and right sides of the receiving portion C1410, and is provided so as to extend downward from the receiving portion C1410.

The support portion C1420 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 is provided below the receiving portion C1410. The support portion C1420 is fixed to the base portion C1211. A through hole C1421 is formed in the support portion C1420.

The through hole C1421 shown in FIG. 288 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the center of the support portion C1420. Pin C1412 is inserted through the through hole C1421. The through hole C1421 is formed to have a size (diameter) so that the pin C1412 can slide.

The urging means C1430 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 urges the receiving portion C1410 upward. The urging means C1430 is, for example, a compression coil spring. The urging means C1430 is provided between the receiving portion C1410 and the supporting portion C1420. The urging means C1430 is provided so that the pin C1412 is inserted in the center thereof. The urging means C1430 formed in this way urges the receiving portion C1410 upward.

In the shock absorbing means C1400 configured in this way, the urging force of the urging means C1430 pushes it up the most upward in the movable range. As a result, the lower left holding portion C1330 is also pushed up to the uppermost position in the movable range.

Hereinafter, the operation of the movable production accessory C1100 when performing the production will be described using W017 to W025.

As shown in FIG. 289, the movable effect object C1100 is located in the standby position before performing the effect. When the movable production accessory C1100 is located in the standby position, it is located behind the logo accessory C1500 and cannot be visually recognized by the player (see FIGS. W01 and W02). At this time, in the movable effect object C1100, the slider C1133 is placed on the claw portion C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 (the portion protruding rearward from the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221) (FIG. (See 285 etc.), thereby holding in the standby position (see FIG. 277 etc.). At this time, the harpoon accessory C1120 is held in a posture (hereinafter, referred to as "vertical posture") in which the effect surface (front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120) is directed forward.

When moving the movable effect object C1100 from the standby position to the intermediate position, first, the solenoid C1332 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 is temporarily excited. As a result, as shown in FIG. 290, the claw portion C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 rotates and retracts forward from the rear surfaces of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. Then, the upper left holding portion C1310 and the claw portion C1331 of the upper right holding portion C1320 cannot support the slider C1133 of the movable effect accessory C1100.

Then, the movable effect object C1100 freely falls and moves to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 291 and 292). Then, the movable effect object C1100 is received by the claw portion C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 (see FIG. 293 and the like).

At this time, the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 receive a downward force from the movable effect accessory C1100 (see FIGS. 285 and 286). Then, the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 press the receiving portion C1410 downward. The receiving portion C1410 is guided by the groove portion C1411 and the pin C1211a against the urging force of the urging means C1430, and moves downward along the base portion C1211 together with the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340. Then, due to the elastic force of the urging means C1430, it is possible to absorb the impact received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the movable effect object C1100 operates at the intermediate position. The movable effect object C1100 is held at an intermediate position by the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

When moving the movable effect object C1100 from the intermediate position to the protruding position, the solenoid C1332 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 is temporarily excited. As a result, the claw portion C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 rotate and retract forward from the rear surfaces of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. Then, the claw portion C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 cannot support the slider C1133 of the movable effect accessory C1100.

Then, the movable effect accessory C1100 falls freely, and the guided portion C1124a of the base portion C1124 of the movable effect accessory C1100 comes into contact with the guide surface C1231 of the inclined guide portion C1230 from above (two points in FIG. 294). See chain line). Then, by guiding the guided portion C1124a to the guide surface C1231, the harpoon accessory C1120 rotates forward with respect to the support C1130 about the axis of the rotation axis C1132 (counterclockwise when viewed from the left side). Move.

Further, as the guided portion C1124a moves forward and downward along the guide surface C1231, the movable effecting accessory C1100 is inclined so that its lower portion protrudes forward. Then, when the guided portion C1124a comes into contact with the folded-back portion C1232, the movement of the lower portion of the movable effecting accessory C1100 to the front and lower directions is restricted. In this way, the movable effect object C1100 moves to the protruding position (see FIGS. 294 to 297). At this time, the harpoon accessory C1120 is held in a posture in which the production surface (front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120) is directed forward and upward (hereinafter, referred to as "tilted posture").

The excitation of the solenoid C1332 is temporary, and the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is released after the movable effect object C1100 falls from the claw portion C1331. Then, the plunger holder C1332a moves downward by the urging force of the urging means C1332b and presses the front surface of the claw portion C1331 downward. As a result, the claw portion C1331 rotates clockwise around the axis of the rotation pin C1331b and returns to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 287 (a)).

Further, when the movable effect object C1100 moves from the protruding position (see FIG. 295) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 291) or the standby position (see FIG. 289), the movable effect object C1100 drives the elevating drive motor C1216 of the left elevating mechanism C1210. The belt C1214 is rotated to raise the carriage C1218 (see FIG. 281). At the same time, the elevating drive motor C1226 of the right elevating mechanism C1220 is driven to rotate the belt C1224 and raise the carriage C1228.

By doing so, the carriage C1218 and the carriage C1228 push up the slider C1133 of the movable effect object C1100 (see FIG. 281). As a result, the movable effect object C1100 moves upward along the shaft C1217 and the shaft C1227. In this way, the movable effect object C1100 can be moved from the protruding position to the intermediate position or the standby position. The same applies when the movable effect object C1100 moves from the intermediate position to the standby position.

When the movable effect object C1100 moves upward and reaches the intermediate position or the standby position, the movable effect object C1100 is brought into contact with the claw portion C1331 from below. Then, when the movable effect object C1100 moves further upward, the claw portion C1331 rotates and retracts forward from the rear surfaces of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. That is, when the slider C1133 of the movable effect object C1100 moves upward, the movement is not restricted by the claw portion C1331.

In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment configured as described above, the shock absorbing means C1400 is held when the movable directing accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) moves from the standby position to the intermediate position (free fall). It is formed so as to absorb the impact received by the mechanism C1300. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the movable effect accessory C1100 and the holding mechanism C1300. At this time, the movable effecting accessory C1100 is moved up and down by the gravity of the movable producing accessory C1100 (downward force) and the urging force of the shock absorbing means C1400's urging means C1430 (upward force). It works like bouncing several times. Such an interesting operation of the movable production accessory C1100 can improve the interest of the player. Further, the receiving portion C1410 can be returned to the original position by the urging force of the urging means C1430.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 can move the movable production accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) downward by free fall by retracting the claw portion C1331 by exciting the solenoid C1332.

Further, the harpoon accessory C1120 moves downward from the standby position (see FIG. 289) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 291), and moves forward and downward from the intermediate position to the protruding position (see FIG. 295). Then, the harpoon accessory C1120 is in a vertical posture in the standby position and the intermediate position, and changes its posture to an inclined posture by rotating during the operation to the protruding position. In this way, by changing the movement direction and posture of the harpoon accessory C1120, it is possible to change the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120, and by extension, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the tilt guide portion C1230 is provided, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be reliably operated from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the holding mechanism C1300 is provided on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200, while the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front side of the drive mechanism C1200. By arranging the holding mechanism C1300 and the shock absorbing means C1400 on opposite sides in this way, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members. Further, the holding mechanism C1300 holds the movable production accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) at different heights on the left and right at the standby position and the intermediate position. By doing so, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members.

Next, the arrangement of the second decorative lens C1121d and the light emitting unit C1123a will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 and 298 to 301. In the following, attention will be paid to the light emitting unit C1123a1 which is one of the plurality of light emitting units C1123a.

FIG. 298 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d in a state where the harpoon accessory C1120 is in a vertical posture. As shown in FIGS. 279 and 298, the accessory illumination substrate C1123 is arranged behind the second decorative lens C1121d. Then, as shown in FIG. 298, the second decorative lens C1121d is arranged at a position shifted downward with respect to the accessory illumination substrate C1123. More specifically, the second decorative lens C1121d is located entirely below the light emitting portion C1123a1 mounted on the accessory illumination substrate C1123. Therefore, between the light emitting unit C1123a1 and the viewpoint of the player Z having the same height as the light emitting unit C1123a1, the second decorative lens C1121d having transparency is not used, but the second decorative lens C1121d is used. The first decorative body C1121a having low transparency is interposed. As a result, the player Z cannot visually recognize the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d.

FIG. 299 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d in a state where the harpoon accessory C1120 is in an inclined posture. As shown in FIG. 299, the harpoon accessory C1120 is tilted so that the lower portion of the harpoon accessory C1120 projects forward, so that the vertical center of the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d are located. The distance in the height direction approaches. Then, a second decorative lens C1121d having transparency is interposed between the light emitting unit C1123a1 and the viewpoint of the player Z. As a result, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d.

In this way, by changing the posture of the harpoon accessory C1120 from the vertical posture to the tilted posture, the player Z can change the appearance of the light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 which is easy to see through the second decorative lens C1121d. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the harpoon accessory C1120 changes its posture from the vertical posture (see FIG. 298) to the tilted posture (see FIG. 299), the number of light emitting portions C1123a at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d increases. As a result, the light from the light emitting unit C1123a that is easily visible through the second decorative lens C1121d can be increased, and the second decorative lens C1121d can be made more shining.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the front-rear distance between the accessory illumination substrate C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d is set longer than in the examples shown in FIGS. 298 and 299. In FIG. 279 and the like, the first decorative lens C1121c is arranged on the left and right sides of the second decorative lens C1121d, but in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the left and right positions of the first decorative lens C1121c are , It is assumed that the second decorative lens C1121d is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the left and right positions.

As shown in FIG. 300, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the light emitting portion C1123a1 is located at substantially the same height as the vertical center of the first decorative lens C1121c. As a result, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the first decorative lens C1121c.

As shown in FIG. 301, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in an inclined posture, the light emitting portion C1123a1 is located at substantially the same height as the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d. As a result, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the transmissive member (first decorative lens C1121c or second decorative lens C1121d) differs depending on whether the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture or the tilted posture. ), The light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 can be easily visually recognized.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see JP-A-2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A accessory decorative body C1121 (movable portion) having a second decorative lens C1121d (transparent member), and a harpoon accessory C1120 having a light emitting portion C1123a (light emitting means) provided on the back side of the accessory decorative body C1121. (Movable device) and
A support C1130 that supports the harpoon accessory C1120, and
The tilt drive unit (tilt guide portion C1230 and rotation shaft C1132) capable of tilting the harpoon accessory C1120 from a vertical posture (first posture) to a tilted posture (second posture) with respect to the support C1130. )When,
With
The light emitting unit C1123a includes a light emitting unit C1123a1 (first light emitting means).
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
When tilted from the vertical posture to the tilted posture, the distance between the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d in the height direction is formed so as to approach.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. Specifically, the player can change the appearance of light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 that is easily visible through the second decorative lens C1121d.

Further, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 is difficult for the player to see through the second decorative lens C1121d.
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, the light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 is easily visible to the player via the second decorative lens C1121d.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the visibility of the light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d without blinking the light emitting unit C1123a1.

Further, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the second decorative lens C1121d is located below the light emitting portion C1123a1.
When the lower portion of the harpoon accessory C1120 projects forward and inclines in the inclined posture, the distance in the height direction between the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d is reduced.

With such a configuration, when the lower portion of the harpoon accessory C1120 protrudes forward, the player can easily see the light from the light emitting unit C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d.

In addition, the transparent member is
The first decorative lens C1121c (first transparent member) and the second decorative lens C1121d (second transparent member) provided below the first decorative lens C1121c are included.
The light emitting unit C1123a includes a light emitting unit C1123a1 (second light emitting means).
The light emitting unit C1123a1
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, it is located at substantially the same height as the first decorative lens C1121c in the front view.
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, it is located at substantially the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d in front view.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily visually recognize the light from the light emitting unit C1123a through different transmissive members in the vertical posture and the tilted posture.

Further, the second decorative lens C1121d is
It is provided between the pair of left and right first decorative lenses C1121c.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in an inclined posture, the light from the light emitting portion C1123a can be easily seen through the transmissive member on the center side which is easy for the player to see.

Further, the accessory lighting board C1123 (board) on which the light emitting unit C1123a is mounted is provided.
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined posture, the area where the accessory illumination substrate C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d overlap increases in front view as compared with the case where the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture. is there.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, it is easier to increase the light from the light emitting portion C1123a which is easy to see through the second decorative lens C1121d as compared with when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture. Can be done.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting units C1123a are provided.
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined posture, the number of the light emitting portions C1123a at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d is increased as compared with the case where the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, it is easier to increase the light from the light emitting portion C1123a which is easy to see through the second decorative lens C1121d as compared with when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture. Can be done.

Further, the left side elevating mechanism C1210 and the right side elevating mechanism C1220 (elevating mechanism) capable of raising and lowering the harpoon accessory C1120 are provided.
The tilt drive unit
By rotating the harpoon accessory C1120 with respect to the left side elevating mechanism C1210, the harpoon accessory C1120 is tilted from the vertical posture to the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be diversified.

Further, the left side elevating mechanism C1210 and the right side elevating mechanism C1220
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be raised and lowered between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and an effect position (intermediate position and protruding position) that is easy for the player to see.
The tilt drive unit
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the effect position, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be tilted to the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the appearance of light from the light emitting unit C1123a and the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120, which are visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d.

Further, the left side elevating mechanism C1210 and the right side elevating mechanism C1220
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be moved up and down between the intermediate position (first position), which is the effect position, and the protrusion position (second position), which is the effect position and is different from the intermediate position. ,
The tilt drive unit
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the intermediate position, it is in the vertical posture, and when it is in the protruding position, it is tilted in the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the appearance of light from the light emitting unit C1123a and the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120, which are visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see JP-A-2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A harpoon accessory C1120 that can operate in the standby position (first position) and the intermediate position (second position),
A holding mechanism C1300 (holding portion) for holding the harpoon accessory C1120 at the standby position and the intermediate position,
The shock absorbing means C1400 that absorbs the shock received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the harpoon accessory C1120 operates at the intermediate position, and the shock absorbing means C1400.
Is provided.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. Specifically, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be changed by absorbing the impact.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 is
A claw portion C1331 that can be moved to a support position that supports the harpoon accessory C1120 and a non-support position that does not support the harpoon accessory C1120.
Solenoid C1332 (driving means) for moving the claw portion C1331 and
Is provided.

With such a configuration, by moving the claw portion C1331 to a non-supporting position, the harpoon accessory C1120 held by the claw portion C1331 can be easily operated.

Further, the shock absorbing means C1400 is
A receiving portion C1410 formed so as to receive the holding mechanism C1300 (claw portion C1331) and movable in the vertical direction, and a receiving portion C1410.
With the urging means C1430 for urging the receiving portion C1410 upward,
Is provided.

With such a configuration, the receiving portion C1410 can be returned to the original position while absorbing the impact.

Further, the base portion C1211 (support portion) having a protruding pin C1211a (protruding portion) and movably supporting the receiving portion C1410 is provided.
The receiving portion C1410 is
It has a groove C1411 extending in the vertical direction and has a groove portion C1411.
The moving direction is restricted by inserting the pin C1211a into the groove C1411.

With such a configuration, the movement of the receiving portion C1410 can be guided.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 can operate in the same direction as the operating direction of the harpoon accessory C1120.

With such a configuration, the impact can be effectively absorbed.

Further, the harpoon accessory C1120 is
It can operate at a protruding position (third position) different from the standby position and the intermediate position.
From the intermediate position to the protruding position, it operates in a direction different from the operating direction from the standby position to the intermediate position.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved. Specifically, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be changed by changing the operation direction of the harpoon accessory C1120.

Further, a drive mechanism C1200 (operation mechanism) for operating the harpoon accessory C1120 is provided.
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
It can operate in a protruding position different from the standby position and the intermediate position.
It is rotatably formed with respect to the drive mechanism C1200, and changes its posture by rotating during operation from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved. Specifically, by changing the posture of the harpoon accessory C1120, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be changed.

Further, the harpoon accessory C1120 is provided with an inclined guide portion C1230 (guide portion) for guiding the operation of the harpoon accessory C1120 from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

With such a configuration, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be reliably operated from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

Further, a drive mechanism C1200 (operation mechanism) for operating the harpoon accessory C1120 is provided.
The holding mechanism C1300 is provided on the back surface side of the driving mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved. Specifically, the holding mechanism C1300 can hold the harpoon accessory C1120 in a state where it is difficult for the player to see.

Further, the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front surface side of the driving mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200.

Further, the intermediate position is located at a height different from the standby position.
The shock absorbing means C1400
The left side shock absorbing means C1400 (first absorbing part) that absorbs the shock on one side of the harpoon accessory C1120, and
The shock absorbing means C1400 (second absorbing portion) on the right side, which absorbs the shock on the other side of the harpoon accessory C1120 and is provided at a height different from the shock absorbing means C1400 on the left side,
Is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the accessory decorative body C1121 is provided with a decoration imitating a harpoon, but the decoration can be arbitrary.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable effect object C1100 is assumed to operate downward by free fall, but it may be operated by using the elevating drive motor C1216 and the elevating drive motor C1226 as drive sources.

Further, in the present embodiment, the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340, but either the lower left holding portion C1330 or the lower right holding portion C1340 is provided. It may be provided immediately below. Further, it may be provided immediately below the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable effect object C1100 is assumed to move in the vertical direction, but the moving direction is not limited to this, and can be any direction (for example, the horizontal direction). The moving direction of the harpoon accessory C1120 can also be any direction (for example, the left-right direction).

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the first to fifth embodiments in that it has the upper accessory C2000. In the following, the upper accessory C2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 320.

The upper accessory C2000 shown in FIGS. 302 to 304 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The upper accessory C2000 is installed on the upper part of the game board P1100. More specifically, the upper accessory C2000 is installed behind the predetermined accessory C2100 installed on the upper part of the game board P1100. As shown in FIGS. 303 to 305, the upper accessory C2000 includes a base member C2010, a first accessory C2020, a second accessory C2030, and a drive mechanism C2040.

The base member C2010 is provided with a first accessory C2020 or the like, which will be described later. The base member C2010 is formed in a frame shape. The base member C2010 is provided on the game board P1100 so that the player cannot see it (see FIG. 302). The base member C2010 includes a frame C2011, a support member C2012, a guide portion C2013, a stopper C2014, and a spring C2015.

A pair of left and right frames C2011 are provided. The frame C2011 is formed in a long shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction.

The support member C2012 is a member that supports the motor C2041 and the like of the drive mechanism C2040 described later. The support member C2012 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The support member C2012 is formed so as to extend over the left and right frames C2011. The left end portion and the right end portion of the support member C2012 are fixed to the upper end portions of the pair of left and right frames C2011.

The guide portion C2013 is a member that guides the first accessory C2020, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, the guide portions C2013 are provided on the pair of left and right frames C2011, respectively. The guide portion C2013 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the axial direction directed in the vertical direction. The upper end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the upper end of the frame C2011. The lower end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the lower end of the frame C2011.

The stopper C2014 is for restricting the downward movement of the first accessory C2020 within a predetermined range. The stoppers C2014 are provided on the pair of left and right frames C2011, respectively. The stopper C2014 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The stopper C2014 is fixed to the lower part of the frame C2011. The stopper C2014 includes a lower insertion portion C2014a, an upper insertion portion C2014b, and a contact portion C2014c.

The lower insertion portion C2014a is a portion where the guide portion C2013 is inserted at the lower end portion of the stopper C2014.

The upper insertion portion C2014b is a portion through which the guide portion C2013 is inserted in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the stopper C2014.

The contact portion C2014c is a portion capable of contacting the first accessory C2020, which will be described later. The contact portion C2014c is composed of an elastic member (rubber or the like) formed in a plate shape. The contact portion C2014c is placed on the upper insertion portion C2014b.

The spring C2015 is for urging the first accessory C2020 upward. The springs C2015 are provided on the left and right guide portions C2013, respectively. The spring C2015 is fitted onto the guide portion C2013. The lower end of the spring C2015 is in contact with the lower insertion portion C2014a of the stopper C2014. The upper end of the spring C2015 is in contact with the first accessory C2020.

The first accessory C2020 gives a visual impression to the player by operating. The first accessory C2020 is arranged in front of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. As shown in FIGS. 306 to 308, the first accessory C2020 includes a first decorative member C2021, a first illuminated substrate C2022, a first closing member C2023, and a second closing member C2024. .. Although the details will be described later, the first accessory C2020 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by the drive mechanism C2040 described later. FIGS. 302 to 314 show a state in which the first accessory C2020 is slid most upward. Hereinafter, the first accessory C2020, the second accessory C2030, and the drive mechanism C2040 will be described with reference to this state.

The first decorative member C2021 is a member capable of transmitting light. The first decorative member C2021 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens). As shown in FIGS. 309 and 310, the first decorative member C2021 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. Further, the first decorative member C2021 is formed in a thin case shape (a shape in which the outer edge portion slightly extends rearward) with an opening at the rear portion. The first decorative member C2021 is formed so as to extend from the left end portion to the right end portion of the base member C2010. The first decorative member C2021 includes a decorative portion C2021a, a vertical hole C2021b, an upper cutout portion C2021c, and a lower cutout portion C2021d (see FIG. 312).

The decorative portion C2021a is a portion of the first decorative member C2021 to be decorated (for example, a decoration imitating a predetermined character). The decorative portion C2021a is formed in the middle left and right on the front side surface of the first decorative member C2021. The decorative portion C2021a is formed, for example, by printing a design and fixing a sheet capable of transmitting light through the printed portion (design) to the first decorative member C2021.

The vertical hole C2021b is an elongated hole with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2021b is formed so as to penetrate the first decorative member C2021 in the front-rear direction. The vertical holes C2021b are formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion C2021a, respectively.

The upper notch C2021c is a notch of the upper end of the first decorative member C2021, as shown in FIGS. 310 to 312. A plurality of upper notch portions C2021c are formed in the first decorative member C2021. In addition, in FIG. 312, the first accessory C2020 is schematically shown.

The lower cutout portion C2021d is a cutout of the lower end portion of the first decorative member C2021. A plurality of lower notch portions C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021.

The first illuminated substrate C2022 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape as shown in FIGS. 309 and 311. The first illuminated substrate C2022 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the first illumination substrate C2022. By emitting the LED, it is possible to irradiate the front of the first illumination substrate C2022 with light. The first illumination board C2022 is housed in the first decorative member C2021 and is fixed to the first decorative member C2021.

As shown in FIGS. 308 and 309, the first closing member C2023 is a member that closes the left and right portions of the first decorative member C2021 from the rear. A pair of left and right closing members C2023 are provided. The first closing member C2023 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing back and forth. The first closing member C2023 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. The first closing member C2023 includes a vertical hole C2023a and an insertion portion C2023b.

The vertical hole C2023a is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2023a is formed so as to penetrate the first closing member C2023 in the front-rear direction. The vertical hole C2023a is formed on one side of the first closing member C2023 in the left-right direction (the side closer to the left-right center portion of the first decorative member C2021).

The insertion portion C2023b is a member that is inserted into the guide portion C2013 (see FIG. 303) of the base member C2010. The insertion portion C2023b is formed on the other side of the first closing member C2023 in the left-right direction (the side closer to the left-right outer portion of the first decorative member C2021).

The second closing member C2024 is a member that closes the left and right halfway portions of the first decorative member C2021 from the rear. The second closing member C2024 is arranged between the left and right first closing members C2023. The second closing member C2024 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing back and forth. The second closing member C2024 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. The second closing member C2024 includes a slit C2024a.

The slit C2024a is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The slit C2024a is formed so as to penetrate the second closing member C2024 back and forth. A plurality of slits C2024a are formed at intervals from each other.

The second accessory C2030 gives a visual impression to the player by operating. As shown in FIGS. 306 and 308, the second accessory C2030 is provided so as to sandwich the first accessory C2020 from the front and back. The second accessory C2030 includes a second decorative member C2031, a decorative support member C2032, and a second illuminated substrate C2033.

The second decorative member C2031 is a member capable of transmitting light. Further, the second decorative member C2031 is a member constituting the front side of the second accessory C2030. The second decorative member C2031 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens) and is configured to be light-transmitting. The second decorative member C2031 is formed in a substantially plate shape. The second decorative member C2031 is formed so that its plate surface is directed back and forth and extends over the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first decorative member C2021. The second decorative member C2031 is provided with a predetermined decoration (for example, a decoration imitating a predetermined character or the like). The second decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the first accessory C2020. More specifically, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged so as to overlap (stack with each other) the first accessory C2020 in the front view in the state shown in FIGS. 306 and 308. The second decorative member C2031 includes a protrusion C2031a and a vertical hole insertion portion C2031b.

The protruding portion C2031a is a portion that protrudes rearward. A plurality of protruding portions C2031a are formed at intervals on the left and right. The protruding portion C2031a is formed in the middle left and right at the lower end portion of the second decorative member C2031. The protruding portion C2031a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is a portion to be inserted into the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first accessory C2020. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the second decorative member C2031, respectively. Two left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2031b are formed at intervals of upper and lower parts. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the second decorative member C2031.

The decorative support member C2032 is a member that supports the second decorative member C2031. Further, the decorative support member C2032 is a member constituting the rear side of the second accessory C2030. The decorative support member C2032 is formed in a substantially plate shape. The decorative support member C2032 is formed so that its plate surface faces back and forth and extends from the first closing member C2023 on the left side to the first closing member C2023 on the right side. The decorative support member C2032 is arranged behind the first accessory C2020. More specifically, the decorative support member C2032 is arranged so as to overlap with the first accessory C2020 in front view in the state shown in FIGS. 306 and 308. The decorative support member C2032 includes a fixing portion C2032a, a vertical hole insertion portion C2032b, and a horizontal hole C2032c.

The fixing portion C2032a is a portion to which the protruding portion C2031a of the second decorative member C2031 is fixed. A plurality of fixed portions C2032a are formed at intervals on the left and right. The fixing portion C2032a is formed in the middle left and right at the lower end portion of the second decorative member C2031. The fixing portion C2032a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The fixing portion C2032a is formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the decorative support member C2032. A protruding portion C2031a is inserted into and fixed to the fixing portion C2032a. As a result, the decorative support member C2032 supports the second decorative member C2031.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is a portion to be inserted into the vertical hole C2023a of the left and right first closing members C2023. The vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is formed on the left portion and the right portion of the decorative support member C2032, respectively. Two left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2032b are formed at intervals of upper and lower parts. As shown in FIGS. 306 and 314, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the decorative support member C2032.

The lateral hole C2032c is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction. The horizontal holes C2032c are formed above the left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2032b, respectively. The lateral hole C2032c is formed so as to penetrate the decorative support member C2032 back and forth.

The second illuminated substrate C2033 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The second illuminated substrate C2033 is provided with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the second illumination substrate C2033. By emitting the LED, it is possible to irradiate the front of the second illumination substrate C2033 with light. The second illumination substrate C2033 is fixed to the left and right halfway portions (above the fixing portion C2032a) on the front surface of the decorative support member C2032. As described above, the second illumination substrate C2033 is fixed not to the second decorative member C2031 but to the decorative support member C2032. As a result, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are placed on each other so that the second illumination board C2033 does not intervene between the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. They are arranged so that they are adjacent to each other in the front and back.

In the second accessory C2030 configured as described above, the vertical hole insertion portions C2031b and C2032b are inserted into the vertical holes C2021b and C2023a of the first accessory C2020, and the vertical hole insertion portions C2032b are inserted into the vertical hole C2023a. On the other hand, it abuts from below. In this way, in the second accessory C2030, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is caught in the vertical hole C2023a, and the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b can support the first accessory C2020. Further, in the second accessory C2030, the vertical hole insertion portions C2031b and C2032b move along the vertical holes C2021b and C2023a of the first accessory C2020 in the vertical direction with respect to the first accessory C2020. It is configured to be relatively slidable.

The drive mechanism C2040 is for operating (sliding) the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030. As shown in FIGS. 305 and 313, the drive mechanism C2040 includes a motor C2041 and an arm C2042.

The motor C2041 is a motor (drive source) that generates power. The motor C2041 is fixed to the rear surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The motor C2041 is provided at the left end portion and the right end portion of the support member C2012, respectively. The motor C2041 can rotate a drive shaft (not shown) whose axial direction is directed in the front-rear direction.

The arm C2042 is for transmitting the power of the motor C2041 to the second accessory C2030. The arm C2042 is provided on the front surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The arm C2042 is provided on the left portion and the right portion of the support member C2012, respectively. The left and right arms C2042 are arranged in the vicinity of the left and right motors C2041 in the rear view. As shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the arm C2042 includes a gear portion C2042a and an extension portion C2042b.

The gear portion C2042a is formed in a substantially disk shape, and is formed so that teeth are provided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The gear portion C2042a is rotatably supported by the support member C2012 via the rotation shaft C2042c (see FIG. 305). The gear portion C2042a is provided so as to mesh with a motor gear (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the motor C2041.

The extending portion C2042b is a portion extending outward in the radial direction from the gear portion C2042a. The extending portion C2042b is formed so as to extend upward from the gear portion C2042a. In the present embodiment, the direction in which the extending portion C2042b extends from the gear portion C2042a may be referred to as "the direction of the arm C2042". A pin C2042d is provided at the tip end portion (upper end portion) of the extension portion C2042b. The pin C2042d is inserted into the lateral hole C2032c of the decorative support member C2032 of the second accessory C2030. The pin C2042d is slidably provided with the lateral hole C2032c. The arm C2042 supports the second accessory C2030 by the pin C2042d. Further, the arm C2042 supports the first accessory C2020 via the second accessory C2030.

In the upper accessory C2000 configured as described above, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at the frontmost position (see FIG. 307). Further in front of the second decorative member C2031, a predetermined accessory C2100 is arranged so as to overlap in a front view (see FIG. 302). In this way, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 and the like are hidden by the predetermined accessory C2100 and are invisible to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, the invisible state means a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game. The states that are difficult to see include, for example, a state in which all parts are invisible (a state in which all parts are completely invisible) and a state in which only a small part is visible (a state in which most parts are invisible). And are included. Hereinafter, such a state in which the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are invisible is referred to as a “standby state”.

As shown in FIG. 313, the arm C2042 faces upward in the standby state. With such a configuration, torque (rotational force) does not act on the arm C2042 due to the weight of the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030. Therefore, in the standby state, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2020 The accessory C2030 can be supported in a stable state.

Hereinafter, the operation of the upper accessory C2000 configured as described above will be described.

In the upper accessory C2000, as shown in FIGS. 304, 316 and 319, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 slide up and down by the power of the motor C2041 of the drive mechanism C2040. Will be executed. In the following, the operation of the upper accessory C2000 will be described by taking as an example the case where the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are slid downward from the standby state shown in FIG. 304.

The first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are in the first sliding state (FIGS. 315 and 316) when the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 slide downward from the standby state. ) Can be transitioned to. Further, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are in a second sliding state (FIGS. 318 and 319) by sliding downward only the second accessory C2030 from the first sliding state. You can transition to.

First, the operation from the standby state to the transition to the first slide state will be described.

When the motor C2041 is driven in the standby state shown in FIG. 313, the gear portion C2042a of the arm C2042 that meshes with the motor gear of the motor C2041 rotates. At this time, the gear portion C2042a on the left side rotates in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 313. Further, the gear portion C2042a on the right side rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 313. The drive of the motor C2041 is controlled by the effect operation control circuit 89.

As shown in FIGS. 313 and 317, as the left and right gear portions C2042a rotate, the left and right extension portions C2042b rotate while the tip portion (pin C2042d) slides through the lateral hole C2032c of the decorative support member C2032. It rotates about the shaft C2042c. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 316 and 317, the arm C2042 transmits the power of the motor C2041 to the decorative support member C2032 in which the lateral hole C2032c is formed, and slides the second accessory C2030 downward. When the second accessory C2030 slides downward, the first accessory C2020 slides downward against the urging force of the spring C2015 due to its own weight. At this time, the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 moves downward along the guide portion C2013. In this way, the first accessory C2020 slides downward integrally with the second accessory C2030 while being guided by the guide portion C2013.

The motor C2041 is stopped when the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 comes into contact with the contact portion C2014c of the stopper C2014 (at a position where the arm C2042 faces substantially the left-right direction). The first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are arranged at positions lower than the predetermined accessory C2100 (see FIG. 315) in a state of overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. In this way, as shown in FIG. 315, the second decorative member C2031 arranged at the frontmost of the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 is in the first slide state visible to the player. It becomes.

In the first sliding state, the light emitted from the first illuminated substrate C2022 in the first decorative member C2021 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 in order, and the game is played. It is emitted to the front of the board P1100. In this way, in the first slide state, the light from the first illuminated substrate C2022 via the first decorative member C2021 can cause the player to visually emit the second decorative member C2031. Further, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction so that the second decorative member C2031 can emit light while the first decorative member C2021 is hidden.

Next, the operation from the first slide state to the transition to the second slide state will be described.

The motor C2041 is driven from the first slide state to rotate the gear portion C2042a. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, the motor C2041 stops when the arm C2042 rotates until it faces downward. The second accessory C2030 slides downward as the arm C2042 rotates.

As described above, in the first accessory C2020, the insertion portion C2023b is in contact with the contact portion C2014c of the stopper C2014 in the first slide state, and the first accessory C2020 is in a state in which it cannot slide downward. Therefore, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b (see FIG. 314) of the decorative support member C2032 slides downward along the vertical hole C2023a of the first closing member C2023 as the arm C2042 is driven. Further, the vertical hole insertion portion C2031b (see FIG. 308) of the second decorative member C2031 is lowered along the vertical hole C2021b of the first decorative member C2021 of the first accessory C2020 as the arm C2042 is driven. Slide to. In this way, the second accessory C2030 slides downward relative to the first accessory C2020, and the second accessory C2030 is arranged at a position lower than the first sliding state. In this way, the transition from the first slide state to the second slide state is made.

As shown in FIGS. 318 and 319, in the second sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at a position that hardly overlaps with the first decorative member C2021. In this way, the first decorative member C2021, which was hidden in the first slide state, becomes exposed (visible to the player) in the second slide state.

In the second slide state, the light from the first illumination board C2022 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and is emitted to the front of the game board P1100. According to this, in the second slide state, the light from the first illumination board C2022 can cause the player to visually emit the first decorative member C2021.

Further, as described above, in the first slide state, the second decorative member C2031 was made to emit light by the light from the first illumination substrate C2022. On the other hand, in the second slide state, the first decorative member C2021 can be made to emit light from the first illuminated substrate C2022 instead of the second decorative member C2031. In this configuration, by switching between the first slide state and the second slide state, the members that emit light from the first illumination substrate C2022 can be made different (see FIGS. 315 and 318). .. In this way, the light emitting mode of the first illuminated substrate C2022 can be changed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, in the second slide state, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at a position (central portion of the game board P1100) visible to the player as shown in FIG. 318. Further, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the second illumination board C2033. In this way, in the second slide state, not only the first decorative member C2021 but also the second decorative member C2031 is in a state where the player can visually emit light. According to this configuration, the two members (first decorative member C2021 and second decorative member C2031) can be made to emit light at the same time in the second slide state, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved. ..

The first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are moved from the second slide state to the first slide state by the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 sliding upward. , Transition to the standby state in order. The spring C2015 can assist the upward sliding operation of the second accessory C2030 by urging the first accessory C2020 upward.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the first illumination substrate C2022 is housed in the first decorative member C2021. The first accessory C2020 can discharge the heat generated when the first illuminated substrate C2022 emits light from the slit C2024a of the second closing member C2024. However, the slit C2024a may be blocked by another member depending on the state of the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. For example, in the present embodiment, in the standby state shown in FIG. 305, the slit C2024a may be blocked by the support member C2012 or the like of the base member C2010. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper notch C2021c and the lower notch C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021, and even when the slit C2024a is closed, the heat generated in the first illuminated substrate C2022 is discharged. The structure is easy to use.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the upper notch C2021c allows air to flow in and out of the first decorative member C2021 at the upper part of the first decorative member C2021. There is. Further, the lower notch C2021d makes it possible for air to flow inside and outside the first decorative member C2021 at the lower part of the first decorative member C2021. According to this configuration, when the temperature of the first decorative member C2021 rises, the heat in the first decorative member C2021 is discharged from the upper notch C2021c, and air is discharged from the outside through the lower notch C2021d. Can flow in (create a chimney effect). As a result, even when the slit C2024a is closed, the heat in the first decorative member C2021 can be efficiently discharged, and the temperature rise in the first decorative member C2021 can be suppressed. Thereby, the load on the first illumination board C2022 can be reduced.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see JP-A-2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first movable body having translucency (first decorative member C2021) and
A second movable body (second decorative member C2031) having translucency and provided in front of the first movable body (first decorative member C2021),
A first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022) provided behind the first movable body (first decorative member C2021), and
With
The first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are connected to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) via the first movable body (first decorative member C2021). A first state (first slide state) in which the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) is visibly emitted from the front by light from the first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022). A second state (second) in which the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) is visibly emitted from the front by the light from the first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022). It is possible to operate with (sliding state).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031), which are in the first state (first sliding state), are moved back and forth with each other. It is located so that it overlaps.

With such a configuration, the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be made to emit light while the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) is hidden behind.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031), which are in the second state (second sliding state), are moved back and forth with each other. It is located so that it does not overlap.

With such a configuration, in the second state (second slide state), the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) that emits light can be easily made visible.

Further, the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) is attached to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) so as to be slidable.

With such a configuration, the first state (first slide state) and the second state (second slide state) can be easily changed.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are in the first state (first slide state). The movable body (second decorative member C2031) moves relative to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) to be in the second state (second slide state). It is a thing.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) can be operated to easily change to the second state (second slide state).

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the first movable body. The second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can operate in a third state (standby state) invisible from the front.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) or the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be visually recognized as needed, which is effective for the fun of the gaming machine. Can be improved.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031), which are in the third state (standby state), operate integrally with each other. As a result, the second state (second slide state) is obtained.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are integrally moved, and the second state (second slide state) is moved. ) And the third state (standby state) can be easily changed.

Further, the first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022) operates integrally with the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

With such a configuration, a mechanism for operating these members by integrally operating the first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022) with the first movable body (first decorative member C2021). Can be aggregated to simplify the configuration.

In addition, a drive source (motor C2041) that generates power and
A transmission means (arm C2042) for transmitting power from the drive source (motor C2041) to the second movable body (second decorative member C2031), and
With
The first movable body (first decorative member C2021) transmits power from the drive source (motor C2041) via the second movable body (second decorative member C2031). ..

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) can also be operated by using the power from the drive source (motor C2041) to the second movable body (second decorative member C2031). it can. As a result, the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the one provided with a second light emitting means (second illuminated substrate C2033) for causing the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) to emit light in the second state (second sliding state). Is.

With such a configuration, the interest of the gaming machine can be effectively improved.

Further, the second light emitting means (second illuminated substrate C2033) is provided behind the first light emitting means (first illuminated substrate C2022), and the second movable body (second illuminated substrate C2022) is provided. It operates integrally with the decorative member C2031) of 2.

With such a configuration, the distance between the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the front-rear direction can be brought close to each other, and the first movable body can be brought close to each other. It is possible to improve the sense of unity of the (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) as a whole.

As shown in parentheses above
The first decorative member C2021 is a form of a first movable portion.
Further, the second decorative member C2031 is a form of the second movable body.
Further, the first illumination substrate C2022 is a form of the first light emitting means.
Further, the motor C2041 is a form of a drive source.
Further, the arm C2042 is a form of transmission means.
Further, the second illumination substrate C2033 is a form of the second light emitting means.

Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the configuration in which the second decorative member C2031 is made to emit light by the light from the first illumination substrate C2022 in the first slide state is not limited to the configuration as in the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the second decorative member C2031 is made to emit light in a state where the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It is possible to emit light in the configuration. For example, the first decorative member C2021 is irradiated with light toward the second decorative member C2031 arranged at a position shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction so as not to overlap with the first decorative member C2021. The second decorative member C2031 may be made to emit light.

Further, the configuration in which the first decorative member C2021 is made to emit light by the light from the first illumination substrate C2022 in the second slide state is not limited to the configuration as in the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 is made to emit light in a state where the second decorative member C2031 is shifted downward from the first decorative member C2021, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and various configurations are used. It is possible to emit light with. For example, a state in which the second decorative member C2031 is displaced upward or left-right with respect to the first decorative member C2021, or before and after the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 from the first slide state. The first decorative member C2021 may be made to emit light in a state where the positions are exchanged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second accessory C2030 is slidable with respect to the first accessory C2020, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the second accessory C2030 is the second. The accessory C2020 of 1 may be configured to be rotatable.

Further, in the present embodiment, by moving the second accessory C2030 from the first slide state, the transition to the second slide state is made, but the configuration for transitioning to the second slide state is as follows. Not limited to the configuration. For example, it may be configured to transition to the second slide state by moving the first accessory C2020. Further, for example, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 may be moved to transition to the second slide state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 can be changed to a standby state in which the player cannot see, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the standby state. The configuration may be immutable (always visible to the player).

Further, in the present embodiment, by integrally moving the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030, the transition from the standby state to the first slide state is performed, but the standby state is changed to the first slide state. The configuration for transitioning to is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 may be moved separately to transition from the standby state to the first slide state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the first illuminated substrate C2022 are integrally moved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the first decorative member C2021. On the other hand, the first illuminated substrate C2022 may be configured to be relatively movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power of the motor C2041 is transmitted to the first accessory C2020 via the second accessory C2030, but the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are used. The configuration for operation is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the second accessory C2030 and the first accessory C2020 may be operated by power from different drive sources.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second illumination substrate C2033 is arranged behind the first illumination substrate C2022, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the first illumination substrate C2022. It may be configured to be arranged in front of the substrate C2022.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first accessory C2020 is urged upward by the spring C2015, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the first accessory C2020 is urged downward. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible to assist the downward sliding operation of the first accessory C2020.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment will be given the same name or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the first to sixth embodiments in that it has the effect button device C3000. Hereinafter, the effect button device C3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 352.

The effect button device C3000 can operate the effect related to the effect performed by the gaming machine. The effect button device C3000 is connected to the sub control circuit 300, for example, similarly to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. The effect button device C3000 includes buttons that can be operated by the player (first button unit C3360 and second button unit C3400, which will be described later). The effect button device C3000 is used for operations such as generating an appropriate effect performed on the gaming machine and switching an already executed effect. Further, the effect button device C3000 has an effect function that operates based on the result of a hit determination process or the like. A detailed description of the operation performed by the effect button device C3000 will be described later. Further, the effect button device C3000 can perform operations related to the effect, such as paying out the game ball and returning the ball lending card.

As shown in FIG. 321, the effect button device C3000 is provided in the dish unit 5 arranged below the glass door 4 of the gaming machine. The effect button device C3000 is provided at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 5. Further, the effect button device C3000 is provided on the side (right side) of the upper plate 51. The effect button device C3000 includes a case portion C3100, a drum portion C3300, and a button peripheral portion C3500.

The case portion C3100 shown in FIGS. 322 to 325 accommodates the drum portion C3300 described later. As shown in FIG. 325, the case portion C3100 is formed in a substantially box shape for partitioning the accommodating portion C3101, which is a space that opens upward. The drum portion C3300 is accommodated in the accommodating portion C3101. Further, the case portion C3100 supports the drum portion C3300 so as to be rotatable. The case portion C3100 is fixed to the dish unit 5. The case portion C3100 includes a bottom case portion C3110, a front case portion C3120, a rear case portion C3130, a left case portion C3140, and a right case portion C3200.

The bottom case portion C3110 shown in FIGS. 323, 324, and 326 constitutes the bottom portion of the case portion C3100. The bottom case portion C3110 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. More specifically, the bottom case portion C3110 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape having a rear portion extending in the horizontal direction. Further, the bottom case portion C3110 is formed in a plate shape in which the front side portion is inclined diagonally forward and upward. The front side portion of the bottom case portion C3110 is curved diagonally forward and downward in a side view. The bottom case portion C3110 includes a first opening C3111 and a second opening C3112.

The first opening C3111 shown in FIGS. 323 and 324 penetrates the front side portion of the bottom case portion C3110 in the thickness direction (substantially in the vertical direction). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 324, the bottom case portion C3110 opens obliquely in the vertical direction along the inner surface of the bottom case portion C3110. The first opening C3111 is formed in a slit shape extending in the left-right direction.

The second opening C3112 penetrates the rear portion of the bottom case portion C3110 in the thickness direction (substantially in the vertical direction). The second opening C3112 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the front-rear direction when viewed from above. The second openings C3112 are formed in pairs so as to be located at both ends in the left-right direction of the rear portion of the bottom case portion C3110 (see FIG. 323).

By forming the first opening C3111 and the second opening C3112 in the bottom case portion C3110, as shown in FIG. 324, liquids such as water and beverages indicated by the alternate long and short dash line are contained in the accommodating portion C3101. Even if it invades, the liquid can be discharged to the outside through the first opening C3111 and the second opening C3112. Not only liquids but also foreign substances such as dust can be discharged to the outside through the first opening C3111 and the second opening C3112.

The front case portion C3120 shown in FIGS. 325 and 326 constitutes the front portion of the case portion C3100. The front case portion C3120 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. More specifically, the front case portion C3120 is formed in a plate shape that is inclined diagonally forward and upward from the front end portion of the bottom case portion C3110 and is curved diagonally forward and downward in the side view.

The rear case portion C3130 shown in FIGS. 324, 326 and 327 constitutes the rear portion of the case portion C3100. The rear case portion C3130 is formed in a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front. Inside the rear case portion C3130, an appropriate substrate used for the operation of the effect button device C3000 is provided. The rear case portion C3130 includes a curved surface portion C3131 and a covering portion C3132.

The curved surface portion C3131 is a portion formed in a curved surface shape on the inner side surface (front surface) of the rear case portion C3130. The curved surface portion C3131 is formed in a shape curved toward the rear (obliquely rearward and downward) in a side view. The curved surface portion C3131 is formed so that the upper end portion extends upward from the rear end portion P of the drum portion C3300 shown in FIG. 324. The curved surface portion C3131 includes a guide groove portion C3131a.

The guide groove portion C3131a shown in FIGS. 327 and 351 is a groove formed in the curved surface portion C3131 substantially along the vertical direction. A plurality of guide groove portions C3131a are formed at intervals in the left-right direction. FIG. 351 shows an example in which four guide groove portions C3131a are formed.

The covering portion C3132 shown in FIG. 324 is a portion that protrudes forward in the upper part of the rear case portion C3130. More specifically, the covering portion C3132 is a portion of the curved surface portion C3131 provided above the portion facing the rear end portion P of the drum portion C3300. The covering portion C3132 protrudes forward from the portion facing the rear end portion P. The covering portion C3132 covers the gap between the rear end portion P of the drum portion C3300 and the curved surface portion C3131 shown in FIG. 324 from above. By providing the covering portion C3132, it is possible to prevent liquid such as water from entering the gap between the drum portion C3300 and the curved surface portion C3131.

The left case portion C3140 shown in FIG. 326 constitutes the left portion of the case portion C3100 and rotatably supports the drum portion C3300. The left case portion C3140 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The left case portion C3140 includes a bearing portion C3141.

The bearing portion C3141 rotatably supports the rotating shaft C3340 of the drum portion C3300, which will be described later. The bearing portion C3141 is formed so as to be recessed to the left on the inner surface (right surface) of the left case portion C3140.

The right case portion C3200 shown in FIGS. 325 to 328 constitutes the right portion of the case portion C3100 and rotatably supports the drum portion C3300. The right case portion C3200 includes a mechanism used for operating the drum portion C3300 (a drive transmission unit C3260, a lock mechanism C3280, etc., which will be described later). The right case portion C3200 includes a base portion C3210, a motor base portion C3220, a first motor C3230, a second motor C3240, a cover portion C3250, a drive transmission portion C3260, a spring portion C3270, and a lock mechanism C3280.

The base portion C3210 shown in FIGS. 327 and 328 rotatably supports the drum portion C3300. The base portion C3210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The base portion C3210 is provided with a motor base portion C3220, a drive transmission portion C3260, and a lock mechanism C3280, which will be described later. The base portion C3210 includes a bearing portion C3211 and a regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212.

The bearing portion C3211 shown in FIG. 328 rotatably supports the rotating shaft C3340 of the drum portion C3300, which will be described later. The bearing portion C3141 is formed in a hole shape (round hole shape) that penetrates the base portion C3210 in the thickness direction (left-right direction).

The regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212 guides the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300, which will be described later. The regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212 is formed so as to penetrate the base portion C3210 in the thickness direction (left-right direction). The regulation shaft guide groove C3212 extends counterclockwise from one end located in front of the bearing C3211 along the circumference centered on the rotation shaft C3340 in a side view (when viewed from the right). It is formed into an elongated hole shape that curves in this way (see also FIG. 339). A regulation shaft C3350, which will be described later, is inserted into the regulation shaft guide groove C3212. The regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212 includes a buffer portion C3212a.

The buffer portion C3212a softens the impact when the regulation shaft C3350 comes into contact with the regulation shaft C3212a. The buffer portion C3212a is provided on the inner surface of one end portion (front end portion) of the regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212. The cushioning portion C3212a is made of an elastic material.

The motor base portion C3220 shown in FIGS. 326, 327 and 329 holds the first motor C3230 and the second motor C3240, which will be described later. The motor base portion C3220 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the left. The motor base portion C3220 is fixed to the base portion C3210 so as to cover the right surface of the base portion C3210. Further, a drive transmission unit C3260 and a lock mechanism C3280, which will be described later, are housed in the space partitioned by the motor base portion C3220 and the base portion C3210. The motor base portion C3220 includes a locking portion C3221 and a locking portion guide groove portion C3222.

The locking portion C3221 shown in FIGS. 327 and 329 is a portion in which the spring portion C3270, which will be described later, is locked. The locking portion C3221 is formed so as to project to the right from the right side surface portion (wall portion facing to the right) of the motor base portion C3220. The locking portion C3221 is provided at the rear upper corner portion on the right surface of the motor base portion C3220.

The lock portion guide groove portion C3222 shown in FIG. 327 guides the guide shaft C2383f of the lock portion C2383, which will be described later. The lock portion guide groove portion C3222 is formed so as to penetrate the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220 in the thickness direction (left-right direction). A guide shaft C2383f, which will be described later, is inserted into the lock portion guide groove portion C3222. The lock portion guide groove portion C3222 is provided on the front side portion of the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220. The lock portion guide groove portion C3222 is formed in an elongated hole shape that is curved so as to extend along the circumference centered on the swing shaft C3281 described later in the side view. Further, the lock portion guide groove portion C3222 is formed so as to extend substantially along the vertical direction.

The first motor C3230 is a drive source for rotating the drum portion C3300. The first motor C3230 is provided on the rear side portion of the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220. The first motor C3230 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220 to the left and right and projects to the left.

The second motor C3240 is a drive source for rotating the lock portion C2383, which will be described later. The second motor C3240 is provided in front of the first motor C3230 on the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220. The second motor C3240 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the right side surface portion of the motor base portion C3220 to the left and right and projects to the left.

The cover portion C3250 shown in FIG. 326 covers the right surface of the motor base portion C3220. The cover portion C3250 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the left.

The drive transmission unit C3260 shown in FIGS. 327 to 329 takes out the drive force of the first motor C3230 and transmits the drive force to the drum unit C3300. The drive transmission unit C3260 is housed in a space partitioned by the base unit C3210 and the motor base unit C3220. The drive transmission unit C3260 includes an output gear C3261, a first gear C3622, a second gear C3263, a third gear C3264, a fourth gear C3265, a fifth gear C3266, and a rotation assisting unit C3267.

The output gear C3261 shown in FIGS. 327 and 328 extracts the driving force of the first motor C3230. The output gear C3261 is fixed to the left end of the output shaft of the first motor C3230.

The first gear C3622 is arranged substantially above the output gear C3261. The first gear C3622 constitutes a two-stage gear that meshes with the output gear C3261 and the second gear C3623 described later. The first gear C3622 is rotatably supported on the right surface of the base portion C3210 around an axial center facing the left-right direction.

The second gear C3623 is arranged substantially above the first gear C3622. The second gear C3623 constitutes a two-stage gear that meshes with the first gear C3622 and the third gear C3264 described later. The second gear C3263 is rotatably supported on the right surface of the base portion C3210 around an axial center facing the left-right direction.

The third gear C3264 is arranged substantially in front of the second gear C3263. The third gear C3264 constitutes a two-stage gear that meshes with the second gear C3263 and the fourth gear C3265 described later. The third gear C3264 is rotatably supported on the right surface of the base portion C3210 around an axial center facing the left-right direction.

The fourth gear C3265 is arranged substantially in front of the third gear C3264. The fourth gear C3265 meshes with the third gear C3264 and the fifth gear C3266 described later. The fourth gear C3265 is rotatably supported on the right surface of the base portion C3210 around an axial center facing the left-right direction.

The fifth gear C3266 is arranged substantially in front of the fourth gear C3265. The fifth gear C3266 meshes with the fourth gear C3265. The fifth gear C3266 is provided on the rotating shaft C3340 of the drum portion C3300 on the right surface of the base portion C3210. The fifth gear C3266 is fixed to the rotating shaft C3340 so as not to rotate, and is rotatably supported together with the rotating shaft C3340.

The rotation assisting portion C3267 shown in FIGS. 327 and 329 (a) assists the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 by the urging force of the spring portion C3270 described later. The rotation assisting portion C3267 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the height direction oriented in the left-right direction. The rotation assisting portion C3267 is provided on the rotating shaft C3340 of the drum portion C3300 so as to be located on the right side of the fifth gear C3266. The rotation assisting portion C3267 is fixed so as not to rotate with respect to the rotation shaft C3340. The rotation assisting portion C3267 includes an arm portion C3267a and a locking portion C3267b.

The arm portion C3267a is a portion that protrudes radially outward from the side surface of the rotation assisting portion C3267.

The locking portion C3267b is a portion to which the spring portion C3270, which will be described later, is locked. The locking portion C3267b is formed so as to project to the right from the tip end portion of the arm portion C3267a.

The spring portion C3270 applies an urging force to the drum portion C3300 in the rotational direction. The spring portion C3270 constitutes a tension spring. One end of the spring portion C3270 is locked to the locking portion C3221 of the motor base portion C3220, and the other end is locked to the locking portion C3267b of the rotation assisting portion C3267. Due to the urging force of the spring portion C3270, the rotation assisting portion C3267 is urged in the clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the side (viewed from the right) with the rotation axis C3340 as the center. As a result, an urging force is applied to the rotating shaft C3340 and the drum portion C3300 fixed to the rotating shaft C3340 as described later in the rotational direction.

The lock mechanism C3280 shown in FIGS. 327 and 328 can regulate the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300. The lock mechanism C3280 is housed in a space partitioned by the base portion C3210 and the motor base portion C3220. The lock mechanism C3280 includes a swing shaft C3281, a cam portion C3282, and a lock portion C2383.

The swing shaft C3281 shown in FIG. 328 supports the lock portion C2383, which will be described later, so as to swing (rotate). The swing shaft C3281 is provided so as to project to the right from the right surface of the base portion C3210. The swing shaft C3281 is provided in front of the output gear C3261.

The cam portion C3282 shown in FIGS. 327, 328 and 329 (c) and 329 (d) takes out the driving force of the second motor C3240. The cam portion C3282 is formed in a substantially disk shape with the thickness direction directed to the left-right direction. The center of the side view of the cam portion C3282 is fixed to the left end portion of the output shaft of the second motor C3240. The cam portion C3282 is rotated by the driving force of the second motor C3240. The cam portion C3282 includes an eccentric shaft C3282a.

The eccentric shaft C3282a transmits the driving force of the second motor C3240 to the lock portion C2383, which will be described later. The eccentric shaft C3282a is provided at a position eccentric with respect to the side view center of the cam portion C3282 (a portion fixed to the output shaft of the second motor C3240). The eccentric shaft C3282a is provided so as to project from the left surface of the cam portion C3282 to the left.

The lock portion C3283 shown in FIGS. 327, 328 and 329 (b) can regulate the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 by engaging with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 described later. The lock portion C2383 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed to the left-right direction. The lock portion C2383 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in the substantially front-rear direction (diagonally forward and upward direction in FIG. 328).

The lock portion C2383 can be operated so as to be displaced to the lock position shown in FIGS. 328, 340 and 344, the unlock position shown in FIG. 339, and the swing lock position shown in FIG. 349. The details of the operation of the lock portion C2383 will be described later. The lock portion C2383 includes a bearing portion C2383a, an elongated hole portion C2383b, a first lock groove portion C2383c, a second lock groove portion C2383d, a third lock groove portion C2383e, a guide shaft C2383f, a regulation protrusion C2383g, and a buffer portion C2383h. ..

The bearing portion C2383a is a portion pivotally supported by the swing shaft C3281. The bearing portion C2383a is formed in a hole shape (round hole shape) that penetrates the lock portion C2383 in the thickness direction. The bearing portion C2383a is provided at the rear end portion of the lock portion C2383.

The elongated hole portion C2383b is a portion through which the eccentric shaft C3282a of the cam portion C3282 is inserted. The elongated hole portion C2383b is formed in an elongated elongated hole shape in the length direction of the lock portion C2383 (in the diagonally front-up direction in FIG. 328). The elongated hole portion C2383b extends in a direction intersecting the circumferential direction centered on the swing shaft C3281 when viewed from the right. The drive of the cam portion C3282 is transmitted to the lock portion C2383 via the eccentric shaft C3282a inserted through the elongated hole portion C3283b.

The first lock groove portion C3283c engages with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 at the initial position (see FIG. 328) described later. The first lock groove portion C2383c opens substantially upward (obliquely backward and upward in FIG. 328) and in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion in the length direction of the lock portion C2383. When the regulation shaft C3350 is engaged with the first lock groove portion C3283c, the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 is restricted.

The second lock groove portion C2383d engages with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 at the first rotation position (see FIG. 340) described later. The second lock groove portion C2383d is provided on the tip end side of the lock portion C2383 with respect to the first lock groove portion C2383c. The second lock groove portion C2383d opens substantially upward (obliquely backward and upward in FIG. 328) and in the left-right direction. When the regulation shaft C3350 is engaged with the second lock groove portion C2383d, the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 is restricted.

The third lock groove portion C2383e engages with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 at the second rotation position (see FIG. 344) described later. The third lock groove portion C2383e is provided on the tip side of the lock portion C2383 with respect to the second lock groove portion C2383d. The third lock groove portion C2383e opens substantially upward (obliquely backward and upward in FIG. 328) and in the left-right direction. When the regulation shaft C3350 is engaged with the third lock groove portion C2383e, the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 is restricted.

The guide shaft C3283f is inserted into the lock portion guide groove portion C3222 of the motor base portion C3220. The guide shaft C2383f projects to the right from the right surface of the lock portion C2383. The guide shaft C2383f is provided in the middle portion of the lock portion C2383 in the length direction.

The regulation protrusion C2383g restricts the movement of the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 within a predetermined range while the lock portion C2383 is located at the swing lock position (see FIGS. 349 and 350) described later. is there. The regulation protrusion C2383g is provided between the first lock groove portion C2383c and the second lock groove portion C2383d. The regulation protrusion C3283g projects substantially upward (diagonally rearward and upward in FIG. 328).

The buffer portion C2383h softens the impact when the regulation shaft C3350 comes into contact with the regulation shaft C3350. The buffer portion C2383h is provided on a surface of the regulation protrusion C3283g that faces substantially forward (diagonally forward and upward in FIG. 328). The cushioning portion C3212a is made of an elastic material.

The case portion C3100 as described above divides the accommodating portion C3101 by the front case portion C3120, the rear case portion C3130, the left case portion C3140, and the right case portion C3200 described above.

The drum portion C3300 shown in FIGS. 324, 327, 328, 331 and 332 has buttons that can be operated by the player (first button portion C3360 and second button portion C3400 described later). .. As shown in FIGS. 321 and 325, the drum portion C3300 is rotatably accommodated in the accommodating portion C3101 of the case portion C3100 around an axial center (rotational axis C3340 described later) facing in the left-right direction.

The drum portion C3300 can rotate around the rotation axis C3340 in a side view. Specifically, the drum portion C3300 has an initial position shown in FIGS. 322 to 328, a first rotation position shown in FIG. 340, a second rotation position shown in FIG. 344, and a third rotation position shown in FIG. 349. It can operate to be located in. The first rotation position is the position where the drum portion C3300 at the initial position is rotated by 60 ° clockwise when viewed from the right. The second rotation position is the position where the drum portion C3300 at the initial position is rotated 90 ° clockwise when viewed from the right. The third rotation position is the position where the drum portion C3300 at the initial position is rotated 120 ° clockwise when viewed from the right. A detailed description of the operation of the drum portion C3300 will be described later.

The drum portion C3300 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a part cut out in the radial direction. More specifically, the drum portion C3300 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis centered in the left-right direction, with the front upper portion cut out in the side view (viewed from the right). The drum portion C3300 includes an upper cover portion C3310, a lower cover portion C3320, a side cover portion C3330, a rotation shaft C3340, a regulation shaft C3350, a first button portion C3360, a decoration portion C3370, and a second button portion C3400. In the following, with reference to the drum portion C3300 at the initial position shown in FIGS. 322 to 328, the upper cover portion C3310, the lower cover portion C3320, the side cover portion C3330, the rotating shaft C3340, the regulation shaft C3350, and the first button are used. The configuration of the part C3360 and the decorative part C3370 will be described.

The upper cover portion C3310 shown in FIGS. 324, 325 and 330 is a portion that constitutes an outer shell of a substantially upper half portion of the drum portion C3300. The upper cover portion C3310 covers the first button portion C3360 described later from above. The upper cover portion C3310 includes a first cover portion C3311, a second cover portion C3312, a third cover portion C3313, and a fourth cover portion C3314.

The first cover portion C3311 shown in FIGS. 324, 325 and 330 constitutes the front side portion of the upper cover portion C3310. The first cover portion C3311 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens downward. The first cover portion C3311 includes an opening portion C3311a and an induction portion C3311b.

The opening C3311a shown in FIGS. 325 and 330 is a portion that exposes the button portion C3362 of the first button portion C3360, which will be described later. The opening C3311a is formed so as to penetrate the upper side surface portion of the first cover portion C3311 in the vertical direction. The opening C3311a is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above.

The guide portion C3311b shown in FIGS. 324, 330 and 351 (b) is stored in the internal region C3312b in a state where the drum portion C3300 is located at a predetermined position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 351 (b)). The game ball is guided to the front side. The guide portion C3311b is formed on the upper side surface portion of the first cover portion C3311 so as to be recessed downward. As shown in FIG. 351 (b), the bottom surface of the guide portion C3311b is formed so as to incline downward. The guide portion C3311b is formed on each of the left and right sides of the opening C3311a. Further, the guide portion C3311b is formed so as to be located in front of the left and right end portions of the second cover portion C3312 (rib C3312a and internal region C3312b) described later. The guide portion C3311b is not limited to the left and right sides of the opening C3311a, and the guide portion C3311b can be formed on one side of the opening C3311a in the left-right direction (for example, only on the right side).

The second cover portion C3312 shown in FIGS. 324, 325, 330 and 351 (b) is a portion that rises from the rear end portion of the first cover portion C3311. The second cover portion C3312 is formed in a substantially plate shape which is inclined downward in the front direction and whose thickness direction is obliquely in the front-rear direction. The front surface of the second cover portion C3312 is formed so as to extend substantially radially outward from the rotation axis C3340 in a side view. That is, the front surface of the second cover portion C3312 is formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the drum portion C3300 (rotates) operates. The second cover portion C3312 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the thickness direction. The second cover portion C3312 includes a rib C3312a and an internal region C3312b.

The rib C3312a shown in FIGS. 330 and 351 (b) rises from the front surface (the surface facing diagonally forward and upward) of the second cover portion C3312 (in other words, toward the direction in which the drum portion C3300 operates). It was formed (to stand up). The rib C3312a is formed in a square frame shape surrounding the circumference of the second cover portion C3312. The rib C3312a is inclined so that the inward facing surface (inner surface) around the second cover portion C3312 expands toward the rising direction (diagonally forward and upward direction) of the rib C3312a. Further, among the ribs C3312a formed in the shape of a four-sided frame, the shape seen from the rising direction of the rib C3312a on the rear side is formed substantially the same as the cross-sectional shape of the third cover portion C3313 shown in FIG. 352. That is, as shown in FIG. 330, the rear rib C3312a is formed in a straight line in which the portion facing the internal region C3312b (front side edge portion) extends in the left-right direction, and is opposite to the portion (front side edge portion). The side portion (rear side edge portion) is formed in an uneven shape. As described above, the rear edge portion of the rear rib C3312a has a portion that is continuous with the guided portion C3313a of the third cover portion C3313 in the circumferential direction and protrudes outward in the lateral view. Further, the rib C3312a on the rear side is formed in a portion of the drum portion C3300 close to the case portion C3100. Specifically, the rear rib C3312a is formed in a portion of the second cover portion C3312 that is in a state of meshing with the outer edge portion, that is, the case portion C3100 in a side view (FIG. 330). , FIG. 351 (a), FIG. 352, etc.).

The internal region C3312b is a region surrounded by the rib C3312a. The internal region C3312b can store game balls and the like in a state where the drum portion C3300 is located at a predetermined position (for example, the second rotation position shown in FIG. 344 and the third rotation position shown in FIG. 349). (See also FIG. 351). That is, in the game ball or the like located in the internal region C3312b, the movement of the internal region C3312b to the outside is suppressed to some extent by the rib C3312a. As a result, game balls and the like can be stored in the internal region C3312b. The details of how the game balls and the like are stored in the internal region C3312b will be described later.

The third cover portion C3313 shown in FIGS. 324, 325 and 330 constitutes an outer peripheral surface (a surface facing outward in the radial direction) of the rear side portion of the upper cover portion C3310. The third cover portion C3313 is formed so as to extend rearward from the rear end portion (upper end portion) of the second cover portion C3312. The third cover portion C3313 is formed in a shape that is curved so as to project rearward in a side view. The third cover portion C3313 includes a guided portion C3313a.

The guided portion C3313a shown in FIGS. 330, 351 and 352 engages with the guide groove portion C3131a of the rear case portion C3130 and is guided by the guide groove portion C3131a. The guided portion C3313a is formed so as to project from the rear surface (curved surface) of the third cover portion C3313. Further, the guided portion C3313a is formed so as to extend along the circumferential direction on the curved surface of the third cover portion C3313. Further, a plurality of guided portions C3313a are formed at intervals in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 352, in a state where the guided portion C3313a is engaged with the guide groove portion C3131a (a state in which the guided portion C3313a is located in the guide groove portion C3131a), the drum portion C3300 is along the guide groove portion C3131a. The rotation of is guided. In this way, in the portion where the guided portion C3313a is engaged with the guide groove portion C3131a, the case portion C3100 and the drum portion C3300 are arranged in a state of being meshed with each other. As a result, the case portion C3100 and the drum portion C3300 can be arranged so as to be close to each other. The distance between the case portion C3100 and the drum portion C3300 is not limited to the configuration according to the present embodiment (a state in which the guided portion C3313a is engaged with the guide groove portion C3131a), and the game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) By setting the distance so that it does not enter, the case portion C3100 and the drum portion C3300 can be arranged so as to be close to each other.

The fourth cover portion C3314 constitutes the side surface of the rear portion of the upper cover portion C3310. A pair of fourth cover portions C3314 are provided so as to cover both left and right sides of the space partitioned by the second cover portion C3312 and the third cover portion C3313.

The lower cover portion C3320 shown in FIGS. 324 and 327 is a portion constituting the outer peripheral surface of the outer shell of the substantially lower half portion of the drum portion C3300. The lower cover portion C3320 covers the decorative portion C3370 and the second button portion C3400, which will be described later, from below. The lower cover portion C3320 is formed in a shape that is curved so as to project downward in a side view. The lower cover portion C3320 is formed with an appropriate opening for exposing the decorative portion C3370 described later. The lower cover portion C3320 includes an opening C3321.

The opening C3321 is a portion that exposes the protruding portion C3420 of the second button portion C3400, which will be described later. The opening C3321 is formed so as to penetrate the front side portion of the lower cover portion C3320 in the substantially front-rear direction.

The side cover portion C3330 shown in FIG. 327 is a portion that constitutes a side surface of the drum portion C3300 in the outer shell of the substantially lower half portion. A pair of side cover portions C3330 are provided so as to cover both sides of the second button portion C3400 described later in the left-right direction.

The rotation shaft C3340 shown in FIGS. 327 and 328 is the center of rotation of the drum portion C3300. The rotation shaft C3340 is arranged with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The rotation shaft C3340 is provided so as to project in the left-right direction from the side cover portion C3330. The rotation shaft C3340 is provided so as not to rotate with respect to the side cover portion C3330. A pair of rotating shafts C3340 are provided so as to project from the left and right side cover portions C3330. The pair of rotating shafts C3340 are pivotally supported by the bearing portion C3141 of the left case portion C3140 and the bearing portion C3211 of the right case portion C3200 (base portion C3210), respectively.

The regulation shaft C3350 regulates the rotation of the drum portion C3300. The regulation shaft C3350 is arranged with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The regulation shaft C3350 is provided so as to project to the right from the right side cover portion C3330. The regulation shaft C3350 is provided at a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the drum portion C3300.

The first button portion C3360 shown in FIGS. 327, 331 and 332 can be operated by the player with the drum portion C3300 located at the initial position. The first button portion C3360 is covered with the upper cover portion C3310 in a state where the button portion C3362, which will be described later, is exposed upward. The first button portion C3360 is fixed to the side cover portion C3330. The first button portion C3360 includes a button base portion C3361 and a button portion C3362.

The button base portion C3361 shown in FIGS. 331 and 332 is a portion fixed to the side cover portion C3330. The button base portion C3361 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. The button base portion C3361 is provided with an appropriate substrate used for processing related to the first button portion C3360. The button base portion C3361 includes a guide hole portion C3361a.

The guide hole portion C3361a shown in FIGS. 331 and 332 guides the operation of the protruding portion C3420 of the second button portion C3400, which will be described later. The guide hole portion C3361a is formed so as to penetrate the button base portion C3361 in the vertical direction. The guide hole portion C3361a is formed in a long hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction. A pair of guide holes C3361a are provided at intervals in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 333, the connecting portion C3423d of the protruding portion C3420, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide hole portion C3361a. Note that FIG. 333 shows a state in which the drum portion C3300 is located at a second rotation position (a position rotated by 90 ° from the initial position).

The button portion C3362 shown in FIGS. 327, 331 and 332 can be pressed by the player. The button portion C3362 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above. The button portion C3362 is arranged so as to insert the opening C3311a of the first cover portion C3311. The pressing operation performed on the button portion C3362 is detected by the substrate provided on the button base portion C3361.

The decorative portion C3370 shown in FIGS. 331 and 332 is a portion decorated so that the player can see it in a state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the second rotation position (see FIGS. 345 and 346). is there. The decorative portion C3370 is provided below the first button portion C3360 at intervals from the first button portion C3360. As shown in FIG. 331, the decorative portion C3370 is covered by the lower cover portion C3320. The decorative portion C3370 is fixed to the side cover portion C3330. The decorative portion C3370 includes a decorative base portion C3371 and a transparent cover portion C3372.

The decorative base portion C3371 is a portion fixed to the side cover portion C3330. The decorative base portion C3371 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. An appropriate light emitting means is mounted on the decorative base portion C3371, and an appropriate substrate used for processing related to light emission of the light emitting means is provided.

The transmission cover portion C3372 guides the light of the light emitting means. The transparent cover portion C3372 is provided so as to cover the decorative base portion C3371 from below. The transmission cover portion C3372 is formed in a shape that is curved so as to project downward. The transmission cover portion C3372 is exposed through an appropriate opening provided in the lower cover portion C3320.

The second button portion C3400 shown in FIGS. 331 to 336 can be operated by the player in a state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the first rotation position, the second rotation position, and the third rotation position. Is. As shown in FIGS. 331 and 332, the second button portion C3400 is provided between the first button portion C3360 and the decorative portion C3370. The second button portion C3400 is fixed to the side cover portion C3330.

In the second button portion C3400, the pop-out portion C3420 described later has a standby position shown in FIGS. 340 and 344, a first pop-out position shown in FIGS. 342 and 345, and a second pop-out position shown in FIGS. 347 and 349. Two-step linear motion is possible so that it is located at the pop-out position. The operation of the second button portion C3400 is performed by a drive source (third motor C3412) different from that of the drum portion C3300. A detailed description of the operation of the second button portion C3400 will be described later. Further, in the following, when referring to FIGS. 331 and 332, the drum portion C3300 is the second when referring to FIGS. 333 to 338, with reference to the state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the initial position. The state of being located at the rotation position (position rotated by 90 ° from the initial position) will be described as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 340 and 344, the second button portion C3400 is in a state in which the drum portion C3300 is located at the first rotation position or the second rotation position, and the protrusion portion C3420, which will be described later, is in the standby position. In the positioned state, the pressing operation via the protruding portion C3420 is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 349, the second button portion C3400 is in a state in which the drum portion C3300 is located at the third rotation position, and the pop-out portion C3420, which will be described later, is located in the second pop-out position. Then, the swing operation via the protruding portion C3420 becomes possible. The second button portion C3400 includes a base portion C3410 and a protruding portion C3420.

The base portion C3410 shown in FIGS. 333 and 334 operates the protruding portion C3420, which will be described later. The base portion C3410 is fixed to the side cover portion C3330. The base portion C3410 includes a motor base portion C3411, a third motor C3412, a base cover portion C3413, a drive transmission portion C3414, a shaft portion C3415, a spring portion C3416, a substrate base portion C3417, and a cylindrical portion C3418.

The motor base portion C3411 holds a third motor C3412, which will be described later. The motor base portion C3411 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction.

The third motor C3412 is a drive source for operating the protruding portion C3420. The third motor C3412 is provided so that the output shaft penetrates the motor base portion C3411 up and down and projects upward.

The base cover portion C3413 covers the upper surface of the motor base portion C3411. The base cover portion C3413 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens downward. The base cover portion C3413 includes a shaft opening C3413a and a gear opening C3413b.

The shaft opening C3413a is an opening through which the shaft portion C3415, which will be described later, is inserted. The shaft opening C3413a penetrates the upper side surface portion (the portion constituting the upper surface) of the base cover portion C3413 in the vertical direction. A pair of shaft openings C3413a are formed at intervals in the left-right direction.

The gear opening C3413b is an opening that rotatably supports the first gear C3414b, which will be described later. The gear opening C3413b penetrates the upper side surface portion of the base cover portion C3413 in the vertical direction. The gear opening C3413b is formed between the pair of shaft openings C3413a.

The drive transmission unit C3414 shown in FIG. 333 takes out the driving force of the third motor C3412 and transmits the driving force of the third motor C3412 to the cylindrical unit C3418 described later. The drive transmission unit C3414 is housed in a space partitioned by the motor base unit C3411 and the base cover unit C3413. The drive transmission unit C3414 includes an output gear C3414a and a first gear C3414b.

The output gear C3414a takes out the driving force of the third motor C3412. The output gear C3414a is fixed to the upper end of the output shaft of the third motor C3412.

The first gear C3414b is arranged on the side (left side) of the output gear C3414a. The first gear C3414b meshes with the output gear C3414a. The first gear C3414b is supported by the gear opening C3413b so as to be rotatable around an axial center facing in the vertical direction.

The shaft portion C3415 projects upward from the base cover portion C3413. The shaft portion C3415 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the vertical direction. The lower end of the shaft portion C3415 is fixed to the shaft opening C3413a. The shaft portion C3415 is fixed to each of the pair of shaft openings C3413a. As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the shaft portion C3415 is inserted into the shaft hole portion C3422a of the connecting portion C3422 of the protruding portion C3420, which will be described later.

The spring portion C3416 shown in FIG. 334 is a spring fitted to the shaft portion C3415. The spring portion C3416 constitutes a compression coil spring. The spring portion C3416 is provided on each of the pair of shaft portions C3415. The spring portion C3416 is provided between the base cover portion C3413 and the connecting portion C3422 of the protruding portion C3420, which will be described later. The spring portion C3416 urges the protruding portion C3420 upward.

The substrate base portion C3417 is provided with an appropriate substrate used for illumination of the protruding portion C3420. An appropriate light emitting means is mounted on the substrate. The substrate base portion C3417 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The substrate base portion C3417 is fixed to the upper end portion of the shaft portion C3415 so as to be bridged over the upper end portions of the pair of shaft portions C3415. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), the substrate base portion C3417 is brought into contact with the connecting portion C3422 of the protruding portion C3420 to restrict the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420.

The cylindrical portion C3418 shown in FIGS. 333 to 335 transmits the drive of the first gear C3414b to the protruding portion C3420. The columnar portion C3418 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented in the vertical direction. Further, the cylindrical portion C3418 has a hollow shape inside and is formed in a cylindrical shape that opens in the vertical direction. The cylindrical portion C3418 is arranged between the pair of shaft portions C3415. The lower end of the cylindrical portion C3418 is non-rotatably fixed to the first gear C3414b. As a result, the cylindrical portion C3418 rotates together with the first gear C3414b. The columnar portion C3418 includes a regulating portion C3418a.

The regulating portion C3418a regulates the vertical movement of the protruding portion C3420 by abutting against the roller portion C3422c and the contact portion C3422d provided in the connecting portion C3422 of the protruding portion C3420, which will be described later (FIG. FIG. See 337 and FIG. 338). The restricting portion C3418a is provided so as to project outward in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion C3418. A pair of restricting portions C3418a are provided so as to be located on one side and the other side in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion C3418. The regulation unit C3418a includes a first regulation unit C3418b, a second regulation unit C3418c, a third regulation unit C3418d, a fourth regulation unit C3418e, and a fifth regulation unit C3418f.

The first regulation unit C3418b regulates the upward movement of the protrusion C3420 so that the protrusion C3420 is in the standby position. The first regulation unit C3418b constitutes the lower surface of the regulation unit C3418a. As shown in FIG. 337 (a), when the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the first regulating portion C3418b, the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted. The first regulating portion C3418b is formed with a recess that is recessed upward so as to receive the roller portion C3422c.

The second regulating section C3418c regulates the upward movement of the popping section C3420 within a range between the standby position and the first popping position. The second regulating portion C3418c is provided so as to extend from the end portion of the first regulating portion C3418b on one side in the circumferential direction (counterclockwise when viewed from above) to one side in the circumferential direction. The second regulating portion C3418c is inclined so as to rise toward one side in the circumferential direction. When the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the second regulating portion C3418c, the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted.

The third regulation unit C3418d regulates the upward movement of the protrusion C3420 so that the protrusion C3420 is in the first protrusion position. The third regulating portion C3418d is provided so as to extend horizontally from the end portion of the second regulating portion C3418c on one side in the circumferential direction to one side in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), when the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the third regulating portion C3418d, the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted.

The fourth regulation unit C3418e regulates the upward movement of the protrusion C3420 within a range between the first pop-out position and the second pop-out position. The fourth regulation unit C3418e is provided so as to extend from one end of the third regulation unit C3418d in the circumferential direction to one side in the circumferential direction. The fourth regulation unit C3418e is inclined so as to rise toward one side in the circumferential direction. The fourth regulating portion C3418e is formed so that the end portion on one side in the circumferential direction reaches the upper end portion of the regulating portion C3418a. As shown in FIG. 338 (a), when the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the fourth regulating portion C3418e, the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the roller portion C3422c reaches the upper end portion of the fourth regulation portion C3418e, the upper surface of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the substrate base portion C3417 to fly. The upward movement of the exit C3420 is restricted.

The fifth regulation unit C3418f regulates the downward movement of the ejection unit C3420 located at the second ejection position. The fifth regulating portion C3418f is formed in a shape in which a corner portion on the other side in the circumferential direction (clockwise direction when viewed from above) is cut out in the upper portion of the regulating portion C3418a. The fifth regulation unit C3418f is located above the first regulation unit C3418b. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), the upwardly facing surface of the fifth restricting portion C3418f abuts on the abutting portion C3422d of the connecting portion C3422, thereby restricting the downward movement of the protruding portion C3420. ..

The pop-out portion C3420 shown in FIGS. 333, 334, and 336 to 338 can operate linearly in the vertical direction (advance / retreat direction) by the driving force from the base portion C3410. The pop-out portion C3420 includes a main body portion C3421, a connecting portion C3422, and a vibrating portion C3423.

The main body portion C3421 constitutes the outer shell of the protruding portion C3420. As shown in FIG. 348, the main body portion C3421 is formed in a substantially T shape when viewed from the front in a state where the second button portion C3400 is assembled to the lower cover portion C3320 and the side cover portion C3330. The main body C3421 is formed in a hollow shape and opens downward.

As shown in FIG. 333, the shaft portion C3415, the spring portion C3416, the substrate base portion C3417, and the cylindrical portion C3418 are housed inside the main body portion C3421. Further, as shown in FIG. 325, the upper surface (tip surface in the pop-out direction) of the main body portion C3421 is exposed from the opening C3321 of the lower cover portion C3320 at the standby position. In this state, the upper surface of the main body portion C3421 is substantially flush with the outer peripheral surface of the lower cover portion C3320. The main body portion C3421 is formed of at least a part (for example, the upper surface) of a translucent material so that the light of the light emitting means provided on the substrate base portion C3417 can be transmitted.

The connecting portion C3422 shown in FIGS. 336 to 338 is connected to the base portion C3410 via the shaft portion C3415 and the cylindrical portion C3418. The connecting portion C3422 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting portion C3422 is fixed to the main body portion C3421 so as to be located at the lower end inside the main body portion C3421. The connecting portion C3422 includes a shaft hole portion C3422a, a cylindrical opening C3422b, a roller portion C3422c, and a contact portion C3422d.

The shaft hole portion C3422a is a portion through which the shaft portion C3415 is inserted. The shaft hole portion C3422a is formed so as to penetrate the connecting portion C3422 in the vertical direction. The shaft hole portions C3422a are formed in pairs at intervals in the left-right direction so that the pair of shaft portions C3415 can be inserted.

The cylindrical opening C3422b is a portion through which the cylindrical portion C3418 is inserted. The cylindrical opening C3422b is formed so as to penetrate the connecting portion C3422 in the vertical direction. The cylindrical opening C3422b is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from below. The cylindrical opening C3422b is formed between a pair of shaft holes C3422a.

The roller portion C3422c is a portion that comes into contact with the regulation portion C3418a provided on the cylindrical portion C3418. The roller portion C3422c is provided so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical opening C3422b. The roller portion C3422c is formed in a wheel shape. The roller portion C3422c is rotatably supported by a shaft portion whose axial center is oriented in the radial direction of the cylindrical opening C3422b. A pair of roller portions C3422c are provided so as to be located on one side and the other side in the radial direction of the cylindrical opening C3422b.

The contact portion C3422d is a portion that comes into contact with the regulation portion C3418a (fifth regulation portion C3418f) provided on the cylindrical portion C3418. The contact portion C3422d is provided so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical opening C3422b. The contact portion C3422d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the cylindrical opening C3422b. A pair of abutting portions C3422d are provided so as to be located below the roller portions C3422c.

The vibrating portion C3423 shown in FIGS. 333 and 336 vibrates the main body portion C3421. The vibrating portion C3423 is provided on the rear surface of the main body portion C3421. The vibrating portion C3423 includes a base portion C3423a, a fourth motor C3423b, a vibrating cam portion C3423c, and a connecting portion C3423d.

The base portion C3423a is provided with a fourth motor C3423b, which will be described later. The base portion C3423a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 333, the base portion C3423a is arranged behind the button base portion C3361 of the first button portion C3360.

The fourth motor C3423b shown in FIG. 333 is a drive source for vibrating the vibrating unit C3423. The fourth motor C3423b is provided at the lower end portion on the rear surface of the base portion C3423a. The fourth motor C3423b is arranged so that the axis of the output shaft faces the left-right direction.

The vibration cam portion C3423c is a portion that generates vibration using the driving force of the fourth motor C3423b. The vibration cam portion C3423c is provided at the tip of the output shaft of the fourth motor C3423b. The vibration cam portion C3423c is formed so that the center of gravity is eccentric with respect to the output shaft of the fourth motor C3423b. In the present embodiment, the vibration cam portion C3423c is formed in a substantially semicircular shape in the side view.

The connecting portion C3423d connects the main body portion C3421 and the base portion C3423a. The connecting portion C3423d is formed so as to project forward from the upper end portion on the front surface of the base portion C3423a. The front end portion of the connecting portion C3423d is fixed to the lower end portion on the rear surface of the main body portion C3421. Further, the connecting portion C3423d is inserted into the guide hole portion C3361a provided in the button base portion C3361 of the first button portion C3360. A pair of connecting portions C3423d are provided at intervals in the left-right direction so as to be inserted into the pair of guide hole portions C3361a.

The button peripheral portion C3500 shown in FIGS. 322 and 326 is provided with a button capable of performing operations related to the game while decorating the periphery of the drum portion C3300. The button peripheral portion C3500 is provided on the upper portion of the case portion C3100 so as to surround both the left and right sides and the rear of the accommodating portion C3101. The button peripheral portion C3500 includes a first portion C3510, a second portion C3520, and a third portion C3530.

The first portion C3510 is a portion provided on the right side of the accommodating portion C3101. The first portion C3510 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. An appropriate decoration is formed on the upper surface of the first portion C3510. The first portion C3510 is provided in the right case portion C3200 of the case portion C3100. The first portion C3510 includes a lending button C3511, a return button C3512, and a cross button C3513.

The lending button C3511 is a button used for lending a game ball. The lending button C3511 is provided on the upper surface of the first portion C3510. The lending button C3511 is provided in the rear portion of the first portion C3510.

Return button C3512 is a button used for returning a ball lending card. The return button C3512 is provided on the upper surface of the first portion C3510. The return button C3512 is provided behind the lending button C3511.

The cross-shaped button C3513 is a button that can be operated to receive information related to the game, such as information displayed on an appropriate menu screen. The cross button C3513 is formed in a cross shape when viewed from above.

The second portion C3520 shown in FIGS. 322, 324 and 326 is a portion provided behind the accommodating portion C3101. The second portion C3520 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. The second portion C3520 is provided on the rear case portion C3130 of the case portion C3100. The second portion C3520 includes an inclined portion C3521.

The inclined portion C3521 is a portion that is inclined diagonally forward and downward at the front end portion of the second portion C3520. The inclined portion C3521 is formed in a shape curved diagonally backward and downward in a side view.

The third portion C3530 is a portion provided on the left side of the accommodating portion C3101. The third portion C3530 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the vertical direction. An appropriate decoration is formed on the upper surface of the third portion C3530. The third portion C3530 is provided on the left case portion C3140 of the case portion C3100.

The effect button device C3000 configured as described above can execute the rotation operation of the drum portion C3300 and the pop-out operation of the second button portion C3400 based on the result of the hit determination process or the like. Here, the pop-out operation is a linear operation along one direction (vertical direction in the examples shown in FIGS. 337 and 338) with respect to the base portion C3410 of the pop-out portion C3420. Hereinafter, the operation of the effect button device C3000 configured as described above will be described.

First, the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 will be described. In the following, the operation of rotating the drum portion C3300 at the initial position will be described.

At the initial positions shown in FIGS. 322 and 328, the drum portion C3300 is in a state in which the first button portion C3360 faces upward. In this state, the player can press the first button portion C3360. Further, in the initial position, the second button portion C3400 (protruding portion C3420) is located in the accommodating portion C3101 of the case portion C3100, and is invisible (inoperable) to the player.

Further, in the initial position, the first lock groove portion C2383c of the lock portion C2383 located at the lock position engages with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300. In this state, the rotation of the drum portion C3300 is restricted.

When the second motor C3240 is driven, the cam portion C3282 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, as shown in FIG. 339. As the cam portion C3282 rotates, the eccentric shaft C3282a inserted into the elongated hole portion C3283b of the lock portion C2383 presses the elongated hole portion C2383b downward. As a result, the lock portion C2383 swings downward around the axis of the swing shaft C3281 and is located at the unlocked position. In this state, the engagement of the lock portion C2383 with the regulation shaft C3350 is released, and the rotational operation of the drum portion C3300 is allowed.

Next, when the first motor C3230 is driven, the output gear C3261 shown in FIGS. 339 and 340 rotates. The rotation of the output gear C3261 is transmitted to the fifth gear C3266 via the first gear C3622, the second gear C3263, the third gear C3264 and the fourth gear C3265. When the fifth gear C3266 rotates, the rotation shaft C3340 and the drum portion C3300 fixed to the fifth gear C3266 rotate clockwise when viewed from the right with the rotation shaft C3340 as the center of rotation.

As described above, by rotating the drum portion C3300 to an arbitrary position, the drum portion C3300 is rotated to the first rotation position shown in FIG. 340, the second rotation position shown in FIG. 344, and the third rotation position shown in FIG. 349. It can be positioned at the rotation position of. When rotating the drum portion C3300 to an arbitrary position, it is possible to adopt an embodiment in which the drive of the first motor C3230 is controlled by using an appropriate sensor that detects the rotation position of the drum portion C3300.

Next, in a state where the drum portion C3300 is rotated to the first rotation position and the second rotation position, the second motor C3240 is driven in the direction opposite to the case where the second motor C3240 is operated from the lock position to the unlock position. The lock portion C2383 at the unlocked position is swung so that it is located at the locked position again. That is, as the output shaft of the second motor C3240 and the cam portion C3282 rotate, the eccentric shaft C3282a inserted through the elongated hole portion C3283b of the lock portion C2383 presses the elongated hole portion C2383b upward. As a result, the lock portion C2383 swings upward around the axis of the swing shaft C3281 and is repositioned at the lock position. In this state, the second lock groove portion C2383d or the third lock groove portion C2383e of the lock portion C2383 engages with the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300. In this state, the rotation of the drum portion C3300 is restricted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, in the state where the drum portion C3300 is rotated to the third rotation position, the second motor C3240 is driven in the direction opposite to the case where the second motor C3240 is operated from the lock position to the unlock position. The lock portion C2383 at the unlocked position is rocked so as to be located at the rocking lock position. As shown in FIG. 349, in the state where the lock portion C3283 is positioned at the swing lock position, the regulation protrusion portion C2383g and the buffer portion C3283h of the lock portion C2383 overlap with the regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212 in the side view. In this state, the drum portion C3300 can swing in the range from the front end portion (buffer portion C3212a) of the regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212 to the regulation protrusion C3283g (buffer portion C2383h).

By the above-described operation, the drum unit C3300 can be rotated to the first rotation position, the second rotation position, and the third rotation position.

As shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, when the drum portion C3300 is located at the first rotation position, the second button portion C3400 (protruding portion C3420) is exposed from the front case portion C3120, and the player It will be in a state of facing the side (front side). In this state, the player can press the second button portion C3400. Further, in this state, the first button portion C3360 is in a state of facing the anti-player side (rear side).

As shown in FIG. 344, when the drum portion C3300 is located at the second rotation position, the second button portion C3400 (protruding portion C3420) is in a state of facing upward. In this state, the player can press the second button portion C3400. Further, in this state, the decorative portion C3370 is in a state of facing the player side (front side). Further, in this state, the first button portion C3360 is in a state of facing the anti-player side (rear side).

As shown in FIG. 349, when the drum portion C3300 is located at the third rotation position, the second button portion C3400 (protruding portion C3420) is in a state of facing diagonally rearward. Further, in this state, the decorative portion C3370 is in a state of facing the player side (front side). Further, in this state, the first button portion C3360 is in a state of facing the anti-player side (rear side).

Contrary to the procedure described above, by driving the first motor C3230 and the second motor C3240, the drum portion C3300 at the first rotation position, the second rotation position, and the third rotation position is set to the initial position. Can be moved to.

Further, in the state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the first rotation position, the second rotation position, and the third rotation position, the protrusion portion C3420 is moved to the first protrusion position and the second protrusion position. It is possible to execute the operation to make it. Further, in the state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the third rotation position, the swing operation of the drum portion C3300 via the protruding portion C3420 can be executed. A detailed description of the operation of the protruding portion C3420 and the swinging operation of the drum portion C3300 will be described later.

Next, the pop-out operation of the second button portion C3400 will be described. In the following, the operation of moving the pop-out portion C3420 of the standby position to the first pop-out position and the second pop-out position will be described. Further, in the following, the operation of the second button portion C3400 in a state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the second rotation position as shown in FIGS. 344 to 348 will be described.

At the standby positions shown in FIGS. 337 (a) and 344, the protruding portion C3420 is housed inside the lower cover portion C3320. In the standby position, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422 comes into contact with the first regulating portion C3418b, so that the protruding portion C3420 is urged upward by the spring portion C3416. Is regulated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), in the standby position, a gap is formed between the lower end portion (connecting portion C3422) of the protruding portion C3420 and the base cover portion C3413 of the base portion C3410. The protruding portion C3420 can move downward by the above-mentioned gap against the urging force of the spring portion C3416. The player can perform a pressing operation by moving the protruding portion C3420 exposed from the opening C3321 of the lower cover portion C3320 downward. The downward movement (pressing operation) of the protruding portion C3420 is detected by an appropriate sensor. In this way, the protruding portion C3420 functions as a button that can be pressed.

When the third motor C3412 shown in FIG. 333 is driven, the output gear C3414a rotates. The rotation of the output gear C3414a is transmitted to the first gear C3414b. As the first gear C3414b rotates, the cylindrical portion C3418 fixed to the first gear C3414b rotates clockwise when viewed from above.

From the standby position shown in FIG. 337 (a), the cylindrical portion C3418 rotates and the regulating portion C3418a moves relative to the roller portion C3422c of the connecting portion C3422, so that the roller portion C3422c becomes the first regulating portion. It is displaced from the state of being in contact with C3418b to the state of being in contact with the second regulating portion C3418c. In a state where the roller portion C3422c is in contact with the second regulating portion C3418c, the protruding portion C3420 moves upward according to the inclination of the second regulating portion C3418c as the columnar portion C3418 rotates.

As the columnar portion C3418 further rotates, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), the roller portion C3422c is displaced from the state of being in contact with the second regulating portion C3418c to the state of being in contact with the third regulating portion C3418d. In this state, the pop-out portion C3420 is located at the first pop-out position. In this state, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), the roller portion C3422c comes into contact with the third regulating portion C3418d, so that the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted.

At the first pop-out position shown in FIGS. 337 (b), 345 and 346, the pop-out portion C3420 protrudes upward with respect to the lower cover portion C3320. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the first pop-out position is a position where the pop-out portion C3420 protrudes from the standby position by about 10 mm.

Further, even at the first pop-out position shown in FIG. 337 (b), the pop-out portion C3420 can move downward against the urging force of the spring portion C3416. The player can perform a pressing operation by moving the protruding portion C3420 protruding from the opening C3321 of the lower cover portion C3320 downward.

As the columnar portion C3418 further rotates, as shown in FIG. 338 (a), the roller portion C3422c is displaced from the state of being in contact with the third regulating portion C3418d to the state of being in contact with the fourth regulating portion C3418e. In a state where the roller portion C3422c is in contact with the fourth regulating portion C3418e, the protruding portion C3420 moves upward according to the inclination of the fourth regulating portion C3418e as the columnar portion C3418 rotates.

As the cylindrical portion C3418 further rotates, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the contact of the roller portion C3422c with the fourth regulating portion C3418e is released. In this state, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the connecting portion C3422 of the protruding portion C3420 comes into contact with the substrate base portion C3417, so that the upward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted. Further, in this state, the upwardly facing surface of the fifth regulating portion C3418f abuts on the abutting portion C3422d of the connecting portion C3422, so that the downward movement of the protruding portion C3420 is restricted. In this state, the pop-out portion C3420 is located at the second pop-out position.

At the second pop-out position shown in FIGS. 338 (b), 347, and 348, the pop-out portion C3420 protrudes further upward from the first pop-out position. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the second pop-out position is a position where the pop-out portion C3420 protrudes from the standby position by about 40 mm.

By driving the third motor C3412 in the direction opposite to the above-described operation, the pop-out portion C3420 at the second pop-out position or the first pop-out position can be moved to the standby position.

Next, as described above, the swing operation of the drum portion C3300 in a state where the pop-out portion C3420 is positioned at the second pop-out position will be described. In the following, an operation of swinging the drum portion C3300 located at the third rotation position forward will be described.

As shown in FIG. 349, when the drum portion C3300 is positioned at the third rotation position, the pop-out portion C3420 located at the second pop-out position protrudes diagonally rearward. In the state where the drum portion C3300 is located at the third rotation position, the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 comes into contact with the buffer portion C3212a provided at the front end portion of the regulation shaft guide groove portion C3212. As a result, the rearward swing of the drum portion C3300 is restricted. Further, in this state, the drum portion C3300 is urged in a direction of swinging backward by the urging force of the spring portion C3270 locked to the rotation assisting portion C3267 shown in FIG. 329 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 349 and 350, the player grips the protruding portion C3420 (main body portion C3421) of the drum portion C3300 at the third rotation position, and at the same time, the drum portion resists the urging force of the spring portion C3270. It is possible to perform an operation of swinging the C3300 so as to pull it forward (toward the front side). At this time, by driving the detent torque of the first motor C3230 and the first motor C3230, it is possible to impart an appropriate resistance force against the swing of the protruding portion C3420. This makes it possible to adjust the resistance force (weight) when swinging the protruding portion C3420.

The swing operation is a range from the third rotation position until the regulation shaft C3350 of the drum portion C3300 comes into contact with the cushioning portion C2383h provided at the regulation protrusion C2383g of the lock portion C2383, as shown in FIG. 350. Can be done with. The swing operation can be detected by using an appropriate sensor that detects the rotational position of the drum portion C3300.

Here, as described above, when the drum portion C3300 is rotated (for example, when it is rotated to the second rotation position or the third rotation position), as shown in FIG. 351 (a), the accommodating portion A game ball or the like may enter the space between the curved surface portion C3131 of the rear case portion C3130 and the drum portion C3300 in the C3101.

In the present embodiment, by providing the rib C3312a on the upper cover portion C3310 of the drum portion C3300, as shown in FIG. 351 (a), the game ball entered in the accommodating portion C3101 is surrounded by the rib C3312a. It can be easily stored in the internal region C3312b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the drum portion C3300 is rotated so as to be positioned at the initial position with the game balls stored in the internal region C3312b, the internal region C3312b is on the player side ( Inclin toward the front side). As a result, the game ball stored in the internal region C3312b gets over the rib C3312a on the front side and rolls (moves) to the front side. As a result, the game ball that has entered the accommodating portion C3101 can be discharged to the outside. At this time, the game ball that has passed over the rib C3312a moves into the guiding portion C3311b located on the side of the first button portion C3360 and moves forward in the guiding portion C3311b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharged game medium from interfering with the operation of the first button portion C3360.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the drum portion C3300 is rotated so as to be located at the initial position, the game ball stored in the internal region C3312b gets over the rib C3312a on the rear side. It can also be rolled (moved) to the rear side. In this case, the game ball can be stored in the space between the inclined portion C3521 of the third portion C3530 of the button peripheral portion C3500 and the third cover portion C3313 of the drum portion C3300. The player can use the game ball held in the space by returning it to the upper plate 51. As a result, the decrease in the number of balls held can be suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 351, an example in which the game ball entered in the accommodating portion C3101 is discharged to the outside is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, even when another game medium such as a coin (medal) or a foreign substance such as a coin or dust enters the storage portion C3101, the game medium or the foreign substance is stored in the internal region C3312b and the drum portion C3300 is rotated. As a result, it can be discharged to the outside.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see JP-A-2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable effecting object that performs a predetermined movable effect by performing a rotation operation.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first movable body (drum portion C3300) and a second movable body (protruding portion C3420) provided on the first movable body (drum portion C3300) are provided.
The first movable body (drum portion C3300) can move from a first position (initial position) to a second position (second rotation position, third rotation position).
When the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is in the first position (initial position), the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is the first movable body (drum portion C3300). Inoperable against
When the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is in the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position), the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is the second. It is capable of operating with respect to one movable body (drum portion C3300).

With such a configuration, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) can be operated from the first position (initial position) to the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position). By operating the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) with respect to the first movable body (drum portion C3300), the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) can operate with respect to the first movable body (drum portion C3300) in a plurality of stages (first popping position, second popping position). Is what.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved by operating the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) with respect to the first movable body (drum portion C3300) in a plurality of stages. ..

Further, the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is invisible from the player side in a state where the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is located at the first position (initial position). The first movable body (drum portion C3300) is visible from the player side in a state where the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is located at the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position).

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved by switching between the visible state and the invisible state of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420).

The operation mode of the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is a rotational operation.

With such a configuration, the fun of the game can be further improved by rotating the first movable body (drum portion C3300).

Further, the operation mode of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is a linear operation.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved by linearly operating the second movable body (protruding portion C3420).

Further, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) includes a first operating means (first button portion C3360).
The second movable body (protruding portion C3420) includes a second operating means (main body portion C3421).
In a state where the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is located at the first position (initial position), the first operating means (first button portion C3360) can be operated.
In a state where the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is located at the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position), the second operating means (main body portion C3421) can be operated. It is supposed to be.

With such a configuration, by switching between a state in which the first operating means (first button portion C3360) can be operated and a state in which the second operating means (main body portion C3421) can be operated, the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

Further, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is
It is possible to operate to a third position (first rotation position) different from the first position (initial position) and the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position).
In a state where the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is located at the third position (first rotation position), the second operating means (main body portion C3421) can be operated. ..

With such a configuration, in addition to the first position (initial position) and the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position), a third position (a third position where the second operating means can be operated) ( By operating the first movable body (drum portion C3300) to the first rotation position), the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) can operate linearly from the fourth position (standby position) to the fifth position (second popping position).
In a state where the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is located at the fourth position (standby position), the second operating means can be operated.
In a state where the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is located at the fifth position (second popping position), the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) can be swung. Is to be done.

With such a configuration, a fourth position (standby position) in which the second operating means can be operated and a fifth position (second position) in which the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) can be swung. By switching the position of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) between the pop-out position) and the position of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420), the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) has a sixth position (first pop-out position) different from the fourth position (standby position) and the fifth position (second pop-out position). It is capable of linear operation to the pop-out position).

With such a configuration, the fun of the game can be further improved by increasing the variation of the operation of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420).

Further, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is provided with a locking protrusion (regulation shaft C3350).
A lock portion C2383 provided with a lock groove (first lock groove portion C2383c, second lock groove portion C2383d, and third lock groove portion C2383e) that engages with the locking protrusion (regulatory shaft C3350) is provided.
In the lock portion C2383, the lock groove (first lock groove portion C2383c, second lock groove portion C2383d, and third lock groove portion C2383e) and the locking protrusion (regulation shaft C3350) are engaged with each other, and the first lock portion C3350 is described. The lock position that regulates the operation of the movable body (drum portion C3300), the lock groove (first lock groove portion C2383c, second lock groove portion C2383d, and third lock groove portion C2383e) and the lock protrusion (the lock protrusion (3283e)). The engagement with the regulation shaft C3350) is released, and the first movable body (drum portion C3300) can be operated at an unlocked position that allows the operation of the first movable body (drum portion C3300).

With such a configuration, it is possible to regulate and switch the operation of the first movable body (drum portion C3300) using the lock portion C2383.

Further, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) can be operated by swinging the second movable body (protruding portion C3420).
The lock portion C2383 regulates the operation of the first movable body (drum portion C3300) within a predetermined range, so that the swing operation of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is within a predetermined range. It is possible to operate in the swing lock position regulated by.

With such a configuration, it is possible to regulate the swing operation of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) using the lock portion C2383.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first member (drum portion C3300) and a second member (case portion C3100) are provided.
The first member (drum portion C3300) and the second member (case portion C3100) are relatively operable.
The first member (drum portion C3300) and the second member (case portion C3100) are arranged so as to be close to each other.
A protrusion (rib C3312a) formed so as to rise from a predetermined surface is formed in a portion of the first member (drum portion C3300) close to the second member (case portion C3100). Is.

With such a configuration, the first member (drum portion C3300) on which the protruding portion (rib C3312a) is formed and the second member (case portion C3100) are relatively operated, thereby making the game more enjoyable. Can be improved.

Further, the protruding portion (rib C3312a) is formed so as to stand up in the direction in which the first member (drum portion C3300) operates.

With such a configuration, the protruding portion (rib C3312a) is formed so as to stand up in the direction in which the drum portion C3300 (rotates) operates, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, the second member (case portion C3100) has a housing portion C3101 for accommodating the first member (drum portion C3300).
The first member (drum portion C3300) can operate with respect to the second member (case portion C3100) in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating portion C3101.

With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved by operating the first member (drum portion C3300) housed in the accommodating portion C3101 of the second member (case portion C3100).

Further, the operation mode of the first member (drum portion C3300) is a rotational operation.

With such a configuration, the fun of the game can be further improved by rotating the first member (drum portion C3300).

Further, the protruding portion (rib C3312a) is formed around a predetermined internal region C3312b.
The first member (drum portion C3300) can store a game medium (game ball) in the internal region C3312b.

With such a configuration, by storing the game medium (game ball) in the internal region C3312b, it is possible to prevent the game medium (game ball) from being clogged in the gap between the accommodating portion C3101 and the first member (drum portion C3300). be able to.

Further, the second member (case portion C3100) has a housing portion C3101 for accommodating the first member (drum portion C3300).
The first member (drum portion C3300) includes an operation portion (first button portion C3360) that can be operated by a player, and the operation portion (first button portion C3360) and the protrusion (rib C3312a). The first position (initial position) located outside the accommodating portion C3101, and the operating portion (first button portion C3360) and the protruding portion (rib C3312a) are located inside the accommodating portion C3101. It can operate at 2 positions (2nd rotation position, 3rd rotation position).
In a state where the first member (drum portion C3300) is located at the second position (second rotation position, third rotation position), the game medium (game ball) can be stored in the internal region C3312b. Can,
In a state where the first member (drum portion C3300) is located at the first position (initial position), the game medium (game ball) stored in the internal region C3312b can be discharged to the outside. ..

With such a configuration, the game medium (game ball) that has entered the accommodating portion C3101 can be discharged.

Further, in the state where the first member (drum portion C3300) is located at the first position (initial position), the game medium (game ball) stored in the internal region C3312b is formed by the protruding portion (game ball). It is inclined so that it can move toward the player side over the rib C3312a).

With such a configuration, the game medium (game ball) that has entered the accommodating portion C3101 can be more preferably discharged.

Further, the operation unit (first button unit C3360) is provided on the player side of the internal area C3312b.
The first member (drum portion C3300) is located at the first position (initial position), and the game medium (game ball) avoids the operation portion (first button portion C3360) side. It is provided with a guidance unit C3311b that guides the game medium (game ball) so as to move.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ejected game medium (game ball) from interfering with the operation by the guiding unit C3311b.

Further, at the bottom of the second member (case portion C3100), openings (first opening C3111 and second opening C3112) communicating with the accommodating portion C3101 are formed.

With such a configuration, foreign matter mixed in the accommodating portion C3101 can be discharged through the openings (first opening C3111 and second opening C3112).

Further, the second member (case portion C3100) includes a covering portion C3132 that covers the gap between the first member (drum portion C3300) and the accommodating portion C3101 from above.

With such a configuration, the covering portion C3132 can suppress the mixing of foreign matter into the accommodating portion C3101.

Further, the accommodating portion C3101 extends along the operating direction of the first member (drum portion C3300), and also provides a guide portion (guide groove portion C3131a) for guiding the operation of the first member (drum portion C3300). Prepare,
The first member (drum portion C3300) includes a guided portion C3313a guided by the guide portion (guide groove portion C3131a).

With such a configuration, the first member (drum portion C3300) can be suitably operated.

The drum portion C3300 is a form of a first movable body and a first member.
Further, the protruding portion C3420 is a form of the second movable body.
Further, the regulation shaft C3350 is a form of a locking protrusion.
Further, the first button portion C3360 is a form of the first operating means.
Further, the main body portion C3421 is a form of the second operating means.
Further, the first lock groove portion C2383c, the second lock groove portion C2383d, and the third lock groove portion C2383e are one form of the lock groove.
Further, the case portion C3100 is a form of the second member.
Further, the rib C3312a is a form of a protruding portion.
Further, the guide groove portion C3131a is a form of the guide portion.
The first button unit C3360 is a form of an operation unit.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the first rotation position, the second rotation position, and the third rotation position of the drum portion C3300 are set to 60 °, 90 °, and 120 clockwise when viewed from the right from the initial position, respectively. An example is shown in which the position is rotated by °, but the position is not limited to this. As the rotation position of the drum portion C3300, various rotation positions can be adopted from the viewpoint of improving the operability when swinging the drum portion C3300 and the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pop-out position and the second pop-out position of the pop-out portion C3420 are set to positions moved by 10 mm and 40 mm from the standby position, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. As the pop-out position of the pop-out portion C3420, various pop-out positions can be adopted from the viewpoint of improving the operability when swinging the drum portion C3300 and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pop-out portion C3420 is configured to operate in two stages of the first pop-out position and the second pop-out position, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the protrusion C3420 may be capable of one-step (for example, only the second pop-out position) operation, or may be capable of three or more stages of operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the first movable body (drum portion C3300) is a rotary operation, but the operation mode is not limited to such a mode. As the operation mode of the first movable body (drum unit C3300), various operations such as a linear operation, a turning operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like can be adopted from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) is a linear operation, but the operation mode is not limited to such a mode. As the operation mode of the second movable body (protruding portion C3420), various operations such as a rotation operation, a turning operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like can be adopted from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the first movable body (drum portion C3300) and the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) are provided by the effect button device C3000 capable of performing operations related to the effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, the first movable body (drum portion C3300) and the second movable body (protruding portion C3420) may be used as a character for performing a predetermined movable effect performed by the gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the first member (drum portion C3300) and the second member (case portion C3100) are provided by the effect button device C3000 capable of performing operations related to the effect. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the first member (drum portion C3300) and the second member (case portion C3100) may be used as accessories for performing a predetermined movable effect performed by the gaming machine.

C3000 effect button device C3100 case part C2383 lock part C3300 drum part C3360 first button part C3400 second button part C3410 base part C3420 protruding part

Claims (11)

A first movable body and a second movable body provided on the first movable body are provided.
The first movable body can move from the first position to the second position.
When the first movable body is in the first position, the second movable body is inoperable with respect to the first movable body.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the first movable body is in the second position, the second movable body can move with respect to the first movable body. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second movable body can operate with respect to the first movable body in a plurality of stages. The second movable body is invisible from the player side in a state where the first movable body is located at the first position, and the first movable body is located at the second position. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is visible from the player side. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the operation mode of the first movable body is a rotational operation. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the operation mode of the second movable body is a linear operation. The first movable body includes a first operating means.
The second movable body includes a second operating means.
In the state where the first movable body is located at the first position, the first operating means can be operated.
The invention according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the second operating means can be operated in a state where the first movable body is located at the second position. Gaming machine. The first movable body is
It is possible to operate to the first position and a third position different from the second position.
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein when the first movable body is located at the third position, the second operating means can be operated. The second movable body can move linearly from the fourth position to the fifth position.
In the state where the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the second operating means can be operated.
The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7, wherein when the second movable body is located at the fifth position, the second movable body can be swung. The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the second movable body can linearly move to a sixth position different from the fourth position and the fifth position. The first movable body is provided with a protrusion for locking.
A lock portion provided with a lock groove that engages with the lock protrusion is provided.
In the lock portion, the lock groove and the lock protrusion are engaged with each other, and the lock position that regulates the operation of the first movable body and the lock groove and the lock protrusion are disengaged from each other. The gaming machine according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the first movable body can be operated at an unlocked position that allows the operation of the first movable body. The first movable body can be operated by swinging the second movable body.
The lock portion can operate at a swing lock position that regulates the swing operation of the second movable body within a predetermined range by restricting the operation of the first movable body within a predetermined range. The gaming machine according to claim 10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.

Images